BHSEC

MATHEMATICS

d
ite
BOOK – II

m
FOR CLASS XII

Li
n y
For Class XII Students of Bhutan
pa
om
C

O.P. MALHOTRA S.K. GUPTA

nd

(Gold Medallist) Principal (Retd.)

Head of Mathematics Department (Retd.) Birla Vidya Mandir
The Doon School, Dehradun Nainital
A

ANUBHUTI GANGAL
nd

M.A. (Gold Medallist), M.Ed.

Formerly, Senior Faculty Member
ha

The Daly College, Indore

C
S
©
 S CHAND SCHOOL BOOKS
(An imprint of S Chand Publishing)
A Division of S Chand And Company Limited
(An ISO 9001 Certified Company)
Head Office : B-1/D-1, Ground Floor, Mohan Co-operative Industrial Estate, Mathura Road,
New Delhi–110 044; Phone : 011–6667 2000, e-mail : [email protected]
Registered Office : A-27, 2nd Floor, Mohan Co-operative Industrial Estate, New Delhi–110 044
www.schandpublishing.com; e-mail : [email protected]

Branches :

d
Ahmedabad : Ph: 079-2754 2369, 2754 1965, [email protected]

ite
Bengaluru : Ph: 080-2235 4008, 2226 8048, [email protected]
Bhopal : Ph: 0755-4274 723, 4209 587, [email protected]
Bhubaneshwar : Ph: 0674-2951 580, [email protected]

m
Chennai : Ph: 044-2363 2120, [email protected]

Li
Guwahati : Ph: 0361-2738 811, 2735 640, [email protected]
Hyderabad : Ph: 040-4018 6018, [email protected]

y
Jaipur : Ph: 0141-2291 317, 2291 318, [email protected]

n
Jalandhar : Ph: 0181-4645 630, [email protected]
Kochi : Ph: 0484-2576 207, 2576 208, [email protected]
Kolkata
Lucknow
pa
: Ph: 033-2335 7458, 2335 3914, [email protected]
: [email protected]
om
Mumbai : Ph: 022-2500 0297, [email protected]
Nagpur : Ph: 0712-2250 230, [email protected]
Patna : Ph: 0612-2260 011, [email protected]
C

Ranchi : [email protected]
nd

Sahibabad : Ph: 0120-2771 238, [email protected]

© 2011, O.P. Malhotra, S.K. Gupta and Anubhuti Gangal

A

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied in any material form (including photocopying or storing it
nd

in any medium in form of graphics, electronic or mechanical means and whether or not transient or incidental to some other use of this
publication) without written permission of the publisher. Any breach of this will entail legal action and prosecution without further notice.
Jurisdiction : All disputes with respect to this publication shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Courts, Tribunals and Forums of
New Delhi, India only.
ha
C

First Published 2011

Revised Edition 2013
Reprints 2012, 2014, 2016, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2020
S
©

ISBN : 978-81-21935-79-1 Product Code : SCS3BHM120MATAB13SBN

PRINTED IN INDIA
By Vikas Publishing House Private Limited, Plot 20/4, Site-IV, Industrial Area Sahibabad, Ghaziabad–201 010
and Published by S Chand And Company Limited, A-27, 2nd Floor, Mohan Co-operative Industrial Estate,
New Delhi–110 044.
 PREFACE
We feel happy in presenting the revised version of our immensely popular book
ISC Mathematics strictly in accordance with the Mathematics syllabus for class 12 for 2011 and
after released by the Curriculum and Professional Support Division (CAPSD) of the Ministry of
Education, Royal Government of Bhutan, as part of its Bhutan Higher Secondary Education Certificate
(BHSEC) course.
The special features of this book are:
1. It follows the prescribed syllabus strictly and incorporates the latest trends in the teaching

d
of Mathematics.

ite
2. For the convenience of the teachers and students the detailed syllabus has been given right
in the beginning.

m
3. The chapters are in the same sequence as given in the syllabus to facilitate teaching in the
class and coverage of the syllabus.

Li
4. The development is logical, and the preparation of each new idea is based on the preceding
material.

y
5. Great pains have been taken to present the subject matter in a very easy to understand

n
manner. To achieve this, the authors had sometimes to sacrifice brevity and give detailed

pa
explanation to bring home to the students the finer points of every topic. A sincere effort
has been made to explain the ‘How and Why’ of every concept to make the fundamen-
om
tals clear. The authors are of the view that a textbook is not just a collection of formulae
and questions but much more than this. A textbook should help in making an in-depth
study of the subject and lay solid and sound foundation for further study.
C

6. The clearly development textual explanations are followed by appropriate solved examples
which are large in number and include almost all types of questions possible on a particular
nd

topic or concept.
7. Effort has been made to include quality questions in exercises for practice, keeping in
mind the latest trend and style of questions. The questions are ample in number and well-
A

graded and would cater to the needs of all types of students—average, above average
and brilliant. Hints have been provided to difficult and tricky questions so that the
nd

student does not get stuck up and is able to maintain his pace.
8. Revision exercises containing multi-choice questions will, we hope expose the students
ha

to a variety of problems, requiring intelligent approach and help them in acquainting

themselves with the latest trends and getting firm grasp of the fundamentals and thorough
knowledge of different topics.
C

9. A sincere effort has been made to maintain Mathematical accuracy and rigour.
S

10. Historical notes have been interspersed throughout the text.

For proper feedback as per the requirement of the BHSEC syllabus, the authors are thankful to
©

Mr. Karma Yeshey and Mr. Geewanath Sharma, Curriculum Officers, CAPSD, Ministry of Education,
Bhutan.
Feedback and suggestions for further improvement would be most welcome.

AUTHORS

(iii)
 SYLLABUS FOR CLASS XII (2011 Onwards)
The syllabus for both the Pure Mathematics course and the Business Mathematics course are as
given below. It will be noticed that while the students taking the Business Mathematics will study
comparatively less content under certain units like Calculus and Coordinate Geometry, they will
study an additional unit called Commercial Mathematics. The Pure Mathematics students will study
two additional units called Trigonometry and Complex Numbers. The commonalties and the
differences of the contents between the Pure Mathematics and Business Mathematics are clearly
indicated below. A good estimate of the expected times that should be spent in the formal teaching
of each topic is given in hours with the topics.

d
ite
UNIT 1 – ALGEBRA Pure Business
Mathematics Mathematics

m
1. Permutations and Combinations (12 hrs)
 Factorial Notation

Li
 Concept of Permutation (nPr): Permutation of alike All All

y
things; restricted permutation; circular permutations
 Concept of Combination ( n C r ): Restricted

n
combinations; Distribution of different things into

pa
groups; Open selection of items from different things
and from alike things
om
 Mixed problems on permutations and combinations
(Note: problems should be fairly simple ones)
2. Determinants and Matrices
C

Determinants: (8 hrs)
 Of order 2 and 3
nd

 Minors and Co-factors of a determinant

 Expansion of a determinant
A

 Properties of a determinant and their use in the

nd

evaluation of a determinant
 Product of determinants (without proof); All All
 Solution of simultaneous equations in 2 or 3 variables
ha

using Cramer’s rule

 Conditions for consistency of 3 equations in two
C

variables
Matrices: (6 hrs)
S

 Of order m × n, where m, n ≤ 3, including case m = n;

©

Types of matrices
 Operations: Addition/Subtraction (Compatibility);
Multiplication by a scalar; Multiplication of two
matrices (Compatibility)
 Application of matrix multiplications
 Adjoint and inverse of a matrix
 Use of matrices to solve simultaneous linear equations
in 2 or 3 unknowns
(iv)
 UNIT 2 – TRIGONOMETRY Pure Business
Mathematics Mathematics
1. Inverse Trigonometric Functions (10 hrs)
 Meaning of inverse trigonometric functions (sin–1x, All This unit is
cot–1x, tan–1x, cot–1x, cosec–1x, sec–1x) NOT for
 Principal values (use of graphs in explanation) B/Maths
 Properties of inverse trigonometric functions (without
proof)

d
UNIT 3 – CALCULUS Pure Business

ite
Mathematics Mathematics
1. Differential Calculus (20 hrs)

m
 Revision of the topics done in class XI All All EXCEPT
 Derivatives of trigonometric, logarithmic, and (i) Derivative

Li
exponential functions of Inverse
trigonometric
 Derivatives of composite, absolute value, implicit and

y
function is
parametric functions

n
NOT included
 Interchange of independent & dependent variable for B/Maths

 Logarithmic differentiation pa
 Differentiating function with respect to another function (ii) The application
of maxima &
om
 Successive differentiation up to 2nd order minima in
Mensuration
 Maxima and minima
 Application of maxima and minima to practical
C

problems
 Derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions reducible
nd

to simple form by substitution

2. Integral Calculus (20 hrs)
A

 Revision of formula of integration form class XI All All EXCEPT,

 Standard method of integration of 1/x, ex, tan x,
nd

the portion on
cot x, cosec x,(ax + b)n , where n ∈ Q Definite
 Integration using substitution integrals,
 Integration by using partial fractions
ha

Properties of
 Integration by parts definite
 Integrals of the sin2 x dx, sin3 x dx, cos2 x dx, cos3 x dx,
C

integrals and
f ′(x)[f (x)] n dx Applications of
 Definite integral – as a limit of sum (only algebraic definite
S

functions) integrals are

 Properties of Definite Integrals (without proof) NOT included
©

 Application of definite integrals – area of a curve for B/Maths

included between x or y axis, volume of revolution about
the x-axis or y-axis or about a line
3. Differential Equations (10 hrs) All This chapter is
 Meaning of differential equations; order and degree of NOT for
a differential equation B/Maths
 Solution of differential equation of 1st order and 1st
degree

(v)
  Variable separable
 Homogenous equations and equations reducible to
homogenous form; (dy/dx) + Py = Q, where P and Q
are function of x only
 Solution of differential equations of second order;
(d 2y/d 2x) = f (x)

UNIT 4 – COORDINATE GEOMETRY Pure Business

Mathematics Mathematics

d
1. Pairs of Straight Lines (10 hrs)
 General equation of a family of lines passing through

ite
All This chapter is
the intersection of two lines L1 and L2: L1 + kL2 = 0, NOT for
k ∈ R; finding k using additional condition B/Maths

m
 General equation of second degree in x and y representing

Li
a pair of lines
 Conditions for general second degree equation to

y
represent a pair of staight line
 Reduction of general equation to individual equation

n
 Conditions for perpendicularity and parallel of the two
lines
 Point of intersection and angle between two lines
pa
om
represented by a second degree equation in x and y
 Equation of the bisector of the angle between a pair of
C

given straight lines

2. Conics (15 hrs)
 As a section of a cone
nd

 Definition and understanding of Foci, Directrix, Latus All All

Rectum
A

 Recognition and Equation of a Parabola, Ellipse and

hyperbola in standard form
nd

 Finding the equation for a conic when focus, directrix,

and eccentricity or ralted data are given
 Finding basic information like foci, directrix, etc from
ha

a given equation.
3. Points and their coordinates in 3 dimensions (10 hrs)
C

Distance between two points; section and mid-point All All

formulas; direction cosines and direction ratios of a line;
S

angle between two lines; conditions of line to be parallel or

©

perpendicular
4. Plane (10 hrs)
 General equation of a plane, as ax + by + cz + d = 0,
where a, b, c are direction ratios of the normal to the All This chapter is
plane NOT for
 Equation of a plane: One point form; Normal form; B/Maths
Intercept form
 Distance of point from a plane
(vi)
  Angle between two planes, and angle between a line
and a plane
 Equation of plane though the intersection of two planes
 Finding the equation of a plane given a point and
direction cosine/ratios of the normal and other
sufficient data

UNIT 5 – DATA AND PROBABILITY Pure Business

Mathematics Mathematics

d
1. Measures of Dispersion (4 hrs)

ite
 Meaning of dispersion; quartile deviation; standard All All
deviation, coefficient of variation; Mean deviation

m
from the mean or median
 Combined mean and standard deviation of two groups

Li
only

y
2. Correlation and Regression (15 hrs)
 Definition and meaning of correlations coefficient

n
 Use of scatter diagram and Line of best fit
 Calculation of coefficient of correlation by Karl
Pearson’s method for ungroup data
pa All All
om
 Calculation of rank correlation coefficient by
Spearman’s method (for both repeating and non-
C

repeating ranks)
 Calculation of regression; coefficient and the two lines
nd

of regression by the method of least squares; use of

lines of regression for prediction
A

3. Probability (15 hrs)

 Random experiment and their outcomes
nd

 Events: sure events, impossible events, mutually

exclusive events, independent and dependent events
All All
ha

 Definition of probability of an event

 Laws of probability: addition and multiplication laws;
C

conditional probability

UNIT 6 – COMMERCIAL MATHEMATICS Pure Business

S

Mathematics Mathematics
©

1. Annuities (10 hrs) This unit is All

 Meaning, Present Value, Annuity Certain, Contingent NOT for
Annuity, Perpetual Annuity, Immediate Annuity, P/Maths
Annuity Due, PV of Immediate and Perpetual Annuity

(vii)
2. Application of Derivatives in Commerce and This unit is
Economics (10 hrs) NOT for
 Cost Function P/Maths All
 Average cost
 Marginal cost
 Revenue function and break-even point

UNIT 7 – COMPLEX NUMBERS Pure Business

Mathematics Mathematics
(15 hrs)

d
 Meaning and as an ordered pair of real number in the

ite
form a + bi
 Geometrical representation in complex plane -Argand
diagram for z (a complex number), 1/z, z and z ; All This unit is

m
equality of two complex numbers; absolute value NOT for
B/Maths

Li
(modulus), properties (without proof)
 Argument (conjugate of complex numbers), polar
form

y
 Operations: Sum/Difference, product and quotient of

n
two complex numbers; additive and multiplicative

pa
inverse of a complex number
 Simple locus equation on complex numbers; proving
2
using – z.z = z and z1 + z2 =z1 ± z2
om
 Square root of a complex number
 De Moivre’s theorem and its application
 Cube root of unity: 1, ω, ω 2
C

ASSESSMENT
nd

The final assessment for class 12, which will determine the students’ result, will be 100% external
examination conducted by the Bhutan Board of Examination (BBE) at the end of the academic
A

session. The BBE examination format will be as per the specification provided herein for the trial
examination.
nd

However, for the purposes of assessing the students’ learning process and progress, and for
school’s internal records, the schools must conduct their assessments on class 12 students based on
the following structure, till the trial examinations, which is similar to that of class XI.
ha

Mode of summative assessment

Class XII
C
S

Year beginning – Mid year 40% Mid year – Year end 60%
©

 Class Participation 5%  Class Participation 5%

 Assignments 5%  Assignments 5%
 Units Tests 5%  Units Tests 5%
 Mid-term Exam 25%  Trial Exam 45%
A brief rationale on each of the components of the assessment above follows:
(viii)
Year beginning to Mid year
Class Participation: Student’s active involvement in the class is important for his/her learning.
Class participation would consist of student’s positive attitude and behaviours towards learning:
his/her ability to follow instructions, cooperation displayed in doing group works, confidence in
asking questions and answering the questions asked, etc to mention a few. Teacher should develop
criteria to assess students for the class participation. A better alternative would be to work out the
criteria with the students in the beginning of the year. It is important that the students know the
criteria and are reminded of them from time to time. This would force the students to be active,
cooperative, critical thinkers and confident communicators in the class. This would also force the
teachers to drive students towards these qualities. These are desirable and healthy disposition we

d
would want in our children. Whatever reasonable assessment tools and marking scheme the teacher

ite
has chosen to use for the class participation up to the mid term should be worked out to be worth 5%
of the whole year assessment, for entering into the student progress Report Form.

m
Assignment: Reasonable amounts of assignment, which we normally called home works, should
be assigned quite regularly. More importantly, they should be checked, and prompt feedback provided

Li
to the students on their works. The teacher will award marks at least two times to each student’s
homework during the first half term of the year; they can devise their own marking scheme. The

y
average mark from the total should be worked out to be worth 5% for entering onto the students’
Progress Report card.

n
pa
Unit Tests: A unit test should be conducted at the end of teaching a unit. It should be carried out
during one of the class periods. The teacher should keep proper record of the students’ achievement
in the series of unit tests. A minimum of two unit tests should be conducted before the mid-term
om
exams. The total marks obtained in the unit tests should be worked out to be worth 5% for entering
onto the student’s Progress Report Card.
Mid-term Examination: The mid-term examination may be based on the specifications provided
C

for the Trial examination/Board examination as below. The mark obtained in it should be brought
down to 25% for entering into the Progress Report Card.
nd

Mid year to Year end

Class Participation: To be done similarly as during the first term of the year.
A

Assignments: To be done similarly as during the first term of the year.

nd

Unit Tests: To be done similarly as during the first half term of the year, but with the units
covered after the mid-term examination.
ha

Trial Examination/Board Examination: The annual examination paper will be set for 100
marks, with writing time of Three hours. The paper will consist of two sections:
 Section A will be composed of 15 multiple choice questions, covering the entire syllabus.
C

Each MCQ will carry 2 marks, making the section worth 30 marks in total. Each MCQ
should have one Key/Correct Answer and three distracters.
S

 Section B will be made up of about 13 open answer type questions set from the entire
©

syllabus, out of which the student will have to attempt 10 questions. Each question will
carry 7 marks, making the section worth 70 marks in total.

(ix)
NOTE:
1. For Pure Mathematics, the weighting accorded for each of the units for the annual examination
is as given below:
UNITS % MARKS
1. Algebra 15%
2. Trigonometry 7%
3. Calculus 30%
4. Coordinate Geometry 25%

d
5. Data and Probability 15%
6. Complex Number 8%

ite
Total 100%

m
2. For the Business Mathematics the weighting accorded for each of the units for the annual
examination is as given below:

Li
UNITS % MARKS

y
1. Algebra 20%

n
2. Calculus 25%
3. Coordinate Geometry 15%
4.
5.
Data and Probability
Commercial Mathematics pa 20%
20%
om
Total 100%
3. Care should also be taken in the preparation of questionsions having a balance of them requiring
C

conceptual understanding, problem solving, communication, reasoning, and applications of

procedural knowledge and skills. Some questions should cross strands or units. Along with
nd

these, test blue print based on Blooms Taxonomy would also be needed to be used in the
preparation of the paper.
4. The marks obtained out of 100 in this examination should be worked out to be worth 45% for
A

entering in to the student’ progress report card.

nd
ha
C
S
©

(x)
 CONTENTS
UNIT 1 – ALGEBRA
Chapters Pages
1. Permutations and Combinations 1.3 – 1.32
2. Determinants 2.3 – 2.47
3. Matrices 3.3 – 3.76

d
UNIT 2 – TRIGONOMETRY

ite
4. Inverse Trigonometric Functions 4.3 – 4.41
UNIT 3 – CALCULUS

m
5. Differentiation 5.3 – 5.67

Li
6. Maxima and Minima 6.1 – 6.29
7. Integration 7.3 – 7.54

yn
8. Definite Integrals 8.3 – 8.32

pa
9. Area of a Curve and Volume of Revolution 9.3 – 9.35
10. Differential Equations 10.3 – 10.45
om
UNIT 4 – COORDINATE GEOMETRY
11. Pairs of Straight Lines 11.3– 11.19
C

12. The Conic Section 12.3 – 12.36

13. Points and Their Coordinates in 3-Dimensions 13.3 – 13.22
nd

14. The Plane 14.3 – 14.23

UNIT 5 – DATA AND PROBABILITY
A

15. Measures of Dispersion 15.3 – 15.28

nd

16. Correlation 16.3 – 16.27

17. Regression Analysis 17.3 – 17.29
ha

18. Probability 18.3 – 18.86

C

UNIT 6 – COMMERCIAL MATHEMATICS

19. Annuities 19.3 – 19.22
S

20. Application of Calculus in Commerce and Economics 20.3 – 20.23

©

UNIT 7 – COMPLEX NUMBERS

21. Complex Numbers 21.3 – 21.42
22. De Moivre’s Theorem 22.1 – 22.13
Logarithms Tables L.3–L.12

(xi)
 UNIT 1

d
ite
ALGEBRA

m
• Permutations and Combinations

Li
• Determinants

y
• Matrices

n
pa
om
PERMUTATIONS AND COMBINATIONS
C
nd

Syllabus
• Factorial notation
A

• Concept of permutation (nPr); permutation of alike things;

nd

restricted permutation; circular permutations.

• Concept of combination (nCr); restricted combinations;
ha

distribution of different things into groups; open selection of

items from different things and from alike things.
C

• Mixed, problems on permutations and combinations.

S

(Note. Problems should be fairly simple ones)

©
 d
ite
m
Li
y
HISTORICAL NOTE

n
pa
In India, Jains were acquainted with concepts of permutations and combinations under the
name Vikalpa. In the Vedic period we find the computations of the number of ways in which the
poetic rhythms of verses can be altered. Mahavira is the world’s first mathematician who
om
provided the general formulae for permutations and combinations. Bhaskara treated the subject
matter of permutations and combinations under the name Anka Pasha in his famous work
Lilavati. In addition to general formulae for nCr and nPr, already provided by Mahavira, Bhaskara
C
gave many important theorems and results concerning the subject. The first book touching on
the subject was Pacioli’s Suma (1494) wherein is discussed the problem of how many ways a
nd

group of individuals can sit around a table. The first treatise on the subject, however, did not
appear until 1713, it was Bernoulli’s Ars Conjectandi.
A
nd
ha
C
S
©
 1
Permutations and Combinations

d
ite
1.01. Introduction

m
Suppose we have 40 books of different subjects and a shelf which can hold only 20 books. We
have to choose 20 books out of these 40 books and then arrange them on the shelf. We can take any

Li
20 books we like and then arrange them on the shelf in any manner we like. Thus, the process of
arranging 20 books out of 40 books involves the following two different processes :

y
1. First, we select 20 books out of 40 books. Suppose these are Algebra, Trigonometry, Calculus,
Geometry, etc. It is our sweet will whether we select a particular book or not.

n
pa
2. After having selected 20 books out of 40 books, we proceed to arrange them on the shelf. We
can arrange them on the shelf in any manner we like, for example, it is up to us whether we put a book
on trigonometry or physics in the first place.
om
The above discussion shows that while considering the alternatives of things or acts, we come
across two types of problems :
C
(a) Selection, (b) Arrangement.
The process of selecting things is called combination and that of arranging things is called
nd

permutation.
Difference between a Permutation and a Combination
A

Combination Permutation
nd

1. Concerns only with selection. 1. Concerns selection as well as arrangement.

2. Ordering of the selected items is 2. Ordering is essential.
ha

immaterial.
Thus, if we have 4 objects A, B, C and D the possible selections (or combinations) and
C

arrangements (or permutations) of 3 objects out of 4 are given below. This will help you to understand
clearly the difference between permutation and combination, clearly.
S

Selection Arrangement
↓ ↓
©

Combination Permutation
ABC *ABC, ACB, BAC, BCA, CAB, CBA
ABD ABD, ADB, BAD, BDA, DAB, DBA
ACD ACD, ADC, CAD, CDA, DAC, DCA
BCD BCD, BDC, CBD, CDB, DBC, DCB
Total 4 combinations 24 permutations

Ch 1–3
Ch 1–4 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

*Note. The possible arrangements corresponding to the selection of A, B and C can be easily
written with the help of a tree diagram shown below:

d
ite
m
A few problems relating to combination are :

Li
1. Formation of a team from a number of players.

y
2. Formation of a particular committee from a number of members.

n
A few problems relating to permutation are :

pa
1. Arrangements of books on a shelf.
2. Formation of numbers with the given digits.
om
3. Formation of words with the given letters.
1.02. Fundamental principle of counting
C

To discover the fundamental principle of counting, study the following examples:

nd

1. Suppose you have 3 full-sleeve and 4 half-sleeve shirts. Since you have the choice of wearing
any of these shirts, you can wear one shirt in 3 + 4 = 7 ways. If in addition, you have 5 T-shirts, then
you can wear one shirt in 3 + 4 + 5 = 12 ways.
A

The above example illustrates one way of counting, which we may call the sum rule and applies
when one event has to happen out of given disjoint events.
nd

Here, if wearing a full-sleeve shirt is the event A and wearing a half-sleeve shirt is the event B,
then A can happen in 3 ways and B can happen in 4 ways. Also, A∩ B = φ, i.e., A and B can’t happen
ha

together. We also say that the two events are exclusive.

Now, suppose you have 3 shirts and 4 pairs of pants. In how many possible ways can you dress
C

up by wearing a shirt and a pair of pants?

In the above case, you can wear any of the 3 shirts and after wearing one of these shirts any of
S

these pairs of pants with it. If we label the shirts as S1, S2, S3 and the pants as P1, P2, P3 and P4, then
the different ways of dressing up can be as under :
©

S1 P1 S2 P1 S3 P1
S1 P2 S2 P2 S3 P2
S1 P3 S2 P3 S3 P3
S1 P4 S2 P4 S3 P4
Total number of ways =12 = 3 × 4.
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–5

In this illustration, we multiply the number of ways in which you can wear a shirt and the number
of ways in which you can wear a pair of pants.
2. There are 4 different routes between cities A and B, and 3 different routes between cities B and
C. How many different routes are there from city A to city C through city B?
Discussion: Obviously, one can go from city A to city B by any of the 4 routes, i.e., in 4 ways.
After having gone to B by any of the different 4 routes, one can go to city C by any of the three routes.
Thus, corresponding to one route taken, from A to B, he has 3 choices from B to C. Therefore,
corresponding to 4 routes, there are 12 choices in all.

d
Therefore, he can go from A to C via B, in 4 × 3 = 12 ways as depicted in the following tree

ite
diagram.

m
Li
n y
pa
om
C

The possible routes taken are :

nd

R1 r1 R2 r1 R3 r1 R4 r1
R1 r2 R2 r2 R3 r2 R4 r2
A

R1 r3 R2 r3 R3 r3 R4 r3
nd

Total number of ways = 12.

ha

3. (a) A house has 5 doors and 12 windows. In how many ways can a person run out of the house
during emergency through a door or a window?
W1
C

(b) In how many ways can a person enter the house

through a door and exit through a window? W2
S

Discussion: (a) The person has the choice of

entering by any one of the windows or doors. Thus the D1 W3
©

person can enter the house in 5 + 12 = 17 ways (sum rule).

W4
(b) Since the person has to enter through a door and
there are 5 doors, he can do so in 5 ways. After having
W12
entered through one of the doors, say, D1, he can exit by
any of the 12 windows, say, W1, W2, W3, ...... , and W12. So,
Ch 1–6 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

corresponding to entry through a particular door, say, D1, there are 12 ways of exit as shown below:
D1W1, D1W2, D1W3, ....., and D1 W12 .
Since, for each of the 5 doors D1 , D2 , D3 , D4 , D5, ...... , there are 12 ways of exit, so in all he can
exit in 5 × 12 = 60 ways.
The examples discussed above illustrate the use of a general principle, called the product rule or
the fundamental principle of counting , which is stated below.
1.03. A fundamental principle
If one operation can be performed in m ways, and if corresponding to each of the m ways of

d
performing this operation, there are n ways of performing a second operation, then the number
of ways of performing the two operations together is m × n. (This AND That).

ite
Suppose that the first operation is performed in any one of the m ways, the second operation can
then be performed in n ways and with the particular first operation, we can associate any one of the n

m
ways of performing the second operation. This means that if the first operation could have been
performed only in this one way, there would have been 1 × n, i.e., n ways of performing both the

Li
operations. But it is given that the first operation can be performed in m ways and there are n ways of
performing the second operation for every one way of performing the first operation. Therefore, there

y
are m × n ways of performing both the operations.

n
Generalisation. The above principle can be extended to the case in which the different operations

pa
can be performed in m, n, p,......ways. In this case the number of ways of performing all the operations
together would be m × n × p .......
Ex. 1. There are 10 buses running between two towns X and Y. In how many ways can a man go
om
from X to Y and return by a different bus?
Sol. The man can go from X to Y in 10 ways and as he is not to return by the same bus that he took
while going, corresponding to each of the 10 ways of going, there are 9 ways of returning. Hence the
C

total number of ways in which he can go to Y and be back is 10 × 9 = 90.

Ex. 2. How many different numbers of three digits can be formed with the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, no
nd

digit is being repeated?

Sol. The unit’s place can be filled with either of these 5 digits and so the unit’s place can be filled
A

in 5 ways. The ten’s place can be filled in 4 ways corresponding to each way of filling up the unit’s
place, for we can have any digit here except the one used in the unit’s place. Similarly, the hundredth’s
nd

place can be filled in 3 ways as here we have any of the remaining three digits. Therefore, there are
5 × 4 × 3 = 60 ways of forming a number of three digits with the five given digits.
ha

Ex. 3. Each section in first year of plus two course has exactly 30 students. If there are 3
sections, in how many ways can a set of 3 student representatives be selected from each section?
Sol. 1st representative can be selected from first section in 30 ways.
C

2nd representative can be selected from second section in 30 ways.

S

3rd representative can be selected from third section in 30 ways.

∴ Required number of ways = 30 × 30 × 30 = 27000.
©

Ex. 4. How many numbers are there between 100 and 1000 such that every digit is either
2 or 9?
Sol. Any number between 100 and 1000 is of 3 digits. The unit’s place can be filled by 2 or 9 in 2
ways.
Similarly ten’s place can be filled in 2 ways.
The hundred’s place can also be filled in 2 ways.
∴ Required no. of numbers = 2 × 2 × 2 = 8.
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–7

Ex. 5. How many odd numbers less than 1000 can be formed using the digits 0, 2, 5, 7 when
repetition of digits are allowed?
Sol. Since the required numbers are less than 1000 therefore, they are 1-digit, 2-digit or 3-digit
numbers.
One-digit numbers. Only two odd one-digit numbers are possible, namely, 5 and 7.
Two-digit numbers. For two-digit odd numbers the unit place can be filled up by 5 or 7 i.e. in two
ways and ten’s place can be filled up by 2, 5 or 7 (not 0) in 3 ways.
∴ No. of possible 2-digit odd numbers =2 × 3 = 6.
Three-digit numbers. For three-digit odd numbers, the unit place can be filled up by 5 or 7 in 2

d
ways. The ten’s place can be filled up by any one of the digits 0, 2, 5, 7 in 4 ways. The hundred’s place

ite
can be filled up by 2, 5 or 7 (not 0) in 3 ways.
∴ No. of possible 3-digit numbers = 2 × 4 × 3 = 24
Hence the total no. of possible odd numbers = 2 + 6 + 24 = 32.

m
Ex. 6. A coin is tossed three times and outcomes are recorded. Use the product rule to determine
the number of possible outcomes. Then list all the outcomes.

Li
Sol. For each toss of coin we have 2 choices– a head (H) or a tail (T). Therefore, by the product
rule, the number of possible outcomes of three tosses is 2 × 2 × 2 = 8.

y
For a listing of these outcomes, it is convenient to draw a tree diagram

n
pa
om
C
nd
A
nd
ha
C

Thus, the possible outcomes are

HHH, HHT, HTH, HTT, THH, THT, TTH, TTT.
S

Note. Can you guess how many possible outcomes would be if the coin is tossed four times? Five
times? n times?
©

Arranging in the same manner as above, and applying the product rule, we find that
For 4 tosses, the number of possible outcomes are 2 × 2 × 2 × 2 = 24 = 16
For 5 tosses, the number of possible outcomes are 25 = 32
For n tosses, the number of possible outcomes are 2n.
Ch 1–8 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

EXERCISE 1 (a)
1. Two persons go in a railway carriage where there are 6 vacant seats. In how many different ways can
they seat themselves ?
2. In how many ways can 2 prizes be awarded to 9 contestants provided no contestant gets both the
prizes ?
3. There are three mathematics teachers in a college in which there are 6 classes. In how many different
ways can they choose the classes, provided one teaches one class only ?
4. How many words (with or without meaning) of three distinct letters of the English alphabets are there?
5. How many numbers are there between 100 and 1000 such that 7 is in the units place ?

d
6. How many integers of four digits each can be formed with the digits 0, 1, 3, 5, 6 (assuming no
repetitions)?

ite
7. How many automobile licence plates can be made if the inscription on each contains two different letters
followed by three different digits ?

m
[Hint. There are 26 letters and 10 digits out of which the inscriptions are to be made. Also, the digit 0
cannot be used at the hundred’s place.]

Li
8. Find the number of ways of arranging 6 players to throw the cricket ball so that the oldest player may
not throw first.
9. How many three-digit numbers can be formed without using the digits 0, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 ?

y
10. Find the number of even positive integers which have three digits.

n
11. How many 2-digit numbers can be formed from the digits 8, 1, 3, 5 and 4 assuming

pa
(a) repetition of digits is allowed?
(b) repetition of digits is not allowed? om
12. How many four-digit even integers can be formed using the digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5?
13. To pass an examination a student has to pass in each of the 3 papers. In how many ways can a student
fail in the examination?
C

[Hint. For each of the 3 papers, there are two choices–pass (P) or fail (F). By product rule, there are 2
× 2 × 2 = 8 choices. But he will pass only if he passes in all the papers (PPP).]
nd

14. How many seven-digit phone numbers are possible if 0 and 1 cannot be used as the first digit and the
first three digits cannot be 555, 411, or 936?.
A

[Hint. First three digits can be filled in (8 × 10 × 10 – 3) ways. Last four digits can be filled in
(10 × 10 × 10 × 10) ways.]
nd

15. There are five routes for a journey from station A to station B. In how many different ways can a man
go from A to B and return, if for returning
(i) any of the routes is taken, (ii) the same route is taken,
ha

(iii)the same route is not taken ?

16. How many 9-digit numbers of different digits can be formed ?
C

ANSWERS
S

1. 30 2. 72 3. 120 4. 15600 5. 90
6. 96 7. Number of licence plates = 26 × 25 × 9 × 9 × 8 = 4,21,200
©

8. 600 [Hint. For first place 5 players (excluding the oldest) and for the remaining places 5
(including the oldest) players are available ∴The no. of ways = 5 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1].
9. 64 10. 450 11. (a) 25, (b) 20 12. 540
13. 23– l = 7 ways 14. [8 × 10 × 10 – 3] × 10 × 10 × 10 × 10 = 7970000
15. (i) 5 × 5 = 25, (ii) 5 × 1 = 5, (iii) 5 × 4 = 20
16. 9 × 9 × 8 × 7 × 6 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 = 3265920
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–9

1.04. Permutations
Def. Each of the different arrangements which can be made by taking some or all of a number
of things at a time is called a permutation.
Notation. The number of permutations of n things taken r at a time is denoted by nPr or P(n, r).
The letter P is an abbreviation of the word ‘permutation’.
Thus 6P4 denotes the number of permutations or arrangements of 6 things taken 4 at a time.
n
1.05. The value of nPr
To find the number of permutations of n different things, taken r at a time or to determine nPr.

d
The number of permutations of n things taken r at a time will be the same as the number of ways
in which r blank places can be filled up with n given things.

ite
As the first place can be filled in by any one of the n things so there are n ways of filling up the
first place.

m
After having filled in the first place by any one of the n things, there are (n – 1) things left. Hence
the second place can be filled in (n – 1) ways. Now, as for every one way of filling up the first place,

Li
there are (n – 1) ways of filling up the second place, so the first two places can be filled in n (n – 1)
ways.

y
After having filled in the first two places in any one of the above ways, there are (n – 2) things left

n
and so the third place can be filled in (n – 2) ways. Now for every one way of filling up the first two

pa
places, there are (n – 2) ways of filling up the third place and so the first three places can be filled up
in n (n – 1) (n – 2) ways. om
It may be observed that
(a) At every stage the number of factors is equal to the number of places filled up.
(b) Every factor is by one less than its preceding factor.
C
Thus, we can conclude that the first (r – 1) places can be filled in n(n – 1)(n – 2)....{n–(r – 2)}
ways. After filling up first (r – 1) places the rth place can be filled in n(n – 1)(n – 2)....{n – (r – 1)}
nd

ways.
Position of the object 1st 2nd ... (r – l)th rth
A

Number of ways n n–1 ... n – (r – 2) n – (r – 1)

nd

Hence the number of ways of filling up all the r places, i.e., the number of permutations of n
different things taken r at a time is n (n – 1) (n – 2)......r factors
ha

= n(n − 1)(n − 2)......(n − r − 1)

n
Hence Pr = n (n – 1) (n – 2) ...... (n – r + 1)
C

Thus, 7P2 = 7 × 6 ; 10P4 = 10 × 9 × 8 × 7, 20P3 = 20 × 19 × 18.

S

Cor. The number of permutations of n things taken all at a time is

©

n
Pn = n (n – 1) (n – 2) ...... 3. 2. 1. [Putting n for r]
Ex. 7. In how many ways can 5 persons occupy 3 vacant seats?
Sol. Total number of ways = 5P3 = 5 × 4 × 3 = 60.
12
Ex. 8. If Pr = 1320, find r.
Sol. Pr = 12 × 1l × ...... to r factors = 1320 = 12 × 11 × 10 ∴ r = 3.
12
Ch 1–10 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

1.06. Factorial notation

The product of n natural numbers from 1 to n is denoted by n ! or n and is read as factorial n.

Thus, n ! or n = 1. 2. 3 ...... (n – l) . n taken out

4 ! = l × 2 × 3 × 4 = 24; 6 ! = 1 × 2 × 3 × 4 × 5 × 6 = 720 n ! = n (n – 1) !
(n – 1)! = 1 × 2 × 3 ...... (n – l).
It is easily seen that 8 ! = 8 × (7 !) or 7! = 7 × (6!) or 6 ! = 6 × (5!), etc., One les s
In general, n ! = n (n – 1) !

d
n
1.07. Values of n Pr in terms of factorial notation

ite
n(n − 1).....(n − r + 1)
n
Pr = n(n − 1)( n − 2)......(n − r + 1) = ⋅ (n − r )
(n − r )

m
n(n − 1)(n − 2)...(n − r + 1) ⋅ (n − r )(n − r − 1)...3.2.1

Li
=
(n − r )

y
n(n − 1)(n − 2).....3.2.1 n
=

n
= (n − r ) (n − r )

pa
n
∴ n
p r = (n − r ) om
18
18
Thus, P5 = 13
C

n
Cor. 1. Putting r = 0, nP0 = n = 1
nd

Cor. 2. Value of 0 !
A

n! n! n!
Putting r = n, nPn = ( n − n )! = 0! ; But nPn = n! ∴ n! = [Art.1.05, Cor.] ∴ 0 ! = 1
0!
nd

Note. In fact, 0 ! is meaningless but in order to avoid contradiction in the results, we suppose that
0 ! = 1.
ha

3
Ex. 9. Find the value of n if nP13 : n + 1P12 = .
C

n! n +1 (n + 1)!
S

Sol. Here, nP13 = and P12 =

( n − 13)! ( n − 11)!
©

n! (n − 11)! 3 n! (n − 11) (n − 12) ⋅ (n − 13)! 3

n
P13 : n+1P12 = ( n − 13)! × ( n + 1)! = 4 ⇒ ( n − 13)! × ( n + 1).n !
=
4

(n − 11)(n − 12) 3
i.e., = ⇒ 4n2 – 95n + 525 = 0 or (n – 15) (4n – 35) = 0
( n + 1) 4
∴ n = 15 (Rejecting the fractional value of n).
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–11

Ex. 10. Show that nPr = n–1Pr + r.n–1Pr–1 where the symbols have their usual meanings.
Sol. L.H.S. = nPr = n (n – 1)( n – 2) .........(n – r + 1) ...(i)

R.H.S. = n–1Pr + r.n–1Pr–1

= (n – 1) (n – 2) ....... (n – 1– r + 1) + r. (n – 1) (n – 2) ...... (n − 1 − r − 1 + 1)

= (n – 1) (n – 2) ........ (n – r + 1) (n – r) + r (n – 1) (n – 2) ...... (n – r + 1)
= (n – 1) (n – 2) ........ (n – r + 1) (n – r + r)

d
= n (n – 1) (n – 2) ........ (n – r + 1) = LHS ...(ii)

ite
n n–1 n–1
From (i) and (ii), we have Pr = Pr + r. Pr–1 .

m
EXERCISE 1 (b)
4!

Li
1. Evaluate
2!2!
2. Give the meaning and value of the symbol in the following : (SC)

y
(a) 5P2 (b) 7P3 (c) 10
P4.

n
Find n if

pa
n
3. P2 = 30 4. nP4 : n–1
P3 = 9 : 1
2n 2n–2 2n n
5. Pn+1 : Pn = 56 : 3 6. P3 = 100. P2
om
7. P (n, 6) = 3 P (n, 5) 8. 2 P (n, 3) = P (n + 1, 3)
9. Find r if 5 P (4, r) = 6 P (5, r – 1), r > 1.
C

10. If n1 + n2 P2 = 90 and n1 − n2 P2 = 30, find the values of n1 and n2.

nd

Prove that
11. P (n, n) = 2P (n, n – 2) 12. P (10, 3) = P (9, 3) + 3P (9, 2)
13. P (n, r) = (n – r + 1) P (n, r – 1) 14. P (n, n) = P (n, n – 1)
A

1 1 x
15. If + = ,find x. (SC)
nd

9! 10! 11!
n! n!
16. If and are in the ratio 2 : 1, find the value of n.
2!(n − 2)! 4!(n − 4)!
ha

Solve for n.
C

(2n)! n!
17. : = 44 : 3 18. (n + 1) ! = 56. (n – 1) !
3!(2 n − 3)! 2!( n − 2)!
S

19. Convert into factorial : 7 . 8 . 9 . 10 . 11 . 12 . 13 . 14 . 15.

©

ANSWERS
1. 6. 2. (a) 20, (b) 210, (c) 5040. 3. 6. 4. 9 5. 4.
6. 13. 7. 8. 8. 5. 9. 3. 10. n1 = 8, n2 = 2.
15!
15. 121. 16. 5. 17. n = 6. 18. n = 7. 19.
6!
Ch 1–12 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

1.08. Restricted permutations

Type I.
Ex. 11. In how many of the permutations of 10 things taken 4 at a time will (a) one thing always
occur, (b) never occur?
Sol. (a) Keeping aside the particular thing which will always occur, the number of permutations of 9
things taken 3 at a time is 9P3. Now this particular thing can take up any one of the four places and so
can be arranged in 4 ways. Hence the total number of permutations = 9P3 × 4 = 9 × 8 × 7 × 4 = 2016.
(b) Leaving aside the particular thing which has never to occur, the number of permutations of 9
things taken 4 at a time is 9P4 = 9 × 8 × 7 × 6 = 3024.

d
Ex. 12. In how many of the permutations of n things taken r at a time will 5 things

ite
(i) always occur, (ii) never occur ?
Sol. (i) Keeping aside the 5 things, the number of permutations of (r – 5) things taken out of

m
(n – 5) things is n – 5Pr_5. Now these 5 things can be arranged in r places in rP5 ways. Hence, the total
number of permutations is rP5 × n – 5Pr_5.

Li
(n − 5)!
(ii) Total number of permutations = n – 5Pr =
(n − r − 5)!

n y
Type II. When certain things are not to occur together.

pa
Case I. When the number of things not occurring together is two.

Procedure om
1. Find the total number of permutations when no restriction is imposed on the manner of
arrangement.
2. Then find the number of permutations when the two things occur together.
C

3. The difference of the two results gives the number of permutations in which the two things
do not occur together.
nd

Ex. 13. Prove that the number of ways in which n books can be placed on a shelf when two
particular books are never together is (n – 2) × (n – 1) !.
A

Sol. Regarding the two particular books as one book, there are (n – 1) books now which can be
arranged in n – 1Pn_1, i.e., (n – 1) ! ways. Now, these two books can be arranged amongst themselves
nd

in 2 ! ways. Hence the total number of permutations in which these two books are placed together is
2 ! . (n – 1)!. The number of permutations of n books without any restriction is n !.
ha

Therefore, the number of arrangements in which these two books never occur together
= n ! – 2 ! . (n – 1) ! = n . (n – 1) ! – 2 . (n – 1) ! = (n – 2) . (n – 1) !
Case II. When the number of things not occurring together is more than two.
C

Ex. 14. In how many ways can 6 boys and 4 girls be arranged in a straight line so that no two girls
are ever together ?
S

Sol. The seating arrangement may be done as desired in two operations.

(i) First we fix the positions of 6 boys. Their positions are indicated by B1, B2,....., B6.
©

× B1 × B2 × B3 × B4 × B5 × B6 ×
This can be done in 6 ! ways.
(ii) Now if the positions of girls are fixed at places (including those at the two ends) shown by the
crosses, the four girls will never come together. In any one of these arrangements there are 7 places for
4 girls and so the girls can sit in 7P4 ways.
Hence the required number of ways of seating 6 boys and 4 girls under the given condition
= 7P4× 6! = 7 × 6 × 5 × 4 × 6 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × l = 604800.
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–13

Type III. Formation of numbers with digits.

Ex. 15. Suppose the six digits 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 are given to us and we have to find the total number
of numbers with no repetition of digits which can be formed under different conditions,
1. There is no restriction. The number of 6-digit numbers .
= 6P6 = 6 ! = 6 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 = 720.
2. Numbers in which a particular digit occupies a particular place.
Suppose we have to form numbers in which 5 always occurs in the ten’s place. In this case the
ten’s place is fixed and the remaining five places can be filled in by the remaining 5 digits in 5P5, i.e.,
5 ! = 120 ways.

d
The number of numbers in which 5 occurs in the ten’s place = 120.

ite
3. Numbers divisible by a particular number. Suppose we have to form numbers which may be
divisible by 2. These numbers will have 2 or 4 or 6 in the unit’s place. Thus the unit’s place can be filled

m
in 3 ways. After having filled up the unit’s place in any one of the above ways, the remaining five
places can be filled in 5P5 = 5 ! = 120 ways.

Li
∴ The total number of numbers divisible by 2 = 120 × 3 = 360.
4. Numbers having particular digits in the beginning and the end. Suppose we have to form

y
numbers which begin with 1 and end with 5. Here, the first and the last places are fixed and the

n
remaining four places can be filled in 4 !, i.e., 24 ways by the remaining four digits.

pa
Therefore, the total number of numbers beginning with 1 and ending with 5 = 24.
Note. If the numbers could have 1 or 5 in the beginning or the end, the number would have been
om
2 ! . 4 !, i.e., 48.
5. Numbers which are smaller than or greater than a particular number. Suppose we have to
form numbers which are greater than 4,00,000. In these numbers there will be 4 or a digit greater than
C
4, i.e., 5, 6 or 7 in the lac’s place. Thus this place can be filled in 4 ways. The remaining 5 places can then
be filled in 5 ! = 120 ways.
nd

∴ The total number of numbers = 4 × 120 = 480.

Ex. 16. How many numbers can be formed by using any number of the digits 3, 1, 0, 5,
A

7, 2, 9, no digit being repeated in any number ?

Sol. The number of single digit numbers is 7P1.
nd

The permutations of 7 digits taken 2 at a time are 7P2. But 6P1 of these have zero in the ten’s place
and so reduce to one digit numbers.
Hence the number of two-digit numbers is 7P2 – 6P1
ha

Similarly the number of the three-digit numbers is 7P3 – 6P2 and so on.
∴ The total number required
C

= 7P1 + (7P2 – 6P1) + (7P3 – 6P2) + (7P4 – 6P3) + (7P5 – 6P4) + (7P6 – 6P5) + (7P7 – 6P6) = 11743.
S

Ex. 17. How many different numbers can be formed with the digits 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, when taken all at
a time, and what is their sum!
©

Sol. The total number of numbers = 5 ! = 120. Suppose we have 9 in the unit’s place. We will have
4 ! = 24 such numbers. The number of numbers in which we have 1, 3, 5 or 7 in the unit’s place is also
4 ! = 24 in each case.
Hence the sum of the digits in the unit’s place in all the 120 numbers
= 24 (1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9) = 600.
The number of numbers when we have any one of the given digits in ten’s place is also 4 ! = 24 in
each case. Hence the sum of the digits in the ten’s place
Ch 1–14 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

= 24 (1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9) tens = 600 tens = 600 × 10.

Proceeding similarly, the required sum
= 600 units + 600 tens + 600 hundreds + 600 thousands + 600 ten thousands
= 600 (1 + 10 + 100 + 1000 + 10000) = 600 × 11111 = 6666600
Type IV. Word Building.
The following cases may arise :—
1. No letter may be repeated.
2. Some letters may be repeated.*
3. There may be a particular letter in the beginning or the end.

d
4. Some letters may occur together.

ite
Words

m
Vowels occur together Consonants occur together

Li
Ex. 18. Suppose the word ‘PENCIL’ is given to us and we have to form words with the letters of
this word.
1. There is no restriction on the arrangement of the letters.

y
The six different letters can be arranged in 6P6 = 6 ! = 720 ways.

n
Hence the total number of words formed = 720.

pa
2. All words begin with a particular letter.
Suppose all words begin with E. The remaining 5 places can be filled with remaining 5 letters in
om
5 ! = 120 ways.
3. All words begin and end with particular letters.
Suppose all words begin with L, and end with P. The remaining 4 places can then be filled in 4 !
C

ways.
∴ The total number of words formed = 4 ! = 24.
nd

Note. If the words were to begin or end with E or L, these two positions could have been filled in
2
P2 = 2 ways. Hence the number of words in this case would have been = 2 × 24 = 48.
A

4. N is always after E.
P EN C I L
nd

Since N is always after E, therefore ‘EN’ is considered to be one letter.

∴ Required no. of permutations = 5! = 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 = 120.
ha

5. Vowels occur together.

The vowels are E and I. Regarding them as one letter, the 5 letters can be arranged in 5 ! = 120
C

ways. These two vowels can be arranged amongst themselves in 2 ! = 2 ways.

∴ The total number of words = 2 × 120 = 240.
S

6. Consonants occur together.

Regarding these consonants as one letter the three letters E, I, (PNCL) can be arranged in 3 !, i.e.,
©

6 ways. The letters PNCL can be arranged among themselves in 4 ! = 24 ways.

∴ The number of words in which consonants occur together = 6 × 24 = 144.
7. Vowels occupy even places.
× × × × × ×
1 2 3 4 5 6
* This case is taken up in the next article.
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–15

There are 6 letters and 3 even places. E can be placed in any one of the three even places in
3
P1, i.e., 3 ways. Having placed E in any one of these places, I can be placed in any one of the
remaining 2 places in 2P1, i.e., 2 ways. Thus, the vowels can occupy even places in 2 × 3 = 6 ways.
After the vowels have been placed the remaining 4 letters can take up their positions in 4P4, i.e., 24
ways.
∴ The total number of words = 6 × 24 = 144.
Ex. 19. How many ways are there to arrange the letter in the word GARDEN with the vowels in
alphabetical order ?
Sol. The word GARDEN contains 6 letters - 4 consonents (G, R, D, N) and 2 vowels A, E. The 4

d
consonents can be arranged in 6 places in 6P4 ways. In each of these arrangements two places will
remain blank in which the first place will be filled by A and the place after this in only way by E as per

ite
the given condition (vowels in alphabetical order)
∴ Required number of ways = 6P4 × 1 = 6 × 5 × 4 × 3 = 360.

m
1.09. Permutations of alike things

Li
The number of permutations of n things taken all at a time where p of the things are alike and
of one kind, q others are alike and of another kind, r others are alike and of another kind, and so
on is

n y
n!
x= .

pa
p ! q ! r ! ...

Suppose the things are letters of which p are a’s, q are b’s, r are c’s and so on. In any one of the
om
required x permutations, replace the p a’s by p new letters (say a1, a2,.......ap) different from each other
and different from the remaining (n – p) letters. Then, permuting these p new letters among themselves
without disturbing the rest, we get p ! new permutations. If this change is made in each of the x
C

permutations, we will obtain x × p ! new permutations in which p letters a’s are now all different. Now,
in any one of the x × p ! permutations, we replace the q b’s by q different letters b1, b2,......bq. Permuting
nd

them without disturbing the rest, we get q ! permutations in all. By doing this in each of the x × p !
permutations we would obtain x × p ! q ! permutations in which all p letters ‘a’s’ and all q letters ‘b’s’
A

are different. Similarly on replacing the r c’s by r different letters and permuting them, we will form x ×
p ! q ! r !......permutations in which all the n letters are now different. But n different letters can be
nd

permuted in n ! ways. Hence x . p ! q ! r !...... = n !

n!
x= .
ha

p ! q ! r ! ...
C

Ex. 20. In how many ways can the letters of the word (i) BHUTAN (ii) INDIA be arranged ?
Sol. (i) The word BHUTAN contains all different letters, i.e., the letters are not repeated.
S

∴ The no. of possible arrangements is 6! = 720 ways.

Sol. (ii) The word INDIA contains 5 letters of which 2 are ‘I’s.
©

5! 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 1
The number of possible arrangements = = = 60 ways.
2! 2 ×1
Ex. 21. How many signals can be made by hoisting 2 blue, 2 red and 5 yellow flags on a pole at the
same time?
9! 9 × 8 × 7 × 6 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 ×1
Sol. The number of signals = = = 756.
2!2!5! 2 × 2 × 5 × 4 × 3 × 2 ×1
Ch 1–16 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Ex. 22. A coin is tossed 6 times. In how many different ways can we obtain 4 heads and 2 tails?
Sol. Whether we toss a coin 6 times or toss 6 coins at a time, the number of arrangements will be
the same.
6!
∴ The number of arrangements of 4 heads and 2 tails out of 6 is = 15.
4!2!
Ex. 23. How many numbers can be formed with digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 3, 2, 1, so that odd digits always
occupy the odd places?
Sol. The odd digits having two 1’s alike and two 3’s alike can be arranged in four odd places in
4!
= 6 ways.

d
2!2!

ite
3!
The three even digits having two 2’s alike can be arranged in the three even places in = 3 ways.
2!

m
∴ The number of numbers = 6 × 3 = 18.
Ex. 24. There are 3 copies each of 4 different books. Find the number of ways of arranging them

Li
on a shelf.
Sol. Total number of books = 3 × 4 = 12

y
Each of the 4 different titles has 3 copies each

n
12 ! 12 !
∴ Required number of ways of arranging them on a shelf = 3 ! 3 ! 3 ! 3 ! = = 369600.

pa
(3!) 4
Ex. 25. Find the number of arrangements of the letters of the word ‘BANANA’ in which the two
om
N’s do not appear adjacently.
Sol. Considering the two N’s as one letter, the number of letters to be arranged = 5.
C
5!
Therefore, the number of arrangements = = 20 (3 A is repeated 3 times)
3!
nd

6!
Total number of arrangements if there were no restriction imposed = 3! 2! = 60.
(A repeated 3 times and N repeated 2 times)
A

∴ Required number of arrangements = 60 – 20 = 40.

Ex. 26. How many numbers greater than a million can be formed with the digits 2, 3, 0, 3, 4, 2, 3?
nd

Sol. A million is a 7-digit number. So any number greater than 1 million will contain all the seven
digits. Since the digit 2 occurs twice and digit 3 occurs thrice and the rest are different, therefore,
ha

7!
number of possible numbers which can be formed with the given seven digits = = 420. These
(2!)(3!)
C

possible numbers include those which have 0 at the millions place. Keeping 0 fixed at the millions
place, the remaining 6 digits out of which 2 occurs twice, 3 occurs thrice and the rest are different can
S

6!
be arranged in = 60 ways.
©

(2!)(3!)
∴ Number of numbers greater than 1 million made from the given digits = 420 – 60 = 360.
Ex. 27. In how many ways can the letters of the word ‘ARRANGE’ be arranged such that the two
r’s do not occur together?
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–17

Sol. (a) There are two a’s, two r’s in the word ‘arrange’, therefore the number of arrangements
7!
= = 1260. ...(1)
2!2!

6!
The number of arrangements in which the two a’s occur together = = 360. ...(2)
2!
∴ The number of arrangements in which 2 r’s do not occur together = (1) – (2) = 1260 – 360 = 900.
1.10. Permutations of repeated things

d
The number of permutations of n different things taken r at a time, when each thing may occur

ite
any number of times is nr.
Suppose r places are to be filled with n things. The first place can be filled in n ways and when this
has been filled up in any one of these ways, the second place can also be filled in n ways for the thing

m
occupying the first place may occupy the second place also. Thus the first two places can be filled in
n × n = n2 ways. Similarly the third place can also be filled in n ways.

Li
Arguing in the same manner, we conclude that the r places can be filled in n × n × n.....r times, i.e.,
nr ways.

y
Ex. 28. In how many ways can 3 prizes be distributed among 4 boys, when

n
(i) no boy gets more than one prize;

pa
(ii) a boy may get any number of prizes;
(iii) no boy gets all the prizes.
om
Sol. (i) The first prize can be given to any of the four boys. Then, the second prize can be given
to any of the three boys. Lastly, the third prize can be given to any one of the remaining 2 boys.
∴ The number of ways in which all the 3 prizes can be given = 4 × 3 × 2 = 24.
C

(ii) In this case, each of the three prizes can be given in 4 ways since a boy can receive any
nd

number of prizes.
∴ The number of ways in which all the prizes can be given = 4 × 4 × 4 = 43 = 64.
(iii) Since anyone of the 4 boys can get all the prizes, therefore, the number of ways in which a
A

boy gets all the 3 prizes = 4.

∴ Number of ways in which a boy does not get all the prizes = 64 – 4 = 60.
nd

Ex. 29. How many numbers of 3-digits can be formed with the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 when digits may
be repeated?
ha

H T O
Sol. Since repetition is allowed, each of the 3 places in a 3-digit
number can be filled in 5 ways. 5 5 5
C

∴ Required number of 3-digit numbers ways ways ways

= 5 × 5 × 5 =53 = 125
S

Ex. 30. How many numbers each containing four digits can be formed, when a digit may be
repeated any number of times?
©

Sol. There are in all 10 digits, including zero. As the first digit of the number cannot be zero, so it
can be chosen in 9 ways. Again, as a digit may occur any number of times in a number, the second,
third and fourth digits of the numbers can be any one of the ten digits and so each of the remaining
three places can be filled in 10 ways.
Hence the total number of 4-digit numbers = 9 × 103 = 9000.
Verification. All the 4-digit numbers will be between 1000 and 9999 and so their number is
9999 – 999 = 9000.
Ch 1–18 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Ex. 31. Eight different letters of an alphabet are given. Words of 4 letters from these are formed.
Find the number of such words with at least one letter repeated.
Sol. If any letter can be used any number of times, then the number of words of 4 Letters with 8
different letters is 8 × 8 × 8 × 8 = 84 = 4096
Number of words of 4 letters with at least one letter repetition not allowed = 8P4 = 8 × 7 × 6 × 5
= 1680
∴ No of 4 letter words with at least one letter repeated is 84 – 8P4 = 4096 – 1680 = 2416.
1.11. Circular permutations

d
If we have to arrange the five letters A, B, C, D, E, two of the arrangements would be ABCDE,

ite
EABCD (Fig. 1.01) which are two distinct arrangements. Now, if these arrangements are written along
the circumference of a circle, the two arrangements are one and the same. Thus, we conclude that
circular permutations are different only when the

m
relative order of the objects is changed otherwise they
are the same. Thus the arrangements in Fig. 1.02 are

Li
different.
As the number of circular permutations depends

y
on the relative positions of objects, we fix the position

n
of one object and then arrange the remaining (n – 1)

pa
objects in all possible ways. This can be done in Fig. 1.01
(n – 1) ! ways.
Method II. Let the 5 persons be denoted by the
om
letters A,B,C, D, E and one of the ways in which they
can form a ring be as shown in Fig. 1.01.
Starting with different letters and reading them
C

in the clockwise direction the various arrangements

Fig. 1.02
of the letters thus obtained are ABCDE, BCDEA,
nd

CDEAB, DEABC, EABCD.

These are all different linear arrangements but have no essential difference when regarded as
A

circular arrangements. This shows that a single circular arrangement of the 5 letters gives rise to 5
different linear arrangements.
nd

Hence if the required number of circular arrangements of the 5 persons be x, the total number of
linear arrangements of the same persons will be 5x.
ha

But we know that the total number of linear arrangements of 5 persons is 5 !.

5!
∴ 5x = 5 ! ∴ x = =4!
C

5
Thus, the number of ways in which five persons form a ring = 4 ! = (5 – 1) !.
S

Similarly the number of ways in which n persons can form a ring = (n – 1) !.

Ex. 32. 20 persons were invited for a party. In how many ways can they and the host be seated
©

around a circular table ? In how many of these ways will two particular persons be seated on either
side of the host ?
Sol. There is 1 host and 20 guests, they are to be seated around a circular table.
(i) Let us fix the seat of one person, say the host, the 20 guests will be seated around the circular
table in 20 ! ways, [or, (n – 1)! = (21 – 1) ! = 20!]
(ii) The two particular persons can be seated on either side of the host in 2 ways and for each way
of their taking seats, the remaining 18 persons can be seated around the circular table in 18 ! ways.
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–19

Hence the number of ways of seating two particular persons on either side of the host = 2 × 18 !.
[or, 2! × (19 – l)!, considering the host and two particular persons as one entity.]
Ex. 33. In how many ways can a party of 4 boys and 4 girls be seated at a circular table so that no
2 boys are adjacent ? (ISC BM 2004)
Sol. Let the girls first take up their seats. They can sit in 3 ! ways. When they have been seated,
then there remain 4 places for the boys each between two girls. Therefore the boys can sit in 4 ! ways.
Therefore there are 3 ! × 4 !, i.e., 144 ways of seating the party.
Ex. 34. A round table conference is to be held between delegates of 20 countries. In how many
ways can they be seated if two particular delegates are

d
(i) always together, (ii) never together ?

ite
Sol. (i) Let D1 and D2 be the two particular delegates. Considering D1 and D2 as one delegate, we
have 19 delegates in all . 19 delegates can be seated round a circular table in (19 – 1) ! = 18 ! ways. But

m
two particular delegates can seat themselves in 2! (D1 D2 or D2D1) ways.
Hence, the total number of ways = 18! × 2! = 2 (18!)

Li
(ii) To find the number of ways in which two particular delegates never sit together, we subtract
the number of ways in which they sit together from the total number of ways of seating 20 persons,

y
i.e., (20 – 1) ! = 19! ways.

n
Hence, the total number of ways in this case = 19! – 2 (18!) = 19 (18!) – 2 (18!) = 17 (18!).

pa
1.12. Clockwise and counter-clockwise permutations
om
We have two types of circular permutations:
(i) Those in which counter-clockwise and clockwise are distinguishable. Thus while seating 4
persons A, B, C, D around a table, the following permutations are considered different. (Fig. 1.03)
C
(ii) Those in which counter-clockwise and anti-clockwise are not distinguishable. (Fig. 1.04)
Thus, (a) while forming a garland of roses or jasmine, the following arrangements are not disturbed
nd

if we turn the garland over.

A
nd
ha

Fig. 1.03 Fig. 1.04

C

(b) The distinction between clockwise and anti-clockwise is ignored when a number of people
S

have to be seated around a table so as not to have the same neighbours.

Ex. 35. Find the number of ways in which (i) n different beads, (ii) 10 different beads can be
©

arranged to form a necklace.

Sol. Fixing the position of one bead, the remaining beads can be arranged in (n – 1)! ways. As
there is no distinction between the clockwise and anti-clockwise arrangements, the required number
(n − 1)! .
of ways =
2
(10 − 1)! 1
Number of ways in which 10 different beads can be arranged = = (9!).
2 2
Ch 1–20 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Ex. 36. Find the number of ways in which 10 different flowers can be strung to form a garland so
that 4 particular flowers are never separated.
Sol. Consider 4 particular flowers as one flower. Then, we have 7 flowers which can be strung to
form a garland in (7 – 1)! = 6! ways. But 4 particular flowers can be arranged in 4! ways.
1
Hence, the required number of ways = (6! × 4!) = 8640.
2
Ex. 37. In how many ways can 7 persons sit around a table so that all shall not have the same
neighbours in any two arrangements.

d
Sol. 7 persons can sit around a table in 6 ! ways but as each person will have the same neighbours

ite
1
in clockwise and anti-clockwise arrangements, the required number = 6! = 360.
2
EXERCISE 1 (c)

m
1. Of 12 different books a shelf will hold 5; how many different arrangements may be made on the shelf ?

Li
2. In how many ways can the letters of the following words be arranged:
(a) RADIO (b) FOREIGN ?

y
3. In how many other ways can the letters of the word ‘SIMPLETON’ be arranged ?

n
4. How many different words beginning and ending with a consonant can be made out of the letters of the word

pa
‘EQUATION’?
5. How many permutations can be made out of the letters of the word ‘TRIANGLE’ ? How many of these will
begin with T and end with E ?
om
6. How many different words can be formed of the letters of the word ‘MALENKOV’ so that
(i) no two vowels are together,
(ii) the vowels may occupy odd places ?
C

7. In how many ways can the letters of the word ‘COMBINE’ be arranged so that;
(i) the vowels are never separated ;
nd

(ii) all the vowels never come together ;

(iii) vowels occupy only the odd places ?
A

8. Three persons have 4 coats, 5 waistcoats, and 6 hats. Find in how many ways can they put on the clothes.
9. If out of 6 flags any number of flags can be shown at a time, find how many different signals can be made out
nd

of them.
10. In how many ways can 9 things be arranged taken 4 at a time, and in how many of these arrangements will
ha

a particular thing be always included ?

11. How many different numbers of 4 digits each can be formed with the ten digits, 0, 1, 2,...9 when digits are
not repeated ?
C

12. From the digits 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, how many three-digit odd numbers can be formed when the repetition of the
digits is not allowed ? (ISC)
S

13. (i) How many different numbers of six digits can be formed with the digits 3, 1, 7, 0, 9, 5?
©

(ii) How many of them are divisible by 10?

(iii) How many of them will have zero in the ten’s place?
14. How many 5-digit telephone numbers can be formed with the digits 0, 1, 2,..., 8, 9 if each number starts
with 35 and no digit appears more than once ? (ISC)
15. There are 5 boys and 3 girls. In how many ways can they stand in a row so that no two girls are together?
16. There are 5 red, 4 white and 3 blue marbles in a bag. They are drawn one by one and arranged in a row.
Assuming that all the 12 marbles are drawn, determine the number of different arrangements. (ISC)
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–21

17. How many 7-digit numbers can be formed using the digits 1, 2, 0, 2, 4, 2 and 4? (ISC)

[Hint. Reqd. number of numbers = Total possible arrangements – those arrangements have 0 in the extreme
7! 6!
left position. = − ].
3!2! 3!2!
18. (i) How many different words can be formed with the letters of the word ‘BANGCHUNG’?
(ii) In how many of these B and H are never together?
(iii) How many of these begin with B and end with A?
19. (i) Find how many arrangements can be made with the letters of the word “MATHEMATICS”?
(ii) In how many of them the vowels occur together? (ISC)

d
[Hint. (ii) A, A, E, I, M, T, H, M, T, C, S

ite
8!
Imagine 4 vowels written together, Then these 8 letters can be permuted in = 10080 ways.
2!2!

m
Corresponding to each of these permutations, the 4 vowels can be arranged among themselves in

Li
4!
= 12 ways.
2!
∴ Reqd. number of words in which vowels occur together = 10080 × 12 = 120960].

n y
20. Ten different books are arranged on a shelf. Find the number of different ways in which this can be done,
if two specified books are (a) to be together, (b) not to be together.

pa
21. In how many ways can 20 books be arranged on a shelf so that a particular pair of books shall not come
together? om
22. Find the number of permutations of the letters of the words
(i) INDIA (ii) BHUTAN (iii) MALDIVES (iv) PAKISTAN.
23. Find the number of ways in which five identical balls can be distributed among ten identical boxes, if not
C

more than one can go into a box.

nd

24. How many numbers are there in all which consist of 5 digits?
25. In how many ways can 5 prizes be distributed among 4 students, when each student may receive
any number of prizes?
A

26. In how many ways can 3 letters be posted in four letter boxes in a village ? If all the three letters are not
posted in the same letter box, find the corresponding number of ways of posting.
nd

27. In how many ways can 8 people sit around a table?

28. In how many ways can 10 people sit around a table so that all shall not have the same neighbours in any
ha

two arrangements?
29. A committee of 11 members sits at a round table. In how many ways can they be seated if the ‘President’
C

and the ‘Secretary’ choose to sit together?

30. In how many ways can 30 different pearls be arranged to form a necklace?
S

31. In how many ways 6 gentlemen and 3 ladies can be seated round a table so that
every gentleman may have a lady by his side.
©

[Hint. Arrange the seats for 6 gentlemen and 3 ladies as shown. This can be
done in 5! (Gentlemen) × 3! (Ladies) = 720 ways.
If arrangements are made in the opposite direction, then the number of
arrangements = 5! × 3! = 720.
∴ Total number of required arrangements = 720 + 720 = 1440.] Fig. 1.05
Ch 1–22 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

ANSWERS
12
1. P5 2. (a) 120 (b) 5040 3. (9!) – 1 4. 4320 5. 40320, 720
6. (i) 14400 (ii) 2880 7. 720 ; 4320 ; 576 8. 172800 9. 1956 10. 3024, 1344
11. 4536 12. 60 13. (i) 600 (ii) 120 (iii) 120 14. 336

15. 14400 16. 27720 17. 360 18. (i) 90720 (ii) 80640 (iii) 1260
11!
19. (i) = 4989600 (ii) 120960 20. (a) 725760 (b) 2903040 21. 18(19!)
2!2!2!

d
10!
22. (i) 60 (ii) 720 (iii) 40320 (iv) 2520 23. 24. 90,000 25. 24 = 1024

ite
5!5!
1 1
26. 64, 60 27. 5040 28. (9 !) 29. 2 (9 !) 30. (29 !) .
2 2

m
1.13. Combinations

Li
Def. Each of the different groups or selections which can be made by taking some or all of a
number of things at a time (irrespective of the order) is called a combination.

y
By the number of combinations of n things taken r at a time is meant the number of groups of r

n
things which can be formed from the n things. The same is denoted by the symbol nCr or C(n, r)

pa
⎛ ⎞
or ⎜ n ⎟ .
⎝r⎠ om
n
1.14. Value of n Cr
Each combination consists of r different things which can be arranged among themselves in r !
C
ways. Therefore, the number of arrangements for all the nCr combinations is nCr × r !. This is equal to
the permutations of n different things taken r at a time.
nd

∴ n
Cr × r = nPr
n
Pr n(n − 1)(n − 2).........(n − r + 1)
A

∴ n
Cr = =
r 1.2.3........r
nd

n! n n!
Cor. 1. nPr = n − r ∴ Cr = r . n − r
ha

Cor. 2. To prove that nCn = 1.

C

n! 1
Putting r = n in nCr = (n − r )! ⋅ r ! , we have
S

n! 1 n! 1 n! 1
n
Cn = (n − n)! ⋅ n ! = 0! ⋅ n ! = 1 ⋅ n ! = 1. (3 0! = 1)
©

Cor. 3. The number of combinations of n different things taken r at a time is equal to the number
of combinations of n different things taken (n – r) at a time, i.e., nCr = nCn_r .
Proof.
Method I. Every time we select a group of r things we leave behind another group of (n – r) things.
Thus for every combination of (n – r) things there corresponds a combination of r things.
∴ nCr = nCn_r.
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–23

n! n n! n!
Method II. nCr = r × n − r and Cn −r = n − r × n − (n − r ) = (n − r ) ⋅ r

n
Cr = nCn – r.
Cor. 4. If nCx = nCy, then, either x = y or x + y = n.
Since nCx = nCy = nCn–y ∴ x = y or x = n – y, i.e., x + y = n.
Cor. 5. An important formula
n
Cr + nCr_1 = n + 1Cr (1< r < n) (Pascal’s Rule)

d
n n

ite
n
Cr + nCr_1 = r . n − r + ( r − 1) . (n − r + 1)

m
⎧⎪ (n − r + 1) + r ⎫⎪ (n + 1) n (n + 1)
= n⎨ ⎬= = = n +1 Cr .

Li
⎩⎪ r . ( n − r + 1) ⎭⎪ r ⋅ ( n − r + 1) r ⋅ ( n − r + 1)

Another form. C (n, r) + C(n, r – 1) = C (n + 1, r),

y
i.e., C (n, r – 1) = C (n + l, r) – C (n, r)

n
Alternative Proof. The total number of combinations of n + 1 things taken r at a time = combinations

pa
that contain a particular thing + combinations that do not contain a particular thing.
∴ n+1Cr = nCr_1 + nCr . om
n n −1 n +1
Note. nCr is greatest if (i) r = , when n is even, (ii) r = or when n is odd.
2 2 2
Ex. 38. Find the values of 6C3 and 30C28.
C

6×5× 4
nd

Sol. (i) 6C3 = = 20.

1× 2 × 3
30 × 29
A

30
(ii) 30C28 = C30 − 28 = 30 C2 = = 435.
1× 2
Ex. 39. If 18Cr = 18Cr + 2 , find the value of rC5 .
nd

8× 7 × 6
Sol. As r≠ r+2, so r + (r + 2) = 18 ∴ r = 8 ∴ rC5 = 8C5 = 8C3 = = 56.
1× 2 × 3
ha

5
Ex. 40. Find the value of 47
C4 + ∑ 52– r
C3 .
C

r =1
5
Sol. 47C4 + ∑ 52− r C3 = 51C3 + 50C3 + 49C3 + 48C3 + 47C3 + 47C4
S

r =1
= 51C3 + 50C3 + 49C3 + 48C3 + 48C4 [3 nCr + nCr–1 = n+1Cr]
©

= 51C3 + 50C3 + 49C3 + 49C4 = 51C3 + 50C3 + 50C4

= 51C3 + 51C4 = 52C4.
Ex. 41. If nCr denotes the number of combinations of n things taken r at a time, then the
expression nCr+1 + nCr–1 + 2 × nCr equals
n+1
(a) Cr+1 (b) n+2Cr (c) n+2Cr+1 (d) n+1Cr
Ch 1–24 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Sol. (c) Given exp. = nCr+1 + nCr–1 + 2 × nCr = nCr+1 + nCr–1 + nCr + nCr (write 2 × nCr = nCr + nCr)
= (nCr+1 + nCr) + (nCr–1 + nCr)
= n+1Cr+1 + n+1Cr = n+2Cr+1
Ex. 42. If nCr–1 = 36, nCr = 84 and nCr+1 = 126, then find the value of r.
n
Cr 84 n! ( r − 1) ! ( n − r + 1) ! 84 n − r +1 7
Sol. n = ⇒ × = ⇒ = .....(i)
Cr −1 36 r ! (n − r ) ! n! 36 r 3

d
n
Cr +1 126 n! r ! (n − r ) ! 3 n−r 3
= ⇒ × = ⇒ =

ite
Also, .....(ii)
n
Cr 84 (r + 1) ! (n − r − 1) ! n! 2 r +1 2

m
5r + 3
From (ii) 2n – 2r = 3r + 3 ⇒ n =
2

Li
5r + 3
− r +1
2 7
Substituting in (i), we get = ⇒ r = 3.

y
r 3

n
pa
EXERCISE 1 (d)
1. Find the value of: om
(a) 5C2 (b) 10
C4 (c) 50
C 47
2. Evaluate :
11
(i) C (15, 14) (ii) C (8, 5) (iii) C2 .
C

3. Evaluate :
nd

(i) C (19, 17) + C (19, 18) (ii) C (31, 26) – C (30, 26).
[Hint. Using C (n, r) + C (n, r – 1) = C (n + 1, r), we have C (30, 26) + C (30, 25) = C (31, 26)
A

⇒ C (31, 26) – C (30, 26) = C (30, 25)]

4. If 4P2 = n.4C2, find n.
nd

5. If nC4 = nC6, find n. (SC)

6. If C (2n, 3): C (n, 2) = 12 : 1, find n.

ha

7. If nCr : nCr+1 = 1 : 2 and nCr+1 : nCr+2 = 2 : 3, determine the values of n and r. (ISC)
C

8. If C (n, 10) = C (n, 12), determine C (n, 5).

9. If C (2n, r) = C (2n, r + 2), find r in term of n.

S

6
50 ∑ 56–r 55 55 56 56
©

10. The value of C4 + C3 is (a) C4 (b) C3 (c) C3 (d) C4

r=1

11. n–1
C3 + n–1C4 > nC3 if (a) n > 7 (b) n ≥ 7 (c) n > 6 (d) n ≥ 6 (IIT)

ANSWERS
1. (a) 10 (b) 210 (c) 19600 2. (i) 15 (ii) 56 (iii) 55 3. (i) 190 (ii) 142506 4. 2
5. 10 6. 5 7. n = 14, r = 4 8. 26334
9. r = n – 1 10. (d) 11. (a)
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–25

1.15. Practical problems on combination

Ex. 43. In how many ways can 4 persons be selected from amongst 9 persons ? How many times
will a particular person be always selected?
Sol. The number of ways in which 4 persons can be selected from amongst 9 persons
9×8× 7× 6
= 9C4 = = 126.
1× 2 × 3 × 4
The number of ways in which a particular person is always to be selected
8× 7 × 6

d
= 8C3 = = 56.
1× 2 × 3

ite
Ex. 44. Find the number of diagonals that can be drawn by joining the angular points of a
heptagon.

m
Sol. A heptagon has seven angular points and seven sides.

Li
The join of two angular points is either a side or a diagonal.
7×6
The number of lines joining the angular points = 7C2 = = 21.

y
1× 2

n
But the number of sides = 7 ∴ The number of diagonals = 21 – 7 = 14.

pa
Ex. 45. A committee of 4 is to be selected from amongst 5 boys and 6 girls. In how many ways can
this be done so as to include (i) exactly one girl, (ii) at least one girl?
om
Sol. (i) In this case we have to select one girl out of 6 and 3 boys out of 5.
The number of ways of selecting 3 boys = 5C3 = 5C2 = 10.
The number of ways of selecting one girl = 6C1 = 6.
C

∴ The required committee can be formed in 6 × 10 = 60 ways.

(ii) The committee can be formed with
nd

(a) one boy and three girls, or (b) 2 boys and 2 girls,
or (c) 3 boys and one girl, or (d) 4 girls alone.
A

The committee can be formed in (a) 5C1 × 6C3 ways ;

The committee can be formed in (b) 5C2 × 6C2 ways ;
nd

The committee can be formed in (c) 5C3 × 6C1 ways ;

The committee can be formed in (d) 6C4 ways.
ha

Hence the required number of ways of forming the committee

= 5C1 × 6C3 + 5C2 × 6C2 + 5C3 × 6C1 + 6C4 = 100 + 150 + 60 + 15 = 325 ways.
C

(ii) Method II. Required ways = (Committees of 4 out of 11 without any restriction) – (Committees
in which no girl is included) = 11C4 – 5C4 = 325.
S

Ex. 46. A student is to answer 10 out of 13 questions in an examination such that he must choose
©

at least 4 from the first five questions. Find the number of choices available to him.
Sol. Two cases are possible :
(i) Selecting 4 out of first five questions and 6 out of remaining 8 questions
5×8×7
∴ Number of choices in this case = 5C4 × 8C6 = 5C1 × 8C2 = 1 × 2 = 140
Ch 1–26 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

(ii) Selecting 5 out of first five questions and 5 out of remaining 8 questions.
8×7×6
⇒ Number of choices = 5C5 × 8C5 = 1 × 8C3 = = 56.
1× 2 × 3
∴ Total number of choices = 140 + 56 = 196.
1.16. Miscellaneous types
Type I. Total number of combinations. To find the total number of combinations of n dissimilar
things taking any number of them at a time.
Case I. When all things are different.

d
Each thing may be disposed of in two ways. It may either be included or rejected.
∴ The total number of ways of disposing of all the things = 2 × 2 × 2 × ......n times = 2n

ite
But this includes the case in which all the things are rejected.
Hence the total number of ways in which one or more things are taken = 2n – 1.

m
Cor. 2n – 1 is also the total number of the combinations of n things taken 1, 2, 3, ...... or n at a time.
Hence, nC1 + nC2 + nC3 + ... + nCn = 2n – 1.

Li
Ex. 47. There are 5 questions in a question paper. In how many ways can a boy solve one or more
questions?

y
Sol. The boy can dispose of each question in two ways. He may either solve it or leave it. Thus

n
the number of ways of disposing of all the questions = 25.

pa
But this includes the case in which he has left all the questions unsolved.
Hence the total number of ways of solving the paper = 25 – 1 = 31.
om
Case II. When all things are not different.
Suppose, out of (p + q + r +...) things, p are alike of one kind, q are alike of a second kind, r
alike of a third kind, and the rest different.
C

Out of p things we may take 0, 1, 2, 3...... or p. Hence they may be disposed of in (p + 1) ways.
Similarly, q alike things may be disposed of in (q + 1) and r alike things in (r + 1) ways. The t
nd

different things may be disposed of in 2t ways.

This includes that case in which all are rejected.
A

∴ The total number of selections = (p + l) (q + l) (r + l) 2t – l.

Ex. 48. Prove that from the letters of the sentence, ‘Daddy did a deadly deed’, one or more letters
nd

can be selected in 1919 ways.

Sol. In the given sentence, there are 9 d’s ; 3 a’s ; 3 e’s ; 2 y’s ; 1 i; and 1 l.
∴ The total number of selections. = (9 + 1) (3 + 1) (3 + 1) (2 + 1) (1 + 1) (1 + 1) – 1
ha

= 10 × 4 × 4 × 3 × 2 × 2 – 1 = 1919.
Type II. Division into groups.
C

To find the number of ways in which p + q things can be divided into two groups containing p
S

and q things respectively.

Every time when a set of p things is taken, a second set of q things is left behind. Hence the
©

required number of ways = the number of combinations of (p + q) things taking p at a time

p+q ( p + q)!
= Cp =
p !q !
Cor. 1. Generalisation. The number of ways in which p + q + r things can be divided into three
groups containing p, q and r things respectively
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–27

= p + q + rC p ×q + r Cq × r Cr = ( p + q + r )! × (q + r )! × 1 = ( p + q + r )!
p !(q + r )! q !r ! p !q !r !
Similarly the result can be extended to the case of dividing a given number of things into more
than three groups.
Cor. 2. The number of ways in which 3p things can be divided equally into three distinct groups
(3 p)!
is ⋅ ( q = p, r = p )
( p !)3
Cor. 3. The number of ways in which 3p things can be divided into three identical groups is

d
ite
(3 p)!
.
3!( p !)3

m
Ex. 49. In how many ways can 15 things be divided into 3 groups containing 8, 4 and 3 things
respectively ?

Li
(15)!
Sol. The number of ways = = 225225.

y
8!4!3!
Ex. 50. In how many ways can 18 different books be divided equally among 3 students?

n
pa
(18)!
Sol. The required number of ways =
(6!)3 om
Ex. 51. In how many ways can 52 playing cards be placed in 4 heaps of 13 cards each ? In how
many ways can they be dealt out to four players giving 13 cards each ?
52!
Sol. (i) The number of ways = .
C

4!(13!) 4
52!
nd

(ii) The number of ways = .

(13!)4
Type III. Permutations and Combinations occurring simultaneously.
A

The method is illustrated by the following examples.

nd

Ex. 52. How many different words, each containing 2 vowels and 3 consonants, can be formed
with 5 vowels and 17 consonants ? (ISC 1996 Type)
Sol. Two vowels can be selected in 5C2 ways.
ha

17
Three consonants can be selected in C3 ways.
∴ 2 vowels and 3 consonants can be selected in 5C2 × 17C3 ways.
C

Now, each group of 2 vowels and 3 consonants can be arranged in 5 ! ways.

S

∴ The total number of words = 5C2 × 17C3 × 5 ! = 816000.

Ex. 53. Find the number of (i) combinations, (ii) permutations of four letters taken from the word
©

EXAMINATION. (ISC 1992 Type)

Sol. There are 11 letters not all different. They are as: (AA) ; (II) ; (N, N) ; E ; X ; M ; T ; 0.
The following combinations are possible:
(a) 2 alike, 2 alike = 3C2 = 3 ;
(b) 2 alike, 2 different = 3C1 × 7C2 = 63 ;
(c) All 4 different = 8C4 = 70.
Ch 1–28 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

∴ The total number of combinations = 3 + 63 + 70 = 136.

∴ The number of permutations in (a) to (c)
4! 4!
=3× + 63 × + 70 × 4! = 18 + 756 + 1680 = 2454.
2!2! 2!
EXERCISE 1 (e)
1. In how many ways can a committee of 8 be chosen from 10 individuals?
2. In how many ways can a committee of five persons be formed out of 8 members when a particular member
is taken every time ?

d
3. In how many ways can a committee of 4 be selected out of 12 persons so that a particular person may
(i) always be taken, (ii) never be taken ?

ite
4. In how many ways can a team of 11 players be selected from 14 players when two of them can play as
goalkeepers only ?

m
5. A person has got 12 friends of whom 8 are relatives. In how many ways can he invite 7 guests such that 5
of them may be relatives ?

Li
6. How many diagonals are there in a polygon of (i) 8 sides, (ii) 10 sides ? (ISC)
7. In how many ways can a committee, consisting of a chairman, secretary, treasurer and four other members

y
be chosen from eight persons ?

n
(Committees with different chairmen, secretaries, treasurers count as different committees.) (SC)

pa
8. (a) In how many ways can a student choose 5 courses out of 9 courses if 2 courses are compulsory for
every student? (ISC)
(b) In how many ways can we select a cricket eleven from 17 players in which 5 players can bowl? Each
om
cricket team must include 2 bowlers. (SC)
9. How many committees of 5 members each can be formed with 8 officials and 4 non-official members in the
following cases :
C

(a) each consists of 3 officials and 2 non-official members ;

nd

(b) each contains at least two non-official members ;

(c) a particular official member is never included ;
A

(d) a particular non-official member is always included ?

10. In a college team there are 15 players of whom 3 are teachers. In how many ways can a team of 11 players
nd

be selected so as to include (i) only one teacher, (ii) at least one teacher?
11. How many different groups can be selected for playing tennis out of 4 ladies and 3 gentlemen, there being
one lady and one gentleman on each side ? (ISC)
ha

12. If nC10 = nC14, find the value of n

C20 and 25
Cn.
13. In how many ways can I invite one or more of six friends to a dinner ?
C

14. In how many ways can 10 marbles be divided between two boys so that one of them may get 2 and the
other 8 ?
S

15. In how many ways can a selection be made out of 5 oranges, 8 mangoes and 7 apples ?
16. In how many ways can 20 articles be packed in the three parcels so that the first contains 8 articles, the
©

second 7 and the third 5 ?

17. In how many ways can 28 different things be formed into 4 heaps so that each may contain 7?
18. In how many ways can 20 students be divided into four equal groups ? In how many ways can these be sent
to four different schools ?
19. Find the number of four letter arrangements of the letters of the word ‘SHOOT’. How many of them begin
with O ? (SC)
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–29

20. To go on a journey 8 persons are to be divided into 2 groups, one group to go by car and the other by train.
In how many ways can this be done if there must be at least 3 persons in each group ? (ISC)
21. A table has 7 seats, 4 being on one side facing the window and 3 being on the opposite side. In how many
ways can 7 people be seated at the table.
(a) if 2 people, X and Y, must sit on the same side; (b) X and Y must sit on opposite sides ;
(c) if 3 people, X, Y and Z, must sit on the side facing the window ? (ISC)
22. Seven cards, each bearing a letter, can be arranged to spell the word “DOUBLES”. How many three-letter
code-words can be formed from these cards ?
How many of these words

d
(a) contain the letter S ; (b) do not contain the letter O ;

ite
(c) consist of a vowel between two consonants ? (GCE)
23. A committee of 5 is to be formed from a group of 12 students consisting of 8 boys and 4 girls. In how many

m
ways can the committee be formed if it
(i) consists of exactly 3 boys and 2 girls ; (ii) contains at least 3 girls ? (ISC)

Li
24. There are 5 gentlemen and 4 ladies to dine at a round table. In how many ways
can they seat themselves so that no two ladies are together?

y
[Hint : 5 gentlemen can seat in (5 – 1) ! = 4 ! = 24 ways. The four ladies will

n
occupy the places marked L so that no two ladies sit together. They can do so in
5

pa
C4 × 4! = 5 × 4! = 5! = 120 ways.
∴ Reqd. number of ways = 24 × 120].
om
25. There are 12 points in a plane, of which 5 are collinear. Find (ISC 1999)
(i) the number of triangles that can be formed with vertices at these points ; Fig. 1.06
(ii) the number of straight lines obtained by joining these points in pairs. (ISC)
C
26. A committee of 5 is to be formed from a group of 10 people, consisting of 4 single men, 4 single women and
a married couple. The committee is to consist of a chairman, who must be a single man, 2 other men and 2
women,
nd

(i) Find the total number of committees possible,

(ii) How many of these would include the married couple ? (ISC)
A

27. A committee of 5 persons is to be formed from a group of 6 gentlemen and 4 ladies. In how many ways can
this be done if the committee is to include at least one lady ? (ISC)
nd

[Sol. The no. of committees is equal to

(4C1 × 6C4 ) + (4C2 × 6C3) + (4C3 × 6C2) + (4C4 × 6C1)
ha

= (4 × 15) + (6 × 20) + (4 × 15) + (1 × 6)

= 60 + 120 + 60 + 6 = 246.]
C

Method II. 10C5 – 6C5 = 246. See solved Ex. 48.]

28. Out of 3 books on Economics, 4 books on Political Science and 5 books on Geography, how many
S

collections can be made, if each collection consists of

(i) exactly one book on each subject, (ii) at least one book on each subject ? (ISC 1990)
©

[Sol. (i) The no. of collections = 3C1 × 4C1 × 5C1 = 3 × 4 × 5 = 60.

(ii) The no. of collections = (3C1 + 3C2 + 3C3) (4C1 + 4C2 + 4C3 + 4C4) (5C1 + 5C2 + 5C3 + 5C4 +5C5)
= (3 + 3 + 1) (4 + 6 + 4 + 1) (5 + 10 + 10 + 5 + 1) = 7 × 15 × 31 = 3255.]
29. Find the number of words which can be formed by taking two alike and two different letters from the word
“COMBINATION”. (ISC 1992)
Ch 1–30 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

[Sol. There are 11 letters, not all different. They are as (O, O), (I, I), (N, N) ; C, M, B, A, T.

3
7×6
The number of combinations taking two alike and two different = C1 × 7C2 = 3 × = 63.
2 ×1
4
Each of these combinations gives rise to
2 , i.e., 12 words.
Therefore, 63 combinations give rise to 63 × 12, i.e. 756 words. (See also solved Ex. 53)]

ANSWERS

d
1. 45 2. 35 3. (i) 165 (ii) 330

ite
4. 132 5. 336 6. (i) 20 (ii) 35
7. 1680 8. (a) 35 , (b) 2200 9. (a) 336 (b) 456 (c) 462 (d) 330
10. 198 ; 1353 11. 36 12. 10626. 25

m
13. 63 14. 90 15. 431

Li
20! 28! 20! 20!
16. 17. 18. ,
8!7!5! 4!(7!) 4 4!(5!) 4
(5!) 4

y
19. 60 ; 24 20. 182 21. (a) 2160 (b) 2880 (c) 576

n
22. 210 (a) 90 (b) 120 (c) 36 23. (i) 336 (ii) 120 24. 2880

pa
25. (i) 210 (ii) 57 26. (i) 240 (ii) 48 27. 246
om
REVISION EXERCISE
1. The set S = {1, 2, 3, ...... , 12}is to be partitioned into three sets A, B, C of equal size. Thus
C

A ∪ B ∪ C = S, A ∩ B = B ∩ C = A ∩ C = φ. The number of ways to partition S is

12! 12! 12! 12!
nd

(a) (b) (c) (d) .

(4!) 3
(4!) 4 3! (4!)3 3! (4!)4
12!
A

12
[Hint. Number of ways = C4 × 8C4 × 4C4 = ]
(4!)3
2. The number of permutations of the letters of the word ‘CONSEQUENCE’ in which all the three E’s are
nd

together is
9! 9! 9!
ha

(a) 9! 3! (b) (c) 2! 2!3! (d) 2! 2!

2!

3. In how many ways can the letters of the word ‘CABLE’ be arranged so that the vowels should always accupy
C

odd positions ?
S

(a) 12 (b) 18 (c) 24 (d) 36

4. At an election, a voter may vote for any number of candidates, not greater than the number to be elected.
©

There are 10 candidates and 4 are to be selected. If a voter votes for at least one candidate, then the number
of ways in which he can vote is
(a) 5040 (b) 6210 (c) 1110 (d) 385
10 10 10 10
[Hint. The no. of ways in which a voter can vote = C1 + C2 + C3 + C4.]
5. If the letters of the word SACHIN are arranged in all possible ways and these words are written out as in
dictionary, then SACHIN appears at serial number
(a) 601 (b) 600 (c) 603 (d) 602
Permutations and Combinations Ch 1–31
43 43
6. If Cr–6 = C3r+1, then the value of r is
(a) 12 (b) 8 (c) 6 (d) 10
7. The number of ways in which 6 men and 5 women can dine at a round table if no two women are to sit
together is given by
(a) 6! × 5! (b) 30 (c) 5! × 4! (d) 7! × 5!
[Hint. Same type as Q. 24 in Exercise 1(e)]
8. Let Tn denote the number of triangles which can be formed using the vertices of a regular polygon of n sides.
If Tn+1 – Tn = 21, Then n =

d
(a) 5 (b) 7 (c) 6 (d) 4

ite
[Hint. To form a triangle, 3 out of n vertices of a regular polygon should be chosen. Hence, the number of
triangles that can be formed = Tn = nC3

m
∴ It is given that Tn+1 – Tn = 21. So n+1C3 – nC3 = 21.

⇒ nC3 + nC2 – nC3 = 21 ⇒ nC2 = 7C2 ⇒ n =7]

Li
56 54
9. If Pr+6 : Pr+3 = 30800 : 1, then r =

y
(a) 40 (b) 41 (c) 42 (d) 39

n
56! 54! 30800

pa
[Hint. 1 × (50 − r )! = 30800 × (51 − r )! ⇒ 51 – r = ]
56 × 55
10. If a polygon has 35 diagonals, then the number of its sides is
om
(a) 8 (b) 9 (c) 10 (d) 11
n
[Hint. C2 – n = 35 ]
C

11. The number of words that can be formed out of the letters of the word ARTICLE so that the vowels occupy
even places is
nd

(a) 36 (b) 574 (c) 144 (d) 754

[Hint. There are 4 odd places and 3 even places and 4 consonents and 3 vowels]
A

12. There are 10 lamps in a hall. Each one of them can be switched on independently. The number of ways in
which the hall can be illuminated is
nd

(a) 102 (b) 1023 (c) 210 (d) 10!

13. In an examination there are three multiple choice questions and each question has 4 choices. Numbers of
ha

ways in which a student can fail to get all answers correct is

(a) 11 (b) 12 (c) 27 (d) 63.
C

[Hint. Each question can be answered in 4 ways and all questions can be answered correctly in only one
way.].
S

14. The number of triangles that can be formed by choosing the vertices from a set of 12 points, seven of which
lie on the same straight line, is
©

(a) 185 (b) 175 (c) 115 (d) 105

15. The number of divisors of 9600 including 1 and 9600 are
(a) 60 (b) 58 (c) 48 (d) 46
7 2
[Hint. Given 9600 = 2 × 3 × 5 , therefore, number of divisors = (7 + 1) (1 + 1) (2 + 1) = 48. ]
Ch 1–32 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

16. How many different words can be formed by jumbling the letters in the word MISSISSIPPI in which no two
S are adjacent ?
(a) 8.6 C4.7C4 (b) 6.7. 8C4 (c) 6.8. 7C4 (d) 7.6C4 8C4
[Hint. First let us arrange MIIII PP

7!
This can be done in ways.
4!2!
M×I×I×I×I×P×P
From the above it is clear that the four S can be put in any of the 8 places marked ‘×’ so that no two S are

d
adjacent in 8C4 ways.

ite
7! 8
∴ Total number of required ways = . C4 = 7 × 6 C4 × 8C4 ]
4!2!

m
ANSWERS

Li
1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (d)

y
5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (b)

n
pa
9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (b)

13. 43 – 1 = 63 14. (a) 12

C3 – 7C3 = 185
om 15. (c) 16. (d)
C
nd
A
nd
ha
C
S
©
 d
ite
m
Li
DETERMINANTS

n y
Syllabus

pa
• of order 2 and 3 om
• Minors and co-factors of a determinant
• Expansion of a determinant
C

• Properties of a determinant and their use in the evaluation of

nd

a determinant
• Product of determinants (without proof)
A

• Solution of simultaneous equations in 2 or 3 variables using

nd

Cramer’s rule
• Conditions for consistency of 3 equations in two variables
ha
C
S
©
 d
ite
m
Li
HISTORICAL NOTE

y
The Japanese mathematician Seki Kowa (1683) systematized an old Chinese method of solving

n
simultaneous linear equations whose coefficients were represented by calculating sticks, bamboo

pa
rods, placed in squares on a table with the positions of the different squares corresponding to the
coefficients. In the process of working out his system, Kowa rearranged the rods in a way similar
om
to that used in our simplification of determinants; thus it is thought that he had the idea of
determinant.
Then years later in Europe Gottfied Wilhelm Von Leibnitz formally originated determinants and
C
gave a written notation for them. The now-standard “vertical line notation” was given in 1841 by
Arthur Cayley.
nd

Determinants were invented independently by Gabriel Cramer, whose now well-known rule for
solving linear systems was published in 1750, although not in present day notation.
Many other mathematicians also made contributions to determinant theory—among them
A

Alexandre Theophile Vandermonde, Pierre Simon Laplace. Josef Maria Wronski and Augustin
Louis Cauchy were prominent. It was Cauchy who applied the word “determinant” to the subject.
nd
ha
C
S
©
 2
Determinants

d
2.01. What is a determinant?

ite
Any four members a, b, c and d are arranged in two rows and two columns between two vertical bars,
as shown below, form what is called a determinant of the second order or second order determinant.

m
a b
Thus the symbol c d represents a second order determinant and its meaning or value is

Li
defined to be ad − bc.
a b

n y
= ad – bc
d

pa
c
Fig. 2.01
5 −3
om
For example, 2 1 = 5 × 1 − (2 × − 3) = 5 − (− 6) = 11.
The numbers a, b, c and d are called the elements of the determinant and the expression
ad −bc on R.H.S. is called the expansion of the determinant. The elements a and b are said to be in
C

the first row, the elements c and d in the second row, the elements a and c in the first column and the
elements b and d in the second column. Thus a determinant of second order contains 2 rows and 2
nd

columns. The first element, i.e., a is called the leading element and the diagonal ad the leading
diagonal.
A

If we consider the two simultaneous equations :

a1 x + b1 y = 0
a2 x + b2 y = 0 }
nd

Elimination of x and y gives

a1 b2 − a2 b1 = 0
ha

a b
We may write the expression (a1 b2 − a2 b1) in the determinant form as a1 b1 .
2 2
a1 b1
C

Thus a2 b2 = a1 b2 − a2 b1.
If we denote an element in the first row and first column by a11, an element in the first row and
S

second column by a12 and an element in the second row and first column by a21 and an element in
the second row and second column by a22 (the first subscripts refer to rows while the second subscripts
©

refer to columns) then we may denote a second order determinant by

a11 a12
a a = a11 a22 − a21 a12
21 22

Definition : For any numbers a1, b1, a2, b2, the determinant
a1 b1
D = has the value a1b2 − a2b1.
a2 b2

Ch 2–3
Ch 2–4 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Caution. The determinant | − 3 | should not be confused with the absolute value | − 3 | which is
equal to 3.
Note. We may name a given determinant by Δ or D.
1 −3
Ex. 1. Evaluate the determinant 4 2 .
1 −3
Sol. Δ = 4 2 = 1 × 2 − (4 × − 3) = 2 + 12 = 14.

Ex. 2. Find the value of the determinant

d
cos A sin A
− sin A cos A

ite
2 2
Sol. Δ = cos A × cos A − (− sin A × sin A) = cos A + sin A = 1.

m
EXERCISE 2 (a)
1. Evaluate the following determinants :

Li
2 5 3 5 a b
(i) 4 1 (ii) 1 2 (iii) −b a

y
2 2
x + 2 2x + 5 y − x − x + xy − y
(iv) (v)

n
3x − 1 x − 3 x+ y
2
x + xy + y
2

pa
sin10º − cos 10º 3 m
2. Prove that = 1. 3. If = 3, find the value of m.
sin 80º cos80º 4 5
x −1 x − 2
4. If = 0, find the value of x.
om k k
5. Determine the value of k for which 4 2k = 0.
x x−3

ANSWERS
C

1. (i) −18 (ii) 1 (iii) a + b2

2
(iv) − 5x2 − 14x − 1 (v) 2y3
3
nd

3. m = 3 4. x = 5. k = 0, 2
2
A

2.02. Determinant of order 3

An expression of the form
nd

a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
a3 b3 c3
ha

is called a determinant of the third order. It contains 3 rows and 3 columns and 32, i.e., 9 elements.
A determinant of third order may be written as
C

a11 a12 a13

b21 b22 b23 .
S

c31 c32 c33

©

2.03. Value of a determinant of order 3

Consider the three simultaneous equations :
a1 x + b1 y + c1 z = 0
a2 x + b2 y + c2 z = 0
a3 x + b3 y + c3 z = 0
From the second and third of these equations, proportional values of x, y, z can be easily found by
the method of cross-multiplication.
Determinants Ch 2–5

x y z
= = = K , (say)
b2c3 − b3c2 c2a3 − a2c3 a2b3 − a3b2
⇒ x = K (b2c3 − b3c2), y = K (c2a3 − a2c3), z = K (a2b3 − a3b2)
Substituting in the first equation, we get
a1 (b2c3 − b3c2) − b1 (a2c3 − a3c2) + c1 (a2b3 − a3b2) = 0 ...(1)
The expression on left-hand side of (1), which is a function of nine elements a1, b1, c1, a2, b2, c2,
a3, b3, c3 is represented by the determinant
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2 ...(2)

d
a3 b3 c3

ite
a1 b1 c1
b c a c a b
Thus a2 b2 c2 = a1 2 2 − b1 2 2 + c1 2 2 ...(3)
b3 c3 a 3 c3 a 3 b3
a3 b3 c3

m
= a1 (b2c3 − b3c2 ) − b1 (a2c3 − a3c2 ) + c1 (a2b3 − a3b2 ) ...(4)

Li
The above gives you an insight into the origin of determinants. By definition, the expression on
the R.H.S. of (4) is called the value of expansion of the determinant given in (2).

y
This may be remembered by the following rule.

n
2.04. The rule of Sarrus

pa
Sarrus gave a rule for a determinant of order 3. It should be noted that such a schematic
representation does not exist for determinants of order greater than 3.
om
Rule. Write down the three columns of the determinant, and
repeat the first two. The positive terms in the expansion are obtained
from the elements on the lines, running diagonally from the top to
bottom (dotted lines), and the negative terms from the elements
C

running diagonally from bottom to top (full lines), beginning being

made, in each case, from an element in the first column.
nd

3 −2 2
Ex. 3. Evaluate 6 1 −1 . Fig. 2.02
A

−2 −3 2
Sol. By Sarrus diagram
nd
ha
C

Fig. 2.03
S

The value of the determinant

= {3 × 1 × 2} + {(− 2) × (−1) × (−2)} + {2 × 6 × (−3)} − {2 × 1 × (−2)} − {3 × (−1) × (−3)} − {(−2) × 6 × 2}
©

= 6 − 4 − 36 + 4 − 9 + 24 = − 15
Aid to memory
We have defined the value of the determinant
a1 b1 c1
a2 b2 c2
a3 b3 c3
Ch 2–6 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

as a1 (b2c3 − b3c2) − b1 (a2c3 − a3c2) + c1 (a2b3 − a3b2) which can be put in the form
b2 c2 a c2 a b
a1 − b1 2 + c1 2 2
b3 c3 a3 c3 a3 b3
We start with the element a1 in the first row and first column. We omit the other elements in that
row and column as indicated below :

d
ite
The second order determinant that remains, is the multiplier of a1 in the expression. The same

m
procedure is followed for obtaining the sub-determinants corresponding to b1 and c1.
® ®

Li
a1 .............. b1..................c1 a1 ...............b1................. c 1
® ®

y
a2 b2 c2 a2 b2 c2
® ®

n
a3 b3 c3 a3 b3 c3

pa
The signs of the multipliers are taken to be alternately positive and negative. This is called the
om
expansion of the determinant by the elements of the first row.
Important note. We can expand a given determinant by the elements of any row or column
and prefix signs as under :
C
+ − +
− + −
nd

+ − +
The signs, alternate, starting with (+) in the left upper hand corner.
A

th th i+j
Aid to memory. The sign corresponding to i row and j column will be (−1) . Thus the
3+2
sign corresponding to element of the third row and second column, i.e., a32 will be (−1) or
nd

‘−’, similarly the sign that will go with element of the third row and third column, i.e., a33 is
3+3
(−1) or ‘+’.
ha

Thus, if we expand the determinant by the element of the first column, we have
b2 c2 b c1 b c1
− a2 1 + a3 1
C

a1
b3 c3 b3 c3 b2 c2
The expansion by using the second row will be
S

b1 c1 a c a b
− a2 + b2 1 1 + c2 1 1
©

b3 c3 a3 c3 a3 b3

Working rule : 1. You may multiply by the elements of any row or column.
2. Multiply each element of a row or column you have chosen by the sub-determinant obtained
by deleting the row and the column in which that element lies. Take signs of products as per
rule given above.
Determinants Ch 2–7

1 3 −2
Ex. 4. Evaluate 4 1 −1
5 −3 2
Sol. Expanding, using the first row, we have
1 −1 4 −1 4 1
Δ = 1 −3 2 − 3 5 2 − 2 5 −3

= 1 (2 − 3) − 3 (8 + 5) − 2 (− 12 − 5) = − 6.

3 2 1

d
Ex. 5. Find the value of 0 1 −8
0 −5 7

ite
Sol. Since there are zeros in the first column, it is more convenient to expand by using the first
column.

m
3 2 1 1 −8 2 1 2 1
1 −8 = 3 −5 7 − 0 −5 7 + 0 1 −8 = 3 (7 − 40) = 3 (−33) = − 99.

Li
0
0 −5 7
a h g

y
Ex. 6. Prove that h b f = abc + 2fgh − af 2 − bg2 − ch2.

n
g f c

pa
Sol. Expanding by using first row, we have :
b f −h h f +g h b 2
Δ = a f = a (bc − f ) − h (ch − fg) + g (hf − bg)
c g c
omg f
= abc − af 2 − ch2 + fgh + fgh − bg2 = abc + 2fgh − af 2 − bg2 − ch2.
2.05. Minors and co-factors
C

Definition. The minor of an element in a determinant is a determinant that is left after removing
the row and the column which intersect at the element, and is of order one less than that of the given
nd

determinant.
Consider the determinant
A
nd
ha

b2 c2 a c2 a b
The minor of a1 is Similarly, the minor of b1 is 2 and that of c1 is a2 b2 ,
c3 . c3 ,
C

b3 a3 3 3
and so on.
S

In general, the minor Mij of an element aij is the value of the determinant obtained by deleting the
i-th row and j-th column of the given determinant.
©

Co-factors. If we apply the appropriate sign to the minor of an element, we have its
co-factor. Thus the minor of b1 is
i+j
a2 c2
and the co-factor of b1 denoted by − 1)
Aij = (− Mij
a3 c3
Co-factor Minor
B1 is − a2 c2 , i.e., B = − (a c − a c ).
1 2 3 3 2
of aij of aij
a3 c3
Ch 2–8 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

It is clear that the minor and the co-factor of an element have the same value when the sum of the
number of the row and the number of the column of the element is an even number.
− 1)i + j Mij.
In general, the co-factor Aij of aij is defined as Aij = (−
Obviously, the co-factor of aij is Mij or − Mij according as (i + j) is even or odd.
Remark. It is easy to see that
Δ = a1 A1 + a2 A2 + a3 A3 = b1 B1 + b2 B2 + b3 B3 = a1 A1 + b1 B1 + c1 C1 etc.,
i.e., the value of a determinant is obtained by multiplying the elements with co-factors and adding
the resulting products.
Also, it can be easily verified that if we multiply the elements of any row (or column) with the

d
corresponding co-factors of any other row (or column) and add them, the result is zero,
i.e., a1B1 + a2 B2 + a3 B3 = 0, a1 C1 + a2 C2 + a3 C3 = 0 etc.

ite
Ex. 7. Find the minors and co-factors of the elements of the determinant
a1 b1 c1

m
Δ = a2 b2 c2
a3 b3 c3

Li
Sol. The element a1 occurs in the first row and first column.
Therefore, to find the minor of a1, we delete the first row and first column of the given determinant.

y
The minor M11 of a1 is given by

n
b2 c2
M11 = = (b2c3 − b3c2)

pa
b3 c3
1+1
The co-factor of a1 is A11 = (−1) om M11 = M11 = (b2c3 − b3c2)
a2 c2
Similarly, minor of b1 is M12 = = (a2c3 − a3c2)
a3 c3
1+2
M12 = − M12 = − (a2 c3 − a3 c2) = (a3c2 − a2c3)
C
Co-factor of b1 is A12 = (− 1)
a2 b2
= (a2b3 − a3b2)
nd

Minor of c1 is M13 =
a3 b3
Co-factor of c1 is A13 = (− 1)1 + 3 M13 = M13 = (a2b3 − a3b2).
A

In a similar manner, we can find the minor and co-factor of each of the remaining elements.
Ex. 8. Find the minor and co-factor of each element of the determinant
nd

2 −2 3
1 4 5 .
2 1 −3
ha

Sol. The minors are

4 5 1 5 1 4
M11 = 1 −3 = − 17, M12 = 2 −3 = − 13, M13 = 2 1 = − 7
C

−2 3 2 3 2 −2
S

M21 = 1 −3 = 3, M22 = 2 −3 = − 12, M23 = 2 1 =6

−2 3 2 −2
©

2 3
M31 = 4 5 = − 22, M32 = 1 5 = 7, M33 = 1 4 = 10
The co-factors are
1+1 1+2
A11 = (− 1) M11 = M11 = − 17, A12 = (− 1) M12 = − M12 = 13,
1+3
A13 = (− 1) M13 = − M13 = − 7
A21 = (− 1)2 + 1 M21 = − M21 = − 3, A22 = (− 1)2 + 2 M22 = M22 = −12,
2+3 3+1
A23 = (− 1) M23 = − M23 = − 6 A31 = (− 1) M31 = M31 = − 22,
3+2 3+3
A32 = (− 1) M32 = − M32 = − 7, A33 = (− 1) M33 = M33 = 10.
Determinants Ch 2–9

2.06. Value of a determinant in terms of minors and co-factors

Now we can define the value of a determinant of order 3 as follows :
a1 b1 c1
Δ = a2 b2 c2 = a1 (b2c3 − b3c2) − b1 (a2c3 − a3c2) + c1 (a2b3 − a3b2)
a3 b3 c3
= a1 (its minor) − b1 (its minor) + c1 (its minor).
b2 c2 a c a b
= a1 − b1 2 2 + c1 2 2
b3 c3 a3 c3 a3 b3

d
This is called the expansion of the determinant by minors of the elements of the first row.

ite
Note 1. Also from the above, we have
Δ = a1 . (its co-factor) + b1 . (its co-factor) + c1 . (its co-factor)

m
(ΠCo-factor of b1 = negative of minor of b1)
Note 2. Since it is possible, however, to evaluate a determinant by expanding by minors, using

Li
any row or column, not just the first row, therefore, there are six distinct ways of expanding by
minors a determinant of order 3.

y
Note 3. We may point out that each element of the determinant is paired with a particular
minor; thus, a function is established. The ordered pairs are (an element, its minor).

n
Note 4. While expanding a determinant by any row or column using minors, we may keep in

pa
mind the following scheme of signs for a third order determinant.
+ − +
om
− + −
+ − +
Note 5. If a row or a column of a determinant consists of all zeros, the value of the determinant is
C

zero.
−2 4 2
nd

Ex. 9. Express the value of the determinant 1 5 − 3 in terms of the minors of the
5 −2 2
elements of the third row.
A

Sol. Value of the determinant

= sum of the elements each multiplied by the associated co-factor
nd

{4 2
} −2 2
{ −2 4
= (5) + 5 −3 + (−2) − 1 −3 + (2) + 1 5 } { }
ha

Upon evaluating each of the 2nd order determinants the value – 130 is obtained.

EXERCISE 2 (b)
C

1. Write the minors and co-factors of each element of the first column of the following determinants and
S

evaluate the determinant in each case.

1 a bc 0 2 6
©

5 20 1 b ca
(i) (ii) (iii) 1 5 0
0 −1
1 c ab 3 7 1
5 1 0
2. Evaluate 2 3 −1 . (ISC)
−3 2 0
6 −3 2
3. Find the value of Δ, where Δ = 2 −1 2 .
− 10 5 2
Ch 2–10 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

4. Find the value of the determinants

1 3 5 x+λ x x
(i) 2 6 10 (ii) x x+λ x
31 11 38 x x x+λ

2 2 2
1 2 3 5 15 − 25
(iii) 2 2 2 (iv) 7 21 30 .
2 3 4
2 2 2 8 24 42
3 4 5
5. Expand the determinants by minors of the given row or column.

d
1 3 −1 2 −1 4
(i) (ii)

ite
2 1 4 ; column 1 3 0 1 ; column 2
6 1 1 2 1 −1
5 1 −1 2 1 −3

m
(iii) 2 3 −1 ; row 2 (iv) 1 1 −2 ; row 1
4 2 3 2 −2 4

Li
6. Solve for x :
2
x 0 0 x x 1

y
(i) 2 1 3 =3 (ii) 0 2 1 = 28

n
0 1 4 3 1 4

pa
7. Show that
1 a b
2 2 2
−a 1 c = 1 + a + b + c . om
−b −c 1
8. Expand and simplify the following :

1 x y 0 tan θ 1 sin θ 1 0
C

(i) 0 cos x sin y (ii) 1 − sec θ 0 (iii) 0 cos φ − cos θ

sec θ tan θ 1 sin φ 0 1
nd

0 sin x cos y
7 6 x
9. If one root of 2 x 2 = 0 is x = − 9, find the other roots.
A

x 3 7
nd

ANSWERS
1. (i) M11 = – 1, M21 = 20, A11 = −1, A21 = − 20, value of determinant = – 5
ha

b ca M = b bc M = a bc
(ii) M11 = c ab , 21 c ab , 31 b ca
b ca A = − a bc A = a bc
C

A11 = c ab , 21 c ab , 31 b ca
Value of the determinant = ab (b – a) + bc (c – b) +ac (a – c)
S

5 0 ,M = 2 6 ,M = 2 6 .
(iii) M11= 7 1 21 7 1 31 5 0
©

5 0 ,A =− 2 6 ,A = 2 6 .
A11 = 7 1 21 7 1 31 5 0
Value of the determinant = – 50.
2. 13 3. 0 4. (i) 0 (ii) λ2 (3x + λ) (iii) − 8 (iv) 0
− 17
5. (i) 67 (ii) 5 (iii) 53 (iv) 4 6. (i) x = 3 (ii) x = 2,
7
8. (i) cos (x + y) (ii) sec2θ (iii) sin (θ − φ) 9. 2, 7
Determinants Ch 2–11

2.07. Applications of determinants

Area of a triangle
You have learnt in class XI that the area of a triangle whose vertices are (x1, y1), (x2, y2), (x3, y3) is
given by the expression
1 [x (y − y ) + x (y − y ) + x (y − y )]
1 2 3 2 3 1 3 1 2
2
1
= [x (y − y ) − y1 (x2− x3) + x2y3 − x3y2]
2 1 2 3
This expression is the expansion of the determinant

d
x y 1
1 x1 y1 1

ite
2 x2 y2 1
3 3

Remark. Since the area has to be a positive quantity, we always take the absolute value of the

m
determinant for the area.
Hence, area of triangle whose vertices are (x1, y1), (x2, y2), (x3, y3) is given by

Li
x y1 1
1 x1
Δ = y2 1
2 x2

y
3 y3 1

n
Note : The area of the quadrilateral ABCD, with vertices at (x1, y1), (x2, y2), (x3, y3) and (x4, y4)

pa
respectively, is the sum of the areas of the two triangles ABC and ACD. Hence
Area of quadrilateral ABCD = Area of Δ ABC + Area of Δ ACD
om
x y1 1 x y1 1
1 1 1 1
= x2 y2 1 + x3 y3 1 .
2 x y3 1 2 x y4 1
3 4
C

Ex. 10. Find the area of the triangle whose vertices are
− 2, − 3), (3, 2), (−
(− −1, − 8).
nd

Sol. The area of the triangle is given by (x 4, y 4) D

C (x 3, y3)
1 - 2 -3 1
A

Δ = 3 2 1
2 -1 - 8 1
(x 1, y 1) A B (x , y )
nd

2 2
1 [1 (- 24 + 2) - 1 (16 - 3) + 1 (- 4 + 9)] Fig. 2.04
=
2
(by expanding along the third column).
ha

1 [ -22 -13 + 5]
= = 15 Hence, required area = 15 sq units.
2
C

Ex. 11. If the points (a, b) (a′′ , b′′ ) and (a − a′′ , b − b′′ ) are collinear, show that ab′′ = a′′ b.
Sol. The given points are collinear if the area of the triangle formed by them is zero,
S

a b 1
1 a′ b′ 1 =0
i.e., if
©

2 a − a′ b − b′ 1
Expanding along the third column, we get,
a¢ b¢ a b a b
⇒ 1 -1 +1 =0
a - a¢ b - b¢ a - a¢ b - b¢ a¢ b¢
⇒ a ¢ (b - b ¢) - b ¢ (a - a ¢) - a (b - b ¢ ) + b (a - a ¢) + ab ¢ - a ¢b = 0
⇒ a ¢ b - a ¢b ¢ - ab ¢ + a ¢b ¢ - ab + ab ¢ + ab - a ¢b + ab ¢ - a ¢b = 0
⇒ ab ¢ - a ¢b = 0 Þ ab ¢ = a ¢b .
Ch 2–12 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Note. After doing properties of determinants you can simplify more easily by applying
a b 1
R2 → R2 –R1 and R3 → R3 –R1, and expanding along C3. Þ 1 a ¢ - a b ¢ - b 0 = 0
2 - a¢ - b¢ 0
Ex. 12. Find the value of x, if the area of the triangle with vertices (x, 4) (2, − 6) and (5, 4) be 35
sq. cm. A (x, 4)
Sol. Let the vertices be A (x, 4), B (2, − 6) and
C (5, 4). As, shown, there are two different possible
positions of the vertex A (x, 4). I

d
For triangle I, the vertices A, B, C are anticlockwise.

ite
B C (5, 4)
∴ Area Δ ABC = 35 (2, −6)
x 4 1 II

m
1 2 -6 1 = 35
⇒ 2 5 4 1

Li
⇒ x (− 6 − 4) − 4 (2 − 5) + 1 (8 + 30) = 70 or – 70 A (x, 4)
Case (i) ⇒ −10x + 12 + 38 = 70 ⇒ 10x = −20 i.e. x = − 2 Fig. 2.05

y
Case (ii) ⇒ x (− 6 − 4) − 4 (2 − 5) + 1 (8 + 30) = − 70

n
∴ − 10x + 12 + 38 = − 70 ⇒ 10x = 120 i.e. x = 12

pa
∴ x = − 2, 12
EXERCISE 2 (c)
om
1. Find the area of the triangle whose vertices are
(i) (− 8, − 2), (− 4, − 6), (− 1, 5) (ii) (3, 8), (− 4, 2), (5, − 1)
(iii) (− 3, 5), (3, − 6), (7, 2).
C

2. Using determinants, prove that the following points are collinear

(i) (11, 7), (5, 5), (− 1, 3) (ii) (0, 3), (4, 6) and ( − 8, − 3) (iii) (− 2, 5), (− 6, − 7), (− 5, − 4).
nd

3. Using determinants, find the area of the triangle whose vertices are (4, − 2), (− 2, 3) and (3, 5). Are the
given points collinear ?
4. Find the area of the quadrilateral whose vertices are A (1, − 1), B (3, 1), C ( − 2, 3) and D (− 1, − 2).
A

5. Show that the points (b, c + a), (c, a + b) and (a, b + c) are collinear.
6. (i) Find x so that the points, (3, − 2), (x, 2) and (8, 8) be on a line.
nd

(ii) For what value of k the points (5, 5), (k, 1) and (11, 7) are collinear.
x + y =1
7. If (x, y), (a, 0), (0, b) are collinear, then using determinants prove that .
ha

a b
ANSWERS
C

1. (i) 28 sq units (ii) 37.5 sq units (iii) 46 sq units

25 sq. units
S

3. 18.5 sq units, not collinear. 4. 6. (i) x = 5 (ii) k = − 7

2
©

2.08. Properties of determinants

Determinants have some properties that are useful by virtue of the fact that they permit to
generate equal determinants with different and simpler configurations of entries. This, in turn, helps
us find values of determinants. In other words, they help us in their transformations. We shall list
these properties as shown below, and illustrate them by using third order determinants, but the
properties are valid for determinants of any order.
Determinants Ch 2–13

Property 1. If each entry in any row, or each entry in any column, of a determinant is 0, then
the determinants is equal to 0.
3 1 5 1 5 3 5 3 1
For example, 0 0 0 = − 0 4 −2 + 0 2 −2 − 0 2 4 = 0 .
2 4 −2
Property 2. If rows be changed into columns and columns into rows, the determinant remains
unaltered.
5 2 11 5 3 −7 You may evaluate the values of the two
For example, 3 4 0 = 2 4 8 determinants and verify.
−7 8 −6 11 0 −6

d
Property 3. If any two rows (or columns) of a determinant are interchanged, the resulting

ite
determinant is the negative of the original determinant.
a1 b1 c1 b1 a1 c1

m
i.e., a 2 b2 c2 = − b2 a2 c2
a3 b3 c3 b a c 3 3 3

Li
1 2 1 2 1 1
For example, if Δ1 = 2 1 2 and Δ 2 = – 1 2 2 then, Δ1 = –Δ2.
−1 0 1 0 −1 1

y
(Formed by interchanging C1 & C2 of Δ1)

n
1 2 1

pa
We have, Δ1 = 2 1 2
−1 0 1 om
= 1 (1 × 1 – 0 × 2) – 2 (2 × 1 – (–1) × 2) + 1 (2 × 0 – (–1) × 1) expanding by 1st column
=1–8+1 =–6
2 1 1
Δ2 = 1 2 2
C

0 −1 1
= 2 (2 × 1 – (–1) × 2) – 1 (1 × 1 – 0 × 2) + 1 (1 × (–1) + 0 × 2) expanding by 1st row
nd

=8–1–1=6
∴ Since Δ1 = – 6 and Δ2 = 6, therefore, Δ1 = – Δ2 or Δ2 = – Δ1.
A

Cor. 1. If any line of a determinant Δ be passed over m parallel lines, the resulting determinant
Δ′ = (– 1)m Δ. For example,
nd

a1 b1 c1 b1 c1 a1
if Δ = a2 b2 c2 and Δ′ = b2 c2 a2 then Δ′ = (– 1)2 Δ = Δ.
b c a
ha

a3 b3 c3 3 3 3

Cor. 2. The sign of any term will be positive or negative according as that term can be made the
principal term in Δ′ by an even or odd number of movements of lines of Δ.
C

−2 1 −4 1 −2 −4
S

For example, 5 7 1 = (− 1) 7 5 1 (Number of jumped columns = 1)

0 2 0 2 0 0
©

2
1 -4 -2
= (- 1) 7 1 5 (Number of jumped columns = 2)
2 0 0
Property 4. If two rows (or two columns) in a determinant are identical, the determinant is
equal to zero.
a1 b1 c1
i.e., Δ = a1 b1 c1 = 0
a2 b2 c2
Ch 2–14 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Proof. Δ = a1 (b1c2 – b2c1) – b1 (a1c2 – a2c1) + c1 (a1b2 – a2b1)

= a1b1c2 – a1b2c1 – a1b1c2 + a2b1c1 + a1b2c1 – a2b1c1 = 0
Hence proved.
Illustration:
1 3 −2
2 4 3 4 3 2
3 2 4 = 1 3 −2 − 3 1 −2 − 2 1 3
1 3 −2
= 1 (– 4 – 12) – 3 (– 6 – 4) – 2 (9 – 2) = – 16 + 30 – 14 = 0.
Property 5. If all the elements of any row (or column) be multiplied by a non zero real number

d
k, then the value of the new determinant is k times the value of the original determinant.

ite
a1 b1 c1 ka1 kb1 kc1
Thus, if Δ = a2 b2 c2 and Ä′ = a2 b2 c2 then Δ′ = kΔ.
Δ.
a3 b3 c3 a3 b3 c3

m
1 3 −1 1 3 −1

Li
For example, 2 1 4 = 3 2 1 4 .
3(2) 3(−1) 3(5) 2 (−1) 5

y
1 3 −1
1 4 = 1 (1 × 15 + 3 × 4) − 3 (2 × 15 − 6 × 4) − 1 (2 × −3 − 6 × 1)

n
L.H.S. = 2
6 −3 15

pa
= 1 × 27 – (3 × 6) – 1 (1 × –12) = 27 – 18 + 12 = 21.
1 3 −1
1 4 = 3 [1(1 × 5 + 1 × 4) − 3 (2 × 5 − 2 × 4) − 1 (2 × −1 − 2 × 1)]
R.H.S. = 3 2
om
2 −1 5
= 3 [1× 9 – 3 × 2 – (1 × –4)]
= 3 [9 – 6 + 4) = 3 × 7 = 21.
C

⇒ L.H.S. = R.H.S.
Cor. If two parallel lines (rows or columns) be such that the elements of one are the
nd

equi-multiplies of the elements of the other, the determinant is equal to 0.

Property 6. If each entry in a row (or column) of a determinant is written as the sum of two
or more terms, then the determinant can be written as the sum of two or more determinants,
A

a1 + x1 b1 c1 a1 b1 c1 x1 b1 c1
i.e., Δ = a2 + x2 b2 c2 = a2 b2 c2 + x2 b2 c2 .
nd

a3 + x3 b3 c3 a3 b3 c3 x3 b3 c3
Illustration:
ha

1 5 3 1 2+3 3 1 2 3 1 3 3
2 6 2 = 2 1+ 5 2 = 2 1 2 + 2 5 2
3 7 1 3 4+3 1 3 4 1 3 3 1
C

L.H.S. = 1 (6 – 14) – 2 (5 – 21) + 3 (10 – 18) = – 8 + 32 – 24 = 0

R.H.S. = [1 (1 – 8) – 2 (2 – 12) + 3 (4 – 3)] + [1 (5 – 6) – 2 (3 – 9) + 3 (6 – 15)]
S

= ( – 7 + 20 + 3) + (– 1 + 12 – 27) = 16 – 16 = 0.
©

Thus, L.H.S. = R.H.S.

Property 7. If each entry of one row (or column) of a determinant is multiplied by a real
number k and the resulting product is added to the corresponding entry in another row (or column
respectively) in the determinant, then the resulting determinant is equal to the original determinant.
a1 b1 c1 a1 b1 c1
i.e., if Δ = a2 b2 c2 and Ä′ = a2 b2 c2 then Ä = Ä′.
a3 b3 c3 a3 + ka1 b3 + kb1 c3 + kc1
Determinants Ch 2–15

a1 b1 c1 a1 b1 c1 a1 b1 c1 a1 b1 c1
Proof : Δ′ = a2 b2 c2 + a2 b2 c2 = a2 b2 c2 + k a2 b2 c2
a3 b3 c3 ka1 kb1 kc1 a3 b3 c3 a1 b1 c1
= Δ+k.0=Δ (Since 2 rows are identical in the 2nd determinant)
1 3 −2 1 3 −2
For example, 0 4 3 = 0 4 3
1 −2 5 1 + 3(1) − 2 + 3(3) 5 + 3 (−2)
L.H.S. = 1 (20 + 6) – 0 (15 – 4) + 1 (9 + 8) = 26 + 17 = 43
1 3 −2
0 4 3 = 1 (− 4 − 21) − 0 (− 3 + 14) + 4 (9 + 8) = − 25 + 68 = 43.

d
R.H.S. =
4 7 −1

ite
Thus, L.H.S. = R.H.S.
Property 8. If to each element of a line (row or column) of a determinant be added the

m
equi-multiples of the corresponding elements of one or more parallel lines, the determinant
remains unaltered, i.e.,

Li
a1 + la2 + ma3 a2 a3 a1 a2 a3
b1 + lb2 + mb3 b2 b3 = b1 b2 b3

y
c1 + lc2 + mc3 c2 c3 c1 c2 c3

n
a1 a2 a3 la2 a2 a3 ma3 a2 a3

pa
L.H.S. = b1 b2 b3 + lb2 b2 b3 + mb3 b2 b3 (By Property 6)
c1 c2 c3 lc2 c2 c3 mc3 c2 c3
a1 a2 a3
om
a2 a2 a3 a3 a2 a3
= b1 b2 b3 + l b2 b2 b3 + m b3 b2 b3 (By Property 5)
c1 c2 c3 c2 c2 c3 c3 c2 c3
C
a1 a2 a3
= b1 b2 b3 + l (0) + m (0) (By Property 4)
nd

c1 c2 c3
a1 a2 a3
b1 b2 b3
A

= = R.H.S.
c1 c2 c3
A useful notation. Suppose to the 5th row we add m times the 7th row and n times the ninth row,
nd

we can denote this operations by R5 → R5 + mR7 + nR9. Similarly C3 → C3 + qC5 + rC7 will stand for
the statement “to the third column add q times the fifth column and r times the seventh column.”
ha

Note. These properties, specially property 8, provide very powerful methods for calculating the
values of determinants. We try to get as many zeros as possible in a row or a column.
C

Property 9. If the elements of a determinant that involve x are polynomials in x, and if the
determinant is equal to 0 when a is substituted for x, then x − a is a factor of the determinant.
S

Since the element of the determinant involving x are polynomials in x, the expansion of the
determinant will also be a polynomial in x. As the determinant is 0, for x = a, x – a is a factor of the
©

determinant.
For example take the following determinant
a b c
2 2 2
Δ = a b c
bc ca ab
If a be substituted for b, first two columns become identical and, therefore, Δ = 0. Thus, a – b is
a factor, similarly b – c and c – a are factors.
Ch 2–16 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Note. A transformation of any of the following type is called an elementary transformation :

(i) Interchange of two rows or two columns.
(ii) Multiplication of a row or column of a determinant by a constant different from zero.
(iii) Addition to the entries of a line of the determinant the constant multiples of a parallel line.
If two determinants are such that each can be obtained from the other by a finite number of
elementary transformations, they are said to be equivalent.
Property 10. Product of two determinants :
The product of two determinants is obtained by multiplying
(1) row by row (2) column by column (3) column by row and (4) row by column

d
a1 b1 c1 α1 β1 γ1

ite
Thus, a2 b2 c2 × α 2 β2 γ2
a3 b3 c3 α3 β3 γ3

m
a1α1 + b1β1 + c1γ1 a1α 2 + b1β2 + c1γ 2 a1α 3 + b1β3 + c1γ 3
= a2α1 + b2β1 + c2 γ1 a2α 2 + b2β2 + c2 γ 2 a2α 3 + b2β3 + c2 γ 3 .

Li
a3α1 + b3β1 + c3γ1 a3α 2 + b3β 2 + c3γ 2 a3α 3 + b3β3 + c3γ 3
Note 1. The above is row by row multiplication. As stated above you can also multiply rows by

y
columns or columns by columns.

n
Note 2. We are not stating the proof here. This is not required at this level.

pa
Illustrations:
3 −6 2 3
1. Let Δ1 = and Δ2 = , then
4 8
om
−5 7
3 −6 2 3 3 × 2 + (− 6) × 3 3 × (− 5) + (− 6) × 7
Δ 1Δ 2 = =
4 8 −5 7 4×2 +8×3 4 × (− 5) + 8 × 7
C

6 − 18 − 15 − 42 − 12 − 57
= =
8 + 24 − 20 + 56
nd

32 36
= – 12 × 36 – (32 × – 57) = – 432 + 1824 = 1392.
−3 −2 0
A

1 3 5
2. Let Δ1 = 2 4 6 and Δ2 = 0 5 − 1 , then
nd

3 5 7 4 6 0
1 × (− 3) + 3 × (− 2) + 5 × 0 1 × 0 + 3 × 5 + 5 × (− 1) 1 × 4 + 3 × 6 + 5 × 0
Δ 1Δ 2 = 2 × (− 3) + 4 × (− 2) + 6 × 0 2 × 0 + 4 × 5 + 6 × (− 1) 2 × 4 + 4 × 6 + 6 × 0
ha

3 × (− 3) + 5 × (− 2) + 7 × 0 3 × 0 + 5 × 5 + 7 × (− 1) 3 × 4 + 5 × 6 + 7 × 0
− 3 − 6 + 0 0 + 15 − 5 4 + 18 + 0 − 9 10 22
C

= − 6 − 8 + 0 0 + 20 − 6 8 + 24 + 0 = − 14 14 32
− 9 − 10 + 0 0 + 25 − 7 12 + 30 + 0 − 19 18 42
S

= – 9 (14 × 42 – 18 × 32) – (– 14) (10 × 42 – 18 × 22) – 19 (10 × 32 – 14 × 22)

©

= – 9 (588 – 576) + 14 (420 – 396) – 19 (320 – 308)

= – 9 × 12 + 14 × 24 – 19 × (– 12) = – 108 + 336 + 228 = 456.
Property 11. If Δ′ is the determinant formed by replacing the elements of a determinant Δ by
2
their corresponding co-factors, then Δ′ = Δ .
It suffices to illustrate the theorem for a determinant of third order.
Determinants Ch 2–17

a1 b1 c1 1 2 3
Let Δ = a2 b2 c2 = −3 2 −1 , then
a3 b3 c3 2 −4 3

2 −1 = 2, A = (−1)2+1 2 3 = − 18,
A1 = (−1) +
1 1
−4 3
2 −4 3

3+1 2 3 1+ 2 −3 −1 2+ 2 1 3
A3 = (−1) = − 8, B1 = (−1) = 7, B2 = (−1) = − 3,
2 −1 2 3 2 3

d
3+ 2 1 3 −3 2 1 2
B3 = (−1) = − 8, C1 = (−1)1+ 3 = 8, C2 = (−1)2+ 3 = 8,
3 −1 2 −4

ite
2 4

3+ 3 1 2
C3 = (−1)
2 =8

m
−3

Li
A1 B1 C1 2 7 8
∴ Δ ' = A2 B2 C2 = −18 −3 8
A3 B3 C3 −8 −8 8

n y
−3 8 −18 8 −18 −3
= 2 −7 +8

pa
−8 8 −8 8 −8 −8

= 2 (−24 + 64) − 7 (−144 + 64) + 8 (144 − 24)

om
= 2 × 40 − 7 × ( −80) + 8 × 120 = 80 + 560 + 960
= 1600 ... (1)
C

1 2 3 1 2 3
Δ 2 = −3 2 −1 = −3 2 −1
nd

2 −4 3 2 −4 3

1×1+ 2 × 2 + 3 × 3 1 × −3 + 2 × 2 + 3 × (−1) 1 × 2 + 2 × (−4) + 3 × 3

A

= −3 × 1 + 2 × 2 + (−1) × 3 (−3) × (−3) + 2 × 2 + (−1) × (−1) (−3) × 2 + 2 × (−4) + (−1) × 3

2 × 1 + (−4) × 2 + 3 × 3 2 × (−3) + (−4) × 2 + (3) × (−1) 2 × 2 + (−4) × (−4) + 3 × 3
nd

14 −2 3
14 −17 −2 −17 −2 14
= −2 14 −17 = 14 +2 +3
−17 29 3 −17
ha

3 29
3 −17 29
= 14 (406 − 289) + 2 ( −58 + 51) + 3 (34 − 42)
C

= 14 × 117 + 2 × (−7) + 3 × (−8) = 1638 − 14 − 24 = 1600 ... (2)

2
(1) and (2) ⇒ Δ′ = Δ .
S
©

Ex. 13. Without expanding, i.e., using properties of determinants, show that
43 1 6 9 9 12
(i) 35 7 4 = 0 (ii) 1 −3 − 4 = 0
17 3 2 1 9 12

1 / a a bc b 2c 2 bc b + c
(iii) 1 / b b ca = 0 (ISC) (iv) c 2a 2 ca c + a = 0 (ISC)
1 / c c ab a 2b 2 ab a + b
Ch 2–18 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Sol. (i) Operating C1 → C1 − 7C3, we have

43 − 7 × 6 1 6 1 1 6
Δ = 35 − 7 × 4 7 4 = 7 7 4 = 0, C1 and C2 being identical (Property 4)
17 − 7 × 2 3 2 3 3 2
(ii) First take out 3 common from C2 and then 4 common from C3
9 3 12 9 3 3
Δ = 3 1 −1 − 4 = 3 × 4 1 −1 −1 = 12 × 0 = 0, (C2 and C3 being identical).
1 3 12 1 3 3
1

d
a bc
a

ite
(iii) Given, Δ = 1 b ca Multiply R1 by a, R2 by b and R3 by c. Then,
b
1

m
c ab
c
2 2

Li
1 a abc 1 a 1
1 1 b2 abc = 1 . abc 1 b 2 1 = 1 × 0 = 0.
Δ =
abc 2 abc 2

y
1 c abc 1 c 1

n
[Two columns being identical]

pa
2 2 bc 1 1 + 1
b c bc b + c b c
c 2a 2 + = 2 2 2 1+ 1 =0
(iv) Let Δ = ca c a a
om b c ca 1
c a
2 2
a b ab a + b 1
ab 1 +1
a b
C
[Taking bc common from R1, ca from R2 and ab from R3]
Operating R2 → R2 − R1, R3 → R3 − R1
nd

c+b
bc 1 1 +1 bc 1
b c bc
2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 (a − b)
− − = − −
A

Δ = a b c c (a b ) 0 a b c c (a b) 0
a b ab
b (a − c) 0 1 − 1 (a − c)
b (a − c) 0 −
nd

a c ac
c+b
bc 1
ha

bc
2 2 2 − 1
= a b c (a − b) (a − c) c 0
ab
C

b 0 − 1
ac
S

c+b
bc 1
2 2 2
a b c (a − b) (a − c) bc
©

= abc 0 − 1 (Multiplying R2 by ab and R3 by ac)

ab . ac
abc 0 − 1
= bc (a − b) (a − c) × 0 = 0 [R2 and R3 being identical rows]
Ex. 14. For positive number x, y and z, show that the numerical value of the determinant
1 log x y log x z
log y x 1 log y z = 0. (IIT)
log z x log z y 1
Determinants Ch 2–19
log y log z
1
1 log x y log x z log x log x
z ⎛
, Using log n m = log m ⎞⎟
log x log
Sol. Let Δ = log x 1 log y z = 1
y
log y log y ⎜⎝ log n ⎠
log z x log z y 1
log x log y
1
log z log z
log x log y log z
1 log x log y log z
=
log x log y log z
log x log y log z
multiplying R1, R2, R3 by log x, log y, log z respectively.

d
=0 3
( R1, R2, R3 are identical)

ite
Ex. 15. Without expanding the determinant, prove that
x+ y y+z z+x

m
(i) z x y = 0; (ISC)
1 1 1

Li
3x + y 2x x
(ii) 4 x + 3 y 3 x 3 x = x 3. (ISC)
5x + 6 y 4x 6x

y
Sol. (i) Operating R1 → R1 + R2, we have

n
x+ y+z x+ y+z x+ y+z

pa
z x y
Δ = 1 1 1
om
1 1 1
= ( x + y + z) z x y = 0, since two rows are identical.
1 1 1
3x + y 2 x x
C
3x 2 x x y 2x x
(ii) Δ = 4 x + y x
3 3 3 x = x x
4 3 3 x + 3 y 3x 3x
5x + 6 y 4 x 6 x
nd

5x 4 x 6 x 6 y 4x 6x
3 2 1 1 2 1
3 2
= x 4 3 3 +x y 3 3 3
A

5 4 6 6 4 6
nd

3 2 1
3 2
= x 4 3 3 + x y (0) since C1 and C3 are identical.
5 4 6
ha

3 3 3
= x [3 (18 − 12) − 2 (24 − 15) + 1 (16 − 15)] = x (18 − 18 + 1) = x .
a b c c b a
C

Ex. 16. Show without expanding the determinant that b c a = b a c .

c a b a c b
S

a b c c b a
Sol. Let D = b c a then (− D) = a c b (Interchanging C1 and C3)
©

c a b b a c
c b a
Again, – (– D) = b a c (Interchanging R2 and R3)
a c b
c b a
⇒ D = b a c .
a c b
Ch 2–20 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

a a+b a+b+c
Ex. 17. Prove that 2 a 3 a + 2 b 4 a + 3 b + 2 c = a 3 . (ISC)
3 a 6 a + 3 b 10 a + 6 b + 3 c
Sol. Operating R2 → R2 – 2R1 and R3 → R3 – 3R1, we have
a a+b a+b+c
Δ = 0 a 2a + b
0 3a 7a + 3b
Expanding by first column
a 2a + b 2 2 3
Δ = a 3a 7a + 3b = a (7a + 3ab − 6a − 3ab) = a .

d
Ex. 18. Without expanding the determinant at any stage, prove that

ite
x+1 x+2 x+a
x + 2 x + 3 x + b = 0, where a, b, c are in A.P. (NMOC)
x+3 x+4 x+c

m
Sol. Given a, b, c are in A.P. ∴ b − a = c − b = d (common difference) ...(1)

Li
x +1 x + 2 x + a
Let Δ = x+2 x+3 x+b
x+3 x+4 x+c

y
Operate R2 → R2 − R1, R3 → R3 − R2. Then,

n
x +1 x + 2 x + a x +1 x + 2 x + a

pa
Δ = 1 1 b−a = 1 1 d [From (1)]
1 1 c−a om 1 1 d
= 0, since R2 and R3 are identical.
Ex. 19. Using properties of determinants, prove that
C
a b c
b c a = (a + b + c) (ab +bc + ca – a2 – b2 – c2). (ISC)
c a b
nd

a b c a+b+c b c
Sol. Δ = b c a = b+c+a c a , Operating C1 → C1 + C2 + C3
A

c a b c+a+b a b
1 b c 1 b c
nd

= (a + b + c) 1 c a = (a + b + c) 0 c − b a − c
1 a b 0 a−b b−c
ha

[Operating R2 → R2 – R1 and R3 → R3 – R1]

= (a + b + c) {(c – b) (b – c) – (a – b) (a – c)}, expanding along 1st column.
2 2 2
C

= (a + b + c) {bc – b – c + bc – (a – ab – ac + bc)}
2 2 2
= (a + b + c) (ab + bc + ca – a – b – c ).
S

2
−á âá ãá
©

Ex. 20. Prove the following identity : áâ − â2 ãâ α 2β 2γ 2.

= 4α
2
áã âã −ã

2
−á âá ãá
2
Sol. Δ = áâ −â ãâ
áã âã −ã 2
Determinants Ch 2–21

Taking, α, β, γ common from C1, C2, C3 respectively

−á á á
Δ = αβγ â −â â
ã ã −ã
Now taking α, β, γ common from R1, R2, R3 respectively
−1 1 1
Δ = α 2β2 γ 2 1 −1 1
1 1 −1
Now applying R2 → R2 + R1 and R3 → R3 + R1, we have

d
2 2 2
−1 1 1
Δ = αβ γ 0 0 2

ite
0 2 0

m
0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Now expanding by using C1, Δ = α2β2γ2 (–1) 2 0 = − α β γ (0 − 4) = 4α β γ .

Li
0 ab2 ac 2 b+c a a
Ex. 21. Evaluate (i) a 2b 0 bc 2 , (ii ) b c+a b . (ISC)

y
2 2
a c bc 0 c c a + b

n
2 2

pa
2 2
0 ab ac 0 b c 0 1 1
Sol. (i) a 2b 0 bc 2 = abc a 2 0 c 2 = abc (a 2b 2c 2 ) 1 0 1
a 2c b 2 c 0 a 2 b2 0 1 1 0
om
2 2 2 3 3 3
= (abc) (a b c ) [–1 (0 – 1) + 1 (1 – 0)] = 2a b c .
(ii) Expanding by using first row, we get
C

c+a b −a b b +a b c+a
Δ = (b + c) c a+b c a+b c c
nd

2 2 2
= (b + c) (ca + bc + a + ab – bc) – a (ab + b – bc) + a (bc – c – ac)
= 4 abc, all other terms cancelling out on simplification.
A

Ex. 22. (a) Solve the following equations :

nd

x 3 7
(i) 2 x 2 =0
7 6 x
ha

3 − x −6 3
(ii) −6 3−x 3 =0
3 3 −6 − x
C

(b) Use properties of determinants to solve for x: (ISC)

S

x+a b c
c x+b a =0
a b x+c
©

x 3 7 x+9 x+9 x+9

Sol. (a) (i) Given, 2 x 2 = 0 ⇒ 2 x 2 =0 [R1 → R1 + R2 + R3]
7 6 x 7 6 x
1 1 1 1 0 0
⇒ ( x + 9) 2 x 2 = 0 ⇒ ( x + 9) 2 x − 2 0 =0 [C2 ⇒ C2 − C1, C3 → C3 − C1]
7 6 x 7 −1 x−7
Ch 2–22 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

x−2 0
⇒ ( x + 9) = 0 (expanding along R1) ⇒ (x + 9) (x − 2) (x − 7) = 0
−1 x − 7
⇒ x = − 9 or x = 2 or x = 7 ∴ The solution set is {− 9, 2, 7}.

3 − x −6 3 − x −6 3
(ii) Given, − 6 3 − x 3 =0 ⇒ −x 3− x 3 =0 [C1 → C1 + C2 + C3]
3 3 −6 − x −x 3 −6 − x

1 −6 3 1 −6 3
⇒ −x 1 3− x 3 =0 ⇒ 0 9− x 0 =0 [R2 → R2 − R1, R3 → R3 − R1]

d
1 3 −6 − x 0 9 −9 − x

ite
9− x 0
⇒ − x ×1 =0 (expanding along C1)
9 − (9 + x)

m
⇒ − x [− (9 − x) (9 + x) − 0] = 0 ⇒ x (9 − x) (x + 9) = 0
⇒ x = 0 or x = 9 or x = − 9. ∴ The solution set is {− 9, 0, 9}.

Li
x+a b c x + a+b+c b c
(b) c x+b a = x+a+b+c x+b a (Using C1 → C1 + C2 + C3)
b x+c x+a+b+c b x+c

y
a

n
1 b c
= (x + a + b + c) 1 x + b a

pa
1 b x+c
1 b c
a−c
om
= (x + a + b + c) 0 x
0 −x x+c−a
(Using R2 → R2 − R1 and R3 → R3 − R2)
C
= (x + a + b + c) [x (x + c − a) + x (a − c)]
[Expanding by means of elements in C1]
nd

2
= (x + a + b + c) x
x+a b c
∴ c x+b a 2
A

= x (x + a + b + c) = 0
a b x+c
∴ x = 0, or − (a + b − c).
nd

b+c c+a a+b a b c

Ex. 23. Prove that q + r r + p p+q =2 p q r .
ha

y+z z+ x x+ y x y z
Sol. Operating C1 → C1 + C2 + C3, we have
C

2 (b + c + a) c + a a+b
Δ = 2 (q + r + p) r + p p+q
2 ( y + z + x) z + x x+ y
S

Operating C2 → C2 − C1 and C3 → C3 − C1, we have

©

b + c + a −b −c a b c
Operating C1 → C1 + C2 + C3 and
Δ = 2 q + r + p −q −r = 2 p q r .
taking ‘−’ common from C2 and C3.
y + z + x − y −z x y z

a + b + 2c a b 3
Ex. 24. Prove that c b + c + 2a b = 2 (a + b + c) .
c a c + a + 2b
Determinants Ch 2–23

a + b + 2c a b
Sol. Given determinant = c b + c + 2a b
c a c + a + 2b
Applying C1 → C1 + (C2 + C3), we obtain
2 (a + b + c) a b 1 a b
= 2 (a + b + c) b + c + 2a b = 2 (a + b + c) 1 b + c + 2a b
2 (a + b + c) a c + a + 2b 1 a c + a + 2b
R2 → R2 – R1 and R3 → R3 – R1 ⇒
1 a b
Δ = 2 (a + b + c) 0 b + c + a 0 .

d
0 0 c+a+b

ite
= 2 (a + b + c) . 1 {(b + c + a) (c + a + b) – (0 × 0)}
3
= 2 (a + b + c) . [Expanding by using 1st column]

m
1 1 1

Li
Ex. 25. Show that α 2 β 2 α – β ) (β
γ 2 = (α β – γ ) (γγ − α αβ + βγ + γα
α) (αβ γα). (ISC 2006)
α 3 β3 γ3

y
Sol. Applying C2 → C2 – C1 and C3 → C3 – C1, we get

n
1 0 0

pa
2 2 2 2
γ − α = 1 . β 3 − α3 γ −α
2 2 2 2 2
Δ = α β −α 3 3 expanding along R1
3 3
α β −α
3 3
γ −α
3 om β −α γ −α

β+α γ+α
= (β − α) (γ − α) 2 2 2 2
β + αβ + α γ + αγ + α
C

β−ã γ+α
= (β − α) (γ − α) 2 2 2 2 Applying C1 → C1 – C2
β + αβ − γ − αγ γ + αγ + α
nd

β−γ γ+α
= (β − α) (γ − α) 2 2 2 2
(β − γ ) + α(β − γ) γ + αγ + α
A

1 γ+α
= (β − α) (γ − α) (β − γ) 2 2
β + γ + α γ + αγ + α
nd

2 2
= (β − α) (γ − α) (β − γ) [1 . (γ + αγ + α ) – (γ + α) (β + γ + α)]
2 2 2 2
= – (α − β) (β − γ) (γ − α) (γ + αγ + α − γβ − γ − γα − αβ − αγ − α )
ha

= – (α − β) (β − γ) (γ − α) (−αβ − βγ − γα)
= (α − β) (β − γ) (γ − α) (αβ + βγ + γα).
C

Ex. 26. Express the determinant | A | in factors, where

S

1 1 1
| A | = a b c = (a – b) (b –c) (c – a) (a + b + c) (ISC)
©

3 3 3
a b c
Sol. Applying C1 → C1 – C2 and C2 → C2 – C3, we get
0 0 1 0 0 1
Δ = a−b b−c c = a−b b−c c
3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3
a −b b −c c (a − b) (a + ab + b ) (b − c) (b + bc + c ) c
0 0 1
= (a − b) (b − c) 1 1 c
a 2 + ab + b2 b 2 + bc + c 2 c3
Ch 2–24 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Expanding by using R1
(a − b) (b − c) . 1 [1 (b2 + bc + c2) − 1 (a2 + ab + b2)]
2 2
= (a − b) (b − c) (bc +c − a − ab) = (a − b) (b − c) {b (c − a) + (c − a) (c + a)}
= (a − b) (b − c) (c − a) (b + c + a) = (a − b) (b − c) (c − a) (a + b + c).
2 2 2
a a − (b − c ) bc
2
Ex. 27. Prove that b b − (c − a)2 ca = (a – b) (b – c) (c – a) (a + b + c) (a2 + b2 + c2).
2
2 2 2
c c − (a − b) ab

d
(ISC)
Sol. Applying C2 → C2 – 2 C1 – 2 C3, we get

ite
2 2 2 2 2
a − (a + b + c ) bc a 1 bc
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Δ = b − (a + b + c ) ca = − (a + b + c ) b 1 ca

m
2 2 2 2 2
c − (a + b + c ) ab c 1 ab

Li
2
1 a bc
2 2 2 2
= (a + b + c ) 1 b ca Interchanging C1 and C2

y
2
1 c ab

n
Multiplying R1, R2 and R3 by a, b and c respectively.

pa
3
a a abc
2 2 2 1 b b3
= (a + b + c ) × abc
abc
om
c c3 abc
3 3
a a 1 1 a a
C
2 2 abc b b3 1 = (a 2 + b 2 + c 2 ) 1 b b3
2
= (a + b + c ) × .
abc
c c3 1 1 c c
3
nd

Now prove as in Ex. 26.

A

2 2 2
x y z
Ex. 28. Prove that yz zx xy = (x − y) (y − z) (z − x) (xy + yz + zx). (NMOC 1994)
x y z
nd

2 2 2
x y z
ha

Sol. Let Δ = yz zx xy
x y z
C

3 3 3
x y z
= 1 xyz
S

xyz xyz , multiplying C1, C2 and C3 by x, y and z respectively.

xyz
x2 y2 z2
©

x3 y3 z3 1 1 1
xyz 3 3 3
= 1 1 1 =− x y z (R1 ↔ R2)*
xyz
x2 y2 z 2
x 2
y 2
z 2

* i.e., interchanging R1 and R2.

Determinants Ch 2–25

1 1 1
2 2 2
= x y z (R2 ↔ R3)
x3 y 3 z 3
Now, operating C2 → C2 − C1, C3 → C3 − C1
1 0 0 2 2 2 2
y −x z −x
Δ = x2 y2 − x2 z 2 − x2 = 3 3 3 3
, expanding along R1
y −x z −x
x3 y 3 − x3 z 3 − x3
y+x z+x

d
= (y − x) (z − x) y 2 + x 2 + xy z 2 + x 2 + zx

ite
y+x z−y
= (y − x) (z − x) y 2 + x 2 + xy 2 2 , operating C2 → C2 − C1
( z − y ) + x ( z − y)

m
y+x 1
= (y − x) (z − x) (z − y) 2 2
y +x + xy x + y + z

Li
= (x − y) (y − z) (z − x) [(y + x) (x + y + z) − 1 (y2 + x2 + xy)]
2 2 2 2
= (x − y) (y − z) (z − x) [xy + y + yz + x + xy + zx − y − x − xy]

y
= (x − y) (y − z) (z − x) (xy + yz + zx).

n
pa
(1 + a1 + b1 + 1c ) .
1+a 1 1
Ex. 29. Prove that 1 1+b 1 = abc (ISC)
1 1 1+c om
= abc + ab + bc + ca.
Sol. Let the given determinant be = Δ. Then, C1 → C1 – C2 and C2 → C2 – C3 gives
C
a 0 1
b 1 + 1 −b b
Δ = −b b 1 =a
− c 1 + c 0 − c
0 −c 1 + c
nd

1 1 1
= a (b +bc + c) + bc = abc + ab + ac + bc = abc 1 + + +
a b c
. ( )
A

Ex. 30. Using properties of determinants, show that

1 a a 2 − bc
nd

1 b b 2 − ca =0
1 c c 2 − ab
ha

2 2
1 a a − bc 1 a a 1 a bc
2 2
Sol. 1 b b − ca = 1 b b − 1 b ca
C

2
1 c c − ab 1 c c2 1 c ab
2 2
S

1 a a a a abc
2 1 2
= 1 b b − b b abc Multiplying and dividing R1 by a, R2 by b and R3 by c.
2 abc 2
©

1 c c c c abc
2 2
1 a a a a 1
2 abc b b2 1
= 1 b b − Taking abc common from C3
2 abc
1 c c c c2 1
2 2 2 2
1 a a a a 1 1 a a a 1 a
2 2 2 2
= 1 b b − b b 1 = 1 b b + b 1 b Interchanging C2 and C3
2 2 2 2
1 c c c c 1 1 c c c 1 c
Ch 2–26 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII
2 2
1 a a 1 a a
2 2
= 1 b b − 1 b b = 0. Interchanging C1 and C2.
2 2
1 c c 1 c c
Ex. 31. Show that
sin2 A sin A cos2 A
sin2 B sin B cos2 B = − (sin A − sin B) (sin B − sin C) (sin C − sin A)
sin2 C sin C cos2 C
(ISC)

d
2 2 2 2
sin A sin A cos A sin A sin A 1 − sin A

ite
2 2 2 2
Sol. Let Δ = sin B sin B cos B = sin B sin B 1 − sin B
2 2 2 2
sin C sin C cos C sin C sin C 1 − sin C

m
2 2 2
sin A sin A 1 sin A sin A sin A
2 2 2
= sin B sin B 1 − sin B sin B sin B

Li
2 2 2
sin C sin C 1 sin C sin C sin C
2 2
sin A − sin B sin A − sin B 0 ⎡Two columns being identical ⎤

y
2 2 ⎢ 2nd det. = 0. ⎥
sin B − sin C sin B − sin C 0 − 0 .

n
= ⎢ In first det. apply ⎥
2
⎢⎣ R1 → R1 − R2 and R2 → R2 − R3.⎥⎦

pa
sin C sin C 1
2 2
sin A − sin B sin A − sin B
= 1 , expanding along C3.
2 2
om
sin B − sin C sin B − sin C
sin A + sin B 1 Taking common factors
= (sin A − sin B) (sin B − sin C) ,
sin B + sin C 1 out from R1 and R2.
C

= (sin A − sin B) (sin B − sin C) [1. (sin A + sin B) − 1 (sin B + sin C)]
nd

= (sin A − sin B) (sin B − sin C) (sin A − sin C)

= − (sin A − sin B) (sin B − sin C) (sin C − sin A).
A

(b + c )2 a
2
a
2

Ex. 32. Prove that b2 (c + a ) 2 b2 = 2abc (a + b + c)3 .

nd

2 2 2
c c (a + b)

Sol. Let the given determinant be denoted by Δ.

ha

Operating C1 → C1 − C3 and C2 → C2 − C3, we get

C

2 2 2
(b + c) − a 0 a
0 (c + a)2 − b2 b2
Δ =
S

c2 − (a + b)2 c2 − (a + b)2 (a + b)2

©

2
(a + b + c) (b + c − a) 0 a
2
= 0 (c + a + b) (c + a − b) b
2
(c + a + b) (c − a − b) (c + a + b) (c − a − b) (a + b)
2
b+c−a 0 a
2 2 Taking (a + b + c) common from
= (a + b + c) 0 c+a−b b
2 C1 and C2
c − a − b (c − a − b) (a + b)
Determinants Ch 2–27

2
b+c−a 0 a
2 2
= (a + b + c) 0 c+a−b b Operating R3 → R3 – (R1 + R2)
−2b −2a 2ab

2 2
2 ab + ac − a 0 a
(a + b + c) 2 2
= 0 bc + ba − b b (Applying C1 → aC1, C2 → bC2)
ab −2ab −2ab 2ab

2 2
2 ab + ac a a
(a + b + c)

d
= b2 bc + ba b 2 (Applying C1 → C1 + C3, C2 → C2 + C3)
ab

ite
0 0 2ab

(a + b + c)
2 b+c a a

m
a, b and 2ab common from
= ab . 2ab b c + a b Taking
R1, R2 and R3 respectively
ab 0 0 1

Li
b+c a
= 2 ab (a + b + c)2 b c+a expanding along R3

y
= 2 ab (a + b + c) {(b + c) (c +a) – ab} = 2 abc (a + b + c)3.
2

n
pa
1 + a 2 − b2 2ab − 2b
2 2 2 2 3
Ex. 33. Show that 2ab 1−a +b 2a = (1 + a + b ) (ISC)
−2a 1 − a 2 − b2
2b
om
2 2
1+ a + b 0 − 2b
2 2 Applying C1 → C1 − bC3
1+ a + b
C
0 2a
Sol. Δ = 2 2 2 2 2 2 C2 → C2 + aC3
b (1 + a + b ) −a (1 + a + b ) 1 − a − b
nd

2 2 2
1 0 − 2b
= (1 + a + b ) 0 1 2a Taking out 1 + a2 + b2 common from C1 and C2
A

b −a 1 − a 2 − b 2
Expanding along C1, we get
nd

Δ = (1 + a2 + b2)2 [1 . (1 – a2 – b2 + 2 a2) + b (0 + 2 b)]

2 2 2 2 2 2 2
= (1 + a + b ) (1 – a – b + 2a + 2b )
ha

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
= (1 + a + b ) (1 + a + b ) = (1 + a + b ) .
C

2 3
x x 1+ x
2 3
Ex. 34. If x, y, z are different and A = y y 1 + y = 0,
S

2
z z 1 + z3
then show that 1 + xyz = 0. (ISC 1988, 1995, 2004)
©

2 2 3
x x 1 x x x
2 2 3
Sol. A = y y 1 + y y y
z z2 1 z z 2
z 3

2 2 2 2
x x 1 1 x x 1 x x 1 x x
2 2 2 2 2
= y y 1 + xyz 1 y y = (−1) 1 y y + xyz 1 y y
z z2 1 1 z z2 1 z z2 1 z z 2
Ch 2–28 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

(Number of jumped columns = 2 in the first determinant)

2
1 x x
2
= 1 y y (1 + xyz).
2
1 z z
2 2
1 x x 1 x x
2 2 2
Now 1 y y = 0 y−x y −x (applying R2 → R2 – R1 and R3 → R3 – R1)
2 2 2
1 z z 0 z−x z −x
2
1 x x

d
= ( y − x) ( z − x) 0 1 y+ x
z+ x

ite
0 1
= (y – x) (z – x) . 1 {1 (z + x) – 1 (y + x)} expanding by using R1

m
= (y – x) (z – x) (z – y) = (x – y) (y – z) (z – x)
∴ A = (1 + xyz) (x – y) (y – z) (z – x).

Li
It is given that A = 0 ∴ (1 + xyz) (x – y) (y − z) (z – x) = 0
But x ≠ y ≠ z ⇒ (x – y) (y – z) (z – x) ≠ 0 ∴ 1 + xyz = 0.

n y
1 a 2 + bc a 3

pa
2 3
Ex. 35. Prove that 1 b + ac b = (a – b) (c – b) (c – a) (a2 + b2 + c2).
2 3
1 c + ab c om
Sol. Operating, R2 → R2 – R1 and R3 → R3 – R1 we get
2 3
1 a + bc a
0 (b 2 − a 2 ) − c (b − a) b3 − a 3
C
D =
0 (c 2 − a 2 ) − b (c − a) c3 − a 3
nd

2 3
1 a + bc a
2 2
= 0 (b − a) (b + a − c) (b − a) (b + a + ab)
A

2 2
0 (c − a) (c + a − b) (c − a) (c + a + ac)
2 3
1 a + bc
nd

a
2 2
= (b − a ) (c − a) 0 b + a − c b + a + ab
0 c + a − b c + a 2 + ac
2
ha

2 2
b + a − c b + a + ab
= (b − a) (c − a) , expanding along C1.
c + a − b c 2 + a 2 + ac
C

2 (b − c) (b − c) (a + b + c)
D = (b − a) (c − a) (c + a − b)
S

⇒ 2 2
c + a + ac Applying R1 → R1 – R2

a+b+c
©

2
= (b − a) (c − a) (b − c) 2 2
c + a − b c + a + ac
2 2
= (a – b) (c – b) (c – a) [2 (c + a + ac) – (a + b + c) (c + a − b)]
= (a – b) (c – b) (c – a) (a2 + b2 + c2).
Determinants Ch 2–29

q q
1 α+
p p
Ex. 36. If p, q, r are not in G.P., and r r = 0,
1 α+
q q
pα + q qα + r 0
2
α + 2qα
show that, pα α + r = 0. (ISC)
q q q
1 α+ 1 −α α+
p p p
Sol. (C2 → C2 − C1) ⇒ r α+ r = 1 −α α+ r

d
1 q
q q
pα + q qα + r pα + q qα + r 0

ite
0
q r
0 0 −

m
p q
= 1 −α α+ r (R1 → R1 − R2)

Li
q
pα + q qα + r 0
⎛q r⎞ −α

y
1
= ⎜ − ⎟ pα + q qα + r , using first row
⎝ p q⎠

n
pa
2
q − pr
= [(qα + r) × 1 − (−α) (pα + q)]
pq om
2
q − pr 2 2
= (pα + 2qα + r) = 0, if pα + qα + r = 0.
pq
2
[since q − pr ≠ 0, as p, q, r are not in G.P.]
C

p b c p q
Ex. 37. If a q c = 0, find the value of + + r (p ≠ a, q ≠ b, r ≠ c).
nd

a b r p − a q − b r−c
Sol. Operating R1 → R1 – R3, R2 → R2 – R3, the given equation becomes
A

p−a 0 c−r
0 q−b c−r = 0 ⇒ (p − a) {r (q – b) – b (c – r)} + (c – r) {– a (q – b)} = 0
nd

a b r
⇒ r (p – a) (q – b) + b (p – a) (r – c) + a (q – b) (r – c) = 0 [Expanding by R1]
ha

r + b + a
⇒ =0 [Dividing throughout by (p – a) (q – b) (r – c)]
r−c q−b p−a
C

⇒ r + (b − q) + q + (a − p) + p = 0 ⇒ r − 1 + q − 1+ p = 0
r−c q−b p−a r−c q−b p−a
S

p q
+ + r = 2.
©

⇒
p−a q−b r −c
Ex. 38. Show that the value of the following determinant is negative, if a, b and c are positive and
a b c
unequal b c a . (ISC, IIT)
c a b
Ch 2–30 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Sol. R1 → R1 + R2 + R3 gives
( a + b + c) ( a + b + c) ( a + b + c) 1 1 1
D= b c a = (a + b + c) b c a
c a b c a b
Now applying C2 → C2 – C1 and C3 → C3 – C1

1 0 0
c−b a−b
D = (a + b + c) b c − b a − b = (a + b + c) a − c b − c , expanding along R1
c a−c b−c

d
= (a + b + c) [– b2 – c2 + 2 bc – a2 + ab + ac – bc]
2 2 2

ite
= – (a + b + c) [b + c + a – ab – ac – bc]
1 2 2 2
= − (a + b + c) [(a − b) + (b − c) + (c − a )] .

m
2
The expression (a − b)2 + (b − c)2 + (c − a)2 being the sum of perfect squares is always positive.

Li
Therefore, the above expression is necessarily negative as a, b and c are positive and unequal.
EXERCISE 2 (d)

n y
1. (a) Without evaluating Problems (i) to (x) state why each statement is true.
−2 1 0

pa
2 3 1 3 1 3
(i) 0 0 0 =0 (ii) 0 1 0 =0 (iii) 3 4 1 =0
−1 2 0 om 1 2 1 −4 2 0
7 3 2 0 2 3 1 1 6 1 3 2
2 1 2 0 2 0 1 2 −2 0 1 4
(iv) 4 1 1 0 =0 (v) 2 3 1 1 =0 (vi) 3 6 1 2 =0
0 2 1 0 0 1 2 0 −4 0 2 8
C

3 2 1 3 4 5 2 3 21 21 2 3
(vii) 4 0 7 = 2 0 3 (viii) 11 4 7 = 7 11 4
nd

5 3 4 1 7 4 6 15 8 8 6 15
1 2 7 6 0 13 2 + 3 −1 2 2 −1 2 3 −1 2
(ix) 6 0 13 = − 1 2 7 (x) 3+ 4 0 1 = 3 0 1 + 4 0 1
A

8 3 5 8 3 3 4+5 3 0 4 3 0 5 3 0

⎡ 1 − 3 2⎤ ⎡ 1 2 0⎤
nd

(b) If A = ⎢ 2 3 − 1⎥ and B = ⎢ − 3 3 1⎥ , without expanding show that | A | = | B |.

⎢⎣ 0 1 0 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ 2 − 1 0 ⎦⎥
ha

[Hint. Use property 2]. (NMOC)

(c) Without actually expanding the determinant but stating and using the theorems on determinants,
C

1 2 3 1 2 3
show that 2 3 4 = 1 1 1
3 4 5 1 0 −1
S

2. Without expanding the determinant show that :

©

42 1 6 5 15 − 25
(i) 28 7 4 = 0 [Hint. Take out 7 common from C1]. (ii) 7 21 30 = 0
14 3 2 8 24 42

x+ y x x
3
(iii) 5x + 4 y 4 x 2 x = x
10 x + 8 y 8x 3x
[Hint. Operate R2 → R2 − 2R1, R3 → R3 − 3R1. Now, expand by C3].
Determinants Ch 2–31

2
1/a a bc
2
(iv) 1/b b ca =0
2
1/c c ab
3. Using the properties of determinants, show that :
0 p−q p−r
(i) q− p 0 q−r = 0 (NMOC)
r− p r−q 0

2 2
1 x+ y x +y

d
(ii) 1 y+z y2 + z2 = (x − y) (y − z) (z − x)

ite
2 2
1 z+x z +x

m
1 1 1 2 3 7
(iii) a b c =0 (iv) 13 17 5 = 0
b+c c+a a+b 15 20 12

Li
x+λ x x
(v) x x+λ x = λ 2 (3x + λ) .

y
x x x+λ

n
2 2

pa
sin x cos x 1
(vi) 2
cos x
2
sin x 1 = 0
− 10 12 2 om
4. Without expanding the determinant at any stage, prove that
x−3 x−4 x−α
x − 2 x − 3 x − β = 0 , where α, β, γ are in A.P.
C
(NMOC)
x −1 x − 2 x − γ
Using properties of Determinants, evaluate :
nd

a−b b−c c−a

5. b−c c−a a−b (ISC)
c−a a−b b−c
A

−1 1 1
1 −1 1
nd

6.
1 1 −1
2 2 2
ha

1 2 3
7. 2
2
3
2
4
2 [Hint. Apply C2 → C2 – 4 C1, C3 → C3 – 9C1]. (ISC)
2 2 2
3 4 5
C

8. Solve the following equations :

15 − 2 x 11 10
S

1 4 20
(i) 1 −2 5 = 0 (IIT) (ii) 11 − 3x 17 16 = 0 (NMOC)
1 2 x 5x
2 7 − x 14 13
©

x −1 1 1 x+a b c
(iii) 1 x −1 1 =0 (iv) a x+b c =0
1 1 x −1 a b x+c
3−λ −1 1
(v) −1 5 − λ −1 = 0
1 −1 3 − λ
Ch 2–32 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

2
a a b +c
9. b b 2 a + c = (b – c) (c – a) (a – b) (a + b + c)
2
c c a+b
[Hint. Operate C1 → C1 + C3, take out (a + b + c) common. Operate R2 → R2 – R1, R3 → R3 – R1,
expand.]

1 a b+c
10. 1 b c+a =0
1 c a+b
2
−a ab ac

d
11. ba −b 2 bc = 4a2 b2 c2 (ISC 2002)

ite
2
ac bc −c
y+z z y
z+x

m
12. z x = 4 xyz (ISC 1996)
y x x+ y

Li
[Hint. Use first C1 → C1 − (C2 + C3), then R2 → R2 − R3, and expand]
a+b+c −c −b
13. −c a+b+c −a = 2 (a + b) (b + c) (c + a) .

y
−b −a a+b+c

n
[Hint. Apply C1 → C1 + C2, C2 → C2 + C3 then apply R1→ R1 + R3 , R2 → R2 + R3 and expand along

pa
C1].
3
1 x x
y3
14. 1 y
3
om
= (x – y) (y – z) (z – x) (x + y + z) [See Solved Ex. 26]
1 z z
1 1 1
α β γ = (α − β) (β − γ) (γ − α)
C
15. (ISC)
βγ γα αβ
nd

1 bc bc (b + c)
16. 1 ca ca (c + a) = 0 (ISC)
1 ab ab (a + b)
A

1 a a2
1 1 1
nd

1 b b 2 = ( a − b ) (b − c ) (c − a )
17. a b c = (a − b) (b − c ) (c − a ) or
1 c c2
a2 b2 c2
ha

(NMOC)
2 2
1 b+c b +c
C

2 2
18. 1 c+a c +a = (b − c) (c − a) (a − b)
2 2
1 a+b a +b
S

[Hint. Apply R2 → R2 − R1, R3 → R3 − R1 ]

©

b+c c+a a+b 2 2 2

19. (i) c + a a + b b + c = 2 (a + b + c) (ab + bc + ca − a − b − c )
a+b b+c c+a
b+c c+a a+b a b c
(ii) c+a a+b b+c =2 b c a
a+b b+c c+a c a b
[Hint. Apply C1 → C1 + C2 + C3, then C2 → C2 − C1, C3 → C3 − C1.
Now, C1 → C1 − (C2 + C3) Finally, interchange R1, R2 and R2, R3]
Determinants Ch 2–33

x y z
20. x2 y2 z2 = (x − y) (y − z) (z − x) (xy + yz + zx) (ISC 1991)
yz zx xy
x y z
2 2 2
21. x y z = xyz ( x − y) ( y − z) ( z − x) (ISC)
3 3 3
x y z

22. (i) Without expanding the determinant, show that (x + y + z) is a factor of the determinant and also
x− y−z 2x 2x
2y y−z−x 2y

d
find its value: (ISC 2007)
2z 2z z−x− y

ite
[Hint. R1 → R1 + R2 + R3].

a−b−c 2a 2a

m
(ii) Show that 2b b−c−a 2b = (a + b + c)3 (ISC)
2c 2c c −a −b

Li
[Hint. Apply R1 → R1 + R2 +R3. Then apply C2 → C2 – C1 and C3 → C3 – C1].
−2a a + b a + c
b + a − 2b b + c = 4 (a + b) (b + c) (c + a). [Hint. Apply factor property (Property 9)]

y
23.
c + a c + b − 2c

n
x+a b c

pa
2
24. (i) a x+b c = x ( x + a + b + c) (ISC)
a b x+c
[Hint. Apply C1 → C1 + C2 + C3 and take out common factor, Then R2 → R2 – R1, R3 → R3 − R1].
om
x p q
p x q = ( x + p + q ) ( x − p ) ( x − q ).
(ii)
C

p q x

x a a
nd

a x a = ( x + 2a ) ( x − a ) 2 .
(iii) (ISC)
a a x
A

1 + a1 a2 a3
a1 1 + a2 a3 = 1 + a1 + a2 + a3
nd

(iv) .
a1 a2 1 + a3
[Hint. (ii), (iii) and (iv). Apply same method as for (i)]
ha

a b c
a − b b − c c − a = a3 + b3 + c3 − 3abc.
25. (i) (ISC)
C

b+c c+a a+b

[Hint. Applying C1 → C1 + C2 + C3, a + b + c is easily seen to be a factor].
S

a b−c c−b
a−c b c−a
©

(ii) = (a + b − c) (b + c − a) (c + a − b) (ISC)
a−b b−a c

a2 bc ac + c 2
a 2 + ab b2 ac = 4 a 2b 2c 2 .
26.
ab b 2 + bc c2
Ch 2–34 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

[Hint. (i) Take a, b and c common from C1, C2 and C3 respectively,

(ii) Apply R2 → R2 − R1 – R3, (iii) Apply C2 → C2 – C3, (iv) Expand along R2].
2
a + 1 ab ac
2 2 2
bc = 1 + a + b + c .
2
27. ab b +1 (ISC 2005)
2
ac bc c +1
28. Without expanding the determinants, show that
2
1 a bc 1 a a
2
1 b ca = 1 b b .

d
1 c ab 2
1 c c

ite
[Hint. 1. Operate aR1, bR2, cR3 and divide the whole det. by abc. 2. Interchange C3 with C2
3. Interchange C1 and C2]

m
a−b−c 2a 2a
b−c−a = ( a + b + c )3 .

Li
29. 2b 2b (ISC)
2c 2c c−a−b
[Hint. R1 → R1 + R2 + R3, Take out (a + b + c) common. Then, C2 → C2 − C1, C3 → C3 − C1. Now,

y
expand along R1]

n
x2 y2 z2

pa
3
30. Using properties of determinants, prove that x y 3 z 3 = xyz (x−y) (y − z) (z − x) (xy + zy + zx)
xyz yzx zxy
om
(ISC 2001)
[Hint. Take xyz common from R3. Then apply C1 → C1 − C2, C2 → C2 − C3, etc]
C
y+z x+ y x
31. Using properties of determinants, prove that z+x y+z y = x3 + y3 + z3 − 3xyz (ISC 2000)
nd

x+ y z+x z
y+z x+ y x x+ y+z y x
A

z+x y+z y z+ x+ y z y
[Hint. = (C1 → C1 + C3) and (C2 → C2 − C3)
x+ y z+x z x+ y+ z x z
nd

1 y x 1 y x
= (x + y + z) 1 z y = (x + y + z) 0 z − y y − x (R2 → R2 − R1) and (R3 → R3 − R2)
ha

1 x z 0 x−z z−y

= (x + y + z) [1. (z − y)2 − (y − x) (x − z) etc.]

C

32. Using properties of determinants, find the value of the following determinant :
S

x3 x2 x
3 2
y y y (ISC 2003)
©

3 2
z z z
a b ax + by
b c bx + cy = (b 2 − ac) (ax 2 + 2bxy + cy 2 )
33. Prove that (ISC 2008)
ax + by bx + cy 0
[Hint. Operate R3 → R3 − x R1 – yR2 ]
Determinants Ch 2–35

ANSWERS
1. (a) (i) Each element in the second row is zero (ii) First and third columns are identical.
(iii) The elements in the third row are equi-multiples of the corresponding elements in the first
row.
(iv) Each element in the fourth column is zero (v) The first and the third rows are identical.
(vi) The elements in the fourth row are equi-multiples of the corresponding elements in the second row.
(vii) The rows are changed into columns and columns into rows.
(viii) The third column has passed over two (even) columns, namely first and second.
(ix) When the first and the second rows are interchanged, the resulting determinant is the negative
of the original determinant.

d
(x) Each element in the first column is the sum of two terms, therefore the determinant can be
written as the sum of two determinants.

ite
5. 0 6. 4 7. − 8
8. (i) x = −1, 2 (ii) x = 4 (iii) x = − 1, 2, 2 (iv) x = 0, − (a + b + c)

m
3
(v) λ = 2, 3, 6 22. (i) (x + y + z) 32. x y z (x − y) (y − z) (z − x)

Li
2.09. Solutions of linear equations using determinants. (Cramer’s rule)
1. Consider the simultaneous equations a1x + b1y = c1, a2x + b2 y = c2
b c −bc a c − a2c1

y
Solving these equations, we get x = 21 1 2,y= 1 2
a1b2 − a2b1 a1b2 − a2b1

n
Writing in determinant form, we can express the solution as

pa
c1 b1 a1 c1
c2 b2 D a2 c2 Dy
= x, y= =
x =
om D D
.
a1 b1 a1 b1
a2 b2 a2 b2
Observe that determinant D in the denominator is really the determinant of the co-efficients. In
C

the determinant Dx, the co-efficients of x, i.e., a1 and a2 are replaced by the constant terms c1 and c2
while in the determinant Dy, the co-efficients of y, i.e. b1 and b2 are replaced by the constant terms.
nd

2. Now consider the following system of equations :

a1 x + b1 y + c1 z = d 1
A

a2 x + b2 y + c2 z = d 2 ...(1)
nd

a3 x + b3 y + c3 z = d 3
d1 b1 c1 a1 x + b1 y + c1 z b1 c1
ha

d2 b2 c2 a2 x + b2 y + c2 z b2 c2
then = [Substituting for d1, d2, d3 from (1)]
d3 b3 c3 a3 x + b3 y + c3 z b3 c3
C

a1 x b1 c1
a2 x b2 c2
S

=
a3 x b3 c3
©

a1 b1 c1
| d1b2 c3 |
a2 b2 c2 ⇒ x=
= x | a1b2 c3 | Using the short notations, where |d1b2c3|
a3 b3 c3
is the determinant obtained from the determinant | a1b2c3 | of the co-efficients, by replacing
a1, a2, a3 by d1, d2, d3 respectively.
Ch 2–36 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

| d1 b2 c3 |
Hence, x = , provided |a1b2c3 | ≠ 0
| a1 b2 c3 |
| a1 d 2 c3 | |a b d |
In the same way, y = and z = 1 2 3
| a1 b2 c3 | | a1 b2 c3 |
These equations are referred to as Cramer’s Rule after the Swiss mathematician Gabriel Cramer
(1704 – 1752).
For short, we can write the above results as
Dx Dy D y
x = ,y= , z = z or x = = z = 1 , provided D ≠ 0.
D D D Dx Dy Dz D

d
Important note : It may be noted that constant terms in the given equations are on the

ite
right side.
Aid to memory. Note that

m
(1) The denominator (D) in all the three x, y and z is the determinant of the co-efficients of

Li
x, y and z in the equations.
(2) The numerator Dx in x is the determinant obtained from the determinant D by replacing
the x co-efficients a1, a2, a3 by the constant terms d1, d2, d3.

y
(3) Dy is obtained on replacing the y-coeffts. by constant terms and Dz is obtained on replacing

n
the z-coeffts. by constant terms.

pa
Remarks 1. Cramer’s rule can be used in exactly the same way to solve the system of n
equations in n unknowns.
om
2. Cramer’s rule does not apply if D = 0.
Working rule. Let the system of three linear equations in x, y, z be
C
a1 x + b1 y + c1 z = d1
a2 x + b2 y + c2 z = d2 ...(i)
nd

a3 x + b3 y + c3 z = d3
a1 b1 c1
A

Step 1. Evaluate D = a2 b2 c2
a3 b3 c3
nd

Dx Dy D
Step 2. If D ≠ 0, then the given equations have a unique solution and x = ,y= , z= z ,
D D D
ha

where Dx is the determinant obtained on replacing the x-coeffts. a1, a2, a3 by the constants d1, d2, d3
d1 b1 c1
C

i.e., Dx = d 2 b2 c2 .
d3 b3 c3
S

Similarly, Dy is the determinant obtained on replacing the y-coeffts. b1, b2, b3 by the constants
d1, d2, d3 and dz is the determinant obtained on replacing the z-coeffts. c1, c2, c3 by the constants
©

d1, d2, d3.

a1 d1 c1 a1 b1 d1
Dy = a2 d2 c2 , Dz = a2 b2 d2
a3 d3 c3 a3 b3 d3
Note. If D = 0, then the given system does not have a unique solution. For detailed discussion
of this case, read the next article.
Determinants Ch 2–37

Remark. If d1 = d2 = d3 = 0 in (i), then the system of equations is said to be homogeneous system,

otherwise it is called a non-homogeneous system of equations.
2.10. Consistent, inconsistent and dependent equations
Consider the following systems of equations :
(1) x +y =−1 (2) x + y =5 (3) x + y =5
8x + 3y = 2 4x + 4y = 20 4x + 4y = 7
On solving these systems of equations, you will find that
(i) the first system has only one solution, namely, x = 1, y = − 2. We say that the system is

d
consistent.
(ii) the second system has infinitely many solutions, namely x = k, y = 5 − k.

ite
(iii) the third system has no solution, i.e., we cannot find values of x and y that may satisfy
both the equations simultaneously. In this case, we say that the system is inconsistent.

m
Remark. If a system of linear equations has an infinite number of solutions, then the equations

Li
are said to be dependent.
A system of equations is said to be consistent if its solution exists whether unique or

y
not, otherwise it is said to be inconsistent.

n
2.11. Conditions of inconsistency

pa
(A) For a system of simultaneous linear equations with 2 unknowns.
Rule.
om
(i) If D ≠ 0, then the given system of equations is consistent and has a unique solution,
namely.
Dy
C
Dx y
x = ,y= ⇒ x = = 1 [Solved Ex. 39]
D D Dx Dy D
nd

(ii) If D = 0 and Dx = Dy = 0, then the system may be consistent with infinitely many solutions
or inconsistent. [Solved Ex. 40 (ii)]
A

(iii) If D = 0 and at least one of Dx and Dy is non-zero then the system has no solution, i.e., the
system is inconsistent. [Solved Ex. 40 (i)]
nd

The above rule is diagrammatically displayed below :

Find D
↓
ha

↓ ↓
D≠0 D=0
C

Unique solution
(Consistent) ↓
S

↓ ↓
One of Dx and Dy ≠ 0 Dx and Dy both = 0
©

No solution
(Inconsistent)
↓
Infinitely many
solutions (Consistent)
or
No solution (Inconsistent)
Ch 2–38 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

(B) For a system of 3 simultaneous linear equations involving 3 unknowns.

Rule.
(i) If D ≠ 0, then the given system of equations is consistent and has a unique solution namely,
D Dy D y
x= x , y = , z= z ⇒ x = = z = 1 . [Solved Ex. 41, 42, 43, 44]
D D D Dx Dy Dz D
(ii) If D = 0 and Dx = Dy = Dz = 0, then the given system may be consistent with infinitely many
solutions [Ex 46, 47, 48] or inconsistent having no solution [Ex. 49]. If consistent, then take
any two equations out of the three given equations and shift one of the variables say z on the
right hand side to obtain two equations in x, y. Solve these two equations by cramer’s rule to

d
obtain x, y in terms of z. [Solved Ex. 46, 47, 48]
(iii) If D = 0 and at least one of the determinants Dx, Dy, Dz is not zero, than the given system of

ite
equations is inconsistent. [Solved Ex. 45, 50]
(iv) If d1 = d2 = d3 = 0, i.e., the given system consists of homogeneous linear equations, then

m
system has only the trivial solution, i.e. x = y = z = 0. If D = 0, the system of equations
[Solved Ex. 51, 52, 53] is consistent and will have infinite solutions.

Li
The above discussion may be diagrammatically summarised as under :
Find D
↓

y
↓ ↓

n
D≠0 D=0

pa
↓
Unique solution1 ↓ ↓
Consistent om Dx = Dy = Dz = 0 At least one of
Dx Dy D
x= ,y= , z= z ↓ Dx, Dy, Dz is
D D D
Consistent not zero
C

↓ ⏐
(Infinitely many solutions) ⏐
nd

or ↓
Inconsistent Inconsistent
A

(No solution) (No solution)

nd

2.12. Consistency of three equations in two variables (Concurrency test)

Consider the equations
ha

a1 x + b1 y + c1 = 0 ...(1)
a2 x + b2 y + c2 = 0 ...(2)
C

a3 x + b3 y + c3 = 0 ...(3)
The system of three equations is consistent, if there exists an ordered pair (h, k) of rational
S

numbers, which is a solution of all the three equations. A discussion of the condition of consistency
in the general case being beyond the scope of the book, we assume that two of the three equations
©

admit of a unique solution. We suppose that the first two equations have a unique solution and then
find the condition that the system is consistent.
Thus assuming that (a1 b2 − a2 b1) ≠ 0, the unique solution of (1) and (2) is
⎛ b1 c2 − b2 c1 c1 a2 − c2 a1 ⎞
⎜a b −a b , a b −a b ⎟
⎝ 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 1⎠
Determinants Ch 2–39

It will also be a solution of (3) provided

b c −b c c a −c a
a3 × 1 2 2 1 + b3 × 1 2 2 1 + c3 = 0
a1 b2 − a2 b1 a1 b2 − a2 b1
or equivalently,
a1 (b2 c3 − b3 c2) − b1 (a2 c3 − a3 c2) + c1 (a2 b3 − b2 a3) = 0
a1 b1 c1
or a2 b2 c2 = 0 ...(4)
a3 b3 c3
Thus, (4) is the condition of consistency of the given system under the assumption a1b2 − a2

d
b1 ≠ 0. This condition (4) is also referred to as the eliminant of the given system of equations and

ite
the process of finding the condition of consistency is called elimination.
Ex. 39. Use Cramer’s rule to solve

m
(i) 7x + 2y − 25 = 0 (ii) 2 + 3 = 0
x y

Li
2x − y − 4 = 0, 1 − 2 =7
x y

y
Sol. (i) The given equations are

n
7x + 2y = 25 ...(1)

pa
2x − y = 4 ...(2)
7 2
D = 2 − 1 = − 7 − 4 = − 11. Since D ≠ 0, therefore, the solution exists.
om
25 2 = − 25 − 8 = − 33, D = 7 25 = 28 − 50 = − 22
Dx = 4 −1 y 2 4
C

Dx − 33 D y − 22
∴ x = = =3 y= = = 2 . Hence, x = 3, y = 2.
D − 11 D − 11
nd

(ii) Given system of equations are 2 + 3 = 0

x y
A

1 − 2 =7
x y
nd

Let 1 = u and 1 = v . Then the given equations become

x y
ha

2u + 3v = 0
u − 2v = 7
C

2 3 0 3 2 0
D = 1 − 2 = − 4 − 3 = − 7, Du = 7 − 2 = − 21, Dv = 1 7 = 14
S

Du − 21 D 14 1
∴ By Cramer’s rule u = = =3 ⇒ x= 1 ,v= v = = −2 ⇒ y = −
−7 D −7
©

D 3 2
1 1
Hence, x = and y = −
3 2
Ex. 40. Solve the following system of equations
(i) x + 3y = 2 (ii) 2x + 7y = 9
2x + 6y = 7 4x + 14 y = 18
Ch 2–40 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Sol. (i) x + 3y = 2 ...(1)

2x + 6y = 7 ...(2)
1 3 2 3
D = 2 6 = 6 − 6 = 0, Dx = 7 6 = 12 − 21 = − 9
Since at least one of the determinants Dx ≠ 0, therefore, the given system is inconsistent i.e., it has
no solution
(ii) 2x + 7y = 9 ... (1)
4x + 14y = 18 ...(2)
2 7
D = 4 14 = 28 − 28 = 0

d
ite
9 7 2 9
Dx = 18 14 = 126 − 126 = 0, Dy = 4 18 = 36 − 36 = 0

m
Since D = 0 and Dx = Dy = 0, therefore, the system has infinitely many solutions or is inconsistent.
9 − 2k
Let x = k. Then, from (1), 2k + 7y = 9 ⇒ y =

Li
7
Substituting this value in (2), we get

y
9 − 2k ⎞
4 (k ) + 14 ⎛⎜ ⎟ = 18 ⇒ 4k + 18 − 4k = 18 ⇒ 18 = 18, which is true.

n
⎝ 7 ⎠

pa
∴ The given system has infinitely many solutions given by x = k, y = 9 − 2k , where k is any
7
real number. The system is dependent. om
Ex. 41. Using determinants, solve the equations
− 4x + 2y − 9z = 2, 3x + 4y + z = 5, x − 3y + 2z = 8
−4 2 −9
C

Sol. Let D = 3 4 1
1 −3 2
nd

= − 4 (8 + 3) − 2 (6 − 1) − 9 (− 9 − 4) = − 44 − 10 + 117 = 63
Œ D ≠0 ∴ The solution exists.
A

2 2 −9
Dx = 5 4 1 = 2 (8 + 3) − 2 (10 − 8) − 9 (− 15 − 32) = 22 − 4 + 423 = 441
8 −3 2
nd

− 4 2 −9
Dy = 3 5 1 = − 4 (10 − 8) − 2 (6 − 1) − 9 (24 − 5) = − 8 − 10 − 171 = − 189
ha

1 8 2
−4 2 2
4 5 = − 4 (32 + 15) − 2(24 − 5) + 2 (− 9 − 4) = − 188 − 38 − 26 = − 252
C

Dz = 3
1 −3 8
S

Dx 441 D y − 189 D − 252

∴ x = = = 7, y = = = − 3, z = z = =−4
D 63 D 63 D 63
©

∴ The solution is x = 7, y = − 3, z = − 4.
Ex. 42. Solve the following system of equations by Cramer’s rule
2 + 3 + 10 = 4, 4 − 6 + 5 = 1 and 6 + 9 − 20 = 2.
x y z x y z x y z
Determinants Ch 2–41

1 1 1
Sol. Let = u, y = v and = w. Then, the above set of equations becomes
x z
2u + 3v + 10w = 4
4u − 6v + 5w = 1
6u + 9v − 20w = 2
2 3 10
Œ D = 4 −6 5 = 2 (120 − 45) − 3 (− 80 − 30) + 10 (36 + 36)
6 9 − 20 = 150 + 330 + 720 = 1200 ≠ 0 ∴ solution exists.
4 3 10
5 = 4 (120 − 45) − 3 (− 20 − 10) + 10 (9 + 12)

d
Du = 1 − 6
2 9 − 20 = 300 + 90 + 210 = 600

ite
2 4 10
Dv = 4 1 5 = 2 (− 20 − 10) − 4 (− 80 − 30) + 10 (8 − 6)
6 12 − 20 = − 60 + 440 + 20 = 400

m
Li
2 3 4
= 2 (–12 − 9) – 3 (8 − 6) + 4 (36 + 36)
Dw = 4 − 6 1 = − 42 − 6 + 288 = 240
6 9 2

y
Du D D
∴ = 600 = 1 , v = v = 400 = 1 , w = w = 240 = 1

n
u =
D 1200 2 D 1200 3 D 1200 5

pa
1 1 1 1 1 1
i.e., = , = , = ⇒ x = 2, y = 3, z = 5.
x 2 y 3 z 4 om
Ex. 43. Use Cramer’s rule to solve
2 2 2 2
x + y + z = 1, ax + by + cz = k, a x + b y + c z = k (ISC)
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
C

Sol. Let D = a b c = a b−a c − a = (b − a) (c − a) a 1 1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
a b c a b −a c −a a b + a c+ a
nd

1 1
= (b − a) (c − a) 1 . b + a c + a = (b − a) (c − a) (c + a − b − a)
A

= (b − a) (c − a) (c − b) = (a − b) (b − c) (c − a) ...(1)
1 1 1
nd

Dx = k b c = (k − b) (b − c) (c − k) replacing a by k in (1)
2 2 2
k b c
ha

Similarly,
1 1 1 1 1 1
c = (a − k) (k − c) (c − a), Dz = a b k = (a − b) (b−k) (k − a)
C

Dy = a k
2 2 2 2 2 2
a k c a b k
S

Dx (k − b) (c − k ) Dy (a − k ) (k − c) D (b − k ) (k − a)
Then x = = , y= = , z= z = .
D (a − b) (c − a) D (a − b) (b − c) D (b − c) (c − a)
©

2
− 3) = 6. Determine the
Ex. 44. Find a, b, c when f (x) = ax + bx + c, f (0) = 6, f (2) = 11 and f (−
quadratic function f (x) and find its value when x = 1.
2
Sol. f (x) = ax + bx + c ; Putting x = 0, 2, − 3 we have
f (0) = a · 0 + b · 0 + c = 6, f (2) = a · 4 + b · 2 + c = 11,
f (− 3) = a · 9 + b · (− 3) + c = 6
⇒ 0 · a + 0 · b + c = 6, 4a + 2b + c = 11, 9a − 3b + c = 6
Ch 2–42 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

0 0 1
∴ D = 4 2 1 = 1 ⋅ (− 12 − 18) = − 30 ≠ 0 ∴ The solution exists.
9 −3 1
6 0 1
Da = 11 2 1 = 6 (2 + 3) + 1( − 33 − 12) = 30 − 45 = − 15, expanding along 1st row.
6 −3 1
0 6 1
Db = 4 11 1 = − 6 (4 − 9) + 1 (24 − 99) = 30 − 75 = − 45
9 6 1
0 0 6

d
Dc = 4 2 11 = 6 (− 12 − 18) = 6 (− 30) = − 180

ite
9 −3 6
Da − 15 1 D − 45 3 D − 180
∴ a = = = , b= b = = , c= c = =6

m
D − 30 2 D − 30 2 D − 30
1 2 3
f (x) = ax + bx + c = x + x + 6.
2
∴

Li
2 2
when 1 2 3
x = 1, f (1) = × (1) + × 1 + 6 = 8. Hence, the value of (x) at x = 1 is 8.

y
2 2
Ex. 45. Determine whether the system

n
x − 3y + 2z = 4, 2x + y − 3z = − 2, 4x − 5y + z = 5 is consistent.

pa
1 −3 2 4 −3 2
Sol. Δ = 2 1 − 3 = 0 . However, Δx = − 2
om 1 −3 =−7
4 −5 1 5 −5 1
Since at least one of the determinants Δx, Δy, Δz ≠ 0 so the equations are inconsistent. This could
be seen in another way by multiplying the first equation by 2 and adding to the second equation to
C

obtain 4x − 5y + z = 6 which is not consistent with the last equation.

Ex. 46. Determine whether the system
nd

4x − 2y + 6z = 8, 2x − y + 3z = 5, 2x − y + 3z = 4 is consistent.
Sol. The given equations are
A

4x − 2y + 6z = 8 ...(1)
2x − y + 3z = 5 ...(2)
nd

2x − y + 3z = 4 ...(3)
4 −2 6 8 −2 6
−1 3 = 0, Dx = 5 − 1 3 = 0
ha

D = 2
2 −1 3 4 −1 3
4 8 6 4 −2 8
C

Dy = 2 5 3 = 0, Dz = 2 − 1 5 = 0
2 4 3 2 −1 4
S

Since D = Dx = Dy = Dz = 0, therefore, nothing definite can be concluded from these facts. The
system may be consistent or inconsistent.
©

On closer examination of the system, we notice that the second and third equations are
inconsistent. Hence the system is inconsistent.
Ex. 47. Solve the following system of equations by using determinants :
x − y + 3z = 6
x + 3y − 3z = − 4
5x + 3y + 3z = 10 (ISC)
Determinants Ch 2–43

Sol. The given equations are

x − y + 3z = 6
x + 3y − 3z = − 4
5x + 3y + 3z = 10
1 −1 3
∴ D = 1 3 −3 = 1 (9 + 9) + 1 (3 + 15) + 3 (3 − 15) = 18 + 18 − 36 = 0
5 3 3
6 −1 3
Further, Dx = −4 3 −3 = 6 (18) + 1 (− 12 + 30) + 3 (− 12 − 30) = 0
10 3 3

d
1 6 3

ite
Dy = 1 −4 −3 = 1 (− 12 + 30) − 6 (3 + 15) + 3 (10 + 20) = 0
5 10 3
−1

m
1 6
Dz = 1 3 −4 = 1 (30 + 12) + 1 (10 + 20) + 6 (3 − 15) = 0
5 3 10

Li
∴ The system has either infinitely many solutions or no solution.
Putting z = k in the first two equations, we get

y
x − y = 6 − 3k

n
x + 3y = − 4 + 3k

pa
This represents a system of two equations in two variables x, y.
1 −1
∴ D = 1 3 = 3 +1= 4 ≠ 0.
om
6 − 3k − 1 = 18 − 9k − 4 + 3k = 14 − 6k
Dx = − 4 + 3k 3
C

1 6 − 3k = − 4 + 3k − 6 + 3k = 6k − 10.
Dy = 1 − 4 + 3k
nd

Dx 14 − 6k 7 − 3k D y 6k − 10 3k − 5
∴ x = = = , y= = =
D 4 2 D 4 2
A

Putting the values of x, y and z in the last equation, we get

7 − 3k ⎞ ⎛ 3k − 5 ⎞ + 3k
5 ⎛⎜ ⎟ + 3⎜ ⎟
nd

= 10.
⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠
⇒ 35 − 15k + 9k − 15 + 6k = 20 ⇒ 20 = 20, which is true.
ha

7 − 3k 3k − 5
∴ The solution is x = ,y= , z = k , where k is any real number.
2 2
These are infinitely many solutions.
C

Ex. 48. Determine whether the system

2x + y − 2z = 4, x − 2y + z = − 2, 5x − 5y + z = − 2 is consistent.
S

Sol. D = Dx = Dy = Dz = 0. Hence nothing can be concluded from these facts.

©

3 4
Solving the first two equations for x and y (in terms of z), x = ( z + 2), y = ( z + 2).
5 5
These values are found by substitution to satisfy the third equation. (If they did not satisfy the
third equation the system would be inconsistent).

Hence the values x = 3 ( z + 2), y = 4 ( z +2) satisfy the system and there are infinite sets
5 5
of solutions, obtained by assigning various values to z. Thus if z = 3, then x = 3, y = 4 ; if z = − 2, then
x = 0, y = 0; etc. Hence the system of equations is dependent.
Ch 2–44 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Ex. 49. Solve : x + y + z = 1, 2x + 2y + 2z = 2, 3x + 3y + 3z = 4.

Sol. The given equations are
x+y+z = 1 ...(1)
2x + 2y + 2z = 2 ...(2)
3x + 3y + 3z = 4 ...(3)
1 1 1
D = 2 2 2 =0
3 3 3
Since D = 0, Cramer’s rule does not apply. However, we observe that Dx = Dy = Dz = 0. Therefore,

d
the system may have infinite solutions or no solution.

ite
To check, consider equations (1) and (3) and let z = k, we have
x+y = 1−k ...(4)

m
3x + 3y = 4 − 3k ...(5)
1 1 1− k 1

Li
Since D = 1 3 = 0 and Dx = 4 − 3k 3 = 3 − 3k − 4 + 3k = − 1 ≠ 0.
Therefore, the system of equations given by equations (4) and (5) has no solution. [Remark (iii),

y
Art. 2.11].

n
Hence, the system of given equations will have no solution, i.e., it is inconsistent.
Ex. 50. By using determinants, prove that there is no solution for the equations:

pa
x + 4y − 2z = 3, 3x + y + 5z = 7, 2x + 3y + z = 5. (ISC)
Sol. The given equations are
om
x + 4y − 2z = 3
3x + y + 5z = 7
C
2z + 3y + z = 5
Remark. In order to show that the given system of equations is inconsistent, it is also sufficient
nd

to show that D = 0 and at least one of Dx, Dy, Dz is non−zero.

1 4 −2
Here, D = 3 1 5 = 1 (1 − 15) − 4 (3 − 10) − 2 (9 − 2) = − 14 + 28 − 14 = 0
A

2 3 1
∴ The system has either infinitely many solutions or no solution.
nd

3 4 −2
Further, Dx = 7 1 5 = 3 (1 − 15) − 4 (7 − 25) − 2 (21 − 5) = − 2
ha

5 3 1
Since, at least one of the determinants Dx, Dy, Dz ≠ 0 therefore the given system is inconsistent.
C

Homogeneous equations
Ex. 51. Prove that the following system of equations are consistent.
S

(i) 4x + 5y − 9 = 0 (ii) x + 3y + z = 0
11x − 4y − 7 = 0
©

55x + 5y + 7z = 0
x + 2y − 3 = 0 9x + 7y + 3z = 0
Sol. (i) The equations are consistent
4 5 −9
if 11 − 4 − 7 = 0,
1 2 −3
Determinants Ch 2–45

i.e., if 4 (12 + 14) − 5 (−33 + 7) − 9 (22 + 4) = 0, i.e., if 104 + 130 − 234 = 0, which is true. Hence,
the equations are consistent.
(ii) The equations are consistent if
1 3 1
55 5 7 = 0
9 7 3
L.H.S. = 1 (15 − 49) − 55 (9 − 7) + 9 (21 − 5) = − 34 − 110 + 144 = 0
Hence, the equations are consistent.
Ex. 52. Solve the following system of homogeneous equations :
3x − 4y + 5z = 0

d
x + y − 2z = 0

ite
2x + 3y + z = 0
3 −4 5 = 3 (1 + 6) + 4 (1 + 4) + 5 (3 − 2)

m
Sol. D= 1 1 − 2 = 21 + 20 + 5 = 46 ≠ 0
2 3 1

Li
Since D ≠ 0, by remark (iv), Art. 2.11 (B), the system of equations has only trivial solution, i.e.,
x = y = z = 0.

y
Ex. 53. Solve the following system of homogeneous equations

n
x + y − 2z = 0 ...(1)

pa
2x + y − 3z = 0 ...(2)
5x + 4y − 9z = 0 ...(3)
1 1 −2
om
= 1 (− 9 + 12) − 1 (−18 + 15) − 2 (8 − 5)
Sol. D = 2 1 −3 = 3 + 3 − 6 = 0
5 4 −9
Since D = 0, by remark (iv), Art 2.11 (B) in Cramer’s rule the system has infinite solutions. Consider
C

first two equations and take z = k. Then,

x + y = 2k,
nd

2x + y = 3k
Solving these equations by Cramer’s rule, we have
A

1 1 2k 1 1 2k
D = 2 1 = − 1 ≠ 0, Dx = 3k 1 = − k, Dy = 2 3k = − k
nd

Dx −k Dy −k
Hence by Cramer’s rule x = = = k, y = = =k
Dy −1 D −1
ha

By substituting the values of x, y, z in equation (3), we have

L.H.S. = 5x + 4y − 9z = 5k + 4k − 9k = 0 = R.H.S.
C

Since equation (3) is satisfied, therefore, x = k, y = k, z = k is the solution for each k ∈ R.

S

EXERCISE 2 (e)
Solve the following systems of equations, using determinants :
©

1. 7x − 2y = − 7 2. 5x + 2y = 3 3. 2x + y = 1
2x − y = 1 3x + 2y = 5 x − 2y = 8
4. 3x + ay = 4 5. (i) 1 + 2 = 8 (ii) 2 − 1 =8
x y x y
3 + 1 = −1 3 + 2 =5
2x + ay = 2, a ≠ 0 x y
x y
Ch 2–46 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

6. 2x + 3y = 0 7. 3x + 4y = 1 8. 5x − y = 7
2x − 3y = 0 6x + 8y = 2 15x − 3y = 21
[Hint. D ≠ 0, Dx = 0, Dy = 0
∴ The system has only the trivial solution x = y = 0]
9. x − y = 1 10. 5x − 7y + z = 11 11. x + 3y + 5z = 22
x+z=−6 6x − 8y − z = 15 5x − 3y + 2z = 5
x + y − 2z = 3 (ISC 2002) 3x + 2y − 6z = 7 9x + 8y − 3z = 16
12. x − y + z = 4 13. 2x − y + 3z = 1
2x + y − 3z = 0 x + 2y − z = 2

d
3x + y + z = 6 5y − 5z = 3

ite
14. The sum of three numbers is 6. If we multiply the third number by 2 and add the first number to the
result, we get 7. By adding second and third numbers to three times the first number, we get 12.
Use determinants to find the numbers.

m
[Hint. The equations are x + y + z = 6, 2z + x = 7, y + z + 3x = 12. Solve these by Cramer’s rule.]

Li
15. The perimeter of a triangle is 45 cm. The longest side exceeds the shortest side by 8 cm and the sum
of the lengths of the longest and the shortest side is twice the length of the other side. Find the
lengths of sides of the triangle.

y
Determine whether each system is consistent.

n
16. 2x − y = 5 17. 2x − 3y + z = 1

pa
4x − 2y = 7 (ISC) x + 2y − z = 1
om 3x − y + 2z = 6
18. x + 3y − 2z = 2 19. 2x − y + z = 4
3x − y − z = 1 x + 3y + 2z = 12
2x + 6y − 4z = 3 3x + 2y + 3z = 10
C

20. x + y = 2
2x − z = 1
nd

2y − 3z = 1 (ISC 1998)
21. (i) Show that the following equations are consistent :
A

4x − 3y + 1 = 0, 7x − 8y + 10 = 0, x + y − 5 = 0
(ii) Find whether the following equations are consistent :
nd

2x + 3y − 17 = 0, x − 2y + 16 = 0, 3x + y − 1 = 0
22. Find k so that the following equations are consistent : (ISC)
ha

(a) 2x − y + 3 = 0 (b) 2x + 3y + 4 = 0
kx − y + 1 = 0 3x + 4y + 6 = 0
C

5x − y − 3 = 0 4x + 5y − k = 0 (ISC)
S

[Hint. (a) Solving 1st and 3rd equations by Cramer’s rule, we get x = 2 and y = 7. For consistency the
third equation must be satisfied by these values].
©

23. Obtain the condition of consistency in the form of a determinant for the following three equations :
2x + 3y − 8 = 0; 7x − 5y + 3 = 0; 4x − 6y + λ = 0
and hence find the value of λ. (ISC)
24. Find the values of k if the following equations are consistent,
x + y − 3 = 0 ; (1 + k) x + (2 + k) y − 8 = 0 ; kx − (1 + k) y + 2 + k = 0 (ISC)
Determinants Ch 2–47

25. If the following equations are consistent and have more than one solution, find the values of λ :
u + v = − (λv + 1) ; u + 2v = − λ (v − 1) + 1 ; 3u + 8v = λ + 2 (ISC 1990)
26. Given x = cy + bz, y = az + cx, z = bx + ay, where x, y, z are not all zero, prove that
a 2 + b 2 + c 2 + 2abc = 1
[x − cy − bz = 0, cx − y + az = 0, bx + ay − z = 0, x, y, z are not zero, it has non-zero solution if,
1 −c −b
D = 0, i.e. c − 1 a = 0.
b a −1

d
ANSWERS

ite
1. x = − 3, y = − 7 2. x = − 1, y = 4 3. x = 2, y = − 3

m
2 1, y= 1 1 −1
4. x = 2, y = − , a≠ 0 5. (i) x = − , (ii) x = , y =
a 2 5 3 2

Li
1 − 3k
6. x = 0, y = 0 7. x = k, y = , where k is any number
4

y
8. x = k, y = 5k − 7, where k is any number 9. x = − 2, y = − 3, z = − 4

n
10. x = 1, y = − 1, z = − 1 11. x = 1, y = 2, z = 3

pa
7 − 5k 5k − 3
12. x = 2, y = − 1, z = 1 13. x =
om , y = k, z = , where k is any number
5 5
14. 3, 1, 2 15. 19 cm, 15 cm, 11 cm 16. Inconsistent 17. Consistent
18. Inconsistent 19. Inconsistent 20. Consistent 21. (ii) Consistent
C

22. (a) k = 3, (b) k = − 8

nd

2 3 −8
7 −5 3 = 0, Þ λ = 8 1 −5
23. 24. k = 1 or − 25. λ = 1 or
4 −6 λ 2 3
A
nd
ha
C
S
©
 d
ite
m
Li
MATRICES

y
Syllabus

n
pa
• Of order m × n, when m, n ≤ 3, including case m = n; Types of
matrices.
om
• Operations : Addition / Subtraction (compatibility);
Multiplication by a scalar; Multiplication of two matrices
C

(compatibility).
nd

Application of matrix multiplication

• Adjoint and inverse of a matrix
A

• Use of matrices to solve simultaneous linear equations in 2

nd

or 3 unknowns.
ha
C
S
©
 3
Matrices

d
3.01. The concept of a matrix

ite
It is often desirable to present a set of numbers (or other elements) in a rectangular array of rows
and columns. The table of values of trigonometric functions is an example of such an arrangement; in
it the columns have the headings sine, cosine, tangent, and cotangent, and the rows are designated by

m
angles, expressed in degrees. It is conventional to call the vertical lines columns and the horizontal
lines rows.

Li
1. Here is a Bowling Analysis in cricket.

y
Overs Maidens Runs Wickets

n
Yogesh 15 7 70 5

pa
John 18 6 55 4
Aslam 10 3 om 21 1
2. Here is an example of simultaneous linear equations :
2x − 3y = 7
1 x + 5y
C
=9
2
These may be set down as below :
nd

Coefficient of x Coefficient of y Constant term

2 −3 7
A

1
5 9
2
nd

Tables are a concise method of presenting a mass of information. When we construct a table
from a collection of data, we generally arrange the data in rows and columns. We extract the information
from the table by reading the entry corresponding to a row and column intersection. Any table is a
ha

matrix.
Definition. A Matrix (plural is matrices) is an array of real numbers (or other suitable
C

entities), arranged in rows and columns.

S

Entries. The entities are called entries, or elements, of a matrix. In this book we shall consider
only real numbers as entries. A matrix is customarily displayed in a pair of brackets or parentheses.
©

If a matrix appears in an understood context, we may omit the row and column headings. Thus the
matrices of illustration Nos. 1 and 2 above can be represented as
⎡15 7 70 5⎤ ⎡ 2 − 3 7⎤
⎢18 6 55 4 ⎥ and ⎢ 1
5 9 ⎥⎥
respectively.
⎣⎢10 3 21 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 ⎦
The following are all matrices :

Ch 3–3
Ch 3–4 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡ 3⎤
⎡3 0 2 ⎤ , ⎢ 5⎥ , ⎡ 0 − 1 2⎤
⎣⎢5 1 4⎦⎥ ⎢ 0 ⎥ ⎢⎣ 2 3 ⎥⎦
⎢⎣ − 7 ⎥⎦

3.02. The order of a matrix

The order or dimension of a matrix is the ordered pair having as first component the number of
rows and as second component the number of columns in the matrix. Thus,
⎡ a1 a2 a3 a4 ⎤
⎡1 ⎤ ⎢b b b b ⎥
⎡ 1 2 3⎤ ⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣ 4 5 6 ⎥⎦ , ⎢ 2 ⎥ , and ⎢ c1 c2 c3 c4 ⎥
1 2 3 4

d
⎣3⎦ ⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣ d1 d 2 d3 d 4 ⎥⎦

ite
are 2 × 3 (read “two by three”), 3 × 1 (read “three by one”) and 4 × 4 (read “four by four”) matrices,
respectively. Note that the number of rows is given first, and then the number of columns.

m
Generally, a matrix that has m rows and n columns is called an m × n (read “m by n”) matrix, or
a matrix of order m × n.

Li
A matrix is also denoted by using double subscripts, where a single letter, say a is used to denote
an entry in a matrix and then two subscripts are appended, the first subscript telling in which row the

y
entry occurs, and the second telling which column. Thus, we write

n
⎡ a11 a12 a13 ⎤
A = ⎢ a21 a22 a23 ⎥
aij

pa
⎢ ⎥
⎣⎢ a31 a32 a33 ⎦⎥
om Elements in
where a21 is the element in the second row and first column, a32 is the element in the ith row and
third row and second column. Generalising, aij is the element in ith row and jth jth column.
column.
C
The general form of a matrix with m rows and n columns is
⎡ a11 a12 a13 ... ... a1n ⎤
nd

⎢a a 22 a 23 ... ... a 2n ⎥
⎢ 21 ⎥
a a32 a33 ... ... a3n ⎥
Am × n = ⎢ 31
A

⎢ ... ... ... ... ... ...⎥

⎢ ... ... ... ... ... ...⎥
⎢a ... amn ⎥⎦⎥
⎣⎢ m1 am 2 am 3
nd

...
This (m × n) matrix can be denoted compactly as (aij)m × n.
⎡ 5 2 0⎤
ha

Ex. 1. Let A = ⎢ − 1 3 7 ⎥ ⋅
⎢ 6 1 4⎥
⎣ ⎦
C

Sol. Then A is a 3 × 3 matrix. The element 7 occurs in the second row and third column. We may
write a23 = 7. Similarly a31 = 6.
S

Ex. 2. If a matrix has 12 elements, what are the possible orders it can have ? What will be
the possible orders if it has 7 elements ?
©

Sol. We know that a matrix of order m × n has mn elements. Hence, to find all possible orders
of a matrix having 12 elements, we will find all ordered pairs the product of whose components is 12.
The possible ordered pairs having the property stated above are (1, 12), (12, 1), (2, 6), (6, 2),
(3, 4), (4, 3). Hence possible orders are
1 × 12, 12 × 1, 2 × 6, 6 × 2, 3 × 4 and 4 × 3.
Remark. If the matrix has 7 elements, then the possible orders will be 1 × 7 and 7 × 1.
Matrices Ch 3–5

2
(i + 2 j )
Ex. 3. (a) Construct a 2 × 2 matrix A = [aij] whose elements are given by a ij = ⋅
2
2
(i − 2 j )
(b) Construct a 2 × 3 matrix A, whose elements are given by aij = ⋅
2
2
⎡a a ⎤ (1 + 2)
Sol. (a) Let A = ⎢ 11 12 ⎥ Putting i = 1, j = 1, a11 = = 9⋅
⎣ a21 a22 ⎦ 2 2
2 2 2
(1 + 2 × 2) (2 + 2 × 1) (2 + 2 × 2)
Similarly, a 12 = = 25 , a21 = = 8, a22 = = 18

d
2 2 2 2
⎡ 9 25 ⎤

ite
∴ A = ⎢2 2 ⎥
⎢ 8 18 ⎥ ⋅
⎣ ⎦

m
2
(i − 2 j)
(b) Given, a ij = where 1 ≤ i ≤ 2, 1 ≤ j ≤ 3.
2

Li
⎡ a11 a12 a13 ⎤
Let the reqd. 2 × 3 matrix A be A = ⎢ a ⎥
⎣ 21 a22 a23 ⎦

y
2
(1 − 2) −
2
−
2

n
Then, a 11 = = 1 , a12 = (1 4) = 9 , a13 = (1 6) = 25
2 2 2 2 2 2

pa
2 2 2
(2 − 2) (2 − 4) (2 − 6)
a 21 = = 0, a22 = = 2, a23 = =8
2 2 2
∴ The required matrix is
om
⎡1 9 25 ⎤
⎡ a11 a12 a13 ⎤ ⎢2 2 2 ⎥
⎢a ⎥ = ⎢ ⎥
⎣ 21 a22 a23 ⎦
C
⎣0 2 8 ⎦.
Ex. 4. Construct a 3 × 4 matrix whose elements are aij = i + j.
nd

Sol. Since a ij = i + j, therefore,

a 11 = 1 + 1 = 2, a12 = 1 + 2 = 3, a13 = 1 + 3 = 4, a14 = 1 + 4 = 5
A

a 21 = 2 + 1 = 3, a22 = 2 + 2 = 4, a23 = 2 + 3 = 5, a24 = 2 + 4 = 6

a 31 = 3 + 1 = 4, a32 = 3 + 2 = 5, a33 = 3 + 3 = 6, a34 = 3 + 4 = 7
nd

⎡ a11 a12 a13 a14 ⎤ ⎡2 3 4 5⎤

Hence, the required matrix is ⎢ a21 a22 a23 a24 ⎥ or ⎢ 3 4 5 6⎥
⎢ ⎥ ⎢4 5 6 7⎥
ha

⎢⎣ a31 a32 a33 a34 ⎥⎦ ⎣ ⎦.

Ex. 5. Construct a 2 × 2 matrix A = [aij] whose elements are given by
C

1
(i) aij = | 2i − 3 j |
2

{
S

i − j if i ≥ j
(ii) aij = i + j if i < j
©

⎡a a ⎤
Sol. (i) Let A = [aij ] = ⎢ 11 12 ⎥
a
⎣ 21 22 ⎦a
1 | 2i − 3 j |, a = 1 | 2 − 3 | = 1 | − 1 | = 1 × 1 = 1
Given, a ij = 11
2 2 2 2 2
1 | 2 − 3(2) | = 1 | − 4 | = 1 × 4 = 2, a = 1 | 2(2) − 3 | = 1 × 1 = 1
a 12 = 21
2 2 2 2 2 2
1 | 2 (2) − 3(2) | = 1 | − 2 | = 1 × 2 = 1
a 22 =
2 2 2
Ch 3–6 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII
⎡ 1 2⎤
⎢ ⎥⋅
Hence, the required matrix is A = ⎢ 2
1 1⎥
⎢⎣ 2 ⎥⎦
(ii) Here, a 11 = 1 − 1 = 0, a12 = 1 + 2 = 3, a21 = 2 − 1 = 1, a22 = 2 − 2 = 0
⎡0 3 ⎤
∴ A = ⎢ .
⎣1 0 ⎥⎦
3.03. Types of matrices
(i) Rectangular matrix. Any m × n matrix, where m ≠ n, is called a rectangular matrix.

d
⎡ 1 − 4⎤

ite
For example, ⎢0 2 ⎥ is a rectangular matrix.
⎢⎣6 3⎥⎦

m
(ii) Row matrix. A matrix having only one row is called a row matrix.
e.g., [3 7 1 − 2]1 × 4, [0 − 3 6]1 × 3 are row matrices.

Li
(iii) Column matrix. A matrix which has only one column is called a column matrix.

⎡ 3⎤ ⎡ 0⎤

y
e.g., ⎢ 2⎥ , ⎢ − 3⎥ , etc.
⎢ 4⎥

n
⎣⎢ − 1⎦⎥3 × 1 ⎣⎢ 5⎦⎥ 4 × 1

pa
(iv) Square matrix. A matrix in which the number of rows is equal to the number of columns is
called a square matrix. An m × m matrix is termed as a square matrix of order m. A 2 × 2 matrix is a
om
square matrix of order 2, a 3 × 3 matrix is a square matrix of order 3.
⎡ a1 b1 c1 ⎤
For example, the matrices ⎡1 3 ⎤ , ⎢ a b c ⎥ are square matrices.
C
⎢⎣6 7 ⎥⎦ ⎢ 2 2 2 ⎥
⎣ a3 b3 c3 ⎦
nd

The fact that matrices may be interpreted in various ways makes them useful in coordinate
geometry. For example, the point 5, − 2 can be denoted by the matrix [5 − 2]. Such a matrix having only

one row is called a row matrix or a row vector. It may also be denoted by the matrix ⎢ ⎥ ⋅
⎡ 5⎤
A

⎣− 2⎦
A matrix of this type having one column is called a column matrix or a column vector.
nd

The coordinates (1, 2, 3) of a point in space may be designated as [1 2 3] by a row matrix or as

⎡1 ⎤
ha

⎢ 2 ⎥ by a column matrix.
⎢3⎥
⎣ ⎦
C

It is no accident that the same notation is used for a

column matrix and a column vector : you have seen in Book
S

1 in the chapters on vectors that they have the same

properties.
©

A polygon is determined by its vertices, and each vertex

is a point (x, y). We can use matrices to denote polygons.
For example quadrilateral ABCD in Fig. 2.01 has vertices
⎡ −3⎤ , ⎡ 3 ⎤ , ⎡5⎤ , ⎡ −1⎤ . Putting these column vertices into
⎣⎢ 1 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 4 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢1 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ −2 ⎦⎥
single 2 by 4 matrix. Fig. 3.01
Matrices Ch 3–7

⎡ −3 3 5 −1⎤
⎢⎣ 1 4 1 −2 ⎥⎦
We have a matrix representing quad. ABCD. Each column refers to one vertex of the quadrilateral.
−1 3 ⎡ −3 3 −1 ⎤
Similarly, the diagonal DB of ABCD is represented by ⎡⎢ −2 4 ⎤⎥ . What could ⎢ 1 4 −2 ⎥ represent?
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Note. If A = [aij] be a square matrix of order m, then the elements aij for which i = j, are called the
diagonal elements of A.
Thus, the diagonal elements of A = [aij] are a11, a22, a33, ...., amm.

d
The line along which the diagonal elements of a square matrix lie, is known as the main or leading
diagonal of the matrix.

ite
⎡ 7 − 2 1⎤
e.g., The matrix ⎢ 3 0 5⎥ is a 3-rowed square matrix in which the diagonal elements are 7, 0,
⎢− 1 4 8⎥⎦

m
⎣
and 8.

Li
(v) Diagonal matrix. It is a square matrix all of whose elements except those in the leading
diagonal, are zero.

y
⎡ a11 0 0 ⎤ ⎡2 0 0⎤
For example, ⎢ 0 a22 0 ⎥ and ⎢ 0 7 0⎥

n
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 0 0 − 1⎥
⎣⎢ 0 0 a33 ⎦⎥ ⎣ ⎦

pa
Definition. A square matrix A = [aij ]n × n is called a diagonal matrix if all the elements, except
those in the leading diagonal are zero, i.e., aij = 0 for all i ≠ j.
om
A diagonal matrix of order n × n having d1, d2, ......., dn as diagonal elements may be denoted by
diag. [d1, d2, ......., dn].
⎡3 0 0 ⎤
C

Thus, the matrix ⎢0 4 0 ⎥ may be denoted by diag [3, 4, − 7].

⎢0 0 − 7 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
nd

(vi) Scalar matrix. A square matrix in which the diagonal elements are all equal, all other
elements being zeros, is called a scalar matrix.
A

⎡3 0 0 ⎤
e.g., ⎢0 3 0⎥ is a third order scalar matrix.
nd

⎢0 0 3⎥
⎣ ⎦
Definition. A square matrix A = [aij]n × n is called a scalar matrix if

{
ha

0, for all i ≠ j
a ij =
α, if i = j , where α ≠ 0
C

(vii) Unit matrix or Identity matrix. A square matrix in which each diagonal element is unity, all
other elements being zeros, is called a unit matrix or an identity matrix.
S

Unit matrix of order n is denoted by In.

⎡1 0 0 ⎤
©

⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎢0 1 0 ⎥
e.g., I2 = ⎢ , I =
⎣0 1 ⎥⎦
3
⎢0 0 1 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
Definition. A square matrix A = [aij] n × n is called an identity or unit matrix if

a ij = { 1, if i = j
0, if i ≠ j
(viii) Sub-matrix. A matrix obtained by deleting the rows or columns or both of a matrix is called
sub-matrix.
Ch 3–8 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡ 5 7 3⎤
⎡ 5 7⎤ ⎢ − 1 2 0 ⎥ , obtained by deleting third
For example, A = ⎢ is sub-matrix of matrix B =
⎣ − 1 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢ 4 1 0⎥
⎣ ⎦
row and third column of matrix B.
(ix) Comparable matrices. Two matrices A and B are said to be comparable if they are of the same
order, i.e., they have the same number of rows and the same number of columns.

e.g., ⎡ 1 0 − 3⎤ and ⎡ − 1 2 3⎤ are comparable matrices, each being of order 2 × 3.

⎢⎣ 2 7 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 4 0 5⎥⎦

3.04. Equality of matrices

d
Two matrices A and B are equal if and only if both matrices are of the same order and each

ite
element of one is equal to the corresponding element of the other,
i.e., A = [aij]m × n and B = [bij]m × n are said to be equal if aij = bij ¼ i, j.

m
⎡2 1⎤ ⎡ 4 / 2 2 − 1⎤ ⎡2 1 ⎤ ⎡2 3⎤
Thus ⎢⎣ 3 0 ⎥⎦ = ⎢ 9 ⎥ , but ⎢ ⎥ ≠ ⎢
⎣ 0⎦ ⎣ 3 0 ⎦ ⎣1 0 ⎥⎦

Li
Ex. 6. Find the values of x, y, z and t which satisfy the matrix equation
⎡ x + 3 x + 2 y⎤ ⎡0 − 7⎤

y
.
⎢⎣ z − 1 4 t − 6 ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣ 3 2 t ⎥⎦

n
Sol. By the principle of equality of matrices,

pa
⎡x + 3 x + 2y⎤ ⎡0 − 7⎤
⎢⎣ z − 1 4t − 6 ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣ 3 ⇒ x+3=0 ⇒ x=−3
2t ⎥⎦
om
z − 1 = 3 ⇒ z = 4, x + 2y = − 7 ⇒ − 3 + 2y = − 7
⇒ y = − 2, 4t − 6 = 2t ⇒ t=3
⎡ 0 0⎤
C

⎡0 0 0 ⎤ ⎢ 0 0⎥ , why ?
Ex. 7. ⎢ ≠
⎣0 0 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢ 0 0⎥
⎣ ⎦
nd

Sol. Because the given matrices are not comparable i.e., they are not of the same order.
Ex. 8. Find the values of x and y so that the matrices
A

⎡2x + 1 3y ⎤ ⎡x + 3 y 2 + 2⎤
A = ⎢
y − 5 y ⎥⎦
, B= ⎢ 0 − 6 ⎥⎦
2
nd

⎣ 0 ⎣
may be equal.
2 2
Sol. A = B ⇒ 2x + 1 = x + 3, 3y = y + 2, y − 5y = − 6
ha

(i) Now, 2x + 1 = x + 3 ⇒ x = 2
2 2
(ii) 3y = y + 2 ⇒ y − 3y + 2 = 0 ⇒ (y − 2) (y − 1) = 0 ⇒ y = 1 or 2.
C

2 2
(iii) y − 5y = − 6 ⇒ y − 5y + 6 = 0 ⇒ (y − 3) (y − 2) = 0 ⇒ y = 3 or 2
Since 3y = y2 + 2 and y2 − 5y = −6 must hold simultaneously.
S

we take the common solution of these two equations, i.e., y = 2.

©

Hence, A = B if x = 2, y = 2.
EXERCISE 3 (a)
1. If a matrix has 8 elements, what are the possible orders it can have ? What if it has 5 elements ?
2. How many entries are there in (i) a 3 × 3 matrix, (ii) a 3 × 4 matrix, (iii) an m × n matrix, (iv) a square
matrix of order n ?
⎡ a11 a12 a13 ⎤
3. Write out the matrix ⎢ a21 a22 a23 ⎥ given that aij = 4i − 3j.
⎢ ⎥
⎣⎢ a31 a32 a33 ⎦⎥
Matrices Ch 3–9
4. Construct a 2 × 2 matrix B = [bij] whose elements are given by
2
(i − 2 j ) 1 ( − 3i + j )
(i) bij = (ii)
2 2
5. Construct a 3 × 4 matrix whose elements are :
i
(i) aij = i − j (ii) aij = ij (iii) aij = .
j
6. (a) Construct a 2 × 3 matrix whose elements are given by
3i − j i + 3j
(i) aij = ⋅ (ii) aij =
2 2
(b) Construct a 3 × 2 matrix whose elements in the ith row and jth column are given by

d
i + 3j 2
(i + 2 j)
(i) aij = . (ii) aij =

ite
.
2 2
⎡5 − 2 1 0 3⎤
7. If A = ⎢7 6 4 2 − 1⎥ , then

m
⎢0 8 3 5 6 ⎥⎦
⎣

Li
(i) State the order of A; (ii) Write down the entries of the second row of A ; (iii) Write down the entries
of the third column of A ; (iv) State the entries a12, a23, a34, a15 of the above matrix; (v) If
aij = 4, find i, j.

n y
8. Find x and y such that

pa
⎡ x y ⎤ = ⎡ − 2 0⎤ ⎡ x + 1⎤ ⎡ − 2 ⎤
(i) ⎢ (ii) [x 3] = [− 1 y] (iii) ⎢ − 3 + y ⎥ = ⎢ 0⎥
⎣ − 1 5 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 1 5⎥⎦ om ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

⎡ x+ y y − z ⎤ ⎡3 − 1⎤
9. If ⎢ = , find x, y, z.
⎣ z − 2x y − x ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣1 1 ⎥⎦

x − y 2 x + z ⎤ ⎡ − 1 5⎤
10. (i) If ⎡⎢
C
= , find x, y, z, w.
⎣ x − y 3z + w⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 13⎥⎦
2

(ii) If matrix ⎡ a + b 2 ⎤ = ⎡6 2 ⎤ , find the values of a and b.

nd

⎢⎣ 5 ab ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣5 8 ⎥⎦
A

ANSWERS
1. 1 × 8, 8 × 1, 2 × 4, 4 × 2. When a matrix has 5 elements, the possible orders are 1 × 5 and 5 × 1.
nd

⎡ 1 − 2 − 5⎤ ⎡1 9⎤ ⎡1 1⎤
3. ⎢5 2 − 1⎥ 4. (i) ⎢ 2 2 ⎥ (ii) ⎢⎢ 2⎥
2
2. (i) 9 (ii) 12 (iii) mn (iv) n
⎢⎣9 6 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 2 ⎥⎦ 5 2⎥
⎢⎣ 2 ⎥⎦
ha

⎡ 0 − 1 − 2 − 3 ⎤ ⎡ 1 2 3 4 ⎤ ⎡ 1 1/2 1/3 1/4 ⎤

5. (i) ⎢ 1 0 − 1 − 2 ⎥ (ii) ⎢ 2 4 6 8 ⎥ (iii) ⎢ 2 1 2/3 1/2 ⎥
C

⎢2 1 0 − 1⎥⎦ ⎢ 3 6 9 12 ⎥ ⎢ 3 3/2 1 3/4 ⎥⎦

⎣ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣
⎡ 2 7⎤ ⎡ 9 25 ⎤
S

⎡ 1 1 0⎤ ⎡ 2 7 5⎤ ⎢ 2⎥ ⎢ 2 2⎥
⎢ ⎥
6. (a) (i) ⎢ 2 ⎥ , (ii) ⎢ 2 ⎥ (b) (i) 5 4
⎢2 ⎥ (ii) ⎢ 8 18 ⎥
⎢5 3⎥ ⎢5 ⎥
©

11 ⎢ 25 49 ⎥
⎢⎣ 2 2 ⎢ ⎥
2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 4 2 ⎥⎦
⎢3 9 ⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎣2 2⎦
⎣⎢ 2 ⎦⎥
7. (i) 3 × 5 (ii) 7, 6, 4, 2, − 1 (iii) 1, 4, 3 (iv) − 2, 4, 5, 3 (v) i = 2, j = 3
8. (i) x = − 2, y = 0 (ii) x = − 1, y = 3 (iii) x = − 3, y = 3
9. x = 1, y = 2, z = 3 10. (i) x = 1, y = 2, z = 3, w = 4, (ii) a = 2, b = 4 or a = 4, b = 2
Ch 3–10 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

OPERATIONS ON MATRICES
3.05. The sum or addition of matrices
Consider the following example :
Rakesh and Anil are close competitors in the mathematics class. They compare their marks at the
end of the second term, the scores for the two terms being as given below :
First term Second term Total
Rakesh Anil Rakesh Anil Rakesh Anil
Algebra 95 90 90 92 185 182
Geometry 85 87 88 89 173 176

d
If we set out this information in matrix form, we can write

ite
⎡95 90 ⎤ + ⎡90 92 ⎤ ⎡185 182 ⎤
⎢⎣85 87 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣88 89 ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣173 176 ⎥⎦

m
This method of combining matrix is called the sum or addition of matrices.

Li
Definition. The sum of two matrices of the same order, Am × n and Bm × n, is the matrix (A + B)m × n
in which the entry in the ith row and jth column is aij + bij, for i = 1, 2, 3, ....m and j = 1, 2, 3, ....n.
Thus, if A = [aij]m × n and B = [bij]m × n, then

y
A + B = [aij + bij]m × n

n
In other words, the sum of two matrices is a matrix of the same order, whose entries are the sums

pa
of the corresponding entries of Am × n and Bm × n.
⎡3 1 2⎤ + ⎡ 1 0 2⎤ ⎡ 3 + 1 1 + 0 2 + 2 ⎤ = ⎡4 1 4 ⎤
Ex. 9.
om
⎢⎣ 2 1 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 1 3 0 ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣ 2 + (− 1) 1 + 3 4 + 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 4 4 ⎥⎦
Note. Two matrices of the same order are said to be compatible or conformable for addition.
The sum of two matrices of different orders is not defined.
C

Ex. 10. Is it possible to define the matrix A + B, when

(i) A has 3 rows and B has 2 rows
nd

(ii) A has 2 columns and B has 4 columns

(iii) A has 3 rows and B has 2 columns
A

(iv) Both A and B are square matrices of the same order ?

Sol. (i) No, because A + B is defined only if A and B are of the same order.
nd

(ii) No. As above.

(iii) Yes, only when A has 2 columns and B has 3 rows for in that case both will be of the same
ha

order.
(iv) Yes. Always.
C

3.06. Zero matrix or null matrix

In the algebra of real numbers R, the equation a + 0 = a is satisfied for all a ∈ R. Accordingly we
S

say that 0 is the identity element for addition in R. In the algebra of matrices, the matrices all of whose
entries are 0 play a corresponding role. Thus
©

⎡ 5 2 ⎤ + ⎡0 0 ⎤ ⎡ 5 + 0 2 + 0⎤ ⎡ 5 2⎤
⎢⎣ − 2 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣ − 2 + 0 3 + 0 ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣ − 2 3⎥⎦
Such a matrix is called a zero matrix and is denoted by 0. It may be of any order. An m × n zero
matrix may also be denoted by 0m × n, or if the matrix is square, we might write 0n, where n indicates
the order of the matrix. Thus,
⎡0 0 0 ⎤
⎡0 0 0 ⎤ 0 = ⎢
01 × 2 = [0 0], 02 × 3 = ⎢ , 0 0 0⎥
⎣0 0 0 ⎥⎦
3
⎢0 0 0 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
Matrices Ch 3–11

3.07. The negative of the matrix

The negative of the matrix Am × n denoted by − Am × n, is the matrix formed by replacing each entry
in the matrix Am × n with the additive inverse.
⎡ 3 − 1⎤ ⎡− 3 1⎤
For example if A3 × 2 = ⎢ 2 − 2 ⎥ , then − A3 × 2 = ⎢ − 2 2⎥
⎢− 4 5⎥⎦ ⎢ 4 − 5⎥
⎣ ⎣ ⎦
The sum Bm × n + (− Am × n) is called the difference of Bm × n and Am × n and is denoted by
Bm × n − Am × n.

d
Definition. If A = (aij)m × n, and X is any matrix of the same order such that A + X = 0, the zero

ite
matrix, then X is called the additive inverse of A. It is clear that X = − A. For example

⎡a ⎤ ⎡− a ⎤ ⎡ a ⎤ ⎡ − a ⎤ ⎡ a − a ⎤ = ⎡0 ⎤
If A = ⎢ ⎥ , then − A = ⎢ ⎥ and A + (− A) = ⎢ ⎥ + ⎢ ⎥ = ⎢

m
⎣b ⎦ ⎣− b⎦ ⎣ b ⎦ ⎣ − b ⎦ ⎣ b − b ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 ⎥⎦

Li
⎡5 − 7 1⎤
Ex. 11. Find the additive inverse of A = ⎢
⎣ 3 0 − 2 ⎥⎦ ⋅

y
Sol. We know that additive inverse of A is a matrix of same order each of whose elements is the

n
negative of corresponding element of A.

pa
⎡ − 5 7 − 1⎤ ⋅
∴ −A = ⎢
⎣− 3 0 2 ⎥⎦
om
3.08. Subtraction of matrices
For the set of real numbers, subtraction was defined as follows :
C

¼ a, b ∈ R, a − b = a + (− b).
nd

We will define the subtraction of matrices in a similar way.

Definition. If A and B are matrices of the same order, then the sum B + (− A) is called the
A

difference or subtraction of B and A is denoted by B − A.

nd

⎡ 2 0 ⎤ and ⎡ 1 − 2⎤ ,
Ex. 12. If L = ⎢ M=⎢ find L − M.
⎣ − 3 6 ⎥⎦ ⎣0 4 ⎥⎦
ha

⎡ 2 0⎤ − ⎡ 1 − 2 ⎤ = ⎡ 2 0⎤ + ⎡− 1 2⎤
Sol. L−M = ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥⎦
⎣ − 3 6 ⎦ ⎣ 0 4 ⎦ ⎣ − 3 6 ⎦ ⎣ 0 − 4
C

⎡ 2 − 1 0 + 2⎤ ⎡ 1 2⎤
= ⎢ =
⎣ − 3 + 0 6 − 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 3 2 ⎥⎦
S

We can obtain the difference directly by subtracting their corresponding entries. Thus
©

⎡ 2 − 1 0 − (− 2) ⎤ = ⎡ 1 2 ⎤
L−M = ⎢
⎣− 3 + 0 6 − 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 3 2 ⎥⎦

3.09. Properties of sums of matrices

At this point, we are able to establish the following facts concerning the set Sm × n (¼ m, n ∈ N) of
all m × n matrices with real number entries.
Ch 3–12 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Theorem: If A, B and C are members of the set Sm × n of all m × n matrices with real number
entries, then
I A + B ∈ Sm × n Closure law for addition
II A + B = B + A Commutative law for addition
III (A + B) + C = A + (B + C) Associative law for addition
IV The matrix 0m × n has the property Additive-identity law
that for every matrix Am × n.
A + 0 = A and 0 + A = A

d
V For every matrix Am × n the matrix − Am × n Additive-inverse law

ite
has the property that
A + (− A) = 0 and (− A) + (A) = 0

m
VI If A, B, C are three matrices of the same order, then
A+B=A+C ⇒ B=C Left cancellation law

Li
B+A=C+A ⇒ B=C Right cancellation law
Compare the properties listed above with the axioms of addition in R.

y
3.10. Solving matrix equations

n
By using the substitution principle and the properties of equality, we can solve certain matrix

pa
equations. Suppose that we have to solve the equation X + A = B for the unknown matrix X. The
answer is easy. We do exactly what we learnt to do with numbers. Add the matrix − A to both sides.
om
This gives
X + A + (− A) = B + (− A)
⇒ X + 0 = B − A, since A + (− A) = 0
C

⇒ X = B − A,
which is the required solution.
nd

⎡ 1 3 ⎤ = ⎡ 4 − 1⎤
Ex. 13. Solve X + ⎢ for the 2 × 2 matrix X.
⎣ − 1 2 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 6 2 ⎦⎥
A

⎡ 4 − 1⎤
X + ⎡⎢
1 3⎤
Sol. ⎥ = ⎢
⎣ − 1 2 ⎦ ⎣6 2⎥⎦
nd

⎡ ⎡ 1 3⎤ ⎤ ⎡ − 1 − 3 ⎤ ⎡ 4 − 1⎤ + ⎡ − 1 − 3⎤
⇒ ⎢ X + ⎢⎣ − 1 2 ⎥⎦ ⎥ + ⎢⎣ 1 − 2 ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣ 6 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 − 2 ⎥⎦
⎣ ⎦
ha

⎡ ⎡ 1 3⎤ ⎡ − 1 − 3⎤ ⎤ ⎡ 4 + (− 1) − 1 + (− 3) ⎤
⇒ X + ⎢⎢ +⎢ ⎥ = ⎢
⎣⎣ − 1 2 ⎥
⎦ ⎣ 1 − 2 ⎥
⎦⎦ ⎣ 6 + 1 2 + (− 2) ⎥⎦
C

X + ⎡⎢
0 0⎤ ⎡ 3 − 4⎤ ⇒ X = ⎡ 3 − 4⎤
⇒ = ⎢
S

⎣ 0 0 ⎥
⎦ ⎣7 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣7 0 ⎥⎦
Checking, we find that
©

⎡ 3 − 4 ⎤ ⎡ 1 3⎤ ⎡ 3 + 1 − 4 + 3⎤ = ⎡ 4 − 1⎤
+⎢ = ⎢
⎢⎣7 ⎥ ⎥
0⎦ ⎣− 1 2⎦ ⎣7 + (− 1) 0 + 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 6 2 ⎥⎦
⎧ 3 − 4⎤ ⎫
Therefore, the solution set is ⎨ ⎡ ⋅
⎩ ⎢⎣ 7 0⎥⎦ ⎬⎭
Matrices Ch 3–13

3.11. Multiplication of a matrix by a scalar

While dealing with matrices, real numbers are often referred to as scalars. We know that
¼x ∈ R, x + x = 2x and x + x + x = 2x + x = 3x. Similarly, we have repeated addition of the same matrix.
⎡a c ⎤ ⋅
Let A = ⎢ By definition of the addition of matrices
⎣b d ⎥⎦

⎡ a c ⎤ ⎡ a c ⎤ ⎡ 2a 2c ⎤
A + A = ⎢ b d ⎥ + ⎢ b d ⎥ = ⎢ 2b 2d ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

d
⎡ a c ⎤ + ⎡ a c ⎤ + ⎡ a c ⎤ = ⎡ 2a 2c ⎤ + ⎡ a c ⎤ = ⎡3a 3c ⎤
and A+A+A = ⎢
⎣ b d ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ b d ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ b d ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2b 2d ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ b d ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3b 3d ⎥⎦

ite
The above examples suggest that we may write A + A as 2A and A + A + A as 3A.

m
We define the product of a real number or scalar k and a matrix A, denoted by kA, as the matrix
whose entries are the products of k and the corresponding entries of A. Thus

Li
⎡ ka kc ⎤
k ⎡⎢
a c⎤
= ⎢ where k ∈ R.
⎥
⎣b d ⎦ ⎣ kb kd ⎥⎦

y
Definition. The product of a real number c and an m × n matrix A with entries aij , is the

n
matrix cA with corresponding entries caij , for i = 1, 2, 3, ..., m and j = 1, 2, 3, ... n.

pa
⎡ 1 − 3⎤
Ex. 14. If A = ⎢ , find 3A and − 2A.
⎣0 2 ⎥⎦ om
⎡ 1 − 3⎤ ⇒ 3 A = 3 ⎡ 1 − 3⎤ = ⎡ 3 × 1 3 × − 3⎤ = ⎡ 3 − 9 ⎤
Sol. A = ⎢
⎣0 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣3 × 0 3 × 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 6 ⎥⎦
⎡ 1 − 3⎤ = ⎡ − 2 × 1 − 2 × − 3⎤ = ⎡ − 2 6⎤
C

Similarly, − 2A = − 2 ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥⎦
⎣ 0 2 ⎦ ⎣ − 2 × 0 − 2 × 2 ⎦ ⎣ 0 − 4
nd

Notice that the product of a real number and a matrix is a matrix.

3.12. Properties of products of matrices and real numbers
A

Products of scalars and matrices have a number of basic properties which follow from the definition
given above and the properties of real numbers. These basic properties are given in the following
nd

theorem.

Theorem. If A ∈ Sm × n and B ∈ Sm × n, where m, n are any given natural numbers and c ∈ R,

ha

d ∈ R, then
I cA ∈ Sm × n V 1A = A
C

II c (A + B) = cA + cB VI (− 1) A = − A
III (c + d) A = cA + dA VII 0A = 0
S

IV (cd) A = c (dA) = d (cA) VIII c0 = 0

©

Ex. 15. Express in a single matrix :

4 ⎡1 3⎤ − 1 ⎡8 4⎤ .
⎣⎢1 − 4 ⎦⎥ 2 ⎢⎣ 4 8 ⎦⎥

4 ⎡1 3⎤ − 1 ⎡ 8 4⎤ ⎡4 12 ⎤ ⎡ 4 2 ⎤ ⎡ 0 10 ⎤
Sol. ⎢⎣1 − 4 ⎥⎦ 2 ⎢⎣ 4 8 ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣ 4 − 16 ⎦⎥ − ⎣⎢ 2 4 ⎦⎥ = ⎢⎣ 2 − 20 ⎦⎥ ⋅
Ch 3–14 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡ 2 5 7⎤
Ex. 16. Find a matrix X such that X + A = 0 and A = ⎢− 3 0 − 4⎥ .
⎢⎣ 3 4 5⎥⎦
⎡0 0 0 ⎤ ⎡ 2 5 7 ⎤ ⎡0 − 2 0−5 0−7 ⎤
Sol. X + A = 0 ⇒ X = ⎢0 0 0 ⎥ − ⎢ − 3 0 − 4 ⎥ = ⎢0 − (−3) 0 − 0 0 − (−4) ⎥
⎢⎣0 0 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3 4 5⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 − 3 0 − 4 0 − 5 ⎦⎥
⎡− 2 − 5 − 7 ⎤
= ⎢ 3 0 4⎥ .
⎣⎢ − 3 − 4 − 5 ⎦⎥
Ex. 17. Find a matrix X such that 3A − 2B + X = 0, where

d
ite
A = ⎡4 2⎤ , B = ⎡− 2 1⎤
⎢⎣ 1 3 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3 2 ⎥⎦
⎡4 2⎤ ⎡− 2 1 ⎤

m
Sol. Given, A = ⎢1 3 ⎥ , B = ⎢
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ 3 2 ⎥⎦

Li
⎡4 2⎤ + ⎡− 2 1 ⎤
Now, 3A − 2B + X = 0 ⇔ X = − 3A + 2B = −3 ⎢ 2⎢
⎣ 1 3 ⎥⎦ ⎣ 3 2⎥⎦

y
⎡ −12 − 6 ⎤ ⎡ − 4 2 ⎤ ⎡ − 12 − 4 − 6 + 2 ⎤ ⎡ − 16 − 4 ⎤
X = ⎢ − 3 − 9 ⎥ + ⎢ 6 4⎥ = ⎢ − 3 + 6 − 9 + 4 ⎥ = ⎢ 3 − 5 ⎥

n
⇔
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

pa
Ex. 18. Solve the equation
⎡ ⎡1 2 3 ⎤ ⎤ ⎡1 0 0⎤
om
− 2 ⎢ X + ⎢ 0 1 2 ⎥ ⎥ = 3 X + ⎢ 0 0 0 ⎥ , over S 3 × 3 .
⎢⎣ ⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
Sol. We first perform the indicated multiplication by − 2 in accordance with part IV of the above
C

theorem to get
⎡− 2 − 4 − 6⎤ ⎡1 0 0 ⎤
nd

− 2 X + ⎢ 0 − 2 − 4 ⎥ = 3X + ⎢0 0 0 ⎥
⎢⎣ 0 0 − 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 1 ⎥⎦
A

Then we add 2X to both sides of the equation to obtain

⎡− 2 − 4 − 6⎤ ⎡1 0 0⎤
nd

⎢ 0 − 2 − 4 ⎥ = 3X + 2 X + ⎢0 0 0⎥
⎢⎣ 0 0 − 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
Now we use part III of the above theorem to find that 3X + 2X = 5X, so that
ha

⎡− 2 − 4 − 6⎤ ⎡1 0 0 ⎤
⎢ 0 − 2 − 4 ⎥ = 5 X + ⎢0 0 0 ⎥
C

⎢⎣ 0 0 − 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 1 ⎥⎦
⎡1 0 0 ⎤
S

Adding − ⎢ 0 0 0 ⎥ to both sides, we get

⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
©

⎡ − 2 − 4 − 6 ⎤ ⎡1 0 0 ⎤ ⎡− 3 − 4 − 6⎤
⎢ 0 − 2 − 4 ⎥ − ⎢0 0 0 ⎥ = 5 X ⇒ ⎢ 0 − 2 − 4 ⎥ = 5 X
⎣⎢ 0 0 − 2 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0 − 3 ⎥⎦

Multiplying both sides of this equation by 1 , we get by part II of the theorem

5
Matrices Ch 3–15

⎡− 3 − 4 − 6⎤ ⎡− 3 − 4 − 6⎤
⎢ 5 5 5 ⎥ ⎢ 5 5 5 ⎥
⎢ − 2 − 4⎥ ⎢
⎢ 0 ⎥ = X ⇒ X =⎢ 0 − 2 − 4⎥
⎥
⎢ 5 5 ⎥ ⎢ 5 5 ⎥
⎢ − 3⎥ ⎢ − 3⎥
⎢⎣ 0 0
5 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0
5 ⎥⎦
This is the required solution.
Ex. 19. If A = diag [3 − 2 1] and B = diag [1 3 − 2], find 2A − 3B.
⎡3 0 0⎤

d
Sol. Given A = diag [3 − 2 1] = ⎢0 − 2 0 ⎥
⎢0 0 1 ⎥

ite
⎣ ⎦
⎡1 0 0 ⎤

m
B = diag [1 3 − 2] = ⎢0 3 0 ⎥
⎢0 0 − 2 ⎥
⎣ ⎦

Li
⎡3 0 0⎤ ⎡1 0 0⎤
∴ 2A − 3B = 2 ⎢0 − 2 0 ⎥ − 3 ⎢0 3 0⎥

y
⎢0 0 1⎥ ⎢0 0 − 2⎥⎦
⎣ ⎦ ⎣

n
⎡ 6 0 0 ⎤ ⎡ 03 0⎤

pa
= ⎢ 0 − 4 0 ⎥ − ⎢0 9 0⎥
⎢0 0 2 ⎥ ⎢0 0 − 6 ⎥⎦
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ om
⎡6 − 3 0 0 ⎤ ⎡3 0 0 ⎤
= ⎢ 0 −4 + 9 0 ⎥ = ⎢ 0 5 0 ⎥ = dig. [3 5 −4]
⎢ 0 2 − 6⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0 − 4 ⎥⎦
C
⎣ 0

cos θ sin θ sin θ − cos θ

Ex. 20. Simplify : cos θ ⎡⎢ − sin θ cos θ ⎤⎥ + sin θ ⎡⎢ cos θ sin θ ⎥⎤ .
nd

⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

Sol. cos θ ⎡ cos θ sin θ ⎤ + sin θ ⎡ sin θ − cos θ ⎤

A

⎣⎢ − sin θ cos θ ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ cos θ sin θ ⎦⎥

⎡ 2
θ cos θ sin θ⎤ + ⎡ sin θ
2
− sin θ cos θ⎤
= ⎢ cos
nd

2 ⎥ ⎢ 2 ⎥
⎣− cos θ sin θ cos θ ⎦ ⎣sin θ cos θ sin θ ⎦
⎡ 2
cos θ + sin θ
2
cos θ sin θ − sin θ cos θ ⎤ = ⎡1 0 ⎤
ha

=⎢ ⎥
⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 1 ⎥⎦
2 2
⎣ − cos θ sin θ + sin θ cos θ cos θ + sin θ
EXERCISE 3 (b)
C

1. Write each sum or difference as a single matrix.

S

(i) [2 3] + [5 1] (ii) ⎡ 3⎤ + ⎡ 2 ⎤
⎢⎣−1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 ⎥⎦
©

⎡− 3 − 2⎤ ⎡ 3 2⎤ ⎡ a b ⎤ ⎡a − b ⎤
(iii) ⎢ 2 + ⎢− b a ⎥ + ⎢b
⎣ 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 2 0 ⎥⎦ (iv)
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ a ⎥⎦
⎡ 1 2 − 1⎤ ⎡ − 1 − 2 1⎤ ⎡cos 2 x sin 2 x ⎤ ⎡ sin 2 x cos
2
x⎤
(v) ⎢3 1 4⎥ + ⎢− 3 0 − 4⎥ (vi) ⎢ ⎥ + ⎢ ⎥
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ 2
⎣⎢ sin x cos x ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢− cos x − sin
2
x ⎦⎥
⎣⎢3 1 − 6 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ −2 − 1 6 ⎦⎥
Ch 3–16 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡ 1 2⎤ ⎡ 2 − 1⎤ ⎡ 4 2⎤
2. (i) Given A = ⎢3 4 ⎥ , B = ⎢ 3 − 2 ⎥ , and C = ⎢ 1 0 ⎥ compute the following :
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣5 6 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 2 − 4 ⎥⎦
(a) A + B, (b) (A + B) + C, (c) A + (B + C), (d) A − B, (e) (A − B) + C, (f) B − A.
(ii) Consider the answers to part (b) and (c), what law is illustrated ?
(iii) Consider the parts (d) and (f), what conclusion can be drawn ?
⎡ 2 1⎤ ⎡1 1⎤
3. Solve the matrix equation X + ⎢ ⎥=⎢ ⎥ for the 2 × 2 matrix.
⎣6 1⎦ ⎣0 1⎦
⎡0 0 1⎤ ⎡ 2 1 2⎤

d
4. Solve the equation X + ⎢0 1 0 ⎥ = ⎢ 3 2 3 ⎥ for the 3 × 3 matrix X.
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥

ite
⎢⎣1 0 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 4 3 4 ⎥⎦
2 − 3⎤ ⎡ x1 x2 ⎤ ⎡ − 3
5. If ⎢⎡
4⎤
− = determine x1, x2, y1, and y2.
0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ y1 y2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 5 − 1⎥⎦

m
⎣4
⎡ 1 2⎤

Li
6. If A = ⎢ − 1 8⎥ , construct a matrix X such that X + A = 0.
⎢ ⎥
⎣⎢ 4 9 ⎥⎦

y
7. If A = ⎡⎢
1 2 3⎤ ⎡ − 1 0 3⎤

n
⎥ and B = ⎢ 0 0 5⎥ , verify the commutative law of addition.
⎣ 4 5 6 ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

pa
⎡1 0 0 ⎤ ⎡1 0 0 ⎤
8. Is the equation ⎢0 2 3 ⎥ − ⎢0 2 3 ⎥ = ⎡⎢
2 3⎤ ⎡2 3 ⎤
− valid ?
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎣1 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣1 2 ⎥⎦
⎢⎣1 4 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣1 4 4 ⎥⎦
om
⎡x 2
3 4 ⎤ + ⎡ −3x 1 −5 ⎤ ⎡ 4 4 −1⎤
9. If ⎢ 1 9 8 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −3 −2 −6 ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣−2 7 2 ⎥⎦ , find the values of x. (ISC 2003)
⎣
C

⎡2 2 2⎤ ⎡3 3 3⎤ ⎡4 4 4⎤
nd

10. For A = ⎢ 2 1 − 3⎥ , B = ⎢ 3 0 5 ⎥ , C = ⎢ 5 − 1 4 ⎥ , compute (a) 3A − 6B + 9C,

⎢⎣ 1 0 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣6 9 − 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣7 8 − 1⎥⎦
(b) 7A − 2B − C.
A

− 2 ⎤ and B = ⎡ 2 1⎤
11. If A = ⎡11 , solve each over S2 × 2 :
⎢⎣ 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 1 1⎥⎦
nd

(i) X + 2A = B (ii) X − A = 3B (iii) 2X − 3A = 2B − X

12. If A = ⎡ 1 2 3⎤ and 2 A − 3B = ⎡4 5 − 9 ⎤ , find B. (NMOC)

⎢⎣− 2 5 7 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 2 3⎥⎦
ha

13. If A = ⎡ 1 − 3 2 ⎤ , B = ⎡2 − 1 − 1⎤ , find the matrix C such that A + B + C is a zero matrix.

⎣⎢2 0 2 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ 1 0 − 1⎦⎥
C

⎡7 0⎤ and X − Y = ⎡3 0⎤ .
14. Find X and Y if X + Y = ⎢ (ISC 2008)
⎣ 2 5⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 3⎥⎦
S

15. If ⎡⎢
x 1⎤ ⎡ y 1⎤ ⎡ 1 2 ⎤
+ = show that x = 1 and y = 0.
⎣ − 1 − y ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3 x ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 1⎥⎦
©

16. If A = diag (1 −4 8), B = diag (−2 3 5), C = diag. (−3 7 10) find
(i) 2A + 3B (ii) B + 2C − A (iii) 3A − B + 4C.
⎡x y⎤ ⎡ 1 − 1⎤ ⎡ 3 5⎤
17. Solve the matrix equation : 2 ⎢ +3⎢ =3⎢ .
⎣z t ⎥⎦ ⎣0 2⎥⎦ ⎣4 6⎥⎦
x + y⎤
18. Find x, y, z and w if 3 ⎡
x y⎤ ⎡ x 6⎤ ⎡ 4
⎢⎣ z w⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣− 1 2w⎥⎦ + ⎢⎣ z + w 3 ⎥⎦
.
Matrices Ch 3–17

⎡ 2⎤
19. Solve for x and y. ⎢ x 2 ⎥ + 2 ⎡ 2 x ⎤ = 3 ⎡ 7 ⎤ (NMOC)
⎢⎣3 y ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 3⎥⎦
⎣y ⎦
⎡ 1 2⎤ ⎡ − 3 − 2⎤ ⎡ p q⎤
20. If A = ⎢ 3 4 ⎥ and B = ⎢ 1 − 5⎥ , then find a matrix C = ⎢ r s ⎥ such that A + B − C = 0.
⎢5 6⎥ ⎢ 4 3⎥⎦ ⎢ t u⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎣ ⎦
⎡2 3 5⎤
21. Let A = ⎢1 0 2 ⎥ , find a matrix B such that A + B − 4I = 0.
⎢3 4 5⎥
⎣ ⎦

d
ANSWERS

ite
⎡ 5⎤ ⎡0 0⎤
1. (i) [7 4] (ii) ⎢ −1⎥ (iii) ⎢0 0⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

m
é 0 2b ù é0 0 0 ù ⎡ 1 1 ⎤
(iv) ê -2b 0 ú (v) ê 0 1 0 ú (vi) ⎢sin x − cos x cos 2x ⎥

Li
ë û ê0 0 0 ú ⎣ ⎦
ë û

⎡ 3 1⎤ ⎡ 7 3⎤ ⎡ 7 3⎤

y
2. (i) (a) ⎢ 6 2 ⎥ (b) ⎢ 7 2 ⎥ (c) ⎢7 2 ⎥
⎢5 7 ⎥ ⎢ 3 3⎥ ⎢ 3 3⎥

n
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

pa
⎡ − 1 3⎤ ⎡3 5 ⎤ ⎡ 1 − 3⎤
(d) ⎢ 0 6 ⎥ (e) ⎢1 6⎥ (f) ⎢ 0 − 6 ⎥
⎢ 5 5⎥ ⎢3 1⎥ ⎢ − 5 − 5⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
om
(ii) The associative law for addition (iii) A − B = − (B − A).
⎡ − 1 0⎤ ⎡2 1 1⎤
3. ⎢ 4. ⎢ 3 1 3 ⎥
⎣ − 6 0⎥⎦ ⎢3 3 4⎥
C

⎣ ⎦
⎡ −1 −2 ⎤
nd

⎢ 1 −8 ⎥
5. x1 = 5, x2 = − 7, y1 = − 1, y2 = 1 6. ⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣ −4 −9 ⎥⎦
A

8. No, although both members of the equation are equal to zero matrices, the orders are not the same.
⎡ 24 24 24 ⎤ ⎡ 4 4 4⎤
nd

9. x = − 1, 4 10. (a) ⎢ 33 −6 − 3⎥ (b) ⎢ 3 8 − 35⎥

⎢ 30 18 9 ⎥⎦ ⎢−12 − 26 31⎥
⎣ ⎣ ⎦
ha

⎡ 0 5⎤ ⎡ 7 1⎤ 1 ⎡7 − 4⎤ 1 ⎡2 1 − 15⎤
11. (i) ⎢ (ii) ⎢ − 2 3⎥ (iii) 12. B = − ⎢
⎣ − 3 1⎥⎦ ⎣ ⎦ 3 ⎢⎣ 1 2 ⎥⎦ 3 ⎣ 5 − 8 − 11⎥⎦
C

⎡ − 3 4 − 1⎤ ⎡5 0 ⎤ ⎡ 2 0⎤
13. ⎢ 14. X = ⎢ , Y =⎢
⎣ − 3 0 − 1⎥⎦ ⎣1 4 ⎥⎦ ⎣1 1 ⎥⎦
S

16. (i) diag (−4 1 31) (ii) diag (−9 21 17) (iii) diag (−7 13 59)
©

17. x = 3, y = 9, z = 6, t = 6 18. x = 2, y = 4, z = 1, w = 3 19. x = − 7 or 3; y = − 3.

⎡− 2 0⎤ é 2 - 3 - 5ù
20. ⎢ 4 − 1⎥ 21. ê - 1 4 -2 ú
⎢ 9 9 ⎥⎦ ê - 3 - 4 - 1ú
⎣ ë û
Ch 3–18 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

3.13. Multiplication of matrices

(1) Let us consider the two matrices
⎡ x1 x2 ⎤
A1 × 3 =[a b c ] and B = ⎢y y ⎥
3× 2 ⎢ 1 2⎥
⎣⎢ z1 z2 ⎦⎥
Suppose that the numbers a, b, c represent the number of bags of wheat flour, rice, and sugar
purchased each week by a shopkeeper, while x1, y1, z1 represent the cost per bag of each respectively
the first week, and x2, y2, z2 the costs the second week. How much would the shopkeeper have to pay
for these purchases ?

d
The total amount payable for the first week is clearly

ite
ax1 + by1 + cz1
while the total cost payable for the second week is

m
ax2 + by2 + cz2
Here we have added the products obtained by multiplying the elements of a row in one matrix by

Li
the corresponding elements of a column in the other matrix.
(2) The number of tubes and the number of speakers used in assembling TV sets of three different

y
models were specified by the following table :

n
Model A Model B Model C

pa
Number of tubes 13 18 20
Number of speakers 2 om 3 4
This array may be called the parts per set matrix. Suppose orders were received in January for 12 sets
of Model A, 24 sets of Model B and 12 sets of Model C; and in February for 6 sets of Model A, 12 of models
B, and 9 of Model C. We can arrange the information in the form of the following matrix :
C

January February
Model A 12 6
nd

Model B 24 12
Model C 12 9
A

We may call this array as the sets per month matrix. To determine the number of tubes and
speakers required in each of the months for these orders, it is clear that we must use both sets of
nd

information. For instance, to compute the number of tubes needed in January, we multiply each entry
in the first row of the parts per set matrix by the corresponding entry in the first column of the sets per
month matrix, and then add the three products. Thus the number of tubes required in January is
ha

13 × 12 + 18 × 24 + 20 × 12 = 828
To compute the number of speakers needed in January we multiply each entry in the second row
C

of the parts per set matrix by the corresponding entry in the first column of the sets per month matrix
and then add the products. Thus, the number of speakers for January is
S

2 × 12 + 3 × 24 + 4 × 12 = 144
Similarly, the number of tubes and speakers for February are respectively.
©

13 × 6 + 18 × 12 + 20 × 9 = 474
and 2 × 6 + 3 × 12 + 4 × 9 = 84
We can arrange the four sums in an array, which we shall call the parts per month matrix.
January February
Number of tubes 828 474
Number of speakers 144 84
Matrices Ch 3–19

We can represent our “operations” in equation form as under :

⎡ 12 6 ⎤
⎡13 18 20 ⎤ ⎢ ⎥ ⎡828 474 ⎤
⎢ 2 3 4 ⎥ ⎢ 24 12 ⎥ = ⎢⎣144 84 ⎥⎦
⎣ ⎦ 12 9
⎣ ⎦
We have multiplied the parts per set matrix by the set per month matrix to get just what should be
expected, the parts per month matrix.
Note that, in the foregoing equation, 828 equals the sum of the products of the entries in the first
row of the left-hand factor by the corresponding entries in the first column of the right-hand factor.
Likewise 474 equals the sum of the products of the entries in the first row of the left-hand factor by

d
the corresponding entries in second column of the right-hand factor, and so on.

ite
⎡ 12 6 ⎤ ⎡ 12 6 ⎤
⎡ 13 18 20 ⎤ ⎢ ⎥ ⎡828⎤ ⎡ 13 18 20 ⎤ ⎢ ⎥ ⎡828 474⎤

m
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 24 12 ⎥ = ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 24 12 ⎥ = ⎢ ⎥
⎣⎢ 2 3 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢ ⎥ ⎣⎢ ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 2 3 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢⎣ ⎦⎥

Li
⎢⎣ 12 9 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 12 9 ⎥⎦

⎡ 12 6 ⎤ ⎡ 12 6 ⎤

y
⎡ 13 18 20 ⎤ ⎢ ⎥ ⎡828 474 ⎤ ⎡ 13 18 20 ⎤ ⎢ ⎥ ⎡828 474 ⎤
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 24 12 ⎥ = ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 24 12 ⎥ = ⎢ ⎥

n
⎣⎢ 2 3 4 ⎦⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎣⎢144 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 2 3 4 ⎦⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢⎣144 84 ⎥⎦

pa
⎢⎣ 12 9 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 12 9 ⎦⎥
om
A method for remembering how to write down the elements in multiplication of one matrix by
another is shown below:
⎡a b ⎤ ⎡e f ⎤ ⎡ ae + bg af + bh ⎤
Let A = ⎢ ⎥ , B = ⎢ g h ⎥ , then AB = ⎢ ce + dg cf + dh ⎥
C

⎣ c d ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡ 1st row × 1st column 1st row × 2nd column ⎤
nd

= ⎢ ⎥
⎣ 2nd row × 1st column 2nd row × 2nd column ⎦
This is a “Multiply row by column” process. We multiply the entries of a row by the corresponding
A

entries of a column and then add the products.

⎡ a11 a12 a13 ⎤ ⎡ b11 b12 ⎤
nd

⎢a a a ⎥ × ⎢b21 b22 ⎥
Thus ⎢ 21 22 23 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣ a31 a32 a33 ⎥⎦3 × 3 ⎢⎣b31 b32 ⎥⎦3 × 2
ha

⎡ a11b11 + a12b21 + a13b31 a11b12 + a12b22 + a13b32 ⎤

⎢ ⎥
= ⎢ a21b11 + a22b21 + a23b31 a21b12 + a22b22 + a23b32 ⎥
C

⎣⎢ a31b11 + a32b21 + a33b31 a31b12 + a32b22 + a33b32 ⎦⎥3 × 2

Note. The definition of the product of two matrices, A and B, requires that the matrix A has the
S

same number of columns, as B has rows ; the result, AB, then has the same number of rows as A and
the same number of columns as B.
©

Am × p × Bp × n = Cm × n
Such matrices A and B are said to be conformable or compatible for multiplication. The fact that
two matrices are conformable in the order AB, however, does not mean that they necessarily are
conformable in the order BA.
⎡4⎤
Ex. 21. Calculate : [1 3 −2] ⎢6⎥ .
⎢ ⎥
⎣5⎦
Ch 3–20 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡4⎤
Sol. [1 3 −2] ⎢⎢6⎥⎥ = [1 × 4 + 3 × 6 + (− 2) (5)] = [4 + 18 − 10] = [12].
⎣5⎦
⎡ 1 2⎤ ⎡ 2 1⎤
Ex. 22. If A = ⎢ and B = ⎢ ⎥ , find AB.
⎣− 1 3⎥⎦ ⎣1 1⎦
2 ⎤ ⎡ 2 1⎤ = ⎡ 1 × 2 + 2 × 1 1 × 1 + 2 × 1⎤ = ⎡ 2 + 2 1 + 2 ⎤ = ⎡ 4 3⎤
Sol. AB = ⎡⎢ −1
1
⎣ 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −1 × 2 + 3 × 1 −1 × 1 + 3 × 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −2 + 3 −1 + 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 2⎥⎦
2 × 1 + 1 × (−1) 2 × 2 + 1 × 3 2 −1 4 + 3
BA = ⎡⎢ 1 1⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ −1 3⎤⎥ = ⎡⎢ 1 × 1 + 1 × (−1) 1 × 2 + 1 × 3⎤⎥ = ⎡⎢ 1 − 1 2 + 3⎤⎥ = ⎡⎢0 5 ⎤⎥
2 1 1 2 1 7
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

d
This example shows that the multiplication of matrices, in general, is not commutative. Thus,

ite
when discussing products of matrices we must specify the order in which the matrices are to be
considered as factors. For the product AB, we say that A is right-multiplied by B, or that B is left-

m
multiplied by A. This is also expressed as “post-multiplication of A by B” or “pre-multiplication
of B by A.”

Li
⎡ 1 −1⎤
Ex. 23. If A = ⎡ 1 0 1⎤ and B = ⎢ 2 1⎥ , find AB.
3 1 2
⎣⎢ ⎦⎥
⎣⎢ 3 1⎦⎥

y
Sol. Since A is a 2 × 3 matrix, and B is a 3 × 2 matrix i.e., A has the same number of columns as

n
B has rows, therefore, they are conformable for multiplication. We have

pa
⎡ 1 − 1⎤
⎡3 1 2 ⎤ ⎢
AB = ⎢ ⎥ 2 1⎥
⎣ 1 0 1⎦ ⎢ 3 ⎥
om
⎣ 1⎦
⎡3 × 1 + 1 × 2 + 2 × 3 3× (− 1) + 1 × 1 + 2 × 1⎤ ⎡3 + 2 + 6 − 3 + 1 + 2⎤ ⎡11 0 ⎤
= ⎢ ⎥=⎢ ⎥=⎢ ⎥.
⎣1 × 1 + 0 × 2 + 1 × 3 1 × (− 1) + 0 × 1 + 1 × 1⎦ ⎣1 + 0 + 3 − 1 + 0 + 1⎦ ⎣ 4 0 ⎦
C

In much of the matrix work in this book, we shall focus our attention on matrices having the same
number of rows as columns. For brevity, a matrix of order n × n is often called a square matrix of
nd

order n. Although many of the ideas we shall discuss are applicable to matrices of any order, we shall
2 3
apply the notions only to square matrices. If A is a square matrix, then A , A , etc., denote AA, (AA) A,
A

etc.
⎡ 1 6⎤ ⎡4 0⎤ ⎡ 1 6 ⎤ ⎡ 2⎤
nd

Ex. 24. Compute : (i) ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 2 − 1⎥ (ii) ⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥

⎣ − 3 5 ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣− 3 5⎦ ⎣− 7 ⎦
⎡ 1⎤ ⎡ 1 6 ⎤
(iv) ⎡ 1⎤ [3 2] (v) [2 − 1] ⎡ − 6 ⎤ ⋅
1
(iii) ⎢ − 6 ⎥ ⎢ − 3 5 ⎥
ha

⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎢⎣ 6 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ ⎦⎥
Sol. (i) The first factor is a 2 × 2 matrix and the second factor is also a 2 × 2 matrix, so that
product is defined and is a 2 × 2 matrix.
C

⎡ 1 6⎤ ⎡4 0⎤ = ⎡ 1 × 4 + 6 × 2 1 × 0 + 6 × (− 1) ⎤ = ⎡ 16 − 6 ⎤
S

⎢⎣ − 3 5⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 − 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 3 × 4 + 5 × 2 − 3 × 0 + 5 × (−1) ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 2 − 5 ⎥⎦ .

(ii) The first factor is a 2 × 2 matrix and the second factor is a 2 × 1 matrix, so that product is
©

defined and is a 2 × 1 matrix.

⎡ 1 6⎤ ⎡ 2⎤ = ⎡ 1 × 2 + 6 × (− 7) ⎤ = ⎡ − 40 ⎤ .
⎣⎢− 3 5⎦⎥ ⎢⎣−7⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ − 3 × 2 + 5 × (− 7) ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ − 41⎦⎥
(iii) The first factor is a 2 × 1 matrix and the second is a 2 × 2 matrix. Since the number of
columns in the first matrix is not equal to the number of rows in the second matrix, therefore, the
product is not defined.
Matrices Ch 3–21

(iv) The first factor is a 2 × 1 matrix and the second is a 1 × 2 matrix, so the product is defined and
is a 2 × 2 matrix. Thus
⎡1 ⎤ [3 2] = ⎡1 × 3 1 × 2 ⎤ = ⎡ 3 2 ⎤
⎣⎢6 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢6 × 3 6 × 2 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢18 12 ⎦⎥
(v) The first factor is a 1 × 2 matrix and the second is a 2 × 1 matrix, so the product is defined and
is a 1× 1 matrix which we frequently write as a scalar. Thus
[2 − 1] ⎢⎣⎡ − 61⎥⎦⎤ = [2 × 1 + (− 1)(− 6)] = [8] = 8.
3.14. Definitions

d
(1) The principal diagonal of a square matrix is the ordered set of entries aij, where i = j,

ite
extending from the upper left-hand corner to the lower right-hand corner of the matrix.
For example, the principal diagonal of

m
⎡ 1 3 − 1⎤
⎢5 2 3⎥

Li
⎢⎣6 4 0 ⎥⎦
consists of 1, 2, and 0, in that order.

y
(2) A diagonal matrix is a square matrix in which all entries, but not in the principal diagonal,

n
are 0.
⎡1 0 0 ⎤

pa
Thus ⎡ 4 0 ⎤ and ⎢0 1 0 ⎥
⎣⎢ 0 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 1 ⎥⎦
om
are diagonal matrices.
(3) In × n denotes the diagonal matrix having 1’s for entries on the principal diagonal.
⎡1 0 0 0 ⎤
C

I2 × 2 = ⎡ 1 0 ⎤ and I 4 × 4 = ⎢0 1 0 0 ⎥
⎢⎣0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢0 0 1 0 ⎥
⎣⎢0 0 0 1 ⎦⎥
nd

The importance of In × n to the operation of multiplication of n × n matrices is apparent in Art.

3.15.
A

3.15. Identity element or unity element or unit matrix

nd

Theorem. For each matrix An × n, we have An × n In × n = In × n An × n = An × n

Further, if for the matrix Bn × n, we have An × n Bn × n = Bn × n An × n = An × n
ha

for all matrices An × n, then Bn × n = In × n.

Accordingly, In × n is the identity element for multiplication in the set n × n square matrices, and In
is unique. The proof of this theorem, for the illustrative case n = 2, is left as an exercise to the
C

×n
student.
Note. Since In × n is a square matrix of order, n, it may be denoted by In. Thus
S

⎡1 0 0 ⎤
⎡1 0 ⎤
I2 = ⎢0 1 ⎥ , I3 = ⎢0 1 0⎥ , etc.
©

⎣ ⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 1 ⎥⎦

Ex. 25. If A = ⎡ − 3 4 ⎤ , show that AI2 = I2 A.

5 2
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦
⎡ 5 2 ⎤ ⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡ 5 × 1 + 2 × 0 5 × 0 + 2 × 1⎤ ⎡ 5 2 ⎤
Sol. AI2 = ⎢ − 3 4 ⎥ ⎢0 1 ⎥ = ⎢ − 3 × 1 + 4 × 0 − 3 × 0 + 4 × 1⎥ = ⎢ − 3 4 ⎥ = A.
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡ 5 2 ⎤ ⎡1 × 5 + 0 × (− 3) 1 × 2 + 0 × 4 ⎤ ⎡ 5 2 ⎤
I2 A = ⎢0 1 ⎥ ⎢ − 3 4 ⎥ = ⎢0 × 5 + 1× (− 3) 0 × 2 + 1 × 4 ⎥ = ⎢ − 3 4 ⎥ = A ⇒ AI 2 = I 2 A.
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Ch 3–22 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡3 3 5⎤
Ex. 26. If A = ⎢ 2 3 4 ⎥ , show that AI3 = I3 A.
⎢⎣ 5 2 3 ⎥⎦
⎡ 3 3 5 ⎤ ⎡1 0 0 ⎤
Sol. AI3 = ⎢ 2 3 4 ⎥ ⎢0 1 0 ⎥
⎢⎣ 5 2 3 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 1 ⎥⎦
⎡3 + 0 + 0 0 + 3 + 0 0 + 0 + 5 ⎤ ⎡3 3 5 ⎤
= ⎢2 + 0 + 0 0 + 3 + 0 0 + 0 + 4⎥ = ⎢2 3 4 ⎥ = A
⎣⎢ 5 + 0 + 0 0 + 2 + 0 0 + 0 + 3 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 5 2 3 ⎥⎦
Similarly, it may be verified that I3A = A ⇒ AI3 = I3 A.

d
3.16. Now we state the last theorem in a more general form as below:

ite
Theorem. If A is an n × n matrix, then AIn = A and InA = A.

m
3.17. The scalar matrix and the diagonal matrix
⎡k 0 0 ⎤

Li
The matrix ⎢ 0 k 0 ⎥ is called a scalar matrix and is obviously obtained by the scalar
⎢⎣ 0 0 k ⎥⎦
⎡k 0 0 ⎤

y
multiplication of matrix I by k as kI = ⎢ 0 k 0 ⎥ ⋅

n
⎣⎢ 0 0 k ⎦⎥

pa
The scalar matrix is a special case of a diagonal matrix. In a diagonal matrix all the elements
except those on the leading diagonal are zeros. om
⎡2 0 0⎤
⎢ 0 3 0 ⎥ is a simple example of a diagonal matrix.
⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
C

3.18. Properties of matrix multiplication

We have learnt that in so far as only addition and subtraction are involved, the algebra of matrices
nd

is exactly like the ordinary algebra of numbers. Now we shall show that it is not so for the operation
of multiplication. There are some major differences in the two algebras when multiplication is involved.
A

1. The product of matrices is not commutative.

(a) Whenever AB exists, BA is not always defined. For example if A be a 5 × 4 matrix and B be
nd

a 4 × 3 matrix, then AB is defined while BA is not defined.

(b) If AB and BA are both defined, it is not necessary that they should be equal. For example if
A be a 4 × 3 matrix and B a 3 × 4 matrix, then AB is defined and is a 4 × 4 matrix. BA is also defined
ha

but is a 3 × 3 matrix. AB and BA being of different orders, AB ≠ BA.

(c) Even if AB and BA are both defined and are of the same order, it is not necessary that
C

AB = BA.
A = ⎡⎢0 3 ⎤⎥ and B = ⎡⎢1 4 ⎤⎥ , then
1 2 0 3
For example, if
S

⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡ 1 ⎤⎡2 0 ⎤=⎡
3 1× 0 + 2 ×1 1× 3 + 2 × 4 ⎤=⎡ 2 11 ⎤
©

AB = ⎢
⎣ 0 3 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 × 0 + 3 × 1 0 × 3 + 3 × 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3 12 ⎥⎦
0 3 ⎤ ⎡1 2 ⎤ ⎡ 0 × 1 + 3 × 0 0 × 2 + 3 × 3⎤ ⎡ 0 9 ⎤
BA = ⎡⎢ = =
⎣ 1 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 3 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣1 × 1 + 4 × 0 1 × 2 + 4 × 3 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 14 ⎥⎦
Thus AB ≠ BA
(d) However, it is not always that AB is not equal to BA.
Matrices Ch 3–23

⎡ 1 0 − 4⎤ ⎡5 8 4⎤
Let A = ⎢ 0 −1 2 ⎥ and B = ⎢ 2 3 2 ⎥
⎢− 1 2 1⎥⎦ ⎢1 2 1 ⎥
⎣ ⎣ ⎦
⎡ 1 × 5 + 0 × 2 − 4 × 1 1 × 8 + 0 × 3 − 4 × 2 1 × 4 + 0 × 2 − 4 × 1⎤
AB = ⎢ 0 × 5 − 1 × 2 + 2 × 1 0 × 8 − 1 × 3 + 2 × 2 0 × 4 − 1 × 2 + 2 × 1⎥
⎢ − 1 × 5 + 2 × 2 + 1 × 1 − 1 × 8 + 2 × 3 + 1 × 2 − 1 × 4 + 2 × 2 + 1 × 1⎥
⎣ ⎦
⎡1 0 0 ⎤
= ⎢0 1 0⎥
⎢⎣0 0 1 ⎥⎦

d
⎡ 5 × 1 + 8 × 0 + 4(− 1) 5 × 0 + 8(− 1) + 4 × 2 5(− 4) + 8 × 2 + 4 × 1⎤

ite
BA = ⎢ 2 × 1 + 3 × 0 + 2(− 1) 2 × 0 + 3(−1) + 2 × 2 2(− 4) + 3 × 2 + 2 × 1⎥
⎢ 1 × 1 + 2 × 0 + 1(− 1) 1 × 0 + 2(−1) + 1 × 2 1(−4) + 2 × 2 + 1 × 1⎥
⎣ ⎦

m
⎡1 0 0 ⎤
= ⎢0 1 0 ⎥ ⋅

Li
Hence, AB = BA.
⎢⎣0 0 1 ⎥⎦
2. The product of two matrices can be zero without either factor being a zero matrix.

y
This fact is borne out by the following example.

n
A = ⎡⎢0 b ⎤⎥ and B = ⎡⎢0 0 ⎤⎥ where a, b, c, d are all different from zero.
0 a c d

pa
Let
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Here A ≠ 0, B ≠ 0. Also, AB = ⎡0 a ⎤ ⎡c d ⎤ = ⎡0 0 ⎤ = 0
om ⎢⎣0 b ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 ⎥⎦
⎡1 1 −1⎤ ⎡ −1 −2 −1⎤ ⎡ −1 −1 1⎤
Ex. 27. If A = ⎢ 2 − 3 4⎥ , B = ⎢ 6 12 6 ⎥ , and C = ⎢ 2 2 − 2 ⎥ , show that AB and
⎢3 3 ⎥⎦ ⎢ 5 5 ⎥⎦ ⎢ −3 3 ⎥⎦
C

⎣ −2 ⎣ 10 ⎣ −3
CA are null matrices but BA ≠ 0, AC ≠ 0.
nd

Sol. Since A, B are square matrices, therefore, AB and BA are both defined.
⎡1 1 − 1⎤ ⎡ − 1 − 2 −1⎤
AB = ⎢ 2 − 3 4 ⎥ ⎢ 6 12 6 ⎥
A

⎢ 3 − 2 3⎥ ⎢ 5 10 5⎥
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦
nd

⎡ −1 + 6 − 5 − 2 + 12 − 10 − 1 + 6 − 5⎤ ⎡0 0 0 ⎤
= ⎢ − 2 − 18 + 20 − 4 − 36 + 40 − 2 − 18 + 20 ⎥ = ⎢0 0 0 ⎥ = null matrix
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
⎣ − 3 − 12 + 15 − 6 − 24 + 30 − 3 − 12 + 15⎦ ⎣0 0 0 ⎦
ha

⎡ −1 − 2 −1⎤ ⎡ 1 1 −1⎤
BA = ⎢ 6 12 6 ⎥ × ⎢ 2 − 3 4 ⎥
C

⎢ 5 10 5⎥ ⎢ 3 − 2 3⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
S

⎡ − 1 + 4 − 3 − 1 + 6 + 2 1 − 8 − 3⎤ ⎡ − 8 7 −10 ⎤
= ⎢ 6 + 24 + 18 6 − 36 + 12 − 6 + 48 + 18 ⎥ = ⎢ 48 − 42 60 ⎥
⎢ 5 + 20 + 15 5 − 30 − 10 − 5 + 40 + 15⎥ ⎢ 40 − 35 50 ⎥
©

⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Similarly, you can show that
⎡0 0 0 ⎤ ⎡ 4 4 − 4⎤
CA = ⎢0 0 0 ⎥ = null matrix, and AC = ⎢ −20 − 20 20 ⎥ , which is not a null matrix.
⎢⎣0 0 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 16 − 16 16 ⎥⎦
Ch 3–24 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

3. Cancellation law for the multiplication of real numbers is not valid for the multiplication
of matrices.
The breakdown for matrix algebra of the law that xy = yx and of the law that xy = 0 only if either x
or y is zero causes additional differences. For instance, for real numbers we know that if ab = ac, and
a ≠ 0, then b = c. This property is called the cancellation law of multiplication. This does not hold
for the multiplication of matrices, that is AB can be equal to AC with the conditions A ≠ 0, and
B ≠ C. Let us consider the following example :
⎡ 1 2 0⎤ ⎡1 2 3⎤ ⎡1 2 3⎤
If A = ⎢ 1 1 0 ⎥ , B = ⎢ 1 1 − 1⎥ and C = ⎢1 1 − 1⎥
⎢⎣ −1 4 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 2 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣1 1 1⎥⎦

d
⎡3 4 1⎤

ite
then AB = ⎢ 2 3 1⎥ = AC and A ≠ 0, and B ≠ C.
⎢⎣ 3 2 −7 ⎥⎦

m
Thus, AB = AC does not imply that B = C.
Note. The invalidity of the commutative law and the concellation law for the multiplication of

Li
matrices should not lead us to conclude a total collapse of all the other familiar laws. Except for these
two laws and the fact that, as we shall see later, many matrices do not have multiplicative inverses

y
(reciprocals), the other basic laws of ordinary algebra generally remain valid for matrices. The
associative law holds for the multiplication of matrices and there are distributive laws that unite

n
addition and multiplication.

pa
4. Matrix multiplication is associative if conformability is assured, i.e., A (BC) = (AB) C.
5. Matrix multiplication is distributive with respect to matrix addition, i.e.,
om
A(B + C) = AB + AC.
Note. It can be proved that
(i) (B + C) A = BA + CA (ii) A (B − C) = AB − AC (iii) (B − C) A = BA − CA
C

Ex. 28. If A = ⎡1 0 ⎤ B = ⎡ 2 0 ⎤ , and C = ⎡ − 1 2 ⎤ , show that

nd

⎢⎣1 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3 1⎥⎦

(i) (AB) C = A (BC); (ii) A (B + C) = AB + AC; (iii) (B + C)A = BA + CA

A

−1 2
A = ⎡⎢1 1 ⎤⎥ , B = ⎡⎢1 1 ⎤⎥ , C = ⎡⎢ 3 1⎤⎥
1 0 2 0
Sol.
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
nd

⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡ 2 0 ⎤ ⎡ 2 + 0 0 + 0 ⎤ ⎡ 2 0 ⎤
(i) AB = ⎢1 1 ⎥ ⎢1 1 ⎥ = ⎢ 2 + 1 0 + 1⎥ = ⎢ 3 1 ⎥
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
ha

⎡2 0⎤ ⎡− 1 2⎤ ⎡ − 2 4 ⎤
(AB)C = ⎢ 3 1 ⎥ ⎢ 3 1⎥ = ⎢ 0 7 ⎥
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
C

⎡2 0⎤ ⎡− 1 2⎤ ⎡ − 2 4 ⎤
BC = ⎢1 1 ⎥ ⎢ 3 1⎥ = ⎢ 2 3⎥
S

⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
©

A(BC) = ⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡ − 2 4 ⎤ = ⎡ − 2 4 ⎤ ⇒ ( AB)C = A(BC )

⎣⎢1 1 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ 2 3⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ 0 7 ⎦⎥

⎡ 2 0 ⎤ ⎡ − 1 2 ⎤ ⎡ 2 − 1 0 + 2 ⎤ ⎡1 2 ⎤
(ii) B + C = ⎢1 1 ⎥ + ⎢ 3 1⎥ = ⎢1 + 3 1 + 1 ⎥ = ⎢ 4 2 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
1+ 0 2 + 0
A(B + C) = ⎢⎡1 1 ⎥⎤ ⎢⎡ 4 2 ⎥⎤ = ⎢⎡1 + 4 2 + 2 ⎥⎤ = ⎢⎡5 4 ⎥⎤
1 0 1 2 1 2
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Matrices Ch 3–25

1 0 −1 2 −1+ 0 2 + 0 −1 2
AB = ⎡⎢ 3 1 ⎤⎥ , AC = ⎡⎢1 1 ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢ 3 1⎤⎥ = ⎡⎢ − 1 + 3 2 + 1 ⎤⎥ = ⎡⎢ 2 3⎤⎥
2 0
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
−1 2 2 −1 0 + 2
AB + AC = ⎡⎢ 3 1 ⎤⎥ + ⎡⎢ 2 3⎤⎥ = ⎡⎢3 + 2 1 + 3 ⎤⎥ = ⎡⎢5 4 ⎤⎥
2 0 1 2
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⇒ A(B + C) = AB + AC
⎡ 2 0 ⎤ + ⎡ −1 2 ⎤ = ⎡ 1 2 ⎤
(iii) B+C = ⎢
⎣1 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 4 2 ⎥⎦
1+ 2 0 + 2
(B + C)A = ⎡ 4 2 ⎤ ⎡1 1 ⎤ = ⎡ 4 + 2 0 + 2 ⎤ = ⎡6 2 ⎤

d
1 2 1 0 3 2
⎣⎢ ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ ⎥⎦

ite
⎡ 2 0 ⎤ ⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡ 2 + 0 0 + 0 ⎤ ⎡ 2 0 ⎤
BA = ⎢1 1 ⎥ ⎢1 1 ⎥ = ⎢ 1 + 1 0 + 1 ⎥ = ⎢ 2 1 ⎥
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

m
−1 2 1 0 −1+ 2 0 + 2
CA = ⎡ 3 1⎤ ⎡1 1 ⎤ = ⎡ 3 + 1 0 + 1⎤ = ⎡ 4 1 ⎤
1 2

Li
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ ⎥⎦

⎡ 2 0 ⎤ ⎡1 2 ⎤ ⎡ 2 + 1 0 + 2 ⎤ ⎡3 2 ⎤
BA + CA = ⎢ 2 1 ⎥ + ⎢ 4 1 ⎥ = ⎢ 2 + 4 1 + 1 ⎥ = ⎢6 2 ⎥

y
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

n
⇒ (B + C) A = BA + CA.

pa
It may be noted that in the above example A (B + C) ≠ (B + C) A.
Ex. 29. If A, B, C are three matrices such that
om
⎡a h g⎤ ⎡ x⎤
A = [x y z ], B = ⎢ h b f ⎥ , C = ⎢ y ⎥ evaluate ABC.
⎢g f c ⎥⎦ ⎢z⎥
⎣ ⎣ ⎦
C

(NMOC)
nd

⎡ag⎤ h
Sol. AB = [ x y z] ⎢ hf⎥ b
⎢g c ⎥⎦
⎣ f
A

= [xa + yh + zg xh + yb + zf xg + yf + zc]
nd

⎡x⎤
∴ ABC = [ax + hy + gz hx + by + fz gx + fy + cz ] ⎢ y⎥
⎢z⎥
⎣ ⎦
ha

= [x (ax + hy + gz) + y (hx + by + fz) + z(gx + fy + cz)]

= [ax2 + by2 + cz2 + 2hxy + 2gzx + 2fyz]
C

6. Zero matrix. Earlier we defined the zero matrix of order m × n and showed that it is the
identity element for matrix addition, i.e., A + 0 = A, where A is any matrix of order m × n. This zero
S

matrix plays the same role in the multiplication of matrices as the number zero does in the multiplication
of real numbers. For example, we have
©

⎡ 0 0⎤
⎡ 2 0 3⎤ ⎢ ⎥ ⎡0 0 ⎤ = 0
⎢⎣ 1 1 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢ 0 0⎥ = ⎢⎣0 0 ⎥⎦ 2
⎣ 0 0 ⎦
thus, for any matrix Ap × n, we have
0m × p Ap × n = 0m × n and Ap × n 0n × q = 0p × q
Some of the above results may be concisely put in the form of a theorem as under :
Ch 3–26 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Theorem. If Sn × n is the set of n × n square matrices for n, a fixed positive integer a ∈ R; A,

B, C ∈ Sn × n , then
I AB ∈ Sn × n Closure law for multiplication.
II (AB)C = A(BC) Associative law for multiplication.
III A(B + C) = AB + AC and (B + C)A = BA + CA Distributive laws.
IV AIn × n = A and In × n A = A Multiplicative-identity law.

3.19. Positive integral powers of matrices

If A is any matrix, the product AA is defined only when A is a square matrix. Let us denote this

d
product AA as A2.

ite
Now by the Associative Law,
2 2
A A = (AA)A = A(AA) = AA = AAA.

m
If we denote this product by A3, then A3 = A2A = AA2 = AAA.
Since the Associative law is true for any number of matrices, we can denote

Li
m
(AAA...m times) by A .
Note 1. If I is a unit matrix of any order, then I = I2 = I3 = I4 = In.

y
Note 2. We can also form polynomials in A that is for any polynomial

n
2 n
f (x) = a0 + a1x + a2x + ...+ anx

pa
we define f (A) to be the matrix
2 n
f (A) = a0I + a1A + a2 A + ...+ an A
om
In case f (A) is the zero matrix, then A is said to be zero or root of the polynomial f (x).
⎡1 2⎤
Ex. 30. If A = ⎢
⎣ 4 − 3 ⎥⎦ , find
C

2 3 3
(i) A , (ii) A , (iii) f (A), where f (x) = 2x − 4x + 5; (iv) Show that A is a zero of the polynomial
2
g (x) = x + 2x − 11.
nd

⎡1 2⎤ ⎡ 1 2⎤ ⎡ 9 − 4⎤
Sol. (i) A2 = AA = ⎢ =
⎣ 4 − 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 4 − 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 8 17 ⎥⎦
A

2 ⎡1 2⎤ ⎡ 9 − 4⎤ ⎡ − 7 30⎤
(ii) A3 = AA = ⎢ 4 − 3⎥ ⎢ − 8 17 ⎥ = ⎢ 60 − 67 ⎥
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
nd

(iii) To find f (A), first substitute A for x and 5 I for the constant 5 in the given polynomial
3
2x − 4x + 5.
ha

3 ⎡− 7 30 ⎤
− 4 ⎡⎢
1 2⎤
+ 5 ⎡⎢
1 0⎤
f (A) = 2 A − 4 A + 5I = 2 ⎢ ⎥ ⎥
⎣ 60 − 67 ⎦ ⎣ 4 − 3⎦ ⎣ 0 1 ⎥⎦
C

⎡ − 14 60 ⎤ ⎡ − 4 − 8⎤ ⎡5 0 ⎤
+ +
= ⎢
⎣ 120 − 134 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 16 12 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 5 ⎥⎦
S

⎡ −14 − 4 + 5 60 − 8 + 0 ⎤ ⎡− 13 52 ⎤
= ⎢ =
⎣120 − 16 + 0 − 134 + 12 + 5⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 104 − 117 ⎥⎦
©

(iv) Now A is zero of g (x) if the matrix g (A) is the zero matrix. Compute g (A) as was done for
f (A), that is first substitute A for x and 11 I for the constant 11 in g (x) = x2 + 2x − 11.
2 ⎡ 9 − 4⎤ + ⎡ 1 2⎤
− 11 ⎡⎢
1 0⎤
g (A) = A + 2 A − 11I = ⎢ 2⎢
⎣ − 8 17 ⎥⎦ ⎣ 4 − 3⎥⎦ ⎣ 0 1 ⎥⎦
⎡ 9 − 4⎤ + ⎡2 4 ⎤ ⎡ − 11
+⎢
0⎤
= ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎥⎦
⎣ − 8 17 ⎦ ⎣ 8 − 6 ⎦ ⎣ 0 −11
Matrices Ch 3–27

⎡ 9 + 2 − 11 − 4 + 4 + 0 ⎤ ⎡0 0 ⎤
= ⎢ − 8 + 8 + 0 17 − 6 − 11⎥ = ⎢0 0 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Since g (A) = 0, therefore A is a zero of the polynomial g (x).
⎡1 3 ⎤ ⎡− 1 4⎤ 2 2 2
Ex. 31. Show that if A = ⎢ 2 6 ⎥ and B = ⎢ 2 1⎥ then (A + B) ≠ A + 2AB + B .
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
2 2
⎧ ⎡ 1 3⎤ ⎡ − 1 4⎤ ⎫ ⎡0 7⎤
Sol. (A + B)
2
= ⎨⎢ ⎥ +⎢ ⎥ ⎬ = ⎢4 7⎥
⎩⎣ 2 6 ⎦ ⎣ 2 1⎦⎭ ⎣ ⎦
⎡ 0 7 ⎤ ⎡ 0 7 ⎤ ⎡ 28 49 ⎤
= ⎢ 4 7 ⎥ ⎢ 4 7 ⎥ = ⎢ 28 77 ⎥

d
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

ite
2
2
= ⎡⎢
1 3⎤ ⎡1 3 ⎤ ⎡1 3 ⎤ ⎡ 7 21⎤ ⎡1 3⎤ ⎡ − 1 4 ⎤ ⎡ 5 7 ⎤
A =⎢ = , AB = ⎢ =
⎣ 2 6 ⎥⎦ ⎣ 2 6 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 6 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣14 42 ⎥⎦ ⎣ 2 6 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣10 14 ⎥⎦

m
⎡ 5 7 ⎤ = ⎡10 14 ⎤ 2 = ⎡ − 1 4 ⎤ ⎡ −1 4 ⎤ = ⎡9 0 ⎤
2AB = 2 ⎢ ,B
⎣10 14⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 20 28⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 9 ⎥⎦

Li
2 2 ⎡ 7 21⎤ + ⎡10 14 ⎤ + ⎡9 0 ⎤ = ⎡ 26 35 ⎤
A + 2AB + B = ⎢
⎣14 42 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 20 28⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 9 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣34 79 ⎥⎦

n y
⎡ 28 49 ⎤ ≠ ⎡ 26 35 ⎤
Since ⎢ , therefore, (A + B)2 ≠ A2 + 2AB + B2
⎣ 28 77 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣34 79 ⎥⎦

pa
Note. If we expand (A + B)2 in the form
2 2
(A + B) × (A + B) = A (A + B) + B (A + B) = A + AB + BA + B
om
2
We can see why the two expressions in the foregoing example are not equal. (A + B) is equal to
2 2 2 2
A + AB + BA + B and, therefore, cannot be equal to A + 2AB + B unless AB = BA, which, here, it
is not.
C

⎡ − 1 4 ⎤ ⎡1 3⎤ = ⎡7 21⎤
BA = ⎢
⎣ 2 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 6 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 4 12 ⎥⎦
nd

⎡0 2 ⎤
Ex. 32. If T = ⎢ , find T2, T3.
⎣0 0 ⎥⎦
A

= T × T = ⎡⎢
2 0 2 ⎤ ⎡0 2 ⎤ ⎡0 0 ⎤
Sol. T = , the null matrix.
⎣0 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 ⎥⎦
nd

⇒ T2 = 0 ⇒ T3 = T2 × T = 0 × T = 0
ha

Thus T is a matrix which has the special property, namely that powers of itself are zero.
Note. In number algebra the only number whose square is zero is zero itself. This is another
difference between matrix algebra and number algebra. Such matrices as T, whose integral power is
C

zero, are said to be NIL POTENT matrices.

Ex. 33. If A = ⎡ 3 1⎤ , show that A2 − 5A + 7I2 = 0

S

⎢⎣ − 1 2 ⎥⎦
©

⎡ 3 1⎤
Sol. Given A = ⎢
⎣ −1 2 ⎥⎦
⎡ 3 1⎤ ⎡ 3 1⎤ ⎡ 9 − 1 3 + 2 ⎤ ⎡ 8 5⎤
⇒ A2 = AA = ⎢ = =
⎣ − 1 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 1 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 3 − 2 − 1 + 4⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 5 3⎥⎦
⎡ 3 1⎤ ⎡ (−5) (3) (−5) × 1⎤ ⎡ −15 − 5 ⎤
− 5A = −5 ⎢ = =
⎣ −1 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣(−5) (−1) (−5) × 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 5 −10⎥⎦
Ch 3–28 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡1 0 ⎤ = ⎡7 0 ⎤
7I2 = 7 ⎢
⎣ 0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 7 ⎥⎦

⎡ 8 5⎤ + ⎡ −15 − 5⎤ + ⎡7 0 ⎤
∴ A2 − 5A + 7I2 = ⎢
⎣ − 5 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 5 −10 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 7 ⎥⎦

⎡ 8 − 15 + 7 5 − 5 + 0⎤ = ⎡ 0 0⎤
= ⎢
⎣ −5 + 5 + 0 3 − 10 + 7⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0⎥⎦ .

⎡ 2 3⎤
Ex. 34. If A = ⎢ ⎥ and f (x) = x2 − 4x + 7, show that f (A) = 0. Use this result to find A5.

d
⎣ − 1 2 ⎦

ite
2 2
Sol. Given, f (x) = x − 4x + 7 ⇒ f (A) = A − 4A + 7I2

⎡ 2 3⎤ ⎡ 2 3 ⎤ = ⎡ 2 × 2 + 3 × − 1 2 × 3 + 3 × 2⎤

m
A2 = AA = ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎣ − 1 2 ⎦⎣ − 1 2 ⎦ ⎣ − 1 × 2 + 2 × − 1 − 1 × 3 + 2 × 2 ⎥⎦

Li
⎡ 1 12 ⎤
= ⎢
⎣ − 4 1⎥⎦

y
⎡ 2 3⎤ = ⎡ 8 12 ⎤ ⎡ 1 0 ⎤ = ⎡7 0 ⎤

n
4A = 4 ⎢ , 7I 2 = 7 ⎢
⎣ −1 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 4 8⎥⎦ ⎣ 0 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 7 ⎥⎦

pa
2 ⎡ 1 12 ⎤ − ⎡ 8 12 ⎤ + ⎡7 0 ⎤
∴ f (A) = A − 4A + 7I2 = ⎢
⎣ − 4 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 4 8⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 7 ⎥⎦
om
⎡ 1 − 8 + 7 12 − 12 + 0 ⎤ = ⎡0 0 ⎤
= ⎢ =0
⎣− 4 + 4 + 0 1 − 8 + 7 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 ⎥⎦
C

Now, f (A) = 0 ⇒ A2 − 4A + 7I2 = 0 ⇒ A2 = 4A − 7I2 ...(1)

nd

3 2 2 2
A = A A = (4A − 7I2) A = 4A − 7I2 A = 4A − 7A (3 I2 A = A)
3
⇒ A = 4 (4A − 7I2) − 7A [From (1)]
A

3
⇒ A = 9A − 28I2 ... (2)
nd

4 3 2 2
A = A A = (9A − 28I2) A = 9A − 28I2A = 9A –28A [Using (2)]
⇒ A4 = 9 (4A −7I2) − 28A [Putting A2 = 4A − 7I2 from (1)]
ha

4
⇒ A = 36A − 63I2 − 28A = 8A − 63I2
∴ A5 = A4A = (8A − 63I2)A = 8A2 − 63I2A = 8A2 − 63A
C

2
= 8 (4A − 7I2) − 63A [Putting A = 4A − 7I2]
S

= 32A − 56I2 − 63A = −31A − 56I2

©

⎡ 2 3⎤ ⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡ − 62 − 93⎤ ⎡56 0 ⎤
= − 31 ⎢ −1 2 ⎥ − 56 ⎢0 1 ⎥ = ⎢ 31 − 62 ⎥ − ⎢ 0 56 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡ − 62 − 56 − 93 − 0⎤ ⎡ − 118 − 93⎤
= ⎢ 31 − 0 − 62 − 56⎥ = ⎢ 31 − 118⎥ .
5
Hence, A
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Matrices Ch 3–29

EXERCISE 3 (c)
⎡ 1⎤
−2⎤ ⎢ 0⎥ ⎡ 1 − 2⎤ ⎡1 2 3⎤
1. Calculate : (i) [3 − 1] ⎡ (ii) [5 2 3 4] ⎢ ⎥ (iii) ⎢⎣ 2
⎢⎣ − 10 ⎥⎦ 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 3 1⎥⎦
⎢ − 1⎥
⎣⎢ 6 ⎦⎥
⎡ 2 3 4 ⎤ ⎡ 1 − 3 5⎤ ⎡ 2 − 3⎤
3 − 1 3⎤ ⎢
(iv) ⎢ 3 4 5 ⎥ ⎢ 0 2 4⎥ (v) ⎡⎢ 1 0⎥
⎢4 5 6⎥ ⎢3 ⎥ − 1 0 2 ⎦⎥ ⎢
⎣ ⎦⎣ 0 5⎦ ⎣
⎣3 1⎥⎦
2. Find the value of x in the following :
⎡x⎤

d
⎡ 4⎤
(i) [ x 7] ⎢ ⎥ = [22] (ii) [− 2 x 4] ⎢ 3 ⎥ = [15]
⎣ x⎦ ⎢5⎥

ite
⎣ ⎦

⎡ 1 3⎤ ⎡− 1 2 ⎤ ⎡ 2 1⎤
3. If A = ⎢ ,B=⎢ , and C = ⎢ in each of the problems through (i) to (xii), find a

m
⎣ 2 1⎥⎦ ⎣ 1 − 1⎥⎦ ⎣ − 1 2 ⎥⎦
2 × 2 matrix equal to the given product.

Li
(i) AB (ii) BA (iii) AC (iv) CA (v) BC (vi) CB

y
2 2 2 2
(vii) A (viii) B (ix) (A + B) C (x) C (A + B) (xi) (A + B) (xii) (C − A)

n
Do you find that AB ≠ BA, AC ≠ CA, BC ≠ CB, (A + B) C ≠ C (A + B) ?

pa
4. (a) If A = ⎡ i 0 ⎤ and B = ⎡⎢ i 0 ⎤⎥ , show that AB ≠ BA, where i2 = − 1.
0 i
⎢⎣0 − i ⎥⎦ ⎣ ⎦ om
(b) If A = ⎡
0 0⎤ ⎡1 0⎤ show that AB ≠ 0 but BA = 0.
⎢⎣1 0⎥⎦ and B = ⎢⎣0 0⎥⎦ ,
⎡1 2 3 ⎤
⎡ 1 0 − 1⎤ ⎡ − 1 − 1⎤
C

⎡ 2 0 3⎤ ⎢ 4 5 6⎥
5. If A = ⎢ , B = ⎢ 0 − 1 1⎥ , C = ⎢ ⎥ and D = ⎢ 2 2 ⎥ , state the order of
⎣ − 1 4 9 ⎥⎦ ⎢ − 1 0 11⎥ ⎢ 7 8 9⎥ ⎢ − 3 − 3⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
nd

⎣⎢1 0 1 ⎦⎥
each of the following matrices :
(a) AB (b) DA (c) AD (d) CB
A

(e) BD (f) D (AB) (g) (CB) (DA) (h) B(DA).

⎡0 1 2⎤ ⎡ 1 −2 ⎤
nd

6. If A = ⎢ 1 2 3 ⎥ and B = ⎢ −1 0 ⎥ , obtain the product AB and explain why BA is not defined.

⎢⎣ 2 3 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 −1⎥⎦
⎡2⎤
ha

7. (i) If A = [4 − 2 5], B = ⎢ 0 ⎥ , find AB and BA.

⎢1 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
⎡1 ⎤
C

⎢2⎥
(ii) AB and BA if A = [1 2 3 4] and B = ⎢ ⎥ ⋅
⎢3⎥
S

⎣⎢ 4 ⎦⎥
8. Evaluate :
©

⎡a ⎤
⎢b ⎥ ⎡ 2 − 1 5⎤
⎡c⎤
(i) [a b] ⎢ ⎥ + [a b c d ] ⎢ ⎥ (ii) [1 − 2 3] ⎢ 0
⎢− 7
2 4⎥ − [2 − 5 7].
⎣ ⎦ 5 0⎥⎦
d ⎢c⎥
⎢⎣ d ⎥⎦ ⎣

⎡ 2 − 3⎤ , 2
9. (i) If A = ⎢ find − A + 6A.
⎣− 2 4⎥⎦
⎡ 2 − 1⎤ and B = ⎡ 1 4⎤ ,
(ii) If A = ⎢ 2
⎢⎣ − 1 7 ⎥⎦ find 3A − 2B.
⎣ 3 2 ⎥⎦
Ch 3–30 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡ 0 3⎤ ,
(i) If A = ⎢
2
10. find k so that kA = 5A − 21 I.
⎣ − 7 5⎥⎦
3 −2 ⎤
(ii) If A = ⎡⎢ 2
, find k such that A = kA − I2.
⎣ 4 −2 ⎥⎦
⎡1 2 ⎤
(iii) If A = ⎢ ⎥ , show that A2 – 3 I = 2A. (ISC 2007)
⎣ 2 1⎦
11. If A = ⎡
2 1⎤ ⎡ 1 − 2⎤ , and C = ⎡ 2 6⎤
⎢⎣1 2⎥⎦ , B = ⎢⎣ − 1 2⎥⎦ ⎢⎣1 3⎥⎦
, by computing each expression determine whether
or not the given statement is true.

d
(a) (AB) C = A (BC) (b) AC = 0 (c) AC = CA

ite
(d) A (B + C) = (B + C) A (e) (− A) C = A (− C) (f) B2 = (− B)2
2 − 1⎤
12. (i) If A = ⎡ ,B=⎢
⎡ 1 0 ⎤ verify whether
,
⎢⎣ 0 1⎥⎦ ⎣ − 1 − 1⎥⎦

m
2 2
(A + B) (A + B) = A + 2 AB + B .

Li
Explain your result with proper reasoning. (ISC)

(ii) If A = ⎡ 0 1 ⎤ , B = ⎡ 0 − i ⎤ where i = − 1, verify that (A + B) = A + B .

2 2 2 2
⎣⎢1 0 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ i 0 ⎦⎥

y
13. If A = ⎡ 4 2⎤ , find (A − 2I) (A − 3I)

n
⎢⎣1 1 ⎥⎦

pa
where I is the unit matrix, and express the above product in a matrix form. (ISC)

14. (i) f (x) = x − 5x + 7, find f (A) when A = ⎡⎢−1 2⎤⎥ .

2 om 3 1
⎣ ⎦
[Hint. Type solved Ex. 30]
⎡2 0 1⎤
(ii) f (x) = x − 5x + 6, find f (A) if A = ⎢2 1 3⎥ .
2
C
⎢ 1 − 1 0⎥
⎣ ⎦
15. (i) Without using the concept of inverse of a matrix, find the matrix
nd

⎡ x y ⎤ such that ⎡ 5 −7 ⎤ ⎡ x y ⎤ = ⎡ − 16 − 6 ⎤
⎢⎣ − 2 (ISC)
⎣⎢ z u ⎥⎦ 3⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ z u ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ 7 2 ⎥⎦
A

(ii) Without using the concept of inverse of a matrix, find the matrix X so that ⎡5 4 ⎤ X = ⎡1 − 2 ⎤ ,
⎣⎢1 1 ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣1 3⎦⎥
where X is a 2 × 2 matrix.
nd

[Hint. Let X = ⎡ x y ⎤]
⎢⎣ z u ⎥⎦
⎡− 1 1 0⎤ ⎡ 0 4 3⎤
ha

2 2 2
16. If A = ⎢ 3 − 3 3⎥ and B = ⎢ 1 − 3 − 3⎥ show that A B = A .
⎢⎣ 5 − 5 5⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 1 4 4⎥⎦
C

⎡ 3 −5 ⎤ 2
17. If A = ⎢ −4 2 ⎥ , find A − 5A − 14 I (ISC)
⎣ ⎦
⎛ 1 −1 1⎞ ⎛ 1 2⎞
S

18. Given A = ⎜ 3 −2 1⎟ and B = ⎜ 2 4⎟

⎜ −2 1 0 ⎟⎠ ⎜ 1 −2 ⎟
⎝ ⎝ ⎠
©

Is it possible to compute AB ? If it is possible to compute AB, then write

(i) the order of the product matrix AB, and
(ii) the value of each of the elements a11, a12 and a31 of the matrix AB. (ISC 1990)
[Note. Element ajk means in the jth row and kth column of the matrix.]
3 −1
( 3
) () ( )
1
19. Given A = 1 2 , B = 1 , C = −2 , find the matrix X, such AX = 3B + 2C. (ISC 1991)
Matrices Ch 3–31

20. A is a 5 × p matrix. B is a 2 × q matrix. A is conformable to B, for pre-multiplication (i.e., AB can be

worked out). AB works out to be a 5 × 4 matrix. Write the values of p and q. (ISC 1992)

(i) Verify that A = ⎡⎢1 2 ⎤⎥ satisfies the equation A3 − 4A2 + A = 0.

2 3
21.
⎣ ⎦

⎡5 3 1⎤
(ii) Show that the matrix A = ⎢ 2 − 1 2⎥ satisfies the equation A3 − 7A2 − 5A + 13 I = 0.
⎣⎢ 4 1 3⎥⎦

⎡ 0 1 0⎤ 3 2
(iii) If A = ⎢ 0 0 1 ⎥ and I is the identify matrix of order 3, show that A = pI + qA + rA .
⎢⎣ p q r ⎥⎦

d
ite
⎡1 0 0⎤
22. (i) If A = ⎢ 0 1 0⎥ , show that A2 = I.
⎢⎣ a b − 1⎥⎦

m
⎡1 1 1⎤
(ii) If A = ⎢1 1 1⎥ , show that A = 3A.
2

Li
⎢⎣1 1 1⎥⎦

y
23. Solve the following matrix equation for x :

n
⎡ 1 0 2⎤ ⎡1⎤
(i) [1 1 x ] ⎢ 0 2 1 ⎥ ⎢1⎥ = 0.

pa
⎣⎢ 2 1 0 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢1⎦⎥

⎡1⎤ ⎡1⎤
om
[Hint. [1 + 0 + 2x 0 + 2 + x 2 + 1 + 0] ⎢1⎥ = 0 ⇒ [2x + 1 2 + x 3] ⎢1⎥ = 0
⎢⎣1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣1⎥⎦

⇒ [2 x + 1 + 2 + x + 3] = 0 ⇒ 3x + 6 = 0 ⇒ x = − 2 ⎤⎦
C
nd

⎡ 1 3 2⎤ ⎡1 ⎤
(ii) [1 x 1] ⎢ 2 5 1⎥ ⎢ 2 ⎥ = 0
⎢⎣15 3 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ x ⎥⎦
A

cos θ sin θ
24. (i) If A = ⎡⎢ − sin θ cos θ⎤⎥ , show that A2 = ⎡ cos 2θ sin 2θ ⎤ .
⎣ ⎦ ⎢⎣ − sin 2θ cos 2θ ⎦⎥
nd

(ii) If A = ⎡ cos 2θ sin 2θ⎤ , show that A2 = ⎡ cos 4θ sin 4θ ⎤ .

⎣⎢ − sin 2θ cos 2θ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ − sin 4θ cos 4θ ⎦⎥
ha

⎡ cos t sin t ⎤
25. Matrix R (t) is given by R (t) = ⎢ − sin t cos t ⎥ , show that R (s) R (t) = R (s + t).
C

⎣ ⎦

26. (a) Give examples of two matrices A and B such that

S

(i) A ≠ O, B ≠ O, AB ≠ O and BA = O ; (Pb 1994)

©

(ii) A ≠ O, B ≠ O, AB = BA = O ;
(iii) AB ≠ BA.
(b) A, B and C such that AB = AC but B ≠ C, A ≠ O.
Ch 3–32 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

ANSWERS
⎡ − 3 − 4 1⎤ ⎡ 14 0 42 ⎤
14 − 6 ⎤
1. (i) [4] (ii) [26] (iii) (iv) ⎢ 18 − 1 56 ⎥ (v) ⎡⎢ 4
⎣⎢ 8 13 9 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 22 − 2 70 ⎥⎦ ⎣ 5⎥⎦

⎡ 2 − 1⎤ ⎡ 3 − 1⎤ ⎡− 1 7⎤
2. (i) x = 2 (ii) x = − 5 3. (i) ⎢ −1 3⎥⎦ (ii) ⎢ −1 2 ⎥ (iii) ⎢ 3 4 ⎥
⎣ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡4 7⎤ ⎡− 4 3⎤ ⎡− 1 3⎤ ⎡7 6 ⎤ ⎡ 3 − 4⎤
(iv) ⎢ 3 − 1⎥ (v) ⎢ 3 − 1⎥ (vi) ⎢ 3 − 4 ⎥ (vii) ⎢ 4 7 ⎥ (viii) ⎢ − 2 3⎥⎦
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣
⎡ − 5 10 ⎤ ⎡ 3 10 ⎤ ⎡15 0 ⎤ ⎡ 7 − 4⎤

d
(ix) ⎢ 6 3⎥ (x) ⎢6 − 5 ⎥ (xi) ⎢ 0 15⎥ (xii) ⎢ − 6 7 ⎦⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣
5. (a) 2 × 3 (b) 3 × 3 (c) 2 × 2 (d) 4 × 3 (e) 3 × 2

ite
(f) 3 × 3 (g) 4 × 3 (h) 3 × 3
⎡ 3 −2 ⎤

m
6. ⎢ 5 −5⎥ , since B has 2 columns and A has 3 rows, i.e., no. of columns in B are not equal to no. of
⎣⎢7 −8 ⎦⎥

Li
rows in A, therefore, BA is not defined.
⎡ 8 − 4 10 ⎤ ⎡ 1 2 3 4⎤
⎢ ⎥ (ii) AB = [30], BA = ⎢⎢ 23 64 69 128⎥⎥

y
7. (i) AB = [13], BA = 0 0 0
⎣⎢ 4 − 2 5⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ 4 8 12 16 ⎥⎦

n
2 2 2 2
(ii) [− 21 15 − 10]

pa
8. (i) [ac + bd + a + b + c + d ]
⎡2 0 ⎤ − ⎤
9. (i) (ii) ⎡381 − 20 10. (i) k=1 (ii) k = 1
⎣⎢ 0 2 ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ 11⎥⎦
11. (a) Yes (b) No (c)
om No (d) No (e) Yes
(f) Yes
⎡4 0⎤ = ⎡0 0⎤ ⎡ 1 − 1 − 3⎤
C
12. No 13. ⎢ 4I 14. (i) ⎢0 0⎥ (ii) ⎢ − 1 − 1 − 10 ⎥
⎣0 4 ⎥⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎢− 5
⎣ 4 4 ⎥⎦
nd

⎡1 − 4 ⎤ ⎡ − 3 − 14 ⎤
15. (i) ⎢3 − 2 ⎥ (ii) ⎢ 4 17 ⎦⎥ 17. (i) 0 18. Yes
⎣ ⎦ ⎣
A

⎡ 3⎤
(i) 3 × 2 (ii) a11 = 0, a22 = − 4, a31 = 0 19. X = ⎢ −2 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
nd

20. p = 2, q = 4 23. (i) x = − 2 (ii) x = − 2 or x = − 14

⎡1 1⎤ ⎡ 1 −1⎤
26. (a) (i) A = ⎡⎢
1 0⎤ ⎡0 0⎤
,B=⎢ (ii) A=⎢ ,B=⎢
ha

⎣0 1⎥⎦ ⎣ 3 0⎥⎦ ⎣1 1⎥⎦ ⎣ −1 1⎥⎦

⎡1 1 ⎤ ⎡1 0⎤ ⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡0 0⎤ ⎡0 0⎤
(iii) A = ⎢0 0⎥ , B = ⎢1 0⎥
C

(b) A=⎢ ,B=⎢ ,C =⎢

⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣0 0⎥⎦ ⎣ 1 0⎥⎦ ⎣0 1⎥⎦
S

3.20. Application of matrix multiplication

©

Ex. 35. A trust fund has Rs 30,000 that must be invested in two different types of bonds. The first
bond pays 5% interest per year, and second bond pays 7% interest per year. Using matrix
multiplication, determine how to divide Rs 30,000 among the two types of bonds if the trust fund must
obtain an annual total interest of (a) Rs 1800, (b) 2000, (c) Rs 1600.
Sol. Let Rs x be invested in first type of bonds and Rs (30000 − x) in second type of bonds.
The value of these bonds can be written in the form of a row matrix A given by
A = [x 30000 − x] which is a 1 × 2 matrix.
Matrices Ch 3–33

And the amounts received as interest per rupee annually from these two types of bonds can be
written in the form of a column matrix B given by
⎡ 5 /100 ⎤
B = ⎢ , which is a 2 × 1 matrix.
⎣7 /100 ⎥⎦
The interest to be annually is a single number, i.e., a matrix of order 1 × 1 which can be obtained
by the product matrix AB, since the product matrix would be a 1 × 1 matrix
⎡ 5 ⎤
AB = [ x 30000 − x ] ⎢⎢100
7 ⎥
⎥
⎢⎣100 ⎥⎦

d
⎡ 5 + (30000 − x). 7 ⎤ = ⎡ 2100 − 2 x ⎤

ite
= ⎢ x.
⎣ 100 100 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 100 ⎦⎥
(a) Since the total annual interest is given to be Rs 1800, therefore,

m
⎡ 2100 − 2 x ⎤ = [1800] ⇒ 2100 − 2 x = 1800
⎢⎣ 100 ⎥⎦

Li
100
⇒ x = 15000 ⇒ 30000 − x = 15000

y
Hence the investments in the two types of bond are Rs 15,000 each.

n
⎡ 2x ⎤
(b) Put ⎢ 2100 − 100 ⎥ = [2000] Ans. Rs 5000, Rs 25000.
⎣ ⎦

pa
⎡ 2x ⎤
(c) Put ⎢ 2100 − 100 ⎥ = 1600 Ans. Rs 25000, Rs 5000.
⎣ ⎦
om
Ex. 36. The amounts of carbohydrates, fats, and proteins in bread, butter, and cheese are as in
the following table :
Carbohydrates Fats Proteins
C

Bread 0.52 0.02 0.09

Butter 0.00 0.81 0.01
nd

Cheese 0.00 0.25 0.20

Now suppose a cheese sandwich and roll contain the following amounts of bread, butter and
A

cheese.
Bread Butter Cheese
nd

Sandwich 80 20 50
Roll 50 10 0
ha

Use matrix multiplication to show the dietary values of the sandwich and roll in terms of
carbohydrates, fats, and proteins.
If now the breakfast matrix of John and Kamla is given as follows :
C

Sandwich Roll
John ⎡3 2⎤
S

Kamla ⎣⎢1 1 ⎦⎥
Find the dietary composition of John and Kamla in terms of carbohydrates, fats, and proteins.
©

(ISC)
Sol. The dietary values of the sandwich and roll are given by the following matrix multiplication :
⎡0.52 0.02 0.09 ⎤
Sandwich ⎡80 20 50 ⎤ ⎢ ⎥
Roll ⎢⎣50 10 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢0.00 0.81 0.01⎥
⎣ 0.00 0.25 0.20 ⎦
80 × 0.52 + 20 × 0 + 50 × 0 80 × 0.02 + 20 × 0.81 + 50 × 0.25 80 × 0.09 + 20 × 0.01 + 50 × 0.20⎤
= ⎢⎡ ⎥⎦
⎣50 × 0.52 + 10 × 0 + 0 50 × 0.02 + 10 × 0.81 + 0 50 × 0.09 + 10 × 0.01 + 0
Ch 3–34 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII
Carbohydrates Fats Proteins
⎡ 41.6 1.6 + 16.2 + 12.5 7.2 + 0.2 + 10 ⎤
= ⎡
41.6 30.3 17.4 ⎤
=
⎢⎣ 26 1 + 8.1 4.5 + 0.1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 26.0 9.1 4.6 ⎥⎦
The dietary composition of John and Kamla is given by the following matrix multiplication :
John ⎡3 2 ⎤ ⎡ 41.6 30.3 17.4⎤
Kamla ⎢⎣1 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 26.0 9.1 4.6 ⎥⎦
⎡3 × 41.6 + 2 × 26.0 3 × 30.3 + 2 × 9.1 3 × 17.4 + 2 × 4.6 ⎤
= ⎢⎣1 × 41.6 + 1 × 26.0 1 × 30.3 + 1 × 9.1 1 × 17.4 + 1 × 4.6 ⎥⎦
Carbohydrates Proteins Fats

d
⎡124.8 + 52 90.9 + 18.2 52.2 + 9.2 ⎤ ⎡176.8 61.4 ⎤ 109.1
= ⎢⎣ 41.6 + 26.0 30.3 + 9.1 17.4 + 4.6 ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣ 67.6 22.0 ⎥⎦

ite
39.4
Thus, the breakfast of John consists of 176.8 carbohydrates, 109.1 fats, and 61.4 proteins. The

m
corresponding amounts for Kamla are 67.6, 39.4, 22.0 respectively.
Ex. 37. The number of gadgets R and S produced per day by each of two factories P and Q and the

Li
number of days per week that each factory operates, are shown in the following table :
FACTORY

y
P Q

n
Gadgets ⎧⎪ R 2 1
⎨

pa
per day ⎪⎩ S 4 3
No. of days operating per week 5 6
om
Determine the product of the matrices
2 1
( )
A = 4 3 and N = 6
5
()
C

and explain what each element of the product represents in the context of the above.

( )
nd

A ⎛⎜ 1 ⎞⎟ = 39 , find the values of x1 and x2

x 17
Given that : x (ISC)
⎝ 2⎠
A

Sol. Product of A and N

R 2 1 5
( )( ) (
10 + 6
= S 4 3 6 = 20 + 18 = 38
16
) ( )
nd

This means that both the factories P and Q produce in a week 16 gadgets R and 38 gadgets S.

(24 13) ⎝⎛⎜ xx ⎠⎞⎟ = (1739) ⇒ ⎛⎜⎝ 42xx ++3xx ⎞⎟⎠ = (1739)
ha

1 1 2
2 1 2

2 x1 + x2 = 17 4 x1 + 2 x2 = 34
C

⇒
4 x1 + 3x2 = 39 ⇒ 4 x1 + 3x2 = 39
S

Subtracting, we get x2 = 5
Substituting this value of x2, we get 2x1 + 5 = 17 ⇒ x1 = 6
©

Hence x 1 = 6, x2 = 5.
Ex. 38. There are two families A and B. There are 4 men, 6 women and 2 children in family A,
with 2 men, 2 women and 4 children in family B. The recommended daily allowance for calories are:
man : 2400, woman : 1900, child : 1800 and for proteins are : man : 55 gm,
woman : 45 gm and child : 33 gm.
Matrices Ch 3–35

Represent the above information by matrices. Using matrix multiplication, calculate the total
requirement of calories and proteins for each of the two families.
Sol. Let F denote the family matrix and R the recommended daily allowance matrix. Then F
a 2 × 3 matrix and R a 3 × 2 matrix can be represented as under :
⎡Calories Proteins ⎤
⎡M W C ⎤ ⎢ 2400
M 55 ⎥
F = A⎢ 4 6 2⎥ , ⎢ 1900 45 ⎥
R=
B ⎢⎣ 2 2 4 ⎥⎦
W
⎢ ⎥
C ⎢⎣ 1800 33 ⎥⎦
The total requirement of calories and proteins for each of the two families is given by the matrix

d
multiplication as shown below :

ite
⎡ 2400 55 ⎤
FR = ⎡
4 6 2⎤ ⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣ 2 2 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢1900 45⎥
⎣1800 33 ⎦

m
⎡ 4 × 2400 + 6 × 1900 × 2 × 1800 4 × 55 + 6 × 45 + 2 × 33⎤ A ⎡ 24600 556 ⎤
= ⎢ =

Li
⎣ 2 × 2400 + 2 × 1900 + 4 × 1800 2 × 55 + 2 × 45 + 4 × 33 ⎥⎦ B ⎢⎣15800 332 ⎥⎦
Thus, family A requires 24,600 calories and 556 gm protein and family B requires 15,800 calories

y
and 332 gm proteins.

n
Ex. 39. Farm A and farm B are classified on the basis of the number of oxen, camels and tractors

pa
which are given in the table as follows :
Oxen Camels Tractors
Farm A : 20
om 5 4
Farm B : 10 6 6
Now the cost (in thousand Rs) average expenditure (in Rs) and average daily return (in Rs) on
C

each ox, camel and tractor is given in the following table :

Cost Average daily Average daily
nd

(in thousand Rs) expenses (in Rs) income (in Rs)

Ox :2.5 20 25
A

Camel : 3.0 20 30
Tractor : 52.5 80 150
nd

If now the number of Farm A and Farm B in States X and Y are as follows :
Farm A Farm B
ha

State X : 2 4
State Y : 6 1
C

Find by using matrix multiplication the total cost expenditure, and income on oxen, camels and
S

tractors in State X and State Y.

Comparing the net income with the total money invested in cost by each State, find which state is
©

getting a comparatively better advantage. (ISC)

(1020 ) ( )
⎛ 2.5 20 25 ⎞
5 4 2 4
Sol. Let P = ⎜ 3.0 20 30 ⎟ and R = 6 1
6 6 ;Q=
⎜ 52.0 80 150 ⎟
⎝ ⎠

( )
X 2 4 ⎛
Oxen Camels Tractors ⎞ ⎛ Oxen Camels Tractors ⎞
RP = Y 6 1 ⎜ 20 5 4 ⎟ = X ⎜ 80 34 32 ⎟
⎜ 10 ⎟ Y ⎜ 130 ⎟
⎝ 6 6 ⎠ ⎝ 36 30 ⎠
Ch 3–36 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎛ Cost Av. daily Av. daily ⎞

⎛ Oxen Camels Tractors ⎞ ⎜ expenses income ⎟
X 32 ⎟ ⎜ 2.5
(RP) Q = Y ⎜ 80 34 20 25 ⎟
⎜ 130 30 ⎟⎠ ⎜ 3.0 30 ⎟
⎝ 36
⎜ 52.5
20
⎝ 80 150 ⎟⎠
⎛ Av. daily Av. daily ⎞
⎜ Cost expenses income ⎟
= X ⎜ 1982 4840 7820 ⎟
Y ⎜ 2008 8830 ⎟⎠
⎝ 5720
Thus

d
Cost Av. daily Av. daily

ite
(in thousand Rs) expenses (in Rs) income (in Rs)
State X : 1982 4840 7820

m
State Y : 2008 5720 8830
Net daily incomes of X and Y are Rs 2980 and Rs 3110 respectively.

Li
Net income 2980 × 100 = 298 = 0.150 %
State X : ×100 =
Investment 1982000 1982

y
Net income 3110 × 100 = 311 = 0.154 %
State Y : × 100 =

n
Investment 2008000 2008

pa
Therefore the State Y is getting a comparatively better advantage.
EXERCISE 3 (d)
om
1. A man buys 8 dozen mangoes, 10 dozen apples and 4 dozen bananas. Mangoes cost Rs 18 per dozen,
apples Rs 9 per dozen and bananas Rs 6 per dozen. Represent the quantities bought by a row matrix
and the prices by a column matrix and hence obtain the total cost.
C
2. A store has in stock 20 dozen shirts, 15 dozen trousers and 25 dozen pairs of socks. If the selling prices
are Rs 50 per shirt, Rs 90 per trousers and Rs 12 per pair of socks, then find the total amount the store
owner will get after selling all the items in the stock.
nd

3. A shopkeeper has 10 dozen Physics books, 8 dozen Chemistry books and 5 dozen Mathematics books.
If their selling prices are Rs 65.70; Rs 43.20 and Rs 76.50 each respectively, find by matrix method the
A

total amount of the sale if all the books are sold.

4. A manufacturer produces three products A, B, C which he sells in the market. Annual sale volumes are
nd

indicated as follows :
Markets Products
A B C
ha

I 8,000 10,000 15,000

II 10,000 2,000 20,000
C

If unit sale prices of A, B and C are Rs 2.25, Rs 1.50 and Rs 1.25 respectively, find the total revenue in
each market with the help of matrices.
S

5. A man invests Rs 50,000 into two types of bonds. The first bond pays 5% interest per year and the
second bond pays 6% interest per year. Using matrix multiplication, determine how to divide Rs
©

50,000 among the two types of bonds so as to obtain an annual total interest of Rs 2780.
6. In a development plan of a city, a contractor has taken a contract to construct certain houses for which
he needs building materials like stones, sand etc. There are three firms A, B, C that can supply him
these materials. At one time these firms A, B, C supplied him 40, 35 and 25 truck loads of stones and
10, 5 and 8 truck loads of sand respectively. If the cost of one truck load of stone and sand is Rs 1200
and Rs 500 respectively, then find the total amount paid by the contractor to each of these firms A, B,
C respectively.
Matrices Ch 3–37

⎡A B C⎤ Stones Sand
[Hint : P = Stone ⎢ 40 35 25⎥ Q = [1200 500]
Sand ⎢⎣10 5 8 ⎥⎦
⎡ 40 35 25⎤
The reqd. total amount paid to each of the firms is given by [1200 500] ⎢
⎣ 10 5 8⎥⎦
Note that here PQ cannot be calculated.]

ANSWERS
1. Rs 258 2. Rs 31800 3. Rs 16621.20
4. From market I, Rs 51,750, From market II, Rs 50,500 5. Rs 22,000; Rs 28,000

d
6. Rs 53,000; Rs 44,500; Rs 34,000.

ite
3.21. Transpose matrix

m
Definition. The matrix obtained from any given matrix A by interchanging its rows and the
T
columns is called the transpose of the given matrix and is denoted by A or A′′ .

Li
Thus (i) if the order of A is m × n, then the order of A′ is n × m.
(ii) (i – jth) element of A = (j – ith) element of A′.
⎡3 6⎤

y
⎡ 2 5⎤ ⎡ 2 1⎤ ⎡ 3 2 1⎤
For example, A = ⎢1 3⎥ , then A′ = ⎢ 5 3⎥ , and if A = ⎢6 5 4 ⎥ , then A′ = ⎢ 2 5⎥ .

n
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 4 ⎥⎦

pa
⎡ 3 5 7⎤ ⎡ 3 −1 4 ⎤
If A = ⎢ −1 0 2 ⎥ , then A′ = ⎢ 5 0 6 ⎥ .
⎣⎢ 4 6 1⎦⎥ ⎣⎢7 2 1⎦⎥
om
3.22. Properties of transpose matrix
Property 1. If A is any matrix then (A′ )′ = A.
C

Property 2. If A and B are two matrices of the same order then (A + B)′ = A ′ + B ′ .
Property 3. If A is m × p matrix and B is p × n matrix then (AB) ′ = B′ Α′ .
nd

Note. (ABCD ....Z) ′ = Z ′ ..... D ′ . C ′ . B ′ . A ′ a scalar.

Property 4. If A is a matrix and k is a scalar then (kA)′ = kA′ .
A

Summary
nd

1. (A′ )′ = A 2. (A + B)′ = A′ + B′
3. (AB)′ = B′ A′ 4. (kA)′ = kA′
ha

Remember the above results.

C

⎡− 2 3 4⎤
Ex. 40. For matrix A = ⎢ 5 − 4 − 3 ⎥ , find 1 (A − A′′ ), where A′′ is the transpose of matrix A.
⎢⎣ 7 2 9 ⎥⎦ 2
S

⎡− 2 3 4⎤ ⎡− 2 5 7⎤
Sol. Given, A = ⎢ 5 − 4 − 3⎥ ⇒ A′ = ⎢ 3 − 4 2 ⎥
©

⎣⎢ 7 2 9 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 4 − 3 9 ⎦⎥
⎧ −2 4⎤ ⎡ − 2 5 7 ⎤ ⎪⎫ 0 − 2 − 3⎤
1 ⎪⎡ 1⎡
3
1
∴ (A − A′) = ⎨⎢ 5 − 4 − 3⎥ − ⎢ 3 − 4 2⎥ ⎬ = ⎢ 2 0 − 5⎥ .
2 2 ⎪⎢ 7 9⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 4 − 3 9⎦⎥ ⎪⎭ 2 ⎢⎣ 3 0⎥⎦
⎩⎣ 2 5
Ch 3–38 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡ 3 4⎤
⎡ 2 4 −1⎤
Ex. 41. If A = ⎢ −1 0 2 ⎥ , B = ⎢ −1 2 ⎥ , find (AB)′′.
⎣ ⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 1⎥⎦
⎡ 3 4⎤
⎡ 2 4 −1⎤
Sol. Given A = ⎢ −1 0 2 ⎥ , B = ⎢ −1 2 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 1⎥⎦

2 4 −1 ⎡
3 4⎤
6−4−2 8 + 8 −1
AB = ⎡⎢ −1 0 2 ⎤⎥ ⎢ −1 2 ⎥ = ⎡⎢ −3 + 0 + 4 −4 + 0 + 2 ⎤⎥ = ⎡⎢ 1 −2 ⎤⎥
0 15
∴
⎣ ⎦ ⎢ 2 1⎥ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎣ ⎦
∴ (AB)′ = ⎡ 0 1⎤ .

d
⎢⎣15 − 2⎥⎦

ite
⎡ 1⎤
Ex. 42. If A = ⎢ − 5 ⎥ , B = [3 1 − 2], verify that (AB)′ = B′ A′. (ISC)
⎣⎢ 7 ⎦⎥

m
⎡ 1⎤ ⎡ 3 1 −2 ⎤ ⎡ 3 −15 21⎤

Li
Sol. AB = ⎢− 5⎥ [3 1 −2] = ⎢ −15 − 5 10 ⎥ ∴ L.H.S. = ( AB )′ = ⎢ 1 − 5 7⎥
⎢⎣ 7⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 21 7 −14 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 2 10 − 14 ⎥⎦
⎡ 3⎤

y
A′ = [1 − 5 7], B′ = ⎢ 1⎥

n
⎢⎣ − 2 ⎥⎦

pa
⎡ 3⎤ ⎡ 3 −15 21 ⎤
R.H.S. = B′A′ = ⎢ 1⎥ [1 − 5 7] = ⎢ 1 − 5 7 ⎥. Thus, L.H.S. = R.H.S.
⎢⎣−2⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −2 10 −14 ⎥⎦
om
⎡ 2 3 4⎤ ⎡4 0 5 ⎤
Ex. 43. If A = ⎢ 5 7 9 ⎥ , B = ⎢1 2 0 ⎥ , verify that (AB)′ = B′ A′ .
⎢⎣ − 2 1 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 3 1 ⎥⎦
C

⎡ 2 3 4⎤ ⎡4 0 5⎤
Sol. Given A = ⎢ 5 7 9 ⎥ , B = ⎢1 2 0 ⎥ , then
nd

⎢⎣ − 2 1 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 3 1 ⎥⎦
⎡ 8 + 3 + 0 0 + 6 + 12 10 + 0 + 4 ⎤ ⎡ 11 18 14 ⎤
A

AB = ⎢ 20 + 7 + 0 0 + 14 + 27 25 + 0 + 9 ⎥ = ⎢ 27 41 34 ⎥
⎣⎢ − 8 + 1 + 0 0 + 2 + 3 − 10 + 0 + 1⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ − 7 5 − 9 ⎦⎥
nd

⎡11 27 − 7 ⎤
∴ (AB)′ = ⎢18 41 5⎥ ...(1)
⎢⎣14 34 − 9 ⎥⎦
ha

⎡4 1 0⎤ ⎡2 5 − 2 ⎤
Also B′A′ = ⎢ 0 2 3 ⎥ ⎢ 3 7 1⎥
⎣⎢ 5 0 1 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 4 9 1⎦⎥
C

⎡ 8 + 3 + 0 20 + 7 + 0 − 8 + 1 + 0 ⎤ ⎡11 27 − 7 ⎤
= ⎢ 0 + 6 + 12 0 + 14 + 27 0 + 2 + 3⎥ = ⎢18 41 5⎥
S

...(2)
⎢⎣10 + 0 + 4 25 + 0 + 9 − 10 + 0 + 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣14 34 − 9 ⎥⎦
©

From (1) and (2) it follows that (AB)′ = B′A′.

EXERCISE 3 (e)
⎡ 1 4 2⎤
1. (i) If A = ⎢ 2 5 3⎥ , find A + AT. (NMOC)
⎢⎣ 3 − 1 0 ⎥⎦
Matrices Ch 3–39

⎡− 3 6 0⎤ 1
(ii) For matrix A = ⎢ 4 − 5 8⎥ , find (A − A′).
⎢⎣ 0 − 7 − 2 ⎥⎦ 2

1 1 ⎡ 0 a b⎤
(iii) Find (A + A′) and (A – A′), where A = ⎢− a 0 c⎥ .
2 2 ⎢⎣ − b − c 0⎥⎦

⎡ 1 3⎤ ⎡ − 2 5⎤
2. If B = ⎢ − 2 5 ⎥ and C = ⎢ 3 4 ⎥ , find (BC)′.
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

d
3. If A = ⎡1 2 0 ⎤ , find (i) AA′, (ii) A′ A.
⎣⎢3 −1 4 ⎦⎥

ite
⎡1 −2 ⎤ ⎡ −1 2 ⎤
4. If A = ⎢1 0 ⎥ , and B = ⎢ −1 1 ⎥ , find (i) A′B, (ii) AB′.
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

m
⎡ 3⎤

Li
5. Verify that (AB)′ = B′A′ if (i) A = ⎢ 1⎥ and B = [1 − 5 7] ;
⎢⎣ − 2 ⎥⎦

y
⎡ −1⎤
(ii) A = ⎢ 2 ⎥ and B = [− 2 − 1 − 4];

n
⎢⎣ 3⎥⎦

pa
⎡2 3⎤ ⎡ 3 4⎤
(iii) If A = ⎢0 1⎥ , B = ⎢2 1⎥ ;
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
om
⎡−5 0⎤
⎡ −1 3 0 ⎤
(iv) A = ⎢ ⎥ , B = ⎢ 0 3⎥ .
⎣ − 7 2 8 ⎦ ⎢ 1 − 8⎥
⎣ ⎦
C

⎡1 2 3⎤ ⎡− 1 1 0⎤
6. If A = ⎢0 1 0 ⎥ and B = ⎢ 0 − 1 1⎥ , verify that (A + B)′ = A′ + B′.
nd

⎢⎣1 1 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 3 4 ⎦⎥

⎡ 1 3⎤ ⎡4 5 6⎤ ⎡ − 1 − 2 1⎤
A

2
7. If A = ⎢ − 1 0 2⎥ , B = ⎢− 1 0 1 ⎥ , C = ⎢− 1 2 3⎥ , find each of the following :
⎢⎣ 1 − 3 − 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 1 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 1 − 2 2 ⎥⎦
nd

(i) 2A′ − B′ (ii) (BC)′. Is (BC)′ = C′B′ ?

(iii) (A + B + C)′. Is (A + B + C)′ = A′ + B′ + C′ ?
ha

⎡ 3⎤
⎢0⎥
C

8. If A = [2 5 7 9] and B = ⎢ 2⎥ , then prove that (A + B′) = (A′ + B)′.

⎢⎣ 4⎥⎦
S

9. Find x and y if the matrix

1 1 2 2
©

A= 2 1 − 2 may satisfy the condition AA′ = A′A = I3.

3 x 2 y

10. If A = ⎡⎢ 5 − 7 ⎤⎥ , then verify that (A2)′ = (A′)2.

2 3
⎣ ⎦

11. If A = ⎡ cos α sin α ⎤ , then verify that A′A = I.

⎢⎣ − sin α cos α ⎥⎦
Ch 3–40 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

ANSWERS
⎡ 0 2 0⎤
⎡2 6 5 ⎤ 1 ⎢⎢ ⎥
1. (i) ⎢6 10 2⎥ (ii) ⎢
−2 0 15⎥⎥ (iii) 12 ( A + A′) = 0, 12 ( A − A′) = A
2⎢
⎣⎢5 2 0 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ 0 − 15 0 ⎥⎦⎥
⎡10 −1 12 ⎤
2. ⎡ 7 19 ⎤ 3. (i) ⎡1 26 ⎤
5 1
(iii) ⎢ −1 5 −4 ⎥
⎢⎣17 10 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣12 −4 16 ⎥⎦
⎡ −2 3⎤ ⎡ − 5 − 3⎤ ⎡− 2 −1 0⎤
4. (i) (ii) ⎢ −1 −1⎥ 7. (i) ⎢ − 1 0 − 7⎥
⎣⎢ 2 −4 ⎦⎥ ⎣ ⎦

d
⎢⎣ 0 3 − 4 ⎥⎦

ite
⎡ − 15 0 − 5 ⎤ ⎡ 4 −3 2⎤
(ii) ⎢ − 10 0 − 6 ⎥ , yes (iii) ⎢ 5 2 − 4⎥ , yes 9. x = − 2, y = − 1
⎢⎣ 31 1 9 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣10 6 3⎥⎦

m
ADJOINT AND INVERSE OF A MATRIX

Li
3.23. The determinant function (Determinant of a square matrix)

y
Associated with each square matrix A having real-number entries is a real number called the

n
determinant of A and denoted by δA or ΔA or | A | or det (A). Thus δ (delta) is a function or mapping
with domain the set of all square matrices having real number entries and with the range the set of

pa
all real-numbers. We say that δ (An × n) is a determinant of order n.
Let us begin by examining δ over the set S2 × 2 of 2 × 2 matrices.
om
Definition. The determinant of the matrix
⎡ a1 b1 ⎤
⎢ a b ⎥ is the number a1b2 − a2b1.
C
⎣ 2 2⎦
We indicate this as follows :
nd

⎡a b ⎤
δ : ⎢ 1 1 ⎥ → a1b2 − a2b1 that is δ : A → δ (A)
⎣ a2 b2 ⎦
A

3.24. Determinant notation

The determinant of a matrix is customarily displayed in the same form as a matrix, but with vertical
nd

bars in lieu of parentheses. f

Thus,
ha

⎡a b ⎤ a1 b1 a1 b1
δ ⎢ 1 1⎥ = = a1b2 − a2b1 a1b2 − a2b1
a
⎣ 2 2⎦b a 2 b2 a 2 b2
C

Note 1. It may be emphasised that while a Fig. 3.02

matrix being just an arrangement of numbers has Fig. 3.02
S

no value, its determinant det A or | A | is not an a b

array of numbers enclosed between two vertical lines. It is a scalar quantity having a
©

definite value. For example, if c +d

⎡a b ⎤ a b Fig. 3.03
A= ⎢ ⎥ , then det A = has the value ad − bc.
⎣ c d ⎦ c d

Note 2. Determinant of order one. The determinant of a matrix [a] is the number ‘a’ itself. Thus,
det [a] = | a | = a, or det [−3] = | −3 | = − 3.
Matrices Ch 3–41

Caution. The determinant | −3 | should not be confused with the absolute value | −3 | of −3.

(
3 −1
)
Ex. 44. If A = 5 2 , find det (A).

3 −1
Sol. det (A) = 5 2 = 3 × 2 − (−1) 5 = 11.

3.25. Determinants of order 3

⎡ a1 b1 c1 ⎤ a1 b1 c1
Let ⎢ a2 b2 c2 ⎥ be a 3 × 3 matrix. Then det (A) = a2

d
b2 c2 ...(1)
⎢ a3 b3 c3 ⎥⎦ a3 b3 c3
⎣

ite
= a1b2c3 + a2b3c1 − a3b1c2 − a1b3c2 − a2b1c3 − a3b2c1 ...(2)
= a1 (b2c3 − b3c2) − b1 (a2c3 − a3c2) + c1 (a2b3 − a3b2)

m
b c2 a c2 a b2
= a1 b2 − b1 2 + c1 2
c3 a3 c3 a3 b3

Li
3
Ex. 45. Compute the determinant of the matrix
⎡ 1 3 −2 ⎤

y
A = ⎢4 1 −1 ⎥

n
⎣⎢ 5 −3 2 ⎥⎦

pa
1 3 −2 1 −1 4 −1 4 1
Sol. | A | or det A = 4 1 −1 = 1 −3 2 − 3 5 2 − 2 5 −3
5 −3 2
om
= 1 (2 − 3) − 3 (8 + 5) − 2 (− 12 − 5) = − 1 − 39 + 34 = − 6
3.26. Singular and non-singular matrices
C

A square matrix A is said to be singular if det [A] = 0, otherwise it is said to be non-singular.

nd

3.27. The Inverse of a square matrix of order 2

⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡0 0 ⎤
A

You have seen that the unit matrix I = ⎢0 1 ⎥ and the zero matrix O = ⎢0 0 ⎥ of order 2 have the
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
special properties that AI = IA = A and AO = OA = O. Hence the matrices I and 0 are analogous to the
nd

number 1 and 0 respectively in ordinary algebra. Furthermore, in the set of all real numbers, we know
that for each non-zero real number a, there exists another real number 1/a or a−1 such that
a . (1/a) = 1 or aa−1 = a−1 a = 1. This number, you know, is called the multiplicative inverse. The
ha

question arises whether every square matrix A also has a multiplicative inverses A−1. That is, given a
non-zero matrix A of order 2, does there exist a square matrix B such that AB = I = BA ?
C

As will be seen from the following examples, it may or may not exist.
S

⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡a b ⎤ ⎡a 0 ⎤
Let A = ⎢0 0 ⎥ then for any matrix B = ⎢ c d ⎥ we have AB = ⎡⎢ 0 0 ⎤⎥ ≠ I and BA = ⎢ c 0 ⎥ ≠ I .
a b
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
©

−1
Thus, no such matrix B exists such that AB = BA = I which means in other words that A does not
exist in this case.
⎡ 3 − 2⎤ ⎡5 2 ⎤
Now consider another example. Let A = ⎢ − 7 5⎥⎦ and B = ⎢⎣7 3 ⎥⎦
⎣

AB = ⎡⎢0 1 ⎤⎥ = I and BA = ⎡⎢0 1 ⎤⎥ = I since AB = BA = I, therefore, each of the matrices

1 0 1 0
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡ 5 2 ⎤ and ⎡ 3 − 2 ⎤
⎢⎣7 3 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ − 7 5⎦⎥ is the inverse of the other.
Ch 3–42 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Definitions.
1. If A and B are square matrices such that AB = BA = I, then B is called the inverse of A and
written as A–1 = B and similarly, A is called the inverse of B written as B–1 = A.
–1 –1
Thus AA = A A = I.
2. If inverse of A exists, i.e., if A is non-singular, then A is called an invertible matrix.
A non-zero square matrix of order n is said to be invertible if there exists a square matrix
B of order n such that AB = BA = In.
For the inverse of a matrix to exist, the following requirements are necessary:

d
(1) The matrix must be a square matrix. This requirement is essential because in equation

ite
AB = BA = I if A is, say, of order 2 × 3 and B is of order 3 × 2, then AB and BA are both defined but
have different orders, namely, 2 × 2 and 3 × 3 and hence cannot be equal.

m
⎡5 0 ⎤
(2) The equation AB = BA = I must be satisfied. For instance, the matrices A = ⎢0 5 ⎥ ,
⎣ ⎦

Li
⎡ ⎤
B = ⎢ 4 1 ⎥ , AB = ⎡⎢ 20 5 ⎤⎥ = BA, but AB is not equal to I. This leads us to the fact that as 0 has no
1 2 5 10
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

y
inverse in the set of real numbers, so the zero matrix O also has no inverse, because OB = O and
not I.

n
pa
3.28. The uniqueness theorem–an invertible matrix has a unique inverse
Proof. Let A be an invertible square matrix of order n. If possible, let B and C be two inverses
om
of A.
Then AB = BA = In (by definition of inverse matrix)
AC = CA = In
C
Now B = BIn = B (AC)
= (BA) C [Matrix multiplication is associative.]
nd

= InC = C
∴ B = C, i.e., any two inverses of A are equal matrices.
A

Hence the inverse of A is unique.

3.29. Method of finding the inverse of a square matrix of order 2
nd

⎡a b ⎤
Consider the matrix A = ⎢ c d ⎥ . Then we have to see whether there exists a 2 × 2 matrix B such
⎣ ⎦
ha

⎡x y ⎤
that AB = BA = I. Let the matrix B = ⎢ z w ⎥ be the inverse of A. Then, we have,
⎣ ⎦
C

⎡a b ⎤ ⎡ x y ⎤ = I ⎡ ax + bz ay + bw⎤ = ⎡1 0 ⎤
AB = I ⇒ ⇒ ⎢⎣ cx + dz cy + dw ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 1 ⎥⎦
⎣⎢ c d ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ z w⎥⎦
S

This is true if and only if (iff)

©

ax + bz = 1, ay + bw = 0
cx + dz = 0, cy + dw = 1 [rule of equality of matrices]
Solving simultaneously, we get
d ,y = − b , z = − c , w = a
x =
ad − bc ad − bc ad − bc ad − bc
Matrices Ch 3–43

⎡ d −b ⎤
⎢ ad − bc ad − bc ⎥ = 1 ⎡ d − b⎤
B = ⎢ −c
a ⎥ ad − bc ⎢⎣ − c a ⎥⎦
Therefore,
⎢ ⎥
⎣ ad − bc ad − bc ⎦
B will not exist if ad − bc = 0

Conclusion. If A = ⎡ a b ⎤ , then the inverse matrix of A denoted by A–1 exists if and only if
⎣⎢ c d ⎥⎦
ad − bc ≠ 0 and in this case A−1 = 1 ⎡ d − b⎤ .
ad − bc ⎢⎣ − c a ⎥⎦

d
ite
Procedure.
Step 1. Check whether the inverse exists by finding det A or |A|. The inverse will exist
iff |A| ≠ 0.

m
Step 2. Interchange the entries on the leading diagonal and change the signs of the entries

Li
on the other diagonal.
Step 3. Divide the result of step 2 by | A |.

y
⎡1 3⎤ –1

n
Ex. 46. If A = ⎢ 2 − 1⎥ , find A .
⎣ ⎦

pa
1 3
Sol. |A| = 2 − 1 = − 1 − 6 = − 7, Since | A | ≠ 0, therefore, A has an inverse.
om
⎡ − 1 − 3⎤
1 ⎡ − 1 − 3⎤ ⎡ 1 7 3 7 ⎤
A−1 = ⎢⎣ − 2 ⎥ = 1 ⎢ =
| A| 1⎦ − 7 ⎣ − 2 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 7 −1 7 ⎥⎦
–1
It is a good idea to check the result when finding A , because there is much room for blundering
C

in the process of determining the inverse. In the above example, we have

A A = − 1 ⎡ − 1 − 3⎤ ⎡ 1 3⎤ = − 1 ⎡ − 7
nd

–1 0 ⎤ = ⎡1 0 ⎤ .
7 ⎢⎣ − 2 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 − 1⎥⎦ 7 ⎢⎣ 0 − 7 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 1 ⎥⎦

Ex. 47. Show that ⎡ 3 5 ⎤ is singular, and hence no inverse exists.

A

⎣⎢6 10 ⎦⎥
nd

⎡3 5 ⎤
Sol. Let A = ⎢ . Then
⎣6 10 ⎥⎦
ha

|A| = 3 5 = 30 − 30 = 0, therefore, no inverse exists.

6 10
C

Ex. 48. If C = ⎡ 4 2 ⎤ , find C . Under what conditions is C (inverse of C ) defined ? Find

2 x 2 −2 2
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦
−2
S

C under that condition.

⎡2 x ⎤ 2 ⎡2 x ⎤ ⎡2 x ⎤ ⎡4 + 4x 4x ⎤
Sol. C = ⎢ 4 2 ⎥ , C = ⎢ 4 2 ⎥ ⎢ 4 2 ⎥ = ⎢ 16 4 x + 4 ⎦⎥
©

⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣
−2 4 + 4x 4x ≠0
C exists if the determinant 16 4x + 4
i.e. if (4 + 4x)2 − 64x ≠ 0 or (x − 1)2 ≠ 0 or x ≠ 1 which is the required condition.

∴ C
−2
=
1 ⎡4 + 4x − 4x ⎤ .
⎢ − 16 4 + 4x ⎦⎥
16 (1 − x) ⎣
2
Ch 3–44 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

3.30. Cofactors of a matrix

Consider a matrix
⎡ a11 a12 a13 ⎤
A = ⎢ a21 a22 a23 ⎥
⎢a ⎥
⎣ 31 a32 a33 ⎦
The cofactor of any element aij of the matrix is denoted by Aij and is equal to
(−− 1) i + j × minor of aij in det A.
⎡ a11 a12 a13 ⎤

d
⎢a21 a22 a23 ⎥
Thus, for the matrix ⎢a
⎣ 31 a32 a33 ⎥⎦

ite
a22 a23 a a23
Cofactor of a 11 = A11 = (−1)
1+1 = 22

m
a32 a33 a32 a33

1+ 2 a21 a23 a a

Li
Cofactor of a 12 = A12 = (−1) a31 a33
= − 21 23
a31 a33

a12 a13 a a13

y
3+1
Cofactor of a 31 = A31 = (−1) a22 a23
= − 12
a22 a23

n
pa
3+ 2 a11 a13 a a
Cofactor of a 32 = A32 = (−1) a21 a23
= − 11 13
a21 a23

⎡1 2 4 ⎤
om
Ex. 49. If A = ⎢5 7 8 ⎥ , find the cofactors of elements 7 and 12.
⎣⎢9 10 12 ⎦⎥
C

Sol. The cofactor of the element a22 i.e., 7 is

2+2 1 4
nd

A22 = (−1) 9 12 = + (12 − 36) = − 20.

The cofactor of the element a33 i.e., 12 is
A

3+ 3 1 2
A33 = (−1) 5 7 = (7 − 10) = − 3.
nd

3.31. Adjoint of a square matrix

ha

⎡ a11 a12 a13 ⎤

Let A = ⎢ a21 a22 a23 ⎥
⎢ a31 a32 a33 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
C

be a 3 × 3 square matrix, and Aij be the cofactor of aij, the adjoint of A denoted by adj. A is defined by
′
S

⎡ A11 A12 A13 ⎤ ⎡ A11 A 21 A31 ⎤

adj. A = ⎢ A21 A22 A23 ⎥ = ⎢ A12 A22 A32 ⎥
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
©

⎢⎣ A31 A32 A33 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ A13 A 23 A33 ⎦⎥

Note carefully that cofactors of the row entries in A are column entries in adj A.

Definition. The adjoint of a square matrix is the transpose of the matrix obtained by replacing
each element of A by its cofactor in | A |.

2
Note. If A is of order 3 × 3 and k is any number, then adj (kA) = k (adj A).
Matrices Ch 3–45

⎡2 1⎤
Ex. 50. Find the adjoint of the matrix A = ⎢ .
⎣ 4 − 1⎥⎦
⎡2 1⎤
Sol. A = ⎢ 4 − 1⎥ . First we find all the co-factors.
⎣ ⎦
A11 = (− 1)1 + 1 | − 1| = − 1 Missing out entries in the 1st row and 1st column
1+2
A12 = (− 1) | 4 | = − 4, A21 = (− 1)2 + 1 |1| = − 1, A22 = (− 1)2 + 2 | 2 | = 2

⎡ A11 A12 ⎤ ′ ⎡ − 1 − 4⎤ ′ ⎡ − 1 − 1⎤
∴ adj. A = ⎢ ⎥ =⎢ ⎥ = ⎢− ⎥.
⎣− 1

d
⎢⎣ A21 A 22 ⎥⎦ 2⎦ ⎣ 4 2⎦

ite
⎡ 1 −1 2⎤
Ex. 51. Find adjoint of A where A = ⎢⎢ 2 3 5 ⎥⎥

m
⎣⎢ − 2 0 1⎦⎥
⎡ 1 − 1 2⎤

Li
⎢ 3 5⎥⎥
Sol. A = ⎢ 2
⎢⎣ − 2 0 1⎥⎦

n y
We know that adj A is the transpose of the matrix obtained by replacing the elements of A by their
corresponding cofactors.

pa
3 5
A11 = cofactor of a11, i.e. 1 = (− 1)
1+1 =3−0=3
om 0 1
1+2 2 5
A12 = cofactor of a12, i.e. −1 = (− 1) = − (2 + 10) = − 12
−2 1
C
2 3
A13 = cofactor of a13, i.e. 2 = (− 1)1 + 3 =0+6=6
−2 0
nd

2+1 −1 2
A21 = cofactor of a21, i.e. 2 = (− 1) = − (– 1− 0) = 1
0 1
A

1 2
A22 = cofactor of a22, i.e. 3 = (− 1)2 + 2 =1+4=5
−2 1
nd

2+3 1 −1
A23 = cofactor of a23, i.e. 5 = (− 1) = − (0 – 2) = 2
ha

−2 0

3+1
−1 2
C

A31 = cofactor of a31, i.e. – 2 = (− 1) = – 5 – 6 = – 11

3 5
1 2
S

A32 = cofactor of a32, i.e. 0 = (− 1)3 + 2 = – 5 − (– 4) = – 1

2 5
©

3+3 1 −1
A33 = cofactor of a33, i.e. 1 = (− 1) = 3 + 2 = 5.
2 3

A31 ⎤ ⎡ 3 1 − 11⎤
T
⎡ A11 A12 A13 ⎤ ⎡ A11 A 21
⎢ ⎥
adj. A = ⎢ A 21 A 22 A 23 ⎥ = ⎢ A12 A 22 A32 ⎥ = ⎢ − 12 5 − 1⎥ .
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣ A31 A32 A33 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ A13 A 23 A33 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 6 2 5⎥⎦
Ch 3–46 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Ex. 52. Find the adjoint of the matrix

⎛1 4 3⎞
A = ⎜4 2 1⎟
⎜3 2 2⎟
⎝ ⎠
2 1
Sol. A11 = cofactor of a11 in | A | = 1 2 2 = 2; A12 = − 4 1 = − 5.
3 2
4 2 =2 4 3 1 3
A13 = 3 2 , A21 = − 2 2 = − 2 ; A22 = 3 2 = − 7 .

d
1 4 4 3
A23 = − 3 2 = 10 , A31 = 2 1 = − 2

ite
1 3 1 4
A32 = − 4 1 = 11 , A33 = 4 2 = − 14

m
⎛ A11 A21 A31 ⎞ ⎛ 2 −2 −2 ⎞

Li
Adj A = ⎜ A12 A22 A32 ⎟ = ⎜ −5 −7 11⎟
⎜A
⎝ 13 A23 A33 ⎟⎠ ⎜⎝ 2 10 −14 ⎟⎠

y
3.32. An important relation between a square matrix and adj A

n
Theorem. If A be any n-rowed square matrix, then (adj A) A = A (adj A) = | A | In , where In is the

pa
n-rowed unit matrix.
According to this theorem, the product of the matrices A and adj A is commutative and is a scalar
om
matrix every diagonal element of which is | A |.
Let us prove this result when A is a 3 × 3 matrix.
⎡ a1 b1 c1 ⎤ ⎡ A1 A2 A3 ⎤
C
⎢ ⎥
Let A = ⎢ a2 b2 c2 ⎥ ∴ adj A = ⎢⎢ B1 B2 B3 ⎥⎥
⎢⎣ a3 b3 c3 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣C1 C2 C3 ⎥⎦
nd

where A1, B1, C1, ..... are cofactors of a1, b1, c1 ....
⎡ a1 c1 ⎤ ⎡ A1 A2 A3 ⎤
A

b1
∴ A (adj A) = ⎢⎢ a2 b2 c2 ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ B1 B2 B3 ⎥⎥
nd

⎣⎢ a3 b3 c3 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢C1 C2 C3 ⎦⎥
⎡ a1 A1 + b1 B1 + c1C1 a1 A2 + b1 B 2 + c1C 2 a1 A3 + b1 B3 + c1C 3 ⎤
ha

= ⎢⎢ a 2 A1 + b2 B1 + c 2C1 a 2 A2 + b2 B 2 + c 2C 2 a 2 A3 + b2 B3 + c 2C 3 ⎥⎥
⎢⎣ a 3 A1 + b3 B1 + c 3C1 a 3 A2 + b3 B 2 + c 3C 2 a 3 A3 + b3 B3 + c 3C 3 ⎥⎦
C

⎡| A | 0 0 ⎤ ⎡1 0 0 ⎤
= ⎢ 0 | A | 0 ⎥ = | A | ⎢⎢ 0 1 0⎥⎥ = | A | ⋅ I 3 [Remark Art. 2.05 in Chapter 2]
⎢ ⎥
S

⎢⎣ 0 0 | A |⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
©

Since a1A2 + b1B2 + c1C2 = a1(b1c3 − b3c1) + b1 (a1c3 − c1a3) + c1 (a1b3 − a3b1) = 0, etc.
Similarly we can prove that (adj A) A = | A |. I3
∴ A (adj A) = (adj A) A = | A | .I3
Note. (1) Adj I = I, (2) Adj O = O.
Matrices Ch 3–47

⎡1 2 ⎤
Ex. 53. If A = ⎢ ⎥ , then verify that A (adj A) = (adj A) A = | A | I2 .
⎣3 4⎦
⎡1 2 ⎤
Sol. We have A = ⎢ ⎥
⎣3 4 ⎦
1+1
Here A11 = cofactor of a11 (= 1) = (− 1) | 4 | = 4,
1+2
A12 = cofactor of a12 (= 2) = (− 1) |3|=–3
2+1
A21 = cofactor of a21, i.e. 3 = (− 1) |2|=–2
2+2
A22 = cofactor of a22, i.e. 4 = (− 1) |1|=1

d
T
⎡ A11 A21 ⎤ ⎡ 4 − 2 ⎤

ite
⎡A A12 ⎤
∴ (adj A) = ⎢ 11 ⎥ = ⎢A ⎥=⎢
⎣ 21
A A 22 ⎦ ⎣ 12 A22 ⎦ ⎣ − 3 1⎥⎦

m
⎡1 2⎤ ⎡ 4 − 2⎤ ⎡ 4 − 6 − 2 + 2⎤ ⎡− 2 0⎤
∴ A (adj A) = ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ =⎢ ⎥ =⎢ ⎥
⎣3 4⎦ ⎣ − 3 1 ⎦ ⎣12 − 12 − 6 + 4⎦ ⎣ 0 − 2⎦

Li
⎡ 4 − 2 ⎤ ⎡1 2⎤ ⎡ 4 − 6 8 − 8 ⎤ ⎡− 2 0⎤
∴ (adj A) A = ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ =⎢ ⎥ =⎢ ⎥
⎣ − 3 1 ⎦ ⎣3 4 ⎦ ⎣ − 3 + 3 − 6 + 4 ⎦ ⎣ 0 − 2 ⎦

y
1 2 ⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡ − 2 0⎤

n
| A | I2 = ⋅ = (4 − 6). ⎢ ⎥ = − 2 ⎢0 1 ⎥ = ⎢ 0 − 2 ⎥
3 4 ⎢⎣0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎣ 0 1 ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

pa
∴ A (adj A) = (adj A) A = | A | I2.
⎡cos α − sin α 0 ⎤
om
Ex. 54. If A = ⎢ sin α cos α 0 ⎥ , find adj A and verify that
⎢ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
⎣
A (adj A) = (adj A) A = | A | I3. (NMOC)
C

⎡ cos α − sin α 0⎤
A = ⎢ sin α cos α 0⎥
nd

Sol. Given
⎢ 0 0 1⎥⎦
⎣
cos α − sin α 0 = cos α (cos α − 0) + sin α (sin α − 0)
A

∴ | A | = sin α cos α 0 2 2
0 0 1 = cos α + sin α = 1
nd

1+1 1+2
A11 = (− 1) (cos α − 0) = cos α ; A12 = (− 1) (sin α − 0) = − sin α ;
1+ 3
A13 = (− 1) (0 − 0) = 0
ha

2+1 2+2
A21 = (− 1) (− sin α − 0) = sin α ; A22 = (− 1) (cos α − 0) = cos α ;
2+3
A23 = (− 1) (0 − 0) = 0
C

A31 = (− 1)3 + 1 (0 − 0) = 0; A32 = (− 1)3 + 2 (0 − 0) = 0; A33 = (− 1)3 + 3 (cos2 α + sin2 α) = 1

⎡ A11 A 21 A31 ⎤ ⎡ cos α sin α 0 ⎤
Adj. A = ⎢ A 21 A 22 A32 ⎥ = ⎢ − sin α cos α 0 ⎥
S

∴
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎣⎢ A31 A32 A33 ⎦⎥ ⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
©

⎡cos α − sin α 0 ⎤ ⎡ cos α sin α 0 ⎤

Now A (Adj. A) = ⎢ sin α cos α 0 ⎥ ⎢ − sin α cos α 0 ⎥
⎢ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
⎣
⎡ cos 2 α + sin 2 α + 0 cos α sin α − sin α cos α 0 + 0 + 0 ⎤
⎢
= ⎢sin α cos α − cos α sin α 2 2 ⎥
sin α + cos α + 0 0 + 0 + 0⎥
⎢⎣ 0+0+0 0+0+0 0 + 0 + 1 ⎥⎦
Ch 3–48 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡1 0 0⎤
= ⎢ 0 1 0 ⎥ = I3 = | A | I3. [3 | A | = 1]
⎢0 0 1⎥
⎣ ⎦
2
Ex. 55. If A is a 3 × 3 non-singular matrix, then | adj A | = | A | .
Sol. We know that A (adj A) = | A | I3
⎡1 0 0⎤ ⎡| A | 0 0 ⎤ | A| 0 0
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
∴ A (adj A) = | A | ⎢ 0 1 0⎥ = ⎢ 0 | A | 0 ⎥ ⇒ | A (adj A) | = 0 | A | 0
⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0 | A |⎥⎦ 0 0 | A|

d
⇒ | A (adj A) | = | A | ⇒ | A | | adj A | = | A | 3 ⇒ | adj A | = | A |2
3
(Œ | A | ≠ 0)
Note. If A is a n × n non-singular matrix, then | adj A | = | A |n−1.

ite
Ex. 56. If A is a 3 × 3 singular matrix, prove that A (adj A) = O.
⎡ A11 A21 A31 ⎤

m
⎡ a11 a12 a13 ⎤
A = ⎢ a21 a22 a23 ⎥ . Then adj A = ⎢A A32 ⎥⎥
Sol. Let
⎢ a31 a32 ⎢ 12 A22
a33 ⎥⎦

Li
⎣ ⎢⎣ A13 A23 A33 ⎥⎦
where A11, A12, A13,.... are the cofactors of a11, a12, a13, ...... respectively.

y
⎡1 0 0⎤ ⎡| A | 0 0 ⎤

n
⎢0 1 0 ⎥ = ⎢ 0 | A | 0 ⎥
∴ A (adj A) = | A | I3 = | A | ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥

pa
⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0 | A |⎥⎦
⎡0 0 0 ⎤
⎢ ⎥
om
= ⎢0 0 0⎥ = O, (A being a singular matrix, | A | = 0)
⎢⎣0 0 0⎥⎦
C

⎡1 3 1⎤
Ex. 57. If A = ⎢ 2 1 0 ⎥ , find the value of (adj. A) A without finding Adj. A. (NMOC)
⎢3 2 3⎥
nd

⎣ ⎦
⎡1 3 1⎤ 1 3 1
= 1(3 − 0) − 3 (6 − 0)
A

Sol. Given A = ⎢ 2 1 0 ⎥ ⇒ |A|= 2 1 0

⎢3 2 3⎥ = − 14
⎣ ⎦ 3 2 3
nd

We know that (Adj. A) A = | A | I

⎡1 0 0⎤ ⎡− 14 0 0⎤
∴ Here (adj A) A = −14I = −14 ⎢0 1 0⎥ = ⎢ 0 − 14 0⎥ .
ha

⎢0 0 1 ⎥ ⎢ 0 0 − 14⎥⎦
⎣ ⎦ ⎣
C

3.33. Theorem
If A and B are two non-singular matrices of the same type, then
S

adj (AB) = (adj B) (adj A)

©

Proof. We have (AB) (adj AB) = | AB | I = (adj AB) (AB) Theorem (Art. 3.32)
Now (AB) (adj B) (adj A) = A (B adj B) (adj A)
= A (| B | I) (adj A) = | B | A (adj A) = | B | | A | I = | A | | B |I = | AB | I
= (AB) (adj AB)
AB = AC does not necessarily imply B = C. However,
⇒ (adj B) (adj A) = adj (AB) if A, B, C are square matrices of the same type and if
A is non-singular then AB = AC ⇒ B = C
Matrices Ch 3–49

Ex. 58. Find the adjoint of the matrix

⎡1 0 − 1⎤
⎢
A= 3 4 5 ⎥⎥ and verify the theorem A (adj A) = | A | I3 = (adj A) A. (ISC 2006)
⎢
⎢⎣ 0 − 6 − 7 ⎥⎦

⎡1 0 − 1⎤
Sol. Given A = ⎢3 4 5⎥
⎢0 − 6 − 7 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
1 0 −1

d
|A| = 3 4 5 = 1 (− 28 + 30) − 1 (− 18 − 0), = 20, expanding along R1

ite
0 −6 −7
4 5 3 5 ⎡3 4⎤

m
A11 = = 2, A12 = − = 21, A13 = ⎢ = − 18
−6 −7 0 − 7 ⎣0 − 6 ⎥⎦

Li
0 −1 1 −1 ⎡1 0⎤
A21 = − = 6, A22 = = − 7, A23 = − ⎢ ⎥=6
−6 −7 0 −7 ⎣0 − 6 ⎦

y
0 −1 1 −1 ⎡ 1 0⎤

n
A31 = = 4, A32 = − = − 8, A33 = ⎢ ⎥=4
4 5 3 5 ⎣3 4 ⎦

pa
⎡ A11 A12 A13 ⎤ ⎡ A11 A 21 A31 ⎤ ⎡ 2 6 4⎤
⎢ A 23 ⎥⎥ = ⎢⎢ A12 A32 ⎥ = ⎢ 21 − 7 − 8⎥⎥
⎥ ⎢
Adj A = transpose of ⎢ A 21 A 22 A 22
om
⎢⎣ A31 A32 A33 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ A13 A 23 A33 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 18 6 4 ⎥⎦
⎡1 0 − 1⎤ ⎡ 2 6 4⎤
C
⎢3 4 5 ⎥ ⎢ 21 − 7 − 8⎥
Now A (adj A) = ⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥
⎢⎣0 − 6 − 7 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 18 6 4 ⎥⎦
nd

⎡ 2 + 0 + 18 6+0−6 4 + 0 − 4⎤ ⎡ 20 0 0 ⎤ ⎡1 0 0 ⎤
⎢ + − − + − + ⎥ = ⎢ ⎥ = ⎢0 1 0⎥ = | A | I .
A

=⎢ 6 84 90 18 28 30 12 32 20 ⎥ ⎢ 0 20 0 ⎥ 20 ⎢ ⎥ 3
⎢⎣0 − 126 + 126 0 + 42 − 42 0 + 48 − 28⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0 20 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 1 ⎥⎦
nd

⎡ 2 6 4⎤ ⎡ 1 0 − 1⎤
Also ⎢ ⎥ ⎢
(adj A) A = ⎢ 21 − 7 − 8⎥ ⎢ 3 4 5⎥⎥
ha

⎢⎣ − 18 6 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 − 6 − 7 ⎥⎦
⎡ 2 + 18 + 0 0 + 24 − 24 − 2 + 30 − 28⎤ ⎡ 20 0 0 ⎤ ⎡1 0 0 ⎤
C

⎢ 0 − 28 + 48 −21 − 35 + 56 ⎥ = ⎢ 0 20 0 ⎥ = 20 ⎢⎢0 1 0 ⎥⎥ = | A | I 3
⎥ ⎢ ⎥
= ⎢ 21 − 21 + 0
⎢⎣ − 18 + 18 + 0 0 + 24 − 24 18 + 30 − 28⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 0 20 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 1 ⎥⎦
S

Hence, A (adj A) = | A | I3 = (adj A) A.

©

EXERCISE 3 (g)
1. Find the adjoint of the following matrices
⎡−1 − 2 3⎤ ⎡1 0 2 ⎤
⎡1 2 ⎤ ⎡ 2 3⎤
(a) A = ⎢ , (b ) A = ⎢ , (c ) A = ⎢ − 2 1 1⎥ , (d ) A = ⎢2 1 0⎥ .
⎣3 4 ⎥⎦ ⎣ 5 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢− 4 − 5 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢3 2 1 ⎥
⎣ ⎣ ⎦
Ch 3–50 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

2. Find the adjoint of the matrix A and verify A (adj. A) = (adj A) A = | A | I2.
⎡3 4⎤ ⎡5 − 2⎤
(i) A = ⎢ ⎥ (ii) A = ⎢ ⎥.
⎣5 7 ⎦ ⎣3 − 2⎦
⎡ 1 − 1 1⎤
3. For the matrix A = ⎢ 2 3 0 ⎥ , prove that A (adj A) = O.
⎢18 2 10 ⎥⎦
⎣
⎡ 1 −2 3⎤
4. Find A (adj A) for the matrix A = ⎢ 0 2 − 1⎥ .
⎢− 4 5 2⎥⎦
⎣
⎡1 2 3 ⎤

d
5. If A = ⎢3 1 2 ⎥ , find the value of A (Adj. A) without finding Adj A. (NMOC)
⎢1 0 3 ⎥

ite
⎣ ⎦
[Hint. A (adj A) = | A | I.]
⎡ − 4 − 3 − 3⎤

m
6. If A = ⎢ 1 0 1⎥ , show that adj A = A.
⎢ 4 4 3⎥⎦
⎣

Li
⎡1 1 1⎤
7. For the matrix A = ⎢ 1 2 − 3⎥ , verify the theorem A (adj A) = (adj A) A = | A | I.
⎢2 3⎥⎦

y
⎣ −1

n
⎡1 2⎤ ⎡ 1 1⎤
8. If A = ⎢ 2 1 ⎥ and B = ⎢ 2 1⎥ , prove that adj AB = (adj B) (adj A).
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

pa
⎡− 1 − 2 − 2⎤
9. If A = ⎢ 2 1 − 2 ⎥ , show that adj A = 3 A′.
⎢ 2 −2 1⎥⎦
⎣
om
⎡ 1 − 2 − 2⎤
10. If A = ⎢ 2 1 − 2 ⎥ , find a non-zero unit matrix B such that AB = BA.
⎢2 − 2 1⎥⎦
C
⎣
[Hint. A (adj A) = (adj A) A ∴ B = adj A. Hence calculate adj A.] [Art. 3.32]
nd

11. Prove that | adj AB | = | adj A | | adj B |

[Hint. By Art 3.34, we know that adj AB = (adj B) (adj A)
⇒ | adj AB | = | adj B | | adj A | = | adj A | | adj B | ].
A

12. Given that A = ⎡⎢

cos x sin x ⎤
and A(adj. A) = K ⎡
1 0⎤
⎣ − sin x cos x ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 1⎥⎦ , find the value of K. (ISC 2005)
nd

[Hint. K = |A|, by Art. 3.32]

ha

ANSWERS
⎡ 7 − 11 − 5⎤ ⎡ 1 4 − 2⎤
1. (a) ⎡ 4 − 2⎤ (b) ⎡ 1 − 3⎤
C

⎢⎣ − 3
(c) ⎢ 0 10 − 5 ⎥ (d) ⎢ − 2 − 5 4⎥
1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣− 5 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢ 1 −2
⎢14
⎣ 3 − 5 ⎥
⎦ ⎣ 1⎥⎦
S

⎡ − 14 0⎤ ⎡− 3 6 6⎤
⎡ 25 0 0 ⎤ 0
⎢− 6 ⎥
4. ⎢ 0 25 0 ⎥ 5. ⎢ 0 − 14 0 ⎥ 10. 5 − 2 12. K = 1
⎢ 0 ⎥ ⎢ − 6 −2 ⎥
©

⎢ 0 0 25⎥ 0 − 14 ⎣ 5 ⎦
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

3.34. Inverse of an n × n matrix

1
If A is an n × n non-singular matrix of order n, then A–1 = (adj A) .
| A|
By definition of an inverse matrix, we know that if AB = BA = I, then B is called the inverse of A, i.e.,
–1
B=A
Matrices Ch 3–51

In Art. 3.32 we have seen that, A (adj A) = (adj A) A = | A | I ...(1)

Since A is non-singular, | A | ≠ 0, therefore,
⎛ 1 ⎞ ⎛ 1 ⎞ 1
(1) ⇒ A⎜ adj A ⎟ = ⎜ adj A ⎟ A = I ⇒ A– 1 = (adj A)
⎝| A| ⎠ ⎝ | A | ⎠ | A|
1
Note. 1. adj A = | A | A–1, if A is non-singular 2. (adj A)–1 = A
| A|
⎡0 0 1 ⎤
3. adj I = I 4. adj O = O 5. The inverse of ⎢0 1 0 ⎥ is itself.

d
⎢⎣1 0 0 ⎥⎦

ite
6. If A is a non-singular matrix of order 3 and k is any non-zero number, then
1 1
(kA)
–1
= (adj kA) = 3 k 2 (adj A) [See note Art. 3.31]

m
| kA | k | A|

Li
1 1 1
= . adj A = A−1.
k | A| k

y
3.35. Theorem

n
The necessary and sufficient condition for a square matrix A to possess inverse is that

pa
| A| ≠ 0, i.e. A is non-singular.
Proof. (a) The condition is necessary, i.e., given that A has inverse, to show that | A | ≠ 0.
om
Let B be the inverse of A, then AB = BA = I
⇒ | AB | = | BA | = | I | ⇒ | A | | B | = | B | | A | = 1 ⇒ | A | ≠ 0.
(b) The condition is sufficient, i.e., given that | A | ≠ 0, to show that A has inverse.
C

adj A
Since | A | ≠ 0, consider B =
| A|
nd

⎛ adj ⎞ I I
AB = A ⎜ ⎟ = | A | A (adj A) = | A | ( | A | I ) = I 3 A (adj A) = | A |
⎝ | A | ⎠
A

⎛ adj ⎞ I I
BA = ⎜ ⎟ A = | A | (adj A) A = | A | ( | A | I ) = I ∴ (adj A) A = | A | I
nd

⎝| A|⎠
Thus AB = BA = I
ha

–1 adj A
∴ The inverse of A exists and A = B = .
| A|
C

From the above theorem, we conclude that A has inverse if and only if | A | ≠ 0. Then
S

–1 adj A
A = .
| A|
©

⎡ p q⎤
Ex. 59. Find the inverse of the matrix ⎢ ⎥ , if ps − rq ≠ 0
⎣r s⎦
⎡ p q⎤ ⎡ p q⎤ –1
Sol. Let A = ⎢ ⎥ . Then | A | = ⎢ r s ⎥ = ps − rq ≠ 0 (given). Hence A exists.
⎣ r s ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Now A11 = s, A12 = − r, A21 = − q, A22 = p
Ch 3–52 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

T T
∴ adj A = ⎡⎢ 11
A A12 ⎤ ⎡ s − r⎤ ⎡ s − q⎤
=⎢ =⎢
⎣ 21
A A22 ⎥⎦ ⎣ − q p ⎥
⎦ ⎣ − r p ⎥⎦
–1adj A 1 ⎡ s − q⎤
∴ =
ps − rq ⎢⎣ − r p ⎥⎦
A = .
| A|
⎡ p q⎤ 1 ⎡ s − q⎤
Method II. By Art. 3.29, the inverse of ⎢ r s ⎥ = ⎢ − r p ⎥ , provided ps − rq ≠ 0.
⎣ ⎦ ps − rq ⎣ ⎦
Note. In the case of 2 × 2 matrix it is easier to find inverse by the method of Art. 3.29.
⎡− 2 5⎤

d
Ex. 60. Find the inverse of the matrix ⎢ ⎥ and verify your answer.
⎣ 3 4⎦

ite
⎡− 2 5 ⎤
Sol. Let A = ⎢ 3 4 ⎥ then | A | = − 2 × 4 − 3 × 5 = − 23 ≠ 0

m
⎣ ⎦
Since | A | ≠ 0, therefore, A is non-singular and A−1 exists.

Li
1 +1 1+2
Now A11 = (−1) | 4 | = 4, A12 = (− 1) |3|=−3
2+1 2+2
A21 = (−1) | 5 | = − 5, A22 = (−1) | −2| = −2

y
⎡ A11 A21 ⎤ ⎡ 4 − 5 ⎤
=

n
∴ adj A = ⎢
⎣ A12 A22 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 3 − 2 ⎥⎦

pa
−1 adj A 1 ⎡ 4 − 5⎤ − 1 ⎡ 4 − 5⎤
∴ = = .
−23 ⎢⎣ − 3 − 2⎥⎦ 23 ⎢⎣ − 3 − 2⎥⎦
A =
| A|
om
Verification :
To verify we have to show that
–1 –1
AA = A A = I2
C

⎡− 2 5⎤ 1 ⎡ 4 − 5⎤ 1 ⎡ − 8 − 15 10 − 10 ⎤
AA−1 = ⎢ ⎥ × − 23 ⎢ − 3 − 2 ⎥ = −
23 ⎢⎣ 12 −12 −15 − 8⎥⎦
nd

⎣ 3 4 ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
− 1 ⎡ − 23 0 ⎤ − 23 ⎡1 0 ⎤
=
23 ⎣ 0 − 23⎥⎦ − 23 ⎢⎣0 1 ⎥⎦
⎢
A

= = I2.

1 ⎡ 4 − 5 ⎤ ⎡ − 2 5⎤ 1 ⎡ − 8 − 15 20 − 20 ⎤
nd

−1
A A = − =−
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
23 ⎣ − 3 − 2 ⎦ ⎣ 3 4 ⎦ 23 ⎢⎣ 6 − 6 −15 − 8⎥⎦
1 ⎡ − 23 0 ⎤ − 23 ⎡ 1 0 ⎤ ⎡ 1 0 ⎤
ha

= − ⎢ 0 − 23⎥ = − ⎢ 0 1⎥ = ⎢ 0 1⎥ = I 2
23 ⎣ ⎦ 23 ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Hence, verified.
C

Ex. 61. Find a 2 × 2 matrix B such that B ⎡1 −2 ⎤ = ⎡6 0 ⎤ .

⎣⎢1 4 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢0 6 ⎦⎥
S

−1
−
Sol. B = ⎡⎢6 0 ⎤⎥ ⎡⎢1 2 ⎤⎥
©

⎣ 0 6 ⎦⎣ 1 4⎦
1 −2 ⎤
A = ⎡⎢
−1
Let . We have to find A .
⎣1 4 ⎥⎦
−1 Adj. A 1 ⎡ 4 2 ⎤
A11 = 4, A12 = −1, A21 = 2, A22 = 1, | A | = 4 + 2 = 6, A = = ⎢
| A| 6 ⎣ −1 1⎥⎦
⎡6 0 ⎤ 1 ⎡ 4 2 ⎤ 1 ⎡ 1 0 ⎤ ⎡ 4 2⎤ ⎡ 4 2⎤ ⎡ 4 2⎤
∴ B = ⎢0 6 ⎥ 6 ⎢ −1 1⎥ = 6 × ⎢ = I. ⎢ = .
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ 6 ⎣0 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −1 1⎥⎦ ⎣ −1 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −1 1⎥⎦
Matrices Ch 3–53

⎡ 1 −1 2 ⎤
Ex. 62. Find the inverse of the matrix ⎢ 0 2 −3 ⎥ . Verify your answer.
⎣⎢ 3 −2 4 ⎦⎥
⎡ 1 −1 2 ⎤ 1 −1 2
Sol. Let A = ⎢ 0 2 −3⎥ ⇒ | A | = 0 2 −3 = 1 (8 − 6) + 1 (0 + 9) + 2 (0 − 6)
⎢⎣ 3 −2 4⎥⎦ 3 −2 4
= 2 + 9 − 12 = −1 ≠ 0
−1 Adj. A .
∴ A is invertible and A = Now we find adj. A.
| A|

d
2 −3 0 −3
A11 = (−1)2 −2 4 = (8 − 6) = 2, A12 = (−1)3 3 4 = − (0 + 9) = −9

ite
4 0 2 3 −1 2
A13 = (−1) 3 −2 = (0 − 6) = −6, A21 = (−1) −2 4 = − (−4 + 4) = 0

m
4 1 2 5 1 −1 = − (−2 + 3) = −1
3 4 = (4 − 6) = −2,

Li
A22 = (−1) A23 = (−1)
3 −2
4 −1 2 5 1 2 = −(− 3 − 0) = 3
A31 = (−1) 2 −3 = (3 − 4) = −1, A32 = (−1)

y
0 −3

n
A33 = (−1)6 1 −1 = (2 + 0) = 2.

pa
0 2

⎡ 2 −9 −6 ⎤ ′ ⎡ 2 0 −1⎤
∴
om
adj. A = ⎢ 0 −2 −1⎥ = ⎢ − 9 −2 3⎥
⎢⎣ −1 3 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 6 −1 2 ⎥⎦

adj. A 1 ⎡ 2 0 −1⎤ ⎡ −2 0 1⎤
C

∴ A−1 = = ⎢ −9 −2 3⎥ = ⎢ 9 2 −3⎥ .
| A| −1 ⎢ − 6 − 1 2 ⎥ ⎢ 6 1 − 2 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
nd

Verification :
−1 −1
To verify we have to show that AA = A A = I.
A

−1
⎡ 1 −1 2 ⎤ ⎡ −2 0 1⎤
AA = ⎢0 2 −3⎥ ⎢ 9 2 −3⎥
⎢⎣ 3 −2 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 6 1 −2 ⎥⎦
nd

⎡ −2 − 9 + 12 0 − 2 + 2 1 + 3 − 4 ⎤ ⎡ 1 0 0⎤
= ⎢ 0 + 18 − 18 0 + 4 − 3 0 − 6 + 6⎥ = ⎢ 0 1 0⎥ = I.
ha

⎢ − 6 − 18 + 24 0 − 4 + 4 3 + 6 − 8⎥ ⎢ ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣0 0 1⎦
⎡ −2 0 1⎤ ⎡ 1 −1 2 ⎤
C

−1
A A = ⎢ 9 2 −3⎥ ⎢0 2 −3⎥
⎢⎣ 6 1 −2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3 −2 4 ⎥⎦
S

⎡ −2 + 0 + 3 2 + 0 − 2 −4 + 0 + 4 ⎤ ⎡ 1 0 0⎤
= ⎢ 9 + 0 − 9 −9 + 4 + 6 18 − 6 − 12 ⎥ = ⎢0 1 0 ⎥ = I.
©

⎢ 6 + 0 − 6 −6 + 2 + 4 12 − 3 − 8⎥ ⎢0 0 1⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Hence, verified.

3.36. Properties of matrices and inverses

There are a number of useful properties associated with matrices and their inverses. For example,
we have the following:
Ch 3–54 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Theorem 1. If A, B be two n-rowed non-singular matrices, then AB is also non-singular and

–1 −1 − 1
(AB) = B A (Reversal law for the inverse of a product)
i.e., the inverse of a product is the product of the inverses taken in the reverse order.
⎡ 2 0 ⎤ and B = ⎡ 0 1 ⎤ , verify that (AB)–1 = B–1 A–1.
Ex. 63. If A = ⎢ ⎢⎣ 2 4 ⎥⎦
⎣ 3 1 ⎥⎦
⎡ 2 0 ⎤ ⎡ 0 1 ⎤ ⎡0 2 ⎤ 0 2
Sol. AB = ⎢ = , | AB | = =0×7−2×2=−4≠0
⎣ 3 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 7 ⎥⎦ 2 7
adj ( AB)

d
Since | AB | ≠ 0, therefore, (AB)–1 exists and is =
| AB |

ite
1+1 1+2
The cofactors of first row in | AB | are (−1) | 7 | and (−1) , | 2 | i.e., 7 and − 2.
The cofactors of second row are (− 1)2 + 1 | 2 | and (− 1)2 + 2 | 0 | , i.e., − 2 and 0.

m
⎡− 7 1⎤
⎡ 7 − 2⎤ ′ ⎡ 7 − 2⎤ −1 1 ⎡ 7 − 2⎤ ⎢ 4 2⎥
∴ adj (AB) = ⎢ = ∴ ( AB) = − ⎢ =

Li
...(1)
⎣− 2 0 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ − 2 0 ⎦⎥ 4 ⎣− 2 0 ⎦⎥ ⎢ 1 ⎥
⎢⎣ 2 0⎥
⎦

y
⎡ ⎤
2 0 2 0
Again, A = ⎢3 1 ⎥ ∴ | A | = 3 1 = 2 ≠ 0 ∴ A−1 exists.
⎣ ⎦

n
1+1
Co-factors of first row in | A | are (− 1) | 1 | = 1 and

pa
(−1)1 + 2 | 3 | = − 3. Co-factors of second row are (− 1)2 + 1 | 0 | = 0 and (− 1)2 + 2 | 2 | = 2
′ adj. A 1 ⎡ 1 0 ⎤
adj. A = ⎡ 1 − 3⎤ = ⎡ 1 0 ⎤
∴
om ∴ A =
−1
= ⎢
⎢⎣0 ⎥ ⎢
2⎦ ⎣− 3 2 ⎦ ⎥ | A| 2 ⎣ − 3 2 ⎥⎦
⎡0 1 ⎤ 0 1 −1
B = ⎢ ∴| B | = =−2≠0 ∴ B exists
⎣ 2 4 ⎥⎦
C
2 4
Co-factors of first row in | B | are (− 1)1 + 1 | 4 | = 4 and (− 1)1 + 2 | 2 | = − 2.
nd

2+1 2+2
Co-factors of second row are (− 1) | 1 | = − 1 and (− 1) |0|=0
′
adj. B = ⎡ 4 − 2 ⎤ = ⎡ 4 − 1⎤ ∴ B = = − 1 ⎡ 4 − 1⎤
−1 adj B
∴
A

⎢⎣ − 1 ⎥
0⎦ ⎣− 2 ⎢ 0⎦ ⎥ | B | 2 ⎢⎣ − 2 0 ⎥⎦
⎡− 7 1 ⎤
nd

−1 −1 1 ⎡ 4 − 1⎤ ⎡ 1 0 ⎤ 1 ⎡ 7 − 2⎤ ⎢ 4 2 ⎥
Also B A = − ⎢ =− ⎢ = ...(2)
4 ⎣− 2 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 3 2 ⎥⎦ 4 ⎣− 2 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢ 1 0 ⎥
⎢ ⎥
⎣ 2 ⎦
ha

From (1) and (2) it follows that (AB)−1 = B−1 A−1.

⎡5 0 4⎤ ⎡1 2 3⎤
C

Ex. 64. If A = ⎢ 2 3 2 ⎥ and B = ⎢1 4 3⎥ find (AB) .

−1 −1
(NMOC)
⎢ 1 2 1⎥ ⎢1 3 4⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
S

Sol. We will find (AB)−1 by using the relation (AB)−1 = B−1A−1. So first we find A−1.
©

5 0 4
|A| = 2 3 2 = 5 (3 − 4) − 0 (2 − 2) + 4 (4 − 3) = −5 + 4 = −1 ≠ 0
1 2 1
∴ A−1 exists.
1+1 1+2 1+3
A11 = (−1) (3 − 4) = −1 ; A12 = (−1) (2 − 2) = 0 ; A13 = (−1) (4 − 3) = 1
2+1 2+2 2+3
A21 = (−1) (0 − 8) = 8 ; A22 = (−1) (5 − 4) = 1 ; A23 = (−1) (10 − 0) = −10
3+1
A31 = (−1) (0 − 12) = −12 ; A32 = (−1)3 + 2 (10 − 8) = −2 ; A33 = (−1)3 + 3 (15 − 0) = 15
Matrices Ch 3–55

⎡ A11 A21 A31 ⎤ ⎡ −1 8 −12 ⎤

⎢
Adj A = A12 A22 A32 ⎥ = ⎢ 0 1 −2 ⎥
⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎣⎢ A13 A23 A33 ⎦⎥ ⎣ 1 − 10 −15⎥⎦
⎡ −1 8 −12⎤ ⎡ 1 −8 12⎤
Adj. A 1 ⎢
∴ A−1 = = 0 1 −2⎥ = ⎢ 0 −1 2⎥
| A| −1 ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ −1 10 −15⎥
⎣ 1 10 15 ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡1 2 3⎤ ⎡ 1 −8 12 ⎤
= B A = ⎢1 4 3⎥ ⎢ 0 −1 2⎥
−1 −1 −1
∴ (AB)
⎢1 3 4 ⎥ ⎢ −1 10 −15⎥
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦

d
⎡1 + 0 − 3 −8 − 2 + 30 12 + 4 − 45⎤ ⎡ −2 20 −29 ⎤

ite
= ⎢1 + 0 − 3 −8 − 4 + 30 12 + 8 − 45⎥ = ⎢ −2 18 −25 ⎥ .
⎢1 + 0 − 4 −8 − 3 + 40 12 + 6 − 60 ⎥ ⎢ −3 29 −42 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

m
–1 –1
Theorem 2. (A′) = (A )′.

Li
⎡ 3 − 10 − 1 ⎤
Ex. 65. If A = ⎢ − 2 8 2 ⎥⎥ , verify that (A′′ )–1 = (A–1)′′ .
⎢

y
⎢⎣ 2 − 4 − 2 ⎥⎦

n
⎡ 3 − 10 − 1 ⎤ ⎡ a11 a12 a13 ⎤

pa
Sol. A = ⎢ − 2
⎢ 8 2 ⎥⎥ = ⎢⎢ a21 a22 a23 ⎥⎥ , (say)
⎣⎢ 2 − 4 − 2 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ a31 a32 a33 ⎦⎥
om
3 − 10 − 1 2 − 10 − 1
Then, | A | = − 2 8 2 = 0 8 2 , operating C1 + C3
C

2 −4 −2 0 −4 −2
nd

8 2
= 2 = 2(− 16 + 8) = − 16 ≠ 0 ∴ A–1 exists.
−4 −2
A

⎡ A11 A21 A31 ⎤

⎢ A32 ⎥⎥
adj. A = ⎢ A12 A22
nd

⎢⎣ A13 A23 A33 ⎥⎦

− 10 − 1 − 10 − 1
ha

8 2
A11 = = − 8, A21 = − = − 16, A31 = = − 12
−4 −2 −4 −2 8 2
C

−2 2 3 −1 3 −1
A12 = − = 0, A22 = = − 4, A32 = − =−4
2 −2 −2 −2 −2 2
S

−2 8 3 − 10 3 − 10
A13 = = − 8, A23 = − = − 8, A33 = =4
− 2 −4 −2
©

2 4 8
⎡ − 8 − 16 − 12 ⎤ ⎡ − 8 − 16 − 12 ⎤ ⎡2 4 3⎤
⎢ 0 − 4 − 4 ⎥ and A−1 = adj A 1 ⎢ ⎥ 1⎢
∴ adj A = ⎢ ⎥ =– 0 − 4 − 4⎥ = ⎢0 1 1⎥⎥
| A| 16 ⎢ 4
⎣⎢ − 8 − 8 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 8 − 8 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 2 − 1⎥⎦

⎡2 0 2⎤
1⎢
∴ −1
( A )′ = ⎢ 4 1 2 ⎥⎥ ...(1)
4
⎢⎣ 3 1 − 1⎥⎦
Ch 3–56 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡ 3 −2 2⎤ ⎡ b11 b12 b13 ⎤

Now, A′ = ⎢ − 10 8 − 4 ⎥⎥ = ⎢⎢b21 b22 b23 ⎥⎥ , (say)
⎢
⎢⎣ − 1 2 − 2⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ b31 b32 b33 ⎦⎥
8 −4 − 10 − 4 − 10 8
| A′ | = 3 − (− 2) +2
2 −2 −1 − 2 −1 2
= 3(– 16 + 8) + 2(20 – 4) + 2(– 20 + 8) = – 24 + 32 – 24 = – 16 ≠ 0
Hence, (A′)–1 exists.
⎡ B11 B31 ⎤ ⎡ − 8 0 − 8⎤

d
B21
⎢ B23 ⎥ = ⎢ 16 − 4 − 8⎥⎥ [Find the values of B , B ,.....etc., yourself]
⎥ ⎢

ite
adj A′ = ⎢ B12 B22
11 21
⎢⎣ B13 B23 B33 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 12 − 4 4⎥⎦

m
⎡ −8 0 − 8⎤ ⎡2 0 2⎤
adj A′ 1 ⎢
16 − 4 − 8⎥ = ⎢ 4 1 2⎥⎥
⎥
−1 1⎢
∴ ( A′ ) = =− ...(2)

Li
| A′ | 16 ⎢ 4
⎢⎣ − 12 − 4 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3 1 − 1⎥⎦
(1) and (2) ⇒ (A′′ )–1 = (A–1)′′ .

y
Ex. 66. Show that

n
−1

pa
⎡ 1 − tan θ ⎤ ⎡ 1 tan θ ⎤ ⎡ cos 2θ − sin 2θ ⎤
⎢ tan θ ⎥ ×⎢ =⎢ ⎥
⎣ 1 ⎦ ⎣ − tan θ 1 ⎥⎦ om ⎣ sin 2θ cos 2θ ⎦
− tan θ ⎤ , B = ⎡ 1 tan θ ⎤
A = ⎡⎢ tan θ
1
Sol. Let
⎣ 1 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ − tan θ 1 ⎥⎦
2 2
| B | = 1 × 1 − (− tan θ) × tan θ = 1 + tan θ = sec θ
C

B11 = 1, B12 = tan θ, B21 = − tan θ, B22 = 1

nd

⎡B B21 ⎤ ⎡ 1 − tan θ ⎤
∴ adj B = ⎢ 11 =
⎣ B12 B22 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ tan θ 1 ⎥⎦
A

adj B ⎡ 1 − tan θ ⎤
∴ B−1 = = 12 ⎢ [By Art. 3.29, B–1 can be found more easily]
|B| sec θ ⎣ tan θ 1 ⎥⎦
nd

⎡ 1 − tan θ ⎤ ⎡ 1 − tan θ ⎤
∴ A × B−1 = ⎢ ⎥ × 12 ⎢
⎣ tan θ 1 ⎦ sec θ ⎣ tan θ 1 ⎥⎦
ha

⎡ cos2 − sin 2 θ ⎤
⎢ − 2 sin θ ⎥
2 ⎡1 − tan θ − 2 tan θ⎤
2 2 cos θ ⎥
= cos2 θ ⎢ cos θ
C

= cos θ ⎢ 2 ⎥
⎣⎢ 2 tan θ 1 − tan θ⎦⎥ ⎢ sin θ cos θ − sin θ ⎥
2 2
⎢ 2 cos θ ⎥
S

2
⎣ cos θ ⎦
⎡cos2 θ − sin 2 θ − 2sin θ cos θ ⎤ ⎡cos 2θ − sin 2θ⎤
©

= ⎢ 2 ⎥
=⎢ .
⎢⎣ 2 sin θ cos θ cos θ − sin θ⎥⎦ ⎣ sin 2θ
2 cos 2θ⎥⎦

⎡ 1 tan x ⎤ −1 ⎡cos 2 x − sin 2x ⎤

Alternative form. If A = ⎢ ⎥ , show that A′ A = ⎢ .
⎣ − tan x 1 ⎦ ⎣ sin 2x cos 2x ⎥⎦
Matrices Ch 3–57

Ex. 67. Show that A = ⎡ 5 3 ⎤ satisfies the equation x − 3x − 7 = 0. Then find A .

2 −1
⎢⎣ −1 −2 ⎥⎦
2
Sol. We have to prove that A − 3A − 7I = 0
⎡ 5 3⎤ ⎡ 5 3⎤ ⎡ 5 3⎤ ⎡ 1 0⎤
A − 3A − 7I = ⎢ −1 −2 ⎥ ⎢ −1 −2 ⎥ − 3 ⎢ −1 −2 ⎥ − 7 ⎢0 1⎥
2
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡ 22 9⎤ − ⎡ 15 9⎤ − ⎡7 0 ⎤ = ⎡ 22 − 15 − 7 9 − 9 − 0⎤ = ⎡ 0 0 ⎤
= ⎢ =0
⎣ −3 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −3 −6⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 7 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −3 + 3 − 0 1 + 6 − 7 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 ⎥⎦
Hence proved.

d
2
Now, dividing both sides of A − 3A − 7I = 0 by A, we have
A − 3A. A−1 − 7A−1 = 0 ⇒ A − 3I = 7A−1

ite
⎡ 5 3⎤ ⎡ 1 0⎤ ⎡ 5 3⎤ ⎡ 3 0 ⎤ ⎡ I –1 ⎤
⇒ 7A = ⎢ −1 −2 ⎥ − ⎢0 3⎥ ⎢3 I = A. A ⇒ = A ⎥
−1 −1 –1
⇒ ⎢ −1 −2 ⎥ − 3 ⎢0 1⎥ = 7A

m
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ A ⎦
−1 ⎡ 2 3⎤ 1⎡ 2 3⎤

Li
−1
⇒ 7A = ⎢ ⎥ ⇒ A = ⎢ ⎥⎦ .
⎣ −1 −5 ⎦ 7 ⎣ −1 −5
⎡ 2 0 − 1⎤

y
−1
Ex. 68. If A = ⎢ 5 1 0 ⎥ , prove that A = A − 6A + 11I.
2

n
⎣⎢ 0 1 3 ⎥⎦

pa
2 0 −1
Sol. | A | = 5 1 0 = 2 (3 − 0) − 0 (15 − 0) − 1(5 − 0) = 6 − 5 = 1 ≠ 0
0 1 3
om
−1
∴ A exists.
1+1 1+2 1+3
A11 = (−1) (3 − 0) = 3 ; A12 = (−1) (15 − 0) = −15; A13 = (−1) (5 − 0) = 5
C
A21 = (−1)2 + 1 (0 + 1) = −1; A22 = (−1)2 + 2 (6 − 0) = 6; A23 = (−1)2 + 3 (2 − 0) = −2
3+1 3+2 3+3
A31 = (−1) (0 + 1) = 1 ; A32 = (−1) (0 + 5) = −5; A33 = (−1) (2 − 0) = 2
nd

⎡ A11 A21 A31⎤ ⎡ 3 −1 1⎤

Adj. A = ⎢ A12 A22 A32 ⎥ = ⎢ −15 6 −5⎥
⎢A ⎥
⎣ 13 A23 A33 ⎦ ⎢⎣ 5 −2 2⎥⎦
A

Adj. A 1 ⎡ 3 −1 1⎤ ⎡ 3 −1 1⎤
nd

∴ A−1 = = ⎢ −15 6 −5⎥ = ⎢ −15 6 −5 ⎥ ...(i)

| A| 1 ⎢ 5 −2 2 ⎥ ⎢ 5 −2 2 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
ha

⎡ 2 0 −1⎤ ⎡ 2 0 −1⎤ ⎡ 2 0 −1⎤ ⎡ 1 0 0⎤

A − 6A + 11I = ⎢ 5 1 0 ⎥ ⎢ 5 1 0 ⎥ − 6 ⎢ 5 1 0 ⎥ + 11 ⎢0 1 0 ⎥
2
Now,
⎢⎣ 0 1 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 1 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 1 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 1⎥⎦
C

⎡ 4 + 0 + 0 0 + 0 − 1 −2 + 0 − 3⎤ ⎡12 0 −6 ⎤ ⎡11 0 0 ⎤
S

= ⎢10 + 5 + 0 0 + 1 + 0 −5 + 0 + 0 ⎥ − ⎢30 6 0 ⎥ + ⎢ 0 11 0 ⎥
⎢ 0 + 5 + 0 0 + 1 + 3 0 + 0 + 9 ⎥ ⎢ 0 6 18⎥ ⎢ 0 0 11⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
©

⎡ 4 − 12 + 11 −1 + 0 + 0 −5 + 6 + 0 ⎤ ⎡ 3 −1 1⎤
= ⎢15 − 30 + 0 1 − 6 + 11 −5 − 0 + 0 ⎥ = ⎢ −15 6 −5⎥ ...(ii)
⎢ 5 − 0 + 0 4 − 6 + 0 9 − 18 + 11⎥ ⎢ 5 −2 2 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
−1 2
(i) and (ii) ⇒ A = A − 6A + 11I.
Ch 3–58 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

1 −1
Ex. 79. For the matrix A = ⎡ 2 3 ⎤ show that A2 − 4A + 5I = 0. Hence obtain A 1.
−
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦

A − 4A + 5I = ⎡ 1 −1⎤ ⎡ 1 −1⎤ − 4 ⎡ 1 −1⎤ + 5 ⎡ 1 0 ⎤

2
Sol.
⎢⎣ 2 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 1⎥⎦
1 − 2 −1 − 3 4 −4 5 0 ⎡ −1 −4 ⎤ ⎡ 4 −4 ⎤ ⎡ 5 0 ⎤
= ⎡⎢ 2 + 6 −2 + 9 ⎤⎥ − ⎡⎢ 8 12 ⎤⎥ + ⎡⎢0 5 ⎤⎥ = ⎢ 8 7 ⎥ − ⎢ 8 12 ⎥ + ⎢0 5 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
−1− 4 + 5 −4 + 4 + 0
= ⎡⎢ 8 − 8 + 0 7 − 12 + 5⎤⎥ = ⎡⎢0 0 ⎤⎥ = 0
0 0
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
2 −1
Now, premultiplying both sides of A − 4A + 5I by A , we obtain

d
A−1A2 − 4A−1A + 5A−1I = 0 ⇒ (A−1A)A − 4I + 5A−1 = 0 [Œ A−1A = I and A−1I = A−1]

ite
−1 −1 −1
⇒ IA − 4I + 5A = 0 ⇒ A − 4I + 5A = 0 ⇒ 5A = 4I − A
⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡1 −1⎤ ⎡ 4 0 ⎤ ⎡1 −1⎤

m
⇒ 5A−1 = 4 ⎢ ⎥−⎢ ⎥=⎢ ⎥−⎢ ⎥
⎣0 1 ⎦ ⎣ 2 3 ⎦ ⎣ 0 4 ⎦ ⎣ 2 3 ⎦

Li
⎡ 4 −1 0 − (−1) ⎤ = ⎡ 3 1⎤
⇒ 5A−1 = ⎢0 − 2 4 − 3⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ −2 1⎦⎥
⎣

y
−1 1 ⎡ 3 1⎤
∴ A = .

n
5 ⎣⎢ −2 1⎦⎥
⎡cos x − sin x

pa
0⎤
Ex. 70. If f (x) = ⎢ sin x cos x 0 ⎥ , show that [f (x)]−1 = f (−
−x).
⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦om
⎡cos x − sin x 0 ⎤
Sol. f (x) = ⎢ sin x cos x 0 ⎥
⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
C

⎡cos (− x) − sin (− x) 0 ⎤ ⎡ cos x sin x 0 ⎤

⇒ f (−x) = ⎢ sin (− x) cos (− x) 0 ⎥ = ⎢ − sin x cos x 0 ⎥ ...(i)
⎢⎣ 0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 1 ⎥⎦
nd

0 0
cos x − sin x 0
Let f (x) = A. Then |A| = sin x cos x 0
A

0 0 1
2 2
= cos x (cos x − 0) + sin x (sin x − 0) = cos x + sin x = 1.
nd

−1
∴ [f (x)] exists.
1+1 1+2
A11 = (−1) (cos x − 0) = cos x, A12 = (−1) (sin x − 0) = sin x
ha

1+3 2+1
A13 = (−1) (0 − 0) = 0, A21 = (−1) (− sin x − 0) = sin x
A22 = (−1)2 + 2 (cos x − 0) = cos x, A23 = (−1)2 + 3 (0 − 0) = 0
C

3+1 3+2
A31 = (−1) (0 − 0) = 0, A32 = (−1) (0 − 0) = 0
3+3 2 2
A 33 = (−1) (cos x + sin x) = 1
S

⎡ A11 A 21 A31 ⎤ ⎡ cos x sin x 0 ⎤

∴ Adj. A = ⎢ A12 A 22 A32 ⎥ = ⎢ − sin x cos x 0 ⎥
©

⎢ ⎥
⎣⎢ A13 A 23 A33 ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦

−1 −1 Adj. A ⎡ cos x sin x 0 ⎤

∴ [f (x)] =A = = ⎢ − sin x cos x 0 ⎥ ...(ii)
| A| ⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
−1
(i) and (ii) ⇒ [f (x)] = f (−x).
Matrices Ch 3–59

⎡3 1⎤ 2 −1
Ex. 71. For the matrix A = ⎢7 5 ⎥ , find x and y so that A + xI = yA. Hence obtain A .
⎣ ⎦
A + xI = yA ⇒ ⎡ 3 1 ⎤ ⎡ 3 1 ⎤ + x ⎡1 0 ⎤ = y ⎡ 3 1⎤
2
Sol.
⎢⎣7 5 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣7 5⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣7 5⎥⎦
⎡ 9+7 3 + 5 ⎤ ⎡ x 0⎤ ⎡3 y y ⎤ ⎡16 + x 8 ⎤ ⎡3 y y ⎤
⇒ ⎢⎣ 21 + 35 7 + 25⎥⎦ + ⎢⎣ 0 x ⎥⎦ = ⎢7 y 5 y ⎥ ⇒ ⎢ 56 =
+ x ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣7 y 5 y ⎥⎦
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ 32
∴ 16 + x = 3y = 3(8) ⇒ x = 24 − 16 = 8
2 2
Putting x = 8 and y = 8 in equation A + xI = yA, we get A − 8A + 8I = 0 ...(i)
−1 −1
Now, you can obtain A by pre-multiplying by A of both sides of (i).

d
−1
Premultiplying by A on both sides of (i),

ite
−1 2 −1 −1
A A − 8A A + 8A I = 0
⇒ (A A)A − 8I + 8A−1 = 0
−1
[3 A−1A = I and A−1 I = A−1]

m
−1 −1
⇒ IA − 8I + 8A = 0 ⇒ A − 8I + 8A = 0 (3 IA = A)

Li
−1 ⎡1 0 ⎤ ⎡ 3 1 ⎤
⇒ 8A = 8I − A = 8 ⎢0 1 ⎥ − ⎢7 5⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

y
⎡8 0 ⎤ ⎡ 3 1 ⎤ ⎡ 5 −1⎤
= ⎢ − =
⎣0 8 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣7 5⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 7 3⎥⎦

n
pa
1 ⎡ 5 −1⎤ .
⇒ A−1 =
8 ⎢⎣ − 7 3⎥⎦
om
EXERCISE 3 (h)
1. Show that A is a singular matrix if
⎡3 6 ⎤ ⎡ 1 1 3⎤
C
(i) A = ⎢ 2 4 ⎥ (ii) A = ⎢ 2 2 6 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎢⎣ 2 −3 1 ⎥⎦
nd

2. Find x if
⎡ x 0 1⎤ ⎡ 8 −6 2⎤
(i) ⎢ 2 −1 4 ⎥ is a singular matrix. (NMOC) (ii) ⎢ − 6 7 − 4 ⎥ is a singular matrix.
A

⎣⎢ 1 2 0 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ 2 − 4 x ⎥⎦
nd

3. For each of the following matrices, determine whether the inverse exists. If it exists, find it.
⎡1 1⎤ ⎡3 5⎤ ⎡3 5 ⎤
(i) ⎢0 1⎥ (ii) ⎢ 2 3⎥ (iii) ⎢ 4 7 ⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
ha

⎡ 3 −2 ⎤ ⎡ 3 −2 ⎤ ⎡3 1 ⎤
(iv) ⎢ −9 6 ⎥ (v) ⎢ −9 6 ⎥ (vi) ⎢ 4 2 ⎥ (ISC 2002)
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
C

4. Find the adjoint and inverse of the following matrices.

−6 5
(i) ⎡ 52 13⎤ (ii) ⎡⎢− 7 6⎤⎥
S

⎣⎢ ⎥⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡cos è − sin è ⎤
©

(iii) ⎢ sin è cos è ⎥ (NMOC)

⎣ ⎦
⎡2 3⎤
5. Find the sum of ⎢ 5 7 ⎥⎦ and its multiplicative inverse. (ISC)
⎣
⎡3 2 ⎤ ⎡4 1⎤ ⎡4 1⎤
6. Find a matrix X for which X ⎢1 −1⎥ = ⎢ 2 3⎥ . Also find the inverse of ⎢ 2 3⎥ . (ISC)
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
Ch 3–60 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII
7. Find the inverse of the following matrices and verify your result.
⎡ 2 5⎤ ⎡ −4 3⎤
(i) ⎢−3 1 ⎥ (ii) ⎢ 5 −5⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
−5
8. (i) Find a 2 × 2 matrix M such that ⎡⎢ 15 − 7 ⎤⎥ M = ⎡⎢ 0 5⎤⎥ .
2 5 0
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
−7
(ii) Find a 2 × 2 matrix N such that N ⎡⎢ 5 − 8⎤⎥ = ⎡⎢ 0 36⎤⎥ .
4 36 0
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

9. If A = ⎡⎢ 5 −2 ⎤⎥ , show that A−1 =

2 3 1
A. (ISC)
⎣ ⎦ 19

d
10. (a) Find the inverse of each of the following matrices and verify your result.
⎡ 2 0 −1⎤ ⎡2 2 1⎤

ite
(i) ⎢ 5 1 0⎥ (ii) ⎢ 1 0 2⎥ . (ISC)
⎣⎢ 0 1 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣2 1 2⎥⎦

m
⎡ 1 2 −2⎤
(b) Verify that AA−1 = A−1A = I, if A = ⎢−1 3 0⎥ .
⎢⎣ 0 −2 1⎥⎦

Li
⎡ 3 0 2⎤
(c) If A = ⎢ 1 5 9 ⎥ and AB = BA = I, find B.

y
⎢⎣ −6 4 7 ⎥⎦

n
−1 −1 −1
11. Verify that (AB) = B A for the matrices A and B where

pa
⎡ 2 1⎤
(i) A = ⎢ 5 3⎥ and B = ⎡ 43 45 ⎤ (ii) A = ⎡ 3 2 ⎤ and B = ⎡ 4 6 ⎤
⎣ ⎦ ⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢7 5 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 3 2 ⎥⎦
⎡ 3 8⎤
om
12. Let A be the matrix ⎢ 2 1⎥ , find A−1 and verify that A−1 =
1 A− 4 I
where I is 2 × 2 unit matrix.
⎣ ⎦ 13 13
13. Given A = ⎡ 2 −3⎤ , compute A−1 and show that 2A−1 = 9I − A. (ISC)
⎣⎢ −4 7 ⎦⎥
C

2 4 −1 ⎡ 3 4⎤
14. (i) If A = ⎡⎢ −1 0 2 ⎤⎥ , and B = ⎢ −1 2 ⎥ , find (AB)−1. (NMOC)
⎣ ⎦
nd

⎢⎣ 2 1⎥⎦
⎡ 5 0 4⎤ −1
⎡1 3 3⎤ −1
(ii) If A = ⎢ 2 3 2 ⎥ , and B = ⎢1 4 3⎥ , find (AB) . (ISC)
A

⎢⎣ 1 2 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣1 3 4 ⎥⎦
⎡10 −10 2⎤ ⎡ 1 −1 2 ⎤
nd

(iii) If A−1 = 1 ⎢ 0 −1
5 −4 ⎥ , and B = ⎢0 2 −3⎥ , find (BA) .
10 ⎢ 0 2 ⎦⎥
⎣ 0 ⎣⎢ 3 −2 4 ⎦⎥
15. If A = ⎡2 −3⎤ , verify that (adj. A)−1 = adj. (A−1).
ha

⎢⎣4 6 ⎥⎦
−1 −1
16. If A = ⎡⎢ 2 −2 ⎤⎥ , show that A + 3A + 4I = 0. Hence find A .
2 −1
C

⎣ ⎦
17. If A2 − A + I = 0, then show that A−1 = I − A.
S

[Hint. Given A2 − A + I = 0
−1
Premultiplying by A on both sides
©

−1 2 −1 −1 −1 −1 −1 −1 −1
A A − A A + A I = 0 ⇒ (A A) A − I + A = 0 [3 A A = I and A I = A ]
−1 −1 −1
⇒ IA − I + A = 0 ⇒ A − I + A = 0 ⇒ A = I − A.] [3 IA = A]
−
18. For the matrix A = ⎡23 21⎤ , show that A − 4A + 7I = 0. Hence find A .
2 −1
⎣⎢ ⎦⎥
⎡ 1 0 −2 ⎤ 3 2 −1
19. Show that A = ⎢ −2 −1 2 ⎥ satisfies the equation A − A − 3A − I3 = 0. Hence, find A .
⎢⎣ 3 4 1⎥⎦
Matrices Ch 3–61

⎡ 1 2 2⎤ −1
20. Let A = ⎢ 2 1 2 ⎥ , prove that A − 4A − 5I = 0. Hence obtain A .
2
⎢⎣ 2 2 1⎥⎦

−1
⎡0 1 1⎤ −1
2
A − 3I
21. Find A if A = ⎢ 1 0 1⎥ . Also, show that A = .
⎣⎢ 1 1 0 ⎦⎥
2

⎡ 1 −2 3⎤
22. If A = ⎢ 0 −1 4 ⎥ , find (A′)−1.
⎢⎣−2 2 1⎥⎦
−8 5
23. Show that A = ⎡⎢ 2 4 ⎤⎥ satisfies the equation x2 + 4x − 42 = 0. Hence find A−1. (ISC)
⎣ ⎦

d
[Hint. See solved Ex. 67]

ite
24. If A = ⎡ 4 3⎤ , find x and y such that A2 − xA + yI = 0.
⎢⎣ 2 5 ⎥⎦

m
⎡ 1 −1 1⎤
25. If A = ⎢ 2 −1 0 ⎥ , find A2 and show that A2 = A−1.

Li
⎣⎢ 1 0 0 ⎥⎦
⎡1 1 2 ⎤ ⎡ 1 2 0⎤ −1 −1 −1
26. If A = ⎢1 9 3⎥ and B = ⎢ 2 3 −1⎥ , verify that (AB) = B A .

y
⎣⎢1 4 2 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ 1 −1 3⎥⎦

n
pa
ANSWERS
5
2. (i) x= (ii) x = 3 om
8
1 −1 ⎡ −3 5⎤ ⎡ 7 −5 ⎤
3. (i) ⎡⎢0 1 ⎤⎥ (ii) ⎢ 2 −3⎥ (iii) ⎢ −4 3⎦⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣
(iv) Singular. The inverse does not exist. (v) The inverse does not exist
C

⎡ 1 − 1⎤
⎢ 2⎥ 4. (i) ⎡ −1 3 ⎤ (ii) ⎡ −6 5 ⎤
nd

(vi) ⎢
⎢ −2 3 ⎥⎥ ⎢⎣ 2 −5⎥⎦ ⎢⎣−7 6 ⎥⎦
⎣ 2⎦
A

(iii) ⎡ cos θ sin θ ⎤ 5. ⎡ − 5 6⎤

⎣⎢− sin θ cos θ ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 10 5 ⎦⎥
nd

⎡ 3 −1⎤
⎡1 1⎤ ⎡4 1⎤ ⎢ 10 10 ⎥ 1 ⎡1 −5⎤
6. x = ⎢1 −1⎥ ; Inverse of ⎢ 2 3⎥ = ⎢ ⎥ 7. (i)
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎢− 1 2⎥ 17 ⎢⎣3 2 ⎥⎦
ha

⎣ 5 5⎦
−8 − 4
(ii) ⎡5 3⎤ 8. (i) ⎡ −7 −2 ⎤ (ii) ⎡⎢ − 5 − 7 ⎤⎥
⎢⎣7 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −15 −5⎥⎦ ⎣ ⎦
C

⎡ 3 −1 1⎤ ⎡ −2 −3 4 ⎤ 1 ⎡ −1 8 −10 ⎤
10. (a) (i) ⎢ −15 6 −5 ⎥ (ii) ⎢ 2 2 −3⎥ (c) ⎢ −61 33 −25⎥
S

65
⎢⎣ 5 −2 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 2 −2 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ 34 −12 15⎥⎦
é 36ù
1 ê- 98 -18
©

⎡ −2 19 −27 ⎤
14. (i) − 1 ⎡ −2 −15 ⎤ (ii) ⎢ −2 18 − 25⎥ (iii) 10 ê 21 6 - 7úú
15 ⎢⎣ −1 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −3 29 − 42 ⎥⎦ ëê 12 2 - 4ûú

1 ⎡ 2 1⎤ ⎡ − 9 − 8 − 2⎤
16. − 1 ⎡ 2 −1⎤
−1
18. 19. A = ⎢ 8 7 2⎥
4 ⎢⎣ 2 1⎦⎥ 7 ⎢⎣ −3 2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 5 − 4 −1⎥⎦

⎡ − 3/ 5 2 / 5 2/ 5⎤ 1 ⎡ −1 1 1⎤ ⎡ − 9 − 8 − 2⎤
21. A = 2 ⎢ 1 −1 1⎥
−1
20. ⎢ 2 / 5 − 3/ 5 2 / 5⎥ 22. ⎢ 8 7 2⎥
⎢⎣ 2 / 5 2 / 5 − 3/ 5⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 1 −1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 5 − 4 −1⎥⎦
Ch 3–62 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

1 ⎡ −4 5⎤ ⎡0 0 1⎤
23. 24. x = 9, y = 14 25. A2 = ⎢0 −1 2 ⎥
42 ⎢⎣ 2 8⎥⎦
⎣⎢ 1 −1 1⎥⎦

HINTS
⎡− 5 2 ⎤ ⎡5 0⎤ ⎡− 5 2 ⎤ ⎡1 0⎤
⎢ 15 ⇒ ⎢ M =5⎢
− 7 ⎥⎦ ⎢0 ⎥ ⎥ 1 ⎥⎦
8. M=
⎣ ⎣ 5⎦ ⎣ 15 − 7⎦ ⎣0

⎡− 5 2 ⎤

d
⇒ AM = 5I, where A = ⎢ ⇒ M = 5 ( A−1I )
⎣ 15 − 7⎥⎦

ite
⇒ M = 5A–1 (3 A−1 I = A− 1 )

m
10. (c) AB = BA = I ⇒ B = A–1.
–1 2 –1 –1 –1 –1
16. A (A + 3A + 4I) = A (0) ⇒ (A A) A + 3A A + 4 A = 0

Li
1
⇒ IA + 3I + 4A = 0 ⇒ A = −
–1 –1
(A + 3I)

y
4

n
3 2 –1 2
19. I3 = A – A – 3A ⇒ A = A – A – 3I3.

pa
3.37. Application of matrices to the solution of linear equations (Martin’s rule)
om
Consider the two simultaneous equations in two variables x and y
a1x + b1y = c1, a2x + b2y = c2
These can be written in matrix form as
C

⎡ a1 b1⎤ ⎡ x ⎤ ⎡c ⎤
= ⎢c1 ⎥ or AX = B.
⎢⎣ a2 b2 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ y ⎦⎥
nd

⎣ 2⎦
where A is a 2 × 2 matrix, and X and B are 2 × 1 column matrices.
A

Similarly the three simultaneous equations

a1x + b1y + c1z = d1, a2x + b2y + c2z = d2, a3x + b3y + c3z = d3
nd

can be written in the matrix form as

⎡ a1 b1 c1 ⎤ ⎡x⎤ ⎡ d1 ⎤
ha

⎢a b c2 ⎥ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢d2 ⎥ ⇒ AX = B.
⎢ a2 b2 c3 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢d ⎥
⎣ 3 3 ⎣ 3⎦
C

where A is a 3 × 3 matrix, and X and B are (3 × 1) column matrices.

S

If now A is non-singular, i.e., | A | ≠ 0, then we can left-multiply both members of the equation by
A−1 to obtain
©

⇒ A−1 AX = A−1B ⇒ I X = A−1B ⇒ X = A−1B (3 I X = X)

Recall that equations having one or more solutions are called consistent equations.
(i) If | A | ≠ 0, the system is consistent and has a unique solution.
(ii) If | A | = 0, the system of equations has either no solution or an infinite number of solutions.
(iii) Find (adj A) B.
Matrices Ch 3–63
(a) If (adj A) B ≠ 0, the system has no solution and is, therefore, inconsistent.
(b) If (adj A) B = 0, the system is consistent and has infinitely many solutions. In this case
we say that the equations are dependent equations.
To help you to remember easily, the above can be summarised diagrammatically as
under :
System : AX = B
↓
Find | A |

d
⎪ ⎪

ite
|A|≠0 |A|=0
Unique Solution No solution or infinite

m
consistent number of solutions
−1
X=A B ↓

Li
Find (adj A) B

⎪ ⎪

y
(adj A) B ≠ 0

n
(adj A) B = 0
↓

pa
No solution ↓
Inconsistent
om Infinitely many solutions
Consistent (Dependent Eqns.)

⎡0 ⎤
Special Case : When B = ⎢0 ⎥ .
C
⎢⎣0 ⎥⎦
In this case, | A | ≠ 0 ⇒ x = 0, y = 0, z = 0. We say that the system has trivial solution.
nd

If | A | = 0, then the system has infinitely many solutions.

Type 1.
A

Ex. 72. Use matrix method to solve the system of equations

4x − 3y = 11, 3x + 7y = −1.
nd

Sol. The given equations are equivalent to

⎡ 4 −3⎤ ⎡ x ⎤ = ⎡11 ⎤ in the matrix form. It is of the form
ha

⎣⎢ 3 7 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ y ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ −1⎦⎥

AX = B where A = ⎡ 4 −3⎤ , X = ⎡ x ⎤ , B = ⎡11 ⎤

C

⎢⎣ 3 7 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ y ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ −1⎥⎦
4 −3
S

|A| = 3 7 = 4 × 7 − 3 × (− 3) = 37 ≠ 0 ∴ A is non-singular.
−1
The system has a unique solution X = A B.
©

⎡A A21 ⎤ ⎡ 7 3⎤
A11 = 7, A12 = −3, A21 = 3, A22 = 4, adj. A = ⎢ 11
A A ⎥ = ⎢⎣ −3 4 ⎥⎦
⎣ 12 22 ⎦

⎡7 3⎤
−1 adj. A 1 ⎡ 7 3⎤ ⎢ 37 37 ⎥
∴ A = = =
| A| 37 ⎢⎣ −3 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢ −3 4 ⎥
⎢⎣ 37 37 ⎥⎦
Ch 3–64 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡7 3⎤ ⎡ 77 − 3 ⎤ ⎡ 74 ⎤
⎡ x ⎤ ⎢ 37 37 ⎥ ⎡11 ⎤ ⎢ 37 37 ⎥ ⎢ 37 ⎥ ⎡ 2⎤
∴ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢ −3 = =
4 ⎥ ⎢⎣ −1⎥⎦ = ⎢ 33 4 ⎥ ⎢ −37 ⎥ ⎢⎣−1⎥⎦ ∴ x = 2, y = −1.
⎣ ⎦ ⎢ ⎥ − − ⎥ ⎢
⎣ 37 37 ⎦ ⎢ ⎥
⎣ 37 37 ⎦ ⎣ 37 ⎦
Ex. 73. Suppose the demand curve for automobiles over some time period can be written as
x 1 = 15000 − 0.2 x2
where x1 is the price of an automobile and x2 is the corresponding quantity. Suppose that the supply
curve is
x 1 = 600 + 0.4 x2.

d
Use matrix theory to obtain x1. (ISC)

ite
Sol. The given equations are
x1 + 0.2 x2 = 15000
x1 − 0.4 x2 = 600

m
( ) ( ) ( ) (15000
600 )
−1
1 0.2 ⎛ x ⎞ 15000 ⎛ x1 ⎞ 1 0.2
In the matrix form we get 1 −0.4 ⎜ x1 ⎟ = 600 ; ⎝⎜ x2 ⎠⎟ = 1 −0.4

Li
⎝ 2⎠
Inverse of (
1 0.2
1 −0.4 = A )
1 −0.4 −0.2
−1 1 ( ) (Art. 3.29)

n y
1 0.2
| A | = 1 − 0.4 = −0.4 − 0.2 = − 0.6

pa
⎛2 1⎞
Therefore, inverse of (1 0.2
) 1 ⎛ −0.4 −0.2 ⎞ = ⎜ 3
1 − 0.4 = −0.6 ⎜ −1
⎝
om ⎟ ⎜
3⎟
1 ⎠ ⎜ 5 −5 ⎟
⎟
⎝3 3 ⎠
⎛2 1 ⎞
⎛ x1 ⎞ ⎜ 3 3 ⎟ ⎛ 15000 ⎞ ⎛ x1 ⎞ 10200
( )
C
Using this, we get ⎜x ⎟ = ⎜ ⎟⎜ ⎟ ⇒ ⎜ ⎟ 24000
⎝ 2⎠ ⎜ 5 −5 ⎟ ⎝ 600 ⎠ ⎝ x2 ⎠
⎝3 3 ⎠
nd

⇒ x 1 = 10200, x2 = 24000.
Type 2.
⎡ 3 −2
A

1⎤
Ex. 74. If A = ⎢ 2 1 − 3⎥ , find A−1. Using A−1, solve the following system of linear equations:
⎢−1 1⎥⎦
nd

⎣ 2
3x − 2y + z = 2, 2x + y − 3z = − 5, − x + 2y + z = 6. (ISC 2008 Type)
ha

⎡ 3 −2 1⎤ 3 −2 1
Sol. Given, A = ⎢ 2 1 − 3⎥ ⇒ | A | = 2 1 −3
⎢−1 1⎥⎦
C

⎣ 2 −1 2 1
−1
= 3 (1 + 6) + 2 (2 − 3) + 1 (4 + 1) = 21 − 2 + 5 = 24 ≠ 0 ⇒ A exists.
S

A11 A 21 A31
©

Now, adj. A = A12 A 22 A32 , where Aij is the cofactor of aij.

A13 A 23 A33
1 –3 2 −3
Here, A11 = (−1)1 + 1 = 7, A12 = (−1)1 + 2 = − (−1) = 1,
2 1 −1 1

1+3 2 1 2+1 −2 1 2+2 3 1

A13 = (−1) = 5, A21 = (−1) = 4, A22 = (−1) =4
−1 2 2 1 −1 1
Matrices Ch 3–65

2+3 3 –2 3+1 − 2 1 3+2 3 1

A23 = (−1) = −4, A31 = (−1) = 5, A32 = (−1) = 11
−1 2 1 −3 2 −3

3+3 3 −2
A33 = (− 1) =7
−1 2
7 4 5 7 4 5
4 11 ⇒ A = 1 adj. A = 1 1
−1
∴ adj. A = 1 4 11
| A| 24
5 −4 7 5 −4 7
The given system of linear equation is

d
3x − 2y + z = 2

ite
2x + y − 3z = − 5
− x + 2y + z = 6

m
⎡ 3 −2 1⎤ ⎡ x ⎤ ⎡ 2 ⎤ ⎡ x⎤ ⎡ 2⎤
⇒ ⎢ 2 1 − 3⎥ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢ − 5 ⎥ ⇒ AX = B where X = ⎢ y ⎥ and B = ⎢ − 5⎥ .

Li
⎢−1 ⎢z⎥ ⎢ 6⎥
⎣ 2 1⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 6 ⎥⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡7 4 5 ⎤ ⎡ 2⎤

y
−1 −1 −1 1 ⎢1 4 11 ⎥ ⎢ − 5⎥
⇒ A (AX) = A B ⇒ X=A B=

n
24 ⎢ ⎥⎢ ⎥
⎣ 5 − 4 7 ⎦ ⎣ 6⎦

pa
⎡7 × 2 + 4 × − 5 + 5 × 6 ⎤ ⎡ 24⎤ ⎡ 1⎤
1 ⎢1 × 2 + 4 × − 5 + 11 × 6 ⎥ = 1 ⎢ 48⎥ = ⎢ 2⎥
⇒ X=
24 ⎢
om
⎥ 24 ⎢ 72⎥ ⎢ 3⎥
⎣5 × 2 + − 4 × − 5 + 7 × 6⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡ x ⎤ ⎡ 1⎤
⇒ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢ 2⎥ ⇒
C
x = 1, y = 2, z = 3.
⎢ z ⎥ ⎢ 3⎥
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
nd

Ex. 75. Solve the following system of equations by matrix method 5x + 3y + z = 16,
2x + y + 3z = 19, x + 2y + 4z = 25
A

Sol. Writing the given equations in the matrix form AX = B as

⎡5 3 1 ⎤ ⎡ x ⎤ ⎡16 ⎤ ⎡5 3 1 ⎤ ⎡x⎤ ⎡16 ⎤

nd

⎢ 2 1 3 ⎥ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢19 ⎥ , where A = ⎢ 2 1 3 ⎥ , X = ⎢ y ⎥ and B = ⎢19 ⎥ ,

⎢⎣1 2 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 25 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢1 2 4 ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 25 ⎥⎦
ha

5 3 1
| A | = 2 1 3 = 5 (4 − 6) − 3 (8 − 3) + 1 (4 − 1) = − 22 ≠ 0.
1 2 4
C

∴ A is non singular.
∴ The system has the unique solution X = A−1B; A11 = −2, A12 = −5, A13 = 3, A21 = −10,
S

A22 = 19, A23 = −7, A31 = 8, A32 = −13, A33 = −1.

⎡ A11 A21 A31 ⎤ ⎡ −2 −10 8⎤
©

∴ adj A = ⎢ A12 A22 A32 ⎥ = ⎢ −5 19 −13⎥

⎢ ⎥
⎣⎢ A13 A23 A33 ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ 3 −7 −1⎥⎦
⎡ −2 −10 8⎤ ⎡ 2 / 22 10 / 22 −8 / 22 ⎤
adj. A
= 1 ⎢ −5 19 −13⎥ = ⎢ 5 / 22 −19 / 22 13 / 22 ⎥
A−1 =
| A | −22 ⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎣ 3 −7 −1⎦ ⎣ −3 / 22 7 / 22 1/ 22 ⎥⎦
−1
Now, AX = B ⇒ X = A B
Ch 3–66 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎡ 32 + 190 − 200 ⎤ ⎡ 22 ⎤
⎡ 2 / 22 10 / 22 −8 / 22 ⎤ ⎡16 ⎤ ⎢ 22 ⎥ ⎢ 22 ⎥ ⎡1 ⎤
⎡ x⎤ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
∴ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢⎢ 5 / 22 −19 / 22 13 / 22 ⎥⎥ ⎢⎢19 ⎥⎥ = ⎢ 80 − 361 + 325 ⎥ = ⎢ 44 ⎥ = ⎢⎢ 2 ⎥⎥
⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢ 22 ⎥ ⎢ 22 ⎥
⎣⎢ −3 / 22 7 / 22 1/ 22 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 25 ⎦⎥ ⎢ −48 + 133 + 25 ⎥ ⎢110 ⎥ ⎣⎢ 5 ⎦⎥
⎢⎣ 22 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 22 ⎥⎦
∴ x = 1, y = 2, z = 5.
Ex. 76. Using matrices, solve the following system of equations :
x + 2y = 5

d
y + 2z = 8
2x + z = 5 (ISC 2003)

ite
Sol. Writing the given equations in matrix form
AX = B as

m
⎡ 1 2 0 ⎤ ⎡x⎤ ⎡5 ⎤
⎢ 0 1 2 ⎥ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢8 ⎥ , we have

Li
⎢⎣ 2 0 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣5 ⎥⎦
1 2 0
| A | = 0 1 2 = 1 (1 − 0) − 2 (0 − 4) + 0 = 1 + 8 = 9 ≠ 0.

y
2 0 1

n
∴ A is non-singular.

pa
∴ The system has the unique solution X = A−1B.
Adj
∴ A is invertible and A−1 =
| A|
om
Now we find Adj A.
A11 A21 A31
C

Adj A = A12 A22 A32

A13 A23 A33
nd

Where A11, A12, A13...., are cofactors of a11, a12, a13....., respectively
A11 = 1, A12 = 4, A13 = −2; A21 = − 2, A22 = 1, A23 = 4; A31 = 4, A32 = − 2, A33 = 1
−2
A

1 4
1 −2 4 1 −2 4 9 9 9
−1 Adj. A 1
= 1 −2 = 4 1 −1
1 −2 ∴ A =
nd

Adj, A = 4 4
−2 4 1 | A | 9 −2 4 1 9 9 9
−2 4 1
9 9 9
ha

−1
Substituting in X = A B,
⎡ 1 −2 4 ⎤
C

⎢ 9 9 9 ⎥
⎡ x⎤ 1 −2 ⎥ ⇒ ⎡8⎤
5
⎢ 4
⎢ ⎥
⎢ y⎥ = ⎢
9 9 ⎥ ⎢5 ⎥
S

⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ 9
⎢ −2 4 1 ⎥ ⎣ ⎦
⎢⎣ 9 9 9 ⎦⎥
©

⎡ 5 − 16 + 20 ⎤
⎢9 9 9 ⎥ 1
⎡ x⎤ ⎢ 20 + 8 − 10 ⎥ = ⎡ 2 ⎤
⇒ ⎢ y⎥ = ⎢ ⎢ ⎥ ⇒ x = 1, y = 2, z = 3.
9 9 9 ⎥ ⎢3⎥
⎣⎢ z ⎦⎥ ⎢ −10 32 5 ⎥ ⎣ ⎦
⎢⎣ 9 + 9 + 9 ⎥⎦
Matrices Ch 3–67

⎡2 3 4⎤ ⎡ 20 2 34⎤
Ex. 77. Find the product of A = ⎢ 5 4 −6 ⎥ and B = ⎢ 8 16 −32⎥ and use it to solve the
⎣⎢ 3 −2 −2 ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ 22 −13 7⎥⎦
system of equation given below :
2 + 3 + 4 = − 3, 5 + 4 − 6 = 4, 3 − 2 − 2 = 6.
(NMOC)
x y z x y z x y z
⎡2 3 4 ⎤ ⎡ 20 2 34 ⎤ ⎡ 40 + 24 + 88 4 + 48 − 52 68 − 96 + 28⎤
Sol. AB = ⎢ 5 4 −6 ⎥ ⎢ 8 16 −32 ⎥ = ⎢100 + 32 − 132 10 + 64 + 78 170 − 128 − 42 ⎥
⎢ 3 −2 −2 ⎥ ⎢ 22 −13 7 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 60 − 16 − 44 6 − 32 + 26 102 + 64 − 14 ⎥⎦
⎣ ⎦⎣

d
⎡152 0 0⎤ ⎡ 1 0 0⎤
= ⎢ 0 152 0 ⎥ = 152 ⎢0 1 0 ⎥

ite
⎢⎣ 0 0 152 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0 0 1⎥⎦
1 1 −1

m
⇒ AB = 152 I ⇒ (AB) = I, i.e., B ⇒ A I
152 152
1 ⎡ 8 16 −32 ⎤
20 2 34

Li
−1 1
⇒ A = B = ⎢ ⎥
152 152 ⎢ 22 −13 7 ⎥⎦
⎣

y
Given system of equations are

n
2+3+4
= −3 or 2u + 3v + 4w = −3

pa
x y z
5+4−6
= 4 or 5u + 4v − 6w = 4
x y z
om
3−2−2 1 1 1
= 6 or 3u − 2v − 2w = 6, where = u, = v, = w.
x y z x y z
C
The above system can be written in the form
⎡2 3 4⎤ ⎡ u ⎤ ⎡ − 3⎤
nd

4 − 6 ⎥ ⎢ v ⎥ = ⎢ 4 ⎥ ⇒ AX = C ⇒ X = A C
⎢5 −1
⎢ 3 − 2 − 2 ⎥ ⎢ w⎥ ⎢ 6⎥
⎣ ⎦⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
A

⎡ 20 2 34 ⎤ ⎡ −3⎤
1 ⎢ 8 16 −32 ⎥ ⎢ 4⎥
⇒ X =
152 ⎢
7 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 6⎥⎦
nd

⎣ 22 −13
⎡ − 60 + 8 + 204 ⎤ ⎡ 152 ⎤ ⎡ 1⎤
1 ⎢ − 24 + 64 − 192 ⎥ = 1 ⎢ −152 ⎥ = ⎢ −1⎥
ha

=
152 ⎢ ⎥ 152 ⎢ −76 ⎥ ⎢ −1/ 2 ⎥
⎣ − 66 − 52 + 42 ⎦ ⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
⎡u ⎤ ⎡ 1⎤
C

⇒ ⎢ v ⎥ = ⎢ −1⎥ ⇒ u = 1, v = −1, w = −1/2

⎢ w⎥ ⎢ −1/ 2 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
S

⎣ ⎦
1 1
⇒ = 1, = −1, = − 1 ⇒ x = 1, y = −1, z = −2.
1
©

x y z 2
Type 3.
Ex. 78. Use matrix method to examine the following system of equations for consistency or
inconsistency 2x + 5y = 7, 6x + 15y = 13
Ch 3–68 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Sol. Writing the given system of equations in matrix form, we have

⎡ 2 5⎤ ⎡ x ⎤ ⎡ 7⎤
⎢⎣ 6 15⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ y ⎥⎦ = ⎢⎣13⎥⎦ or AX = B, where
⎡2 5⎤
A = ⎢ 6 15 ⎥ , X = ⎡ y ⎤ , B = ⎡13⎤ , | A | = 6 15 = 30 − 30 = 0 ∴ A is singular
x 7 2 5
⎣ ⎦ ⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ ⎥⎦
∴ Either the given system has no solution or an infinite number of solutions.
We find (adj A) B.
⎡A A21 ⎤ ⎡ 15 −5⎤
A11 = 15, A12 = − 6, A21 = − 5, A22 = 2 ∴ adj A = ⎢ A11 =
⎣ 12 A22 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ −6 2 ⎥⎦

d
15 −5 7 105 − 65
(adj A) B = ⎡ −6 2 ⎤ ⎡13⎤ = ⎡ −42 + 26 ⎤ = ⎡ −16 ⎤ ≠ 0
40

ite
∴
⎣⎢ ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ ⎦⎥
⇒ The given system has no solution, and is, therefore, inconsistent.

m
Note: 2x + 5y = 7 ⇒ 3 (2x + 5y) ⇒ 7 × 3 ⇒ 6x + 15 y = 21 whereas the other equation is
6x + 15y = 13.

Li
Hence, inconsistent.
Ex. 79. Using matrix method examine the consistency or inconsistency of the system

y
6x + 4y = 2, 9x + 6y = 3

n
Sol. Representing the system by the matrix equation AX = B

pa
⎡6 4 ⎤ ⎡ x ⎤ ⎡2⎤ ⎡6 4 ⎤
= ⎢ 3⎥ where A = ⎢9 6 ⎥ , X = ⎡ x ⎤ , B = ⎡ 2 ⎤
⎣⎢9 6 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ y ⎦⎥ ⎣ ⎦ om ⎣ ⎦ ⎢⎣ y ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3⎥⎦
6 4
| A | = 9 6 = 36 − 36 = 0 ∴ A is singular
∴ Either the system has no solution or has infinite number of solutions.
C

To check, we find (adj. A) B.

A11 = 6, A12 = −9, A21 = −4, A22 = 6
nd

⎡A A ⎤ 6 −4
adj A = ⎢ A11 A21 ⎥ = ⎡ −9 6⎤ , (adj A) B = ⎡ 6 −4 ⎤ ⎡ 2 ⎤ = ⎡12 − 12 ⎤ = ⎡0 ⎤ = 0
⎣ 12 22 ⎦ ⎣⎢ ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ −9 6 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 3⎦⎥ ⎣⎢18 − 18 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢0 ⎦⎥
A

Since (adj A) B = 0, therefore, the given system is consistent and has an infinite number of
solutions. Let y = k. Putting y = k in 1st equation, we get
nd

1
6x + 4k = 2 ⇒ 6x = 2 − 4k ⇒ x = (2 − 4k) ⇒ x = 1 (1 − 2k)
6 3
ha

Substituting the values of x and y in the 2nd equation, e.g. 9x + 6y = 3, we have

1
9. (1 − 2k) + 6k = 3 ⇒ 3 − 6k + 6k = 3 ⇒ 3 = 3, which is true.
3
C

1
Hence the given system has infinite number of solutions, given by x = (1 − 2k), y = k.
3
S

Ex. 80. Test for consistency the system of equations

4x − 5y − 2z = 2, 5x − 4y + 2z = − 2, 2x + 2y + 8z = − 1. (ISC 2007)
©

Sol. The system can be represented in the form AX = B,

⎡ 4 −5 −2 ⎤ ⎡x⎤ ⎡ 2⎤
where A = ⎢ 5 −4 2 ⎥ , X = ⎢ y ⎥ , B = ⎢ − 2 ⎥
⎣⎢ 2 2 8 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ z ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ −1⎦⎥
4 −5 −2
| A | = 5 −4 2 = 4 (−32 − 4) + 5 (40 − 4) − 2 (10 + 8)
2 2 8 = −144 + 180 − 36 = −180 + 180 = 0
Matrices Ch 3–69
−1
Since | A | = 0, ∴ A does not exist. Either the system has no solution or has infinite number of
solutions.
⎛ B Adj A ⎞
To check, we find (adj A) B. ⎜3 X = = A B =
–1
.B ⎟
⎝ A | A| ⎠
A11 = −36, A12 = −36, A13 = 18, A21 = 36, A22 = 36, A23 = −18, A31 = −18, A32 = −18, A33 = 9.
⎡ A11 A21 A31⎤ ⎡ −36 36 −18⎤
adj A = ⎢⎢ A12 A22 A32 ⎥⎥ = ⎢ −36 36 −18⎥ ,
⎣ A13 A23 A33 ⎦ ⎣⎢ 18 −18 9 ⎦⎥

⎡ −36 36 −18⎤ ⎡ 2 ⎤ ⎡ −126 ⎤

d
∴ (adj A) B = ⎢ −36 36 −18⎥ ⎢ −2 ⎥ = ⎢ −126 ⎥ ≠ 0

ite
⎣⎢ 18 −18 9 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ −1⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 63⎦⎥
Since | A | = 0 and (adj A)B ≠ 0, the given system has no solution and is, therefore inconsistent.

m
Ex. 81. Test for consistency and solve the equations
5x + 3y + 7z = 4, 3x + 26y + 2z = 9, 7x + 2y + 10z = 5.

Li
Sol. The given system can be written in the matrix form AX = B, i.e.,
⎡5 3 7 ⎤ ⎡ x⎤ ⎡4⎤ ⎡5 3 7⎤ ⎡ x⎤ ⎡4⎤

y
⎢ 3 26 2 ⎥ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢ 9 ⎥ where A = ⎢ 3 26 2 ⎥ , X = ⎢ y ⎥ , B = ⎢ 9 ⎥

n
⎣⎢7 2 10 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ z ⎦⎥ ⎢⎣ 5⎥⎦ ⎢⎣7 2 10 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 5 ⎥⎦

pa
5 3 7
Now | A | = 3 26 2 = 5 (260 − 4) − 3 (30 − 14) + 7 (6 − 182) = 0
7 2 10
om
−1
Since | A | = 0, therefore, A does not exist. ∴ The system has either no solution or has infinite
number of solutions.
C
To check, we find (adj A)B
A11 = 256, A12 = −16, A13 = −176, A21 = −16, A22 = 1, A23 = 11, A31 = − 176, A32 = 11, A33 = 121
nd

⎡ A11 A21 A31 ⎤ ⎡ 256 −16 −176⎤

adj. A = ⎢⎢ A12 A22 A32 ⎥ = ⎢ −16 1 11⎥
⎣ A13 A23 A33 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ −176 11 121⎦⎥
A

⎡ 256 −16 −176 ⎤ ⎡ 4 ⎤ ⎡1024 − 144 − 880 ⎤ ⎡ 0 ⎤

nd

(adj. A)B = ⎢ −16 1 11⎥ ⎢ 9 ⎥ = ⎢ − 64 + 9 + 55 ⎥ = ⎢ 0 ⎥ = 0

⎢⎣ −176 11 121⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 5 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 704 + 99 + 605 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 ⎥⎦
Since | A | = 0 and (adj. A)B = 0, the system is consistent and has infinite number of solutions.
ha

Let z = k and solve any two of the given equations as follows :

5x + 3y + 7y = 4 or 5x + 3y = 4 − 7k ...(1)
C

3x + 26y + 2k = 9 or 3x + 26y = 9 − 2k ...(2)

S

Solving (1) and (2), we have x = 1 (7 − 16k), y = 1 (k + 3). Also z = k

11 11
©

Substituting in the third equation, e.g., 7x + 2y + 10z = 5, we have

1 1
7. (7 − 16k) + 2. (k + 3) + 10k = 5,
11 11
or 49 − 112k + 2k + 6 + 110k = 55 or 55 = 55 which is true.
Thus, the given system of equations has infinite number of solutions given by
1 1
x = (7 − 16k), y = (k + 3), z = k where k is any real number.
11 11
Ch 3–70 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

EXERCISE 3 (i)
Solve the following systems of equations by matrix method.
1. 2x − 3y = 1 2. 2x + 3y = 23 3. 3x + 7y = 4
3x − 2y = 4 (NMOC) 3x + 4y = 32 (ISC 1991) x + 2y = 1
4. 2x + y = 5 5. 3x + y + z = 3 6. x − y + z = 2
5x − 2y = 8 2x − y − z = 2 2x − y = 0
−x−y+z=1 2y – z = 1

7. 2 + 3 + 10 = 4
x y z

d
4 − 6 + 5 =1
x y z

ite
6 + 9 − 20 = 2 1 = u, 1 = v, 1 = w
[Hint. Put and solve for u,v,w]
x y z x y z

m
8. x + y = 5 9. 5x − y = − 7 10. x1 − 2x2 + 3x3 = 4
z+y=7 2x + 3z = 1 2x1 + x2 − 3x3 = 5

Li
z+x=6 3y – z = 7 −x1 + x2 + 2x3 = 3 (ISC 2002)
[Hint. See solved Ex. 75]

y
11. x − 2y + 3z = 6, 12. x +y+z=6

n
x + 4y + z = 12, x –y+z=2
x − 3y + 2z = 1 (ISC 2001) 2x + y – z =1 (ISC 2007)

pa
( )
13. (i) Find the inverse of the matrix 0.8 −0.6 and use it in solving the equations
0.6 0.8
0.8x1 − 0.6x2 = 10
om
0.6x2 + 0.8x2 = 20. (ISC)
(ii) Find the inverse of the matrix ( )
6
4 5
7 , and use it to solve the simultaneous equations
C
6x + 7y = 2
4x + 5y = 3. (ISC)
nd

⎡ 4 − 5 −11⎤ −1 −1
14. (i) If A = ⎢ 1 − 3 1⎥ , find A and using A solve the system of equations 4x − 5y − 11z = 12,
⎢⎣ 2 3 − 7 ⎥⎦
x − 3y + z = 1, 2x + 3y − 7z = 2.
A

⎡ 8 − 4 1⎤
(ii) If A = ⎢10 0 6 ⎥ , find A−1. Using A−1, solve the following system of linear equations :
nd

⎢⎣ 8 1 6 ⎥⎦
8x − 4y + z = 5, 10x + 6z = 4, 8x + y + 6z = 5 .
2
ha

é1 2 -3 ù
ê2 3 ú
2 ú , find A−1 and hence solve the following system of linear equations.
(iii) If A = ê
êë 3 -3 -4 úû
C

x + 2y – 3z = – 4, 2x + 3y + 2z = 2, 3x – 3y – 4z = 11. (ISC 2008)

S

[Hint. See Solved Ex. 74]

⎡− 5 1 3⎤ ⎡ 1 1 2⎤
15. Find the product of two matrices A and B, where A = ⎢ 7 1 − 5 ⎥ and B = ⎢ 3 2 1⎥
©

⎢⎣ 1 −1 1⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ 2 1 3⎦⎥
and use it to solve the system of equations
x + y + 2z = 1, 3x + 2y + z = 7, 2x + y + 3z = 2. (NMOC, Roorkee)
Use matrix method to examine the following systems of equations of consistency or inconsistency.
16. 3x − 2y = 5 17. 4x − 2y = 3 18. x + 5y = 3
6x − 4y = 9 6x − 3y = 5 2x + 10y = 6
Matrices Ch 3–71

19. 3x − y + 2z = 3 20. x + y + z = 6 21. 2x − y + 3z = 1

2x + y + 3z = 5 x + 2y + 3z = 14 x + 2y − z = 2
x − 2y − z = 1 x + 4y + 7z = 30 5y − 5z = 3
22. Show that the following system of equations is consistent.
x − 2y + z = 0, y − z = 3, 2x − 3z = 10
Also find the solution using matrix method. (ISC BM 2003)
23. Find k so that the equations
3x − 2y + 2z = 1, 2x + y + 3z = − 1, x − 3y + kz = 0 may have a unique solution.
24. For what value of k, do the equation
2x − 3y + 2z = a

d
5x + 4y − 2z = − 3

ite
x − 13]y + kz = 9
not have a unique solution ?

m
25. Suppose the demand curve for automobiles over some time period can be written as x1 = 15000
– 0.2 x2 where x1 is the price of an automobile and x2 is the correponding quantity. Suppose the supply

Li
curve is x1 = 600 + 0.4 x2. Use matrix theory to obtains x1. (ISC)
26. Gaurav purchases 3 pens, 2 bags and 1 instrument box and pays Rs 41. From the same shop, Dheeraj

y
purchases 2 pens, 1 bag and 2 instrument boxes and pays Rs 29, while Ankur purchases 2 pens, 2 bags

n
and 2 instrument boxes and pays Rs 44. Translate the problem into a system of equations. Solve the

pa
system of equation by matrix method and hence find the cost of one pen, one bag and one instrument
box.
[Hint. Let the cost of 1 pen be Rs x, of one bag be Rs y and of one instrument box be Rs z. Then
om
3x + 2y + z = 41, 2x + y + 2z = 29, 2x + 2y + 2z = 44. Solve by matrix method.]

ANSWERS
C

1. x = 2, y = 1 2. x = 4, y = 5 3. x = −1, y = 1
4. x = 2, y = 1 5. x = 1, y = −1, z = 1 6. x = 1, y = 2, z = 3
nd

7. x = 2, y = 3, z = 5 8. x = 2, y = 3, z = 4 9. x = − 1, y = 2, z = 1
10. x1 = 4, x2 = 3, x3 = 2 11. x = 1, y = 2, z = 3 12. x =1, y = 2, z = 3
A

⎡5 −7 ⎤ −11 , y = 5
13. (i) ⎡⎢ −0.6 0.8⎤⎥ ; x1 = 20, x2 = 10
0.8 0.6
(ii) ⎢ 2 2 ⎥;x=
⎣ ⎦ ⎢ −2 ⎥ 2
⎣ 3 ⎦
nd

−1 −1 ⎡18 − 68 − 38⎤
14. (i) A = ⎢ 9 − 6 −15 ⎥ , x = − 1, y = −1, z = − 1
ha

72 ⎢ 9 − 22 − 7 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
⎡ −6 25 −24⎤ 1
(ii) A−1 = 1 ⎢ −12 40 −38⎥ , x = 1, y = 2 , z = − 1
C

10 ⎢ 10 − 40 ⎥
⎣ 40 ⎦
é − 6 17 13 ù
S

−1 1 ê 14 5 −8 ú , x = 3, y = - 2, z =1
(iii) A = 15.AB = 4I ; x = 2, y = 1, z = −1
67 êê-15 9 -1 úú
ë û
©

16. Inconsistent 17. Inconsistent

18. Consistent, infinitely many solutions, x = 3 − 5k, y = k where k ∈ R. 19. Inconsistent.
20. Consistent, has infinitely many solutions z = k, x = k − 2, y = 8 − 2k for all k ∈ R.
4 − 5k 5k + 3
21. Consistent, infinitely many solution z = k, x = ,y= , where k ∈ R.
5 5
22. x = 8, y = 5, z = 2 23. k ≠ − 1 24. k ≠ 8
25. x1 = 10 , 200; x2 = 24,000. 26. Pen → Rs 2, bag → Rs 15, instrument box → Rs 5.
Ch 3–72 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

HINTS
8. Write the given equation as x + y + 0⋅z = 5, 0.x + y + z = 7, x + 0.y + z = 6
A A
14. First show that AB = 4I, or B = I ⇒ B–1 = . Now BX = D
4 4
⎡ x ⎤ ⎡1 ⎤ ⎡ x⎤ ⎡1 ⎤ ⎡ x⎤ ⎡1 ⎤
⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢7 ⎥ ⇒ B −1 B ⎢ y ⎥ ⇒ B − 1 ⎢7 ⎥ ⇒ ⎢ y ⎥ = A ⎢7 ⎥
⇒ B ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ 4 ⎢ ⎥ , etc.
⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣2 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣2 ⎥⎦
22. The system will have a unique solution only, if the coefft, matrix is non-singular, i.e.,

d
|A| ≠ 0.

ite
REVISION EXERCISE ON CHAPTERS 2 AND 3

m
⎡1 0 1 ⎤
1. (i) If A = ⎢ 2 1 0 ⎥ then find det A.
⎣⎢ 3 2 1 ⎥⎦

Li
⎡ x + y 2x + z ⎤ = ⎡ 4 7 ⎤
(ii) If ⎢ x − y 2 z + w ⎥ ⎢ 0 10 ⎥ , then find the values of x, y, z, w.
⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦

y
⎡5 6 −3 ⎤
(iii) If A = ⎢ −4 3 2 ⎥ , then find the cofactors of the elements of 2nd row

n
⎢⎣ −4 −7 3 ⎥⎦

pa
⎡ cos θ sin θ 0 ⎤
2. Find θ if the matrix ⎢ sin θ cos θ 0 ⎥ is singular.
⎢⎣ 0 0 1 ⎥⎦
om
3. Find the inverse of the matrix ⎡⎢ 1 3 ⎤⎥ .
2 1
⎣ ⎦
C

4. Find λ if the system of equations 3x − 2y + z = 0, λx − 14y + 15z = 0, x + 2y − 3z = 0 has non-zero solution.

nd

[Hint Refer to Art 3.37, special cases, Page 3-62]

⎡1 0 1 ⎤
5. The matrix ⎢ 2 1 0 ⎥ is
⎣⎢ 3 1 1 ⎦⎥
A

(a) non-singular (b) singular (c) skew-symmetric (d) symmetric

x 1 y+ z 1/ a 1 bc
nd

6. (i) Show that y 1 z + x = 0 (ii) 1/ b 1 ca = 0

z 1 x+ y 1/ c 1 ab
⎡ 2 2⎤ ⎡ 0 −1⎤
7. If A = ⎢ −3 2 ⎥ , B = ⎢1 0 ⎥ , then find (B−1 A−1)−1.
ha

⎣ ⎦ ⎣ ⎦
1 x x +1
2x x ( x − 1) ( x + 1) x
C

8. (i) If f (x) = , then find f (100).

3x( x − 1) x( x − 1) ( x −2) ( x + 1) x ( x − 1)
x+a b c
S

(ii) Show that one root of the equation b x+c a = 0 is – (a + b + c).

c a x+b
©

9. If the system of equations x + 2y − 3z = 1, (λ + 3) z = 3, (2λ + 1) x + z = 0 is inconsistent, then find the

value of λ.
2 3 4
5 5 5
10. Evaluate 53 4
5 5
5
4 6 7
5 5 5
Matrices Ch 3–73

⎡ 2 0 −3 ⎤
11. If A = ⎢ 4 3 1 ⎥ is expressed as a sum of a symmetric and skew symmetric matrix, then find the skew
⎢⎣ −5 7 2 ⎥⎦
symmetric matrix.
a1 b1 c1 b2c3 − b3c2 a3c2 − a2c3 a2b3 − a3b2
12. If a2 b2 c2 = 5 then find the value of b3c1 − b1c3 a1c3 − a3c1 a3b1 − a3b3
a3 b3 c3 b1c2 − b2c1 a2c1 − a1c2 a1b2 − a2b1

[Hint. See solved Ex. 55]

13. If the system of equations x − ky − z = 0, kx − y − z = 0, x + y − z = 0 has a non-zero solution, then find
the possible values of k.

d
3 2
1+ x x x

ite
14. If 1 + y3 y2 y = 0 and x, y, z and all different, then find the value of xyz.
3 2
1+ z z z

m
⎡α 0 ⎤ ⎡1 0 ⎤
15. (i) If A = ⎢ 1 1 ⎥ , B = ⎢5 1 ⎥ whenever A2 = B then the value of α is
⎣ ⎦

Li
⎣ ⎦
(a) 1 (b) −1 (c) 4 (d) no real value of α.

y
(ii) x + ay = 0, y + az = 0, z + ax = 0. The value of a for which the system of equation has infinitely many

n
solutions is

pa
(a) a = 1 (b) a = 0 (c) a = − 1 (d) no value.

⎡a b ⎤ ⎡α β⎤
2
and A = ⎢
om
α ⎥⎦
16. If A = ⎢ ⎥ , then
⎣b a ⎦ ⎣β
2 2 2 2
(i) α = a + b , β = ab (ii) α = a + b , β = 2ab,
(iii) α = a2 + b2, β = a2 – b2 (iv) α = 2ab, β = a2 + b2
C

⎡0 0 − 1⎤
nd

⎢ −1 0 ⎥⎥ . The only correct statement about the matrix A is

17. Let A = ⎢ 0
⎢⎣ − 1 0 0 ⎥⎦
A

–1
(a)A does not exist (b) A = (– 1) I, when I is a unit matrix
(c) A is a zero matrix (d) A2 = I
nd

1 a b
9
18. In a Δ ABC, if 1 c a = 0, then prove that sin2 A + sin2 B + sin2 C = .
4
ha

1 b c
C

19. The number of values of k for which the system of equations (k + 1) x + 8y = 4k,
kx + (k + 30)y = 3k – 1 has infinitely many solutions is
S

(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) Infinite

10! 11! 12!
©

20. The value of the determinant 11! 12! 13! is

12! 13! 14!
(a)2 (10! 11!) (b) 2 (10! 13!) (c) 2 (10! 11! 12!) (d) 2 (11! 12! 13!)
2
21. If A – A + I = 0, then the inverse of A is
(a)A (b) A + I (c) I – A (d) A – I
Ch 3–74 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

–1
22. If A is an invertible matrix, then what is det (A ) equal to

1
(a) 0 (b) det (A) (c) (d) 1
det ( A)

⎡1 0 0⎤ ⎡1 ⎤ ⎡ 2⎤
⎢ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
23. A = ⎢ 2 1 0 ⎥⎥ , if U1, U2 and U3 are column matrices satisfying A U1 = ⎢0⎥ , A U2 = ⎢ 3 ⎥ and
⎢⎣ 3 2 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣0⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 ⎥⎦

d
⎡ 2⎤
⎢ ⎥

ite
A U3 = ⎢ 3 ⎥ and U is a 3 × 3 matrix when columns are U1, U2, U3 then find
⎢⎣1 ⎥⎦

m
–1
(a) the value of | U | (b) the sum of the elements of U
⎡ 3⎤

Li
⎢ ⎥
(c) the value of [3 2 0] U ⎢ 2 ⎥ .
⎢⎣ 0 ⎥⎦

y
log e 2 log e3

n
log e
Evaluate log e2 log e3 log e4

pa
24. (i)
log e3 log e 4 log e5
om
(ii) If A is an invertible matrix of order n, then Adj. A =
(a) | A |n (b) | A |n + 1 (c) | A |n – 1 (d) | A |n + 2.
C
1 1 1
25. Let A = 1 1 1 be a square matrix of order 3, then for any positive integer n, what is
nd

1 1 1
n
A equal to ?
(b) 3nA (3n–1) A
A

(a) A (c) (d) 3A

1 2 3
nd

26. Let A = (aij)n × n and adj A = (α ij). If A = 4 5 4 then find α23.

2 3 −1
⎡ x x2 1 + x2 ⎤
ha

⎢ 2⎥
27. If A = ⎢ y y 1 + y ⎥ where x, y, and z are distinct, what is |A| ?
2

⎢z z2 1+ z2 ⎥
C

⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ ,
(i) 0 (ii) x 2 y − y 2 x + xyz (iii) (x – y) (y – z) (z – x) (iv) xyz.
S

cos(α + β) − sin(α + β) cos 2 β

©

28. The determinant sin α cos α sin α is independent of

− cos α sin α cos β
(a) b (b) a (c) a and b both (d) To become rational
Matrices Ch 3–75

ANSWERS
1. (i) 2 (ii) 2, 2, 3, 4 (iii) 3, 3, 11
π 1 ⎡ 3 −1 ⎤
2. 3. ⎢ ⎥ 4. 5
4 5 ⎣ −1 2 ⎦
⎡ 2 −2⎤
5. (b) 7. ⎢ ⎥ 8. (i) 0
⎣2 3 ⎦
0 −2 1
1 2 0 −3
9. – 10. 0 11.

d
2
−1 3 0

ite
12. 25 13. – 1, 1 14. –1
15. (i) d (ii) c 16. (ii)
17. (d) 19. (b) 20. (c)

m
21. (c) 22. (c)
⎡ 1 ⎤ ⎡ 2 ⎤ ⎡ 2 ⎤ ⎡ 2 ⎤

Li
1 2
23. U1 = ⎢ − 2 ⎥ , U 2 = ⎢ − 1 ⎥ , U 3 = ⎢ − 1 ⎥ ,U = ⎢ − 2 − 1 − 1 ⎥⎥
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢
⎢⎣ 1 ⎥⎦ ⎣⎢ − 4 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ − 3 ⎦⎥ ⎣⎢ 1 − 4 − 3 ⎦⎥

y
(i) | U | = 3, (ii) 0 (iii) 5

n
24. (i) (0) (ii) (c) 25. (c) 26. 8 27. (iii) 28. (c)

pa
HINTS
om
12. Reqd. determinant = |adj A| where
a1 b1 c1
C

A = a2 b2 c2 = | A |3−1 = | A |2 = 52 = 25. (See note, solved Ex. 55)

nd

a3 b3 c3
⎡ α 0 ⎤ ⎡ α 0 ⎤ ⎡ α2 0⎤ ⎡1 0⎤
2
15. (i) A = ⎢ =⎢ ⎥=
2
∴ α =1 ⇒ α=±1
1 ⎦ ⎣ 1 1 ⎦ ⎣ α + 1 1 ⎦ ⎢⎣ 5
⎥ ⎢ ⎥ 1 ⎥⎦
A

⎣1
Also α + 1 = 5 ⇒ α = 4 ∴ No real value of α.
nd

1 a 0
(ii) 0 1 a = 0 ⇒ 1 + a3 = 0 ⇒ a = – 1
ha

a 0 1
⎡a b⎤⎡a b⎤
C

16. A2 = A. A = ⎢ . Equate the value of A2 so obtained to the given value of A2.

⎣b a ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ b a ⎥⎦
S

1 a b
1 c a = 0, on simplification ⇒ (a – b) 2 + (b – c) 2 + (c – a) 2 = 0
©

18.
1 b c
It is possible only if and only if a = b = c, i.e., Δ ABC is equilateral ⇒ ∠A = ∠B = ∠C = 60º.
19. For infinitely many solutions, the two equations must be identical
k +1 8 4k 2
⇒ = = ⇒ k 2 − 4k + 3 = 0 and k – 3k + 2 = 0
k k + 3 3k − 1
Ch 3–76 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

k2 k 1
⇒ = = ⇒ k2 = 1 and k = 1
−8+9 3−2 −3+ 4
1 11 11 × 12
20. Δ = 10! 11! 12! 1 12 12 × 13 , Apply R2 → R2 – R1 and R3 → R3 – R1
1 13 13 × 14
2 –1 –1 –1 –1
21. A – A + I = 0 ⇒ I = A – A ⋅ A ⇒ IA = AA – A(AA ) ⋅ A = I – A.
–1 –1 –1
22. Since | A | ≠ 0, therefore A exists such that AA = I = A A

d
–1 –1 –1
1
| = | A| .

ite
⇒ | AA | = | I | ⇒ | A | | A |=1 ⇒ |A

⎡ x⎤ ⎡1 0 0⎤⎡ x ⎤ ⎡1⎤ ⎡ x⎤ ⎡ 1 ⎤

m
⎢ ⎥ ⎢ 0 ⎥ ⎢ y ⎥ = ⎢ 0 ⎥ ⇒ ⎢⎢ y ⎥⎥ = ⎢⎢ − 2 ⎥⎥ Similarly you
⎥ ⎢ ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
23. Let U1 = ⎢ y ⎥ so that ⎢ 2 1

Li
⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 3 2 1 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ z ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 ⎥⎦

⎡ 2 ⎤ ⎡ 2 ⎤

y
⎢ −1 ⎥ ⎢ ⎥
⎥ , U3 = ⎢ − 1 ⎥ Now find U and then adj U and then U
–1

n
may obtain U2 = ⎢
⎢⎣ − 4 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ − 3 ⎥⎦

pa
⎡3⎤ ⎡ 1 2 2 ⎤⎡3⎤
0 ] U ⎢⎢ 2 ⎥⎥ = [ 3 0 ] ⎢⎢ − 2 − 1⎥⎥ ⎢⎢ 2 ⎥⎥
[3 2 2
om −1
.
⎢⎣ 0 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 1 −4 − 3⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 0 ⎥⎦
C
28. Expand cos (a + b), – sin (a + b), cos 2 b (putting = cos2 b – sin2b).
Now apply R1 → R1 + sin β R2 + cos β R3. You will obtain the value of the determinant
nd

as 0.
A
nd
ha
C
S
©
 d
ite
m
Li
UNIT 2

y
TRIGONOMETRY

n
pa
•
om
Inverse Trigonometric Functions
Syllabus
C

• Meaning of inverse trigonometric functions

nd

(sin–1x, cos–1x, tan–1x, cot–1x, cosec–1x, sec–1x)

• Principal values (use of graphs in explanation)
A

• Properties of inverse trigonometric functions (without proof)

nd
ha

THIS UNIT IS NOT FOR BUSINESS MATHEMATICS

C
S
©
 4
7
Inverse Trigonometric Functions

d
ite
4.01. Inverse circular or trigonometrical functions

If sin θ = x, then θ = sin −1 x (Read as sine inverse x)

m
–1
Thus we see that ‘sin x’ is a symbol which denotes an angle or a number the value of whose sine
–1

Li
is x. Similarly, ‘cos x’ denotes an angle whose cosine is x and so on. Thus

sin π = 1 ∴ tan π = 1 ∴ π = tan (1)

–1
Q

y
()
6 2 4 4
π =
sin 1 ;
–1

n
6 2

pa
The expressions sin–1x, cos–1x, tan–1x, ... are called inverse trigonometric functions.
–1
Note. The symbol ‘arc sin x’ is also used for sin x.
–1
om
Caution. It should be clearly noted that sin x is merely a symbol to indicate the angle and should
–1
not be confused with (sin x) or 1/sin x. The (–1) is not an exponent here. It is the inverse notation
–1
used in f (x).
C

4.02. The inverse of a t -function is not a function

The equation y = sin x defines the sine function and in this defining equation, x is the independent
nd

variable and y is the dependent variable. The domain is the set of all real numbers or angles, and the
range is the set of all real numbers between –1 and +1 inclusive. We know that there is unique value
A

of y for each given angle or number x. Suppose we are interested in the converse process that is, we
want to find the value of x for a given value of y which, in other words, means that we wish to know a
nd

number or an angle corresponding to a particular value of the sine of the angle.

π
Suppose it is given that y = sin x = 1 , then x = (or 30°) is a number or angle whose
6
ha

2
1 5π 1
sine is but (or 150°) is also a number or angle whose sine is . Besides these, other possible
2 6 2
C

13π 17π –7π –11π

values are (or 390°), (or 510°), (or – 210°), and (or – 330°) …In fact, we have an
6 6 6 6
S

1
infinitely many values of x, both positive and negative, for which sin x = . More concisely, if
2
©

sin x = 1 , then x = π + 2nπ and 5π + 2nπ , n Î I .

2 6 6
The function {(x, y) | y = sinx } will thus be an infinite set of ordered pairs given below:

{( ) ( 56π + 2nπ, 12 ) , n ∈ I }
π + 2nπ, 1 ,
6 2
1
when y is replaced by .
2
Ch 4–3
Ch 4–4 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

The inverse of this function is the set of ordered pairs

{( ) ( 12 ,
1 , π + 2nπ ,
2 6 )
5π + 2nπ , n ∈ I
6 }
which is obviously not a function, because corresponding to a value of the independent variable
there are more than one value of the dependent variable.
4.03. Inverses of trigonometric functions
Consider the sine function {(x, y) : y = sin x} ... (1)
The inverse of this function is found by interchanging the x and the y in the defining equation.

d
It is

ite
{(x, y) : x = sin y} ... (2)
and as discussed in Art. 4.01 is denoted by the symbolism
{(x, y) : y = sin–1x} or {(x, y) : y = are sin x}

m
Other trigonometric functions also have inverse relations which are defined similarly
–1
{(x, y) : y = cos x} or {(x, y) : y = arc cos x}

Li
–1
{(x, y) : y = tan x} or {(x, y) : y = arc tan x}
–1
{(x, y) : y = cot x} or {(x, y) : y = arc cot x}

y
–1
{(x, y) : y = sec x} or {(x, y) : y = arc sec x}

n
{(x, y) : y = cosec–1x} or {(x, y) : y = arc cosec x}

pa
Note. As we have explained in Art. 4.02, all inverses of t-functions are not functions. We shall now
find in the next section the conditions under which the inverse of a t-function may be made a function.
om
4.04. Defining inverse t -function
We have seen that the inverses of t-functions are all relations. They are not functions. In order to
make these relations inverse functions certain restrictions must be placed on either the domain or the
C

range. Since the domain is already restricted to the interval –1 ≤ x ≤ 1; therefore, we consider
restricting the range.
nd

Consider the sine function

{
sine = θ : −π ≤ θ ≤ π } → {x : − 1 ≤ x ≤ 1} denoted by sin θ = x .
A

2 2
We then, define the inverse sine function, as
nd

sin
–1
{
2
π
: {x : – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1} → θ : – ≤ θ ≤
2 }
π denoted by –1
sin x = θ .
ha

We see in the above that all values of x in the interval of the domain, i.e., (–1 ≤ x ≤ 1) are
–π ≤ θ ≤ π
associated with one and only one value in the restricted range, i.e., .
C

2 2
S
©

Fig. 4.01
–π ≤ θ ≤ π
Thus, sin–1x is an angle, whose sine is x, i.e., sin –1 x ⇔ x = sin θ , where .
2 2
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–5

Since all values of x in the interval of the domain (– 1 ≤ x ≤ 1) are associated with one and only

( π π
)
one value in the restricted range – 2 ≤ θ ≤ 2 , the inverse function of sine function exists and is
defined in the restricted range.
Similarly, in case of cosine function, its inverse function will exist, if we restrict the domain of
cosine function to 0 ≤ x ≤ π which means that the domain of cos–1x would be –1 ≤ x ≤ 1 and range
0 ≤ y ≤ π.
cosine cos–1

d
0 1 1 0
π 3 3 π

ite
6 2 2 6
π 1 1 π
3 2 2 3
π π

m
1 1
4 2 2 4
π –1 –1 π

Li
Fig. 4.02
In the table given below, we have listed the definition of the inverse trigonometric functions with

y
restricted ranges.

n
pa
GRAPHS OF INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS
–1
4.05. y = sin x
om
π π
Consider the function equation x = sin y. We know that as y increases from – to , then x
2 2
increases monotonically, taking up every real value in [–1, 1], so that to each value of x in this interval
C

⎡ –π π ⎤
there corresponds one and only one value of y in the interval ⎢ 2 , 2 ⎥ . Thus, there is one and only
⎣ ⎦
nd

one angle with a given sine.

–1
According we define sin x as follows:
A

–1 ⎡ –π π⎤
sin x is the angle in the interval ⎢ 2 , 2 ⎥⎦ , whose sine is x.
⎣
nd

⎡ –π π ⎤
In others word, the domain of the sin–1x is [–1, 1] and the range is ⎢ 2 , 2 ⎥ .
⎣ ⎦
ha

–1
To draw the graph of y = sin x.
Table for sin–1x
C

– 3 –1 –1 1 1 3
S

x –1 0 1
2 2 2 2 2 2
= – 0.87 = – 0.70 = – 0.5 = 0.5 = 0.70 = 0.87
©

–1 –π –π –π –π π π π π
sin x 0
2 3 4 6 6 4 3 2

We know that
π π
(i) y increases monotonically from – to as x increases from –1 to 1.
2 2
Ch 4–6 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

–1 –1 π –1 π
(ii) sin x = 0, sin 1 = , sin (–1) = – .
–1
2 2
(iii) sin x is defined in the interval [–1, 1] only.
π
Take 10 small divisions = 1 along the x-axis and 5 small division = along the y-axis.
6
Plot the points and join.
We thus have the graph as drawn in Fig. 4.03.

d
ite
m
Li
n y
pa
om
C
nd
A
nd

–1
Fig. 4.03. Graph of y = sin x
Note. A portion of the graph of y = sin x is shown in Fig. 4.04. It is easily seen that the graph
ha

of y = sin–1x is the reflection of y = sin x, in the line y = x, as by interchanging x and y in

y = sin x we get x = sin y, i.e., y = sin–1x.
C

1
S

–π – π/2 π/2 π
©

–1
Fig. 4.04
–1
4.06. Graph of y = cos x
Consider the functional equation x = cos y.
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–7

We know that as y increases from 0 to π, then x decreases monotonically taking up every real
value between 1 and −1. Thus, there is one and only one angle, lying between 0 to π, with a given
cosine.
−1
Accordingly we define cos x as follows :
−1
cos x is the angle in the interval [0, π ], whose cosine is x.
In other words, the domain of cos−1 x is [−1, 1] and the range is [0, π].
To draw the graph of y = cos− x
1

–1
Table for cos x

d
– 3 –1 –1 1 1 3
x –1 0 1

ite
2 2 2 2 2 2
= – 0.87 = – 0.70 = – 0.5 = 0.5 = 0.70 = 0.87

m
–1 5π 3π 2π π π π π
cos x π 2
0
6 4 3 3 4 6

Li
We note that
(i) y decreases monotonically from π to 0 as x increases from −1 to 1.

y
−1 −1 π −1
(ii) cos (−1) = π, cos 0 = , cos 1 = 0.

n
−1
2
(iii) cos x is defined in the interval [−1, 1] only.

pa
We thus have the graph as is drawn in Fig. 4.05.
om
C
nd
A
nd
ha
C
S
©

Fig. 4.05. Graph of y = cos–1x

Ch 4–8 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Note. A portion of the graph of y = cos x is shown below. The graph of y = cos–1x is reflection of
y = cos x in the line y = x.

0
π π π 2π 5π π 7π 4π 3π
6 3 2 3 6 6 3 2

d
–1

ite
1
Graph of y = cos x

m
–1

Li
4.07. y = tan x
Consider the functional equation x = tan y.
−π π

y
We know that as y increases from to , then x increases monotonically taking up every
2 2

n
value in (− ∞, ∞) so that to each value of x in this interval there corresponds one and only one value

( )
pa
of y in the interval − π , π .
2 2
−1
Accordingly we have the following definition of tan x ·
om
−π π
tan x is the angle in the interval ⎛⎜ , ⎞⎟ , whose tangent is x. In other words, the domain of
−1
⎝ 2 2⎠
(
tan x is (−∞, ∞) and the range is − π , π .
−1
)
C

2 2
−1
To draw the graph of y = tan x
nd

–1
Table for tan x
–1 1
A

x – 3 –1 0 1 3
3 3
= –1.73 = – 0.58 = 0.58 = 1.73
nd

–π –π –π π π π
tan –1x 0
3 4 6 6 4 3
ha

−1 π
When x →∞, then tan x →
2
C

−π
When x → − ∞, then tan −1 x →
2
S

We note that
−π π
as x increses from − ∞ to ∞.
©

(i) y increases monotonically from to

2 2
−1
(ii) tan 0 is 0.
−1
(iii) tan x is defined in the interval (−∞, ∞).
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–9
Plot the points (–1.73, – π / 3 ), (–1, – π / 4 ), (–0.58, – π / 6 ), (0, 0), (0.58, π / 6 ), (1, π / 4 ), (1.73, π / 3 )
and join. Keep in mind that as y, i.e., tan –1 x → π / 2, x → ∞ and as y, i.e., tan x → – π / 2 , x → ∞ .
–1

We then have the graph as is drawn in Fig. 4.06.

d
ite
m
Li
n y
pa
–1
Fig. 4.06. Graph of y = tan x
om
–1
Note. To help you to compare the graphs of y = tan x and y = tan x, a portion of the graph of
y = tan x is shown below.
C

Y
nd
A
nd

−π
ha

3 π –π 0 π π 3 π
– X
2 2 2 2
–1
C
S
©

Graph of y = tanx
–1
4.08 y = cot x
Consider the functional equation x = cot y. We know that as y increases from 0 to π, then x
decreases monotonically from + ∞ to − ∞, taking up every real value between − ∞ and + ∞.
Ch 4–10 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII
Thus, there is one and only one angle, lying between 0 and π, with a given cotangent.
−1
Accordingly we define cot x as follows :

(cot x ) is the angle in the interval (0, π) whose cotangent is x.

−1

−1
In other words the domain of cot x is (− ∞, ∞) and the range is (0, π).
To draw the graph of y = cot− x
1
–1
Table for cot x
5π
( )
π π 3π π
Using cot ( π – x) = – cot x, we have cot 6 = cot π – 6 = – cot 6 , cot 4 = cot π – 4 ( )
( )
= – cot π , cot 2π = cot π – π = – cot π .

d
4 3 3 3

ite
Hence, we have the following table.
–1 1

m
x – 3 –1 0 1 3
3 3
= –1.73 = – 0.58 = 0.58 = 1.73

Li
–1 5π 3π 2π π π π π
cot x
6 4 3 2 3 4 6

n y
We note that
(i) y decreases monotonically from π to 0 as x increases from − ∞ to ∞.

pa
−1 π
(ii) cot 0 = .
−1
2
(iii) cot x is defined in the interval (− ∞, ∞).
om
5π 3π 2π π π π π
Plot the points (–1.73, ), (–1, ), (–0.58, ), (0, ), (0.58, ), (1, ), (1.73, ) and join.
6 4 3 2 3 4 6
Observe that as x → ∞ , cot –1 x → 0 and as x → – ∞ , cot −1 x → π .
C

We then have the graph as is drawn in Fig. 4.07.

nd
A
nd
ha
C
S
©

Fig. 4.07. Graph of y = cot–1x

Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–11

Note. The graph of y = cot x is shown below.

Y

d
−π π π

ite
–π 0 3
2 – π X
2 2
–1

m
Li
n y
pa
Graph of y = cot x
–1
4.09. y = sec x
om
π
Consider the functional equation x = sec y. We know that as y increases from 0 to , then x
2
π
C
increases monotonically from 1 to + ∞. Also as y increases from to π, then x increases monotonically
2
from − ∞ to −1. Thus, there is one and only one value of the angle, lying between 0 and π, whose
nd

secant is any given number, not lying between −1 and 1.

−1
Accordingly we define sec x as follows :
A

π
sec−1 x is the angle, lying between 0 and π, whose secant is x, excluding , but including 0
2
and π.
nd

In other words, the domain is x ≤ − 1 and x ≥ 1, i.e., R – [–1, 1] and the range is [0, π] −{}
π
2
.
ha

To draw the graph of sec− x.

1

–1
Table for sec x
C

x 1 1.15 1.41 2 –2 –1.41 –1.15 –1

S

–1 π π π 2π 3π 5π
sec x 0 π
6 3 3 6
©

4 4

We note that
π π
(i) y increases from 0 to as x increases from 1 to + ∞, and y increases from to π as x
2 2
increases from − ∞ to − 1.
(ii) sec−1 (−1) = π ; sec −1 1 = 0.
Ch 4–12 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

(iii) sec −1 x is defined for x ≤ − 1 and x ≥ 1.

π
Plotting the points (1, 0), (1.15, ), ……, (–1, π ) as obtained from the table.
6
We have the graph of the form drawn in Fig. 4.08.

d
ite
m
Li
n y
–1
Fig. 4.08. Graph of sec x

pa
Note. The graph of y = sec x is given below to help you to observe the difference between the
–1
graph of y = sec x and y = sec x.
om
Y
C
nd
A

1
nd

−π
–π 0 π 3 π π
π X
2 2 2
ha

–1
C
S
©

Graph of y = sec x

–1
4.10. y = cosec x
π
Consider the functional equation x = cosec y. We know that as y increases from − to 0, then
π 2
x decreases monotonically from −1 to − ∞, and as y increases from 0 to , x decreases monotonically
2
from + ∞ to 1.
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–13
−π π
Thus, there is one and only one value of the angle lying between and , whose cosecent
2 2
is any given number, not lying between −1 and 1.
Accordingly we define cosec−1 x as follows :
−1 –ð ð
Cosec x is the angle, lying between and , whose cosecant is x, excluding 0, but
2 2
−π π
including and .
2 2
−π π
In other words the domain of cosec x is x ≤ −1 and x ≥ 1, and the range is ⎡⎢ , ⎤⎥ − {0}.
−1

d
⎣ 2 2⎦
To draw the graph of y = cosec− 1 x.

ite
–1
Table for cosec x
x 2 1.41 1.15 1 –2 –1.41 –1.15 –1

m
–1 π π π π –π –π –π –π

Li
cosec x
6 4 3 2 6 4 3 2
We note that

y
π
(i) y decreases from 0 to − π as x increases from − ∞ to −1, and y decreases from to 0 as x

n
2 2
increases from 1 to + ∞.

pa
(ii) cosec
−1
( )
−1 −π
2 ()
= − 1 ; cosec−1 π = 1 .
2
om
(iii) cosec x is defined
for x ≤ −1 and x ≥ 1.
π π –π
Plotting the points (2, ), (1.41, ), ……, (–1, )
C
6 4 2
We have the graph as is drawn in Fig. 4.09.
nd
A
nd
ha
C
S
©

–1
Fig. 4.09. Graph of cosec x
–1
Graph of y = cosec x is given to help you compare the graphs of y = cosec x and
y = cosec x.
Ch 4–14 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

−π 0 π 2π
–π π 3 π X

d
2 2 2

ite
–1

m
Li
y
Graph of y = cosec x

n
−1 −1 −1 −1 −1

pa
–1
Note 1. The graphs of y = sin x, cos x , tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x are the reflections
respectively of the graphs of y = sin x, cos x, tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x in the line y = x.
Note 2. The symbol sin−1 x is also written as “arc sin x” in certain books. Similarly, cos−1 x is
−1
om
written as “arc cos x” while tan x is written as “arc tan x”, and so on.
4.11. Table
C

Function Domain Range

–π ≤ y ≤ π ⎡ π π⎤
nd

y = sin–1x –1 ≤ x ≤ 1 , i.e., ⎢ – 2 , 2 ⎥
2 2 ⎣ ⎦
0 ≤ y ≤ π , i.e., [0, π ]
–1
y = cos x –1 ≤ x ≤ 1
A

–1
y = tan x All real numbers (– ∞ < x < ∞ )
–π < y < π
2 2
π π
(
, i.e., – 2 , 2 )
nd

–1
y = cot x All real numbers (– ∞ < x < ∞ ) 0 < y < π , i.e., (0, π )
π⎫
ha

1≤ x < ∞ ⎫ x ≤ −1 0≤ y< Note that

⎪ 2⎪
⎪
⎬ π ⎧π⎫
⎬ , i.e., [0, π] – ⎨ ⎬
and i.e., or
y = sec–1x π y≠
⎪
−∞ < x ≤ −1⎭ x ≥ −1 < y ≤ π⎪ 2 ⎩2⎭
C

2 ⎪⎭
π ⎫
– ∞ < x ≤ –1⎫ x ≤ –1 ≤ y < 0⎪ Note that
S

–
⎪ 2 ⎪
y = cosec–1x
and ⎬ i.e., or ⎬ ⎡ π π⎤
π ⎪ y ≠ 0, i.e., ⎢ – , ⎥ – {0}
1 ≤ x < ∞ ⎪⎭
©

x ≥ –1 0< y≤ ⎣ 2 2⎦
2 ⎪⎭

Remark. The choice of particular ranges for various principal-valued inverse trigonometric
functions is arbitrary. The ranges that we have given are the ones customarily chosen and ordinarily
used in all branches of mathematics. We have generally chosen ranges involving small values of y, to
have small graphs and also to effect a one-to-one correspondence between the domain and the range.
There is no universal agreement on the remaining portions of their ranges. For example, we could have
the restricted range for Arc cosine function as – π ≤ y ≤ 0 or – 2π ≤ y ≤ – π .
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–15

4.12. Principal values of inverse trigonometric functions

In our discussion in Art. 4.10, we have considered s in e

π π
the sine function having the domain – ≤ θ ≤ with 3F
–1
2 2 2
restricted range – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1 and then defined its inverse. 7F 1
–
6 2
Apart from the domain of sine function taken above
other domains are possible with the same range. For 5F
1

{ }{ }
2
example, θ : 3π ≤ θ ≤ 5π , θ : –5π ≤ θ ≤ –3π etc.

d
Fig. 4.10
2 2 2 2

ite
But we consider only the least numerical value among all the values of the angle whose sine is
–1
x, and call it the principal value of sin .

m
Thus, principal valued function for inverse sine function for real numbers is defined as

Li
{(x, y) : y = sin –1 x, – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1 and – π ≤ y ≤ π .
2 2 }

n y
The smallest numerical value, either positive or negative, of an inverse trigonometric function
is called the principal value of the function.

pa
–1 –1 –1 –π π
Thus, the principal values of sin x, tan x, cosec x are the angles that lie betweenand
2 2
om
–1 –1 –1
and the principal values of cos x, cot x, sec x are the angles that lie between 0 and π .

Remark. To denote general values we use capital letters. Thus sin–1x denotes all angles whose
C

sine is x and sin–1x denotes the principal value, i.e., an acute angle (positive or negative) whose sine
nd

–1 ⎛ ⎞
is x (depending upon whether x is positive or negative. Thus, the principal value of sin ⎜ 1 ⎟ is 45°
⎝ 2⎠
A

–1 ⎛ 3⎞
and that of sin ⎜ – ⎟ is – 60°.
⎝ 2 ⎠
nd

–1 –1
Similarly, tan x denotes all angles whose tangent is x and tan x denotes the principal value, i.e.,
–π π
ha

an acute angle between and .

2 2
Note. Unless otherwise stated, by any inverse value of a t-function is meant its principal value.
C

4.13. Table of principal values

S

Function Domain Principal Value For x ≥ 0 For x < 0

©

–1
y = sin x –1 ≤ x ≤ 1 −π ≤ y ≤ π 0≤ y≤ π –π ≤ y<0
2 2 2 2

y = cos–1x –1 ≤ x ≤ 1 0≤ y≤π 0≤ y≤ π π
< y≤π
2 2

y = tan–1x All real numbers –π < y< π 0≤ y<

π
–
π
< y<0
2 2 2 2
Ch 4–16 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

y = cot–1x All real numbers 0< y<π 0< y≤ π π

< y<π
2 2
π 0< y< π π<y≤π
y = sec–1x x ≥ 1 or x ≤ – 1 0 < y ≤ π, y ≠
2
2 2

y = cosec–1x x ≥ 1 or x ≤ – 1 – π ≤ y ≤ π, y ≠ 0 0< y≤ π –π ≤ y<0

2 2 2 2
Ex. 1. Write down the values of

((i) sin
–1 1
(ii) cos
–1
( – 12 ) –1
(iii) tan (–1)

d
2

ite
–1 –1 –1 ⎛ 2 ⎞
(iv) sec 2 (v) cot 3 (vi) cosec ⎜ – ⎟
⎝ 3⎠

m
Sol. (i) Let sin
–1 1 = x,
2 ( – π2 ≤ x ≤ π2 ) ⇒ sin x =
1 = sin π ∴ x = π
2 6 6
.

Li
( )
(ii) Let x = cos – , (0 ≤ x ≤ π) ⇒ cos x = – 1 = – cos π = cos π – π = cos 2π
–1 1
( )

y
2 2 3 3 3

n
2π
∴ x =

pa
3
π
(π
(iii) Let x = tan (–1), – 2 < x < 2
–1
) ⇒ tan x = –1 = – tan
om π = tan – π
4 4 ( ) ∴ x = –
π.
4
–1 π x = π.
(iv) Let x = sec 2, (0 < x ≤ π) ⇒ sec x = 2 = sec
3 ∴ 3
C

π
(v) Let x = cot –1 3, (0 < x < π) ⇒ cot x = 3 = cot π ∴ x = .
6 6
nd

–1 æ
(vi) Let cosec ç –
è
2 ö
÷,
3ø
( – π2 ≤ x ≤ π2 ) ⇒ cosec x =
–2 F
= – cosec = cosec –
3  
F
3
A

∴ x = –
π.
nd

3
Ex. 2. Find the values of the following:
ha

tan (1) + cos ⎛⎜ – ⎞⎟ + sin ⎛⎜ – ⎞⎟

(i) –1 –1 1 –1 1
⎝ 2⎠ ⎝ 2⎠
C


(ii) cos –1 1 + 2 sin –1 1
2 2 
S

( ) ( )
Sol. (i) tan –1(1) + cos –1 – 1 + sin –1 – 1 = π + 2π + – π ( )
©

2 2 4 3 6

3π + 8π – 2π
= = 3π
12 4

(ii) cos
–1
( 12 ) + 2 sin ( 12 )
–1
=
π + 2 ⋅ π = π + π = 2π
3 6 3 3 3
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–17

–1 –1
Ex. 3. tan 3 – sec (–2) is equal to
π π 2π
(i) π (ii) – (iii) (iv)
3 3 3

Sol. y = tan –1 3, (0 ≤ y < π2 ) = π3

Let x = sec–1(–2), ( π2 < x ≤ π ) sec x = – 2 = sec ( π – π3 ) = sec 23π
⇒ ⇒ x = 2π
3
π 2π –π
3 – sec (–2) = 3 – 3 = 3 .

d
–1 –1
∴ tan Ans. (ii)

ite
Similar questions for practice :
1. Find the principal values of

m
⎛ 1 ⎞ 3
(i) sin –1 ⎜ – ⎟ (ii) cos
–1
(iii) tan –1 (– 3)

Li
⎝ 2⎠ 2
–1 2
(iv) cot–1(–1) (v) sec (vi) sec–1(–2)

y
3

n
–1 ⎛ 1 ⎞ –1 ⎛ 3⎞ –1 ⎛ 1 ⎞
(vii) sin ⎜ – ⎟ (viii) cos ⎜⎜ – ⎟⎟ (ix) tan ⎜ ⎟

pa
⎝ 2⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ 3⎠

(x) (
tan –1 – 3 ) –1
(xi) sec – 2 (
om ) (xii) cot –1(– 3)

–1 2
2. Evaluate : tan 3 – sec –1 (–2) + cosec –1
3
C

ANSWERS
nd

π π π 3π
1. (i) – (ii) (iii) – (iv)
4 6 3 4
π 2π π 5π
A

(v) (vi) (vii) – (viii)

6 3 6 6
nd

π π 3π 5π
(ix) (x) – (xi) (xii)
6 3 4 6
2. 0
ha

4.14. Properties of inverse t -functions

Below we state the properties of inverse t-functions without proof.
C

Theorem 1. Self-adjusting property

S

–1 ⎡ π π⎤ sin (sin–1x) = x, for all x ∈ [–1, 1]

(i) sin (sin θ) = θ , for all θ ∈ ⎢ – , ⎥
⎣ 2 2⎦
©

–1
(ii) –1
cos (cos θ) = θ , for all θ ∈ [0, π] cos (cos x) = x, for all x ∈ [–1, 1]

(iii) –1 π π
tan (tan θ) = θ , for all θ ∈ – , ( 2 2 ) tan (tan–1x) = x, for all x ∈ R

⎡ π π⎤ cosec (cosec–1x) = x, for all x ∈ [–∞, – 1]

cosec (cosec θ) = θ , for all θ ∈ ⎢ – 2 , 2 ⎥ ,
–1
(iv)
⎣ ⎦
θ≠0 ∪ [1, ∞], i.e., R – [–1, 1]
Ch 4–18 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

π –1
sec (sec θ) = θ , for all θ ∈ [0, π], θ ≠ 2 sec (sec x) = x, for all x (–∞, – 1)
–1
(v)

∪ [1, ∞], i.e., R – [–1, 1]

–1
cot (cot θ) = θ for all θ ∈ (0, π) cot (cot x) = x, for all x ∈ R
–1
(vi)

Caution. The students should note carefully the restrictions specified against each formula.
–1
⎢⎣ 2 2 ⎥⎦
π π
Thus sin (sin θ) ≠ θ, if θ ∉ ⎡ – π , π ⎤ , tan –1(tan θ) ≠ θ , if θ ∉ – ,
2 2
etc. ( )

d
For example, cos –1 cos 7π ( ) ≠ 76π , because 76π does not lie between 0 and .

ite
π
6

(cos 76π ) = cos {cos ( 2π – 56π )}

m
–1 –1
In fact, cos

Li
= cos ( cos )
5π–1 7π = 2π – 5π
6 6 6 Q

y
5π

n
= and cos(2π – θ) = cos θ
6

pa
Ex. 4. Evaluate the following:

(sin ð3 ) (cos 2ð3 ) (tan 10ð )

(i) sin
–1
(ii) cos
om
–1
(iii) tan
–1

(iv) sin ( sin ) (v) cos ( cos ) (tan 5ð4 )

–1 5ð 9ð
–1 –1
(vi) tan
C
6 8

(vii) sin sin ( ) (viii) sec ( sec )

2ð 7ð
–1
nd

–1
3 6

Sol. (i) sin ( sin ) = (ii) cos ( cos 2 ) = ( ) = 10π

π π π 2π (iii) tan –1 tan π
A

–1 –1
3 3 3 3 10
nd

5π
(iv) does not lie between – π and π .
6 2 2

( ) = sin π6 .
ha

5π = sin π – π
So we write sin
6 6

(sin 56π ) = sin (sin π6 ) = π6 .

C

–1 –1
∴ sin
S

9π
(v) does not lie between 0 and π .
8
©

So we write cos 9π = cos 2π – 7π

8 8 ( ) = cos 78π
∴ cos
–1
(cos 98π ) = cos (cos 78π ) = 78π .
–1
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–19

5π π π
(vi) does not lie between – and .
4 2 2
5π = π + π
So we write and use tan ( π + θ ) = tan θ
4 4

∴ tan
–1
( tan 54π ) = tan {tan ( π + π4 )} = tan ( tan π4 ) =
–1 –1 π
4
.

2π π π
(vii) does not lie between – and .
3 2 2

d
So we write 2π = π – π and use sin(π – θ) = sin θ

ite
3 3
π
( )
sin sin 2 = sin sin π –
–1 –1 π
{ ( )} = sin (sin π3 ) =
–1 π

m
∴ 3 3 3
.

Li
7π
(viii) does not lie between 0 and π .
6

y
7π = 2π – 5π
So we write and use sec (2π – θ) = sec θ

n
6 6

(sec 76π ) = sec {sec ( 2π – 56π )} = sec (sec 56π ) = 5π

pa
–1 –1 –1
∴ sec .
6
Ex. 5. Evaluate the following:
om
(i) ( 25 )
sin sin
–1
(ii) tan tan ( –1 23
18 ) (
(iii) sin cos –1 3
5 )
C

(iv) sin ( sec 25 )

–1
(v) sin (cot–1x) (vi) cos (tan–1x)
nd

(vii) cos ( tan 3 )

–1
A

Sol. (i) sin ( sin 2 ) = 2

(
(ii) tan tan –1 23 ) = 1823
nd

–1
5 5 18
–13 = θ cos θ =
3
⇒
ha

(iii) Let cos

5 5
sin θ = 4 4 3 sin –1 4
–1 –1
⇒ ⇒ θ = sin ⇒ cos =
C

5 5 5 5

(
∴ sin cos
–1
)
3 = sin sin –1 4
( )= 4
.
S

5 5 5
25 25
sec θ =
©

–1
(iv) Let θ = sec ⇒
7 7

sin θ = 24 24
–1
⇒ ⇒ θ = sin
25 25

∴ (
sin sec
–1 25
7 ) = sin sin ( –1 24
25 )= 24
25
.
Ch 4–20 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

(v) Let cot –1 x = θ ⇒ cot θ = x

sin θ = 1 1
⇒ ⇒ θ = sin
–1
2
1+ x 1+ x
2

⎛ ⎞
∴ ( ⎜
)
sin cot –1 x = sin ⎜ sin –1 1
2
⎟ =
⎟
1
2
⎝ 1+ x ⎠ 1+ x

(vi) Let tan –1 x = θ ⇒ tan θ = x

d
cos θ = 1 –1 1
∴ ⇒ θ = cos

ite
2
1+ x 1+ x
2

⎛ ⎞
( )

m
1 1
cos tan –1 x = cos ⎜ cos ⎟ =
–1
∴ ⎜ 2 ⎟ 2
⎝ 1 + x ⎠ 1+ x

Li
(vii) Let tan –1 3 = θ . Then tan θ = 3 ⇒ cos θ = 4
4 4 5

y
θ = cos 4 tan 3 = cos 4
–1 –1 –1
⇒ ⇒

n
5 4 5

( ) ( )
pa
3 –1–1 4 4
∴ cos tan = cos cos 5 = 5 .
4
Ex. 6. Prove that sec2(tan–12) + cosec2(cot–13) = 15.
om
2 –1 2 –1
Sol. sec (tan 2) + cosec (cot 3)

{ ( )} + {cosec (cot 3 )}
2 2
–1 –1
C
= sec tan 2

{ ( )} + {cosec (cot 13 )}
2 2
2
nd

–1 –1
= sec tan
1

{ ( )} + {cosec (cosec )}
2 2
–1 –1
A

= sec sec 5 10

( 5) + ( )
2 2
= 15 .
nd

= 10
Theorem 2. Reciprocal property
ha

(i) –1 –1 1 x ∈ R – (–1, 1)
cosec x = sin ,
x
1
C

–1
(ii) sec–1x = cos , x ∈ R – (–1, 1)
x
ì –1 1
S

ïïtan x , x>0
(iii) cot –1 x = í
©

ï ð + tan –1 1 , x < 0
ïî x
Theorem 3.

(i) sin (–x) = –sin x, x ∈ [–1, 1] (ii) cos –1(– x ) = ð – cos –1 x, x ∈ [–1, 1]
–1 –1

(iii) tan (–x) = –tan x, x ∈ R (iv) cot –1(– x ) = ð – cot –1 x, x ∈ R

–1 –1
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–21

(v) sec –1 (– x ) = ð – sec –1 x, x ∈ R – [–1, 1]

(vi) cosec (–x) = – cosec x, x ∈ R – [–1, 1]
–1 –1

Theorem 4.
–1 –1 ð
(i) sin x + cos x = , for all x ∈ [–1, 1]
2
–1 –1 ð
(ii) tan x + cot x = , for all x ∈ R
2
–1 –1 ð
(iii) sec x + cosec x = , for all x ∈ R – [–1, 1]

d
2

ite
Theorem 5. (Conversion property)

⎛ x ⎞ ⎛ 1 ⎞

m
–1 –1 2 –1 –1
(i) sin x = cos 1 – x = tan ⎜ ⎟ = sec ⎜ ⎟
⎝ 1 – x2 ⎠ ⎝ 1 – x2 ⎠

Li
⎛ 1 – x2 ⎞
⎟ = cosec 1
–1 –1
cot ⎜

y
=
⎜⎝ x ⎟⎠ x

n
pa
⎛ 1 – x2 ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
–1 –1 2 –1 –1 x
(ii) cos x = sin 1 – x = tan ⎜ ⎟ = cosec ⎜ ⎟
⎝ x ⎠ ⎜⎝ 1 – x 2 ⎟⎠
om
⎛ ⎞
–1
= cot ⎜
x
⎟ = sec 1
⎜⎝ 1 – x 2 ⎟⎠
–1
()
C
x

⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ 1 + x2 ⎞
nd

(iii) tan –1 x = sin –1 ⎜ x –1 1 –1

⎟ = cos ⎜ ⎟ = cosec ⎜ ⎟
⎜⎝ 1 + x 2 ⎟⎠ ⎜⎝ 1 + x 2 ⎟⎠ ⎜⎝ x ⎟⎠

( 1 + x ) = cot ( 1x )
A

–1 2 –1
= sec
nd

Ex. 7. Prove that

sin ⎡⎢ cot { ( )}
cos tan x ⎤⎥ =
x2 + 1
ha

–1 –1
(i)
⎣ ⎦ 2
x +2

{ ( )}
C

x2 + 1
(ii) cos ⎡⎢ tan sin cot x ⎤⎥ =
–1 –1
⎣ ⎦ 2
x +2
S

⎧⎪ ⎫⎪
–1 –1 1 1
Sol. cos (tan x) = cos ⎨ cos ⎬ = (Theorem 5)
©

2 2
⎪⎩ 1 + x ⎪⎭ 1+ x
⎡ –1 1 ⎤
–1
{
⇒ sin ⎡⎣ cot cos(tan x) ⎤⎦ = sin ⎢ cot
–1
⎢⎣
} ⎥
1 + x ⎦⎥
2
2 + x2 1 + x2

⎧⎪ –1 1 + x 2 ⎫⎪ 2
1+ x =
2
x +1
= sin ⎨ sin ⎬ = θ
2 2
⎩⎪ 2 + x ⎭⎪
2 2+ x x +2 1
Ch 4–22 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

–1 ⎪⎧ –1 1 ⎫⎪ = 1
(ii) sin (cot x) = sin ⎨sin ⎬
⎩⎪ 1 + x ⎪⎭
2 2
1+ x

⎡ –1 1 ⎤
∴
⎣ { ⎦
⎣⎢
}
cos ⎡ tan –1 sin (cot –1 x) ⎤ = cos ⎢ tan ⎥
1 + x ⎦⎥
2

⎧⎪ –1 1 + x 2 ⎫⎪ 2
1+ x =
2
x +1
= cos ⎨ cos ⎬= 2 2
2+ x x +2

d
2
⎩⎪ 2+ x ⎭⎪

ite
Theorem 6.
⎛ x+ y ⎞
tan –1 x + tan –1 y = tan –1 ⎜

m
(i) ⎟ if xy < 1
⎝ 1 – xy ⎠

Li
–1 –1 –1 x – y
(ii) tan x – tan y = tan if xy > – 1
1 + xy
Explanation of the restriction. Since x > 0, y > 0 and xy < 1, therefore tan (α + β) is +ve

y
⇒ α + β lies in Quadrant I or Quadrant III.

n
π ⇒ α< π –β
In case, α + β lies in Quad. I, α + β <

pa
2 2
⇒ tan α < tan
π
2 ( )
– β ⇒ tan α < cot β ⇒ x < 1 ⇒ xy < 1.
y
om (Since y > 0)
Note. The same result holds good if x < 0, y < 0, xy < 1.
–1 –1 –1 x + y
Remark. (i) If x > 0, y > 0 and xy > 1, then tan x + tan y = π + tan
C
1 – xy
–1 x+ y
(ii) If x < 0, y < 0 and xy > 1, then tan x + tan –1 y = – π + tan –1
nd

1 – xy
The above two cases are not included in this course.
A

–1 x– y
Remark. (i) If x > 0, y < 0 and xy < –1, then tan x – tan –1 y = π + tan –1
1 + xy
nd

–1 –1 –1 x – y
(ii) If x < 0, y > 0 and xy < – 1, then tan x – tan y = – π + tan
1 + xy
ha

The above two cases are not included in this course.

Theorem 7.
C

If x2 < 1,
S

2
–1
2tan x = tan
–1 2 x = sin –1 2 x = cos –1 1 – x
2 2 2 .
1– x 1+ x 1+ x
©

Theorem 8.
–1 –1 –1 2
(i) 2sin x = sin –1(2 x 1 – x 2 ), (ii) 2cos x = cos (2x – 1)
–1 –1 3 –1 –1 3
(iii) 3sin x = sin (3x – 4x ) (iv) 3cos x = cos (4x – 3x)
3
–1 –1 3x – x
(v) 3tan x = tan 2
1 – 3x
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–23

Theorem 9.

–1 –1 –1
(i) sin x ± sin y = sin (x 1 – y 2 ± y 1 – x 2 ), if x, y ≥ 0 and x 2 + y 2 ≤ 1 .

–1 –1 –1 2 2
(ii) sin x ± sin y = ð – sin (x 1 – y 2 ± y 1 – x 2 ), if x, y ≥ 0 and x + y > 1.

–1 –1 –1
(iii) cos x ± cos y = cos (xy m 2 2
1 – x 2 ⋅ 1 – y 2 ), if x, y > 0 and x + y ≤ 1 .

(iv) cos–1x ± cos–1y = ð – cos –1 ( xy m 1 – x 2 ⋅ 1 – y 2 ) , if x, y > 0 and x2 + y2 > 1.

d
ite
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Ex. 8. Evaluate:

m
(i)
⎛
tan 1 ⎜ cos
2⎝
–1 5 ⎞
3 ⎟⎠ (
(ii) tan 2tan –1 1 – ð )

Li
5 4
–1 5 =θ 5
Sol. (i) Let cos . Then cos θ =

y
3 3

n
1– 5

pa
1 – cos θ =
tan θ = 3 = 3– 5
2 1 + cos θ 3+ 5
1+ 5
3
om
(3 – 5) (3 – 5)
= = 3 – 5 = 1 (3 – 5) .
(3 + 5) (3 – 5) 9–5 2
C

(ii) We know, by theorem 7, that

2x
nd

–1 –1
2tan x = tan 2
if | x | < 1
1– x
⎛ 2× 1 ⎞
A

–1 ⎜ 5 ⎟ 1 < 1.
1 3 x = 1 and
–1
∴ 2 tan = tan ⎜ 1 ⎟ 5
5 ⎜1 – ⎟ 5
nd

⎝ 25 ⎠
−1 5
= tan
ha

12
Now ( 1−π
tan 2 tan
5 4
−1
) = tan ⎡ tan −1 5 − tan −1 1⎤
⎣⎢ 12 ⎦⎥
C

We know, by theorem 6, that

−1 ⎛ x− y⎞
S

tan–1 x – tan–1 y = tan ⎜ ⎟ if xy > – 1

⎝ 1 + xy ⎠
©

5 5
Here x = , y = 1, therefore xy = > − 1,
12 12
⎛ 5 −1 ⎞
∴ tan
−1 5
12
−1
− tan 1 = tan ⎜
−1 ⎜ 12
5
⎜1 + ×1⎟
⎟ −1 −7
⎟ = tan 17 ( )
⎝ 12 ⎠

∴ (
tan 2 tan 1 −
−1
5 4
π
)
⎡ −1 −7 ⎤ = −7 .
= tan ⎢ tan
⎣ 17 ⎥⎦ 17 ( )
Ch 4–24 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

Ex. 9. The value of tan ⎡cos −1 4 + tan −1 2 ⎤ is

⎢⎣ 5 3 ⎥⎦
6
(i) (ii) 17 (iii) None of these. (IIT)
17 6
2
1− x
Sol. If cos α = x, then tan α =
x 1
1 – x2

()
2 α
1− 4 x

d
5
∴ cos
−1 4
= tan
–1 = tan −1 3 Fig. 4.11
5 4/5 4

ite
−1 4 + tan −1 2 −1 3 −1 2 3 2 1
∴ cos = tan + tan [Here xy = × = < 1, Theorem 6]
5 3 4 3 4 3 2

m
⎡ 3+2 ⎤
(
⎢ −1 4 3 ⎥ = tan tan −1 17 = 17
= tan ⎢ tan . )

Li
1 − 3 . 2⎥ 6 6
⎣⎢ 4 3 ⎦⎥
Hence, (ii) is the answer.

y
(
Ex. 10. Evaluate : cos sin −1 3 + sin −1 5 . )

n
5 13

pa
−1 3 −1 5
Sol. Let θ = sin and φ = sin . Then
5 13 om
3 5
sin θ = and sin φ = (Fig. 4.12)
5 13
Y Y
C
P P
5 13
3 5
nd

θ φ
O 4 M O 12 M X
X
A

Fig. 4.12
nd

(
cos sin
−1 3 + sin −1 5
5 13 ) = cos (θ + φ) = cos θ. cos φ – sin θ sin φ
ha

4 × 12 − 3 × 5 = 48 − 15 = 33
=
5 13 5 13 65 65 65
−1
Ex. 11. Evaluate : tan (2 cot− x).
C

−1 1
Sol. Let cot x = z. Then x = cot z ⇒ tan z =
x
S

2
2 tan z
©

Now tan (2 cot−1 x) = tan 2z = 2

= x = 22x .
1 − tan z 1 − 1 x −1
2
x
Ex. 12. Show that tan −1 1 + tan −1 1 = π .
2 3 4
1 × 1 = 1 <1
Sol. Here xy = , therefore we can use
2 3 6
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–25

−1 −1 −1 ⎛x+ y⎞
tan x + tan y = tan ⎜ 1 − xy ⎟
⎝ ⎠

⎛ 1+1 ⎞
−1 1 + tan −1 1 −1 ⎜ 2 3 ⎟ = tan −1 5/ 6 = tan −11 = π
∴ tan = tan ⎜ 1 1⎟ .
2 3 ⎜1 − ⋅ ⎟ 5/ 6 4
⎝ 2 3⎠
− − −
Ex. 13. Prove that tan−1 x + cot−1 (x + 1) = tan−1 (x2 + x + 1). (ISC)

−1 −1 −1 −1 1

d
Sol. tan x + cot (x + 1) = tan x + tan x +1

ite
x
Since x× 1 = < 1, therefore we have
x +1 x +1

m
⎛ x+ 1 ⎞
−1 ⎜ x +1 ⎟

Li
−1 −1 1 −1 2
tan x + tan = tan ⎜ ⎟ = tan (x + x + 1).
x +1 1
⎜⎜ 1 − x . x + 1 ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎠

y
−1 1 + sin − 1 2 =π

n
Ex. 14. Show that sin .
5 5 2

pa
Y Y
om
5 5
1 2
θ φ
C
O 2 X O 1 X
nd

Fig. 4.13

1 −1 −1 2
A

Sol. Let θ = sin and φ = sin .

5 5
nd

1 2
Then sin θ = and sin φ = , each angle is in the first quadrant.
5 5
π π
ha

We have to show that θ + φ = , or sin (θ + φ) = sin = 1.

2 2
1 1 + 2 2 = 1.
Now sin (θ + φ) = sin θ . cos φ + cos θ sin φ =
C

5 5 5 5
sin 1 = π − sin −1 2
−1
S

Method II. 2
5 5
⎡ −1 ⎤ π
sin ⎢sin 1 ⎥ = sin ⎡ − sin
−1 2 ⎤
©

⇒ ⎢⎣ 2
⎣ 5⎦ 5 ⎥⎦
1 ⎛ −1 2 ⎞ = cos ⎛ cos−1 1 ⎞ = 1 .
⇒ = cos ⎜ sin ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
5 ⎝ 5⎠ ⎝ 5⎠ 5
Hence proved
Method III. We know that
x + sin y = sin −1 ⎡⎣ x 1 − y 2 + y 1 − x 2 ⎤⎦ if −1 ≤ x, y ≤ 1, x + y ≤ 1.
−1 −1 2 2
sin
Ch 4–26 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

1 2 1 2 <1 1 4
and x + y = + = 1
2 2
Here x = ,y= and −1 < , (Theorem 9)
5 5 5 5 5 5

∴
−1 ⎡ 1
sin−1 x + sin−1 y = sin ⎢
⎣ 5 5 5 5
⎤
1 − 4 + 2 1 − 1 ⎥ = sin
⎦
−1 1
+4
5 5 ( )
−1 π
= sin 1 = .
2
Hence proved.

+ sin 16 = π
−1 4+ −1 5 −1
Ex. 15. Prove that sin sin
5 13 65 2

d
sin
−1 4 + sin
−1 5 π − sin
−1 16
Sol. =

ite
5 13 2 65
⇒ sin
−1 4
5
+ sin
−1 5
13
−1
= sin 1 − sin
−1 16
= sin −1 1 + sin −1 −16 ( )

m
65 65
We know that

Li
−1 −1
sin x + sin y = sin
−1 ⎡ x 1 − y 2 + y 1 − x 2 ⎤ if −1 ≤ x, y ≤ 1, x2 + y2 ≤ 1.
⎣ ⎦
4 5
On the left side, −1 ≤ , < 1 , and or if xy < 0, x2 + y2 > 1.

y
5 13
16 + 25 = 2704 + 625 + 3329 < 1

n
x2 + y2 = .
25 169 25 × 169 4225

pa
On the right side, (
65 )
xy = 1 × −16 = −16 < 0 , and
65
om
= 1+ (
65 )
2
2 2 −16 = 1 + 256 = 4481 > 1
x +y
4225 4225
C
Therefore, we can apply the result to both sides
−1 ⎡4 25 5 16 ⎤
∴ L.H.S. = sin ⎢ 5 1 − 169 + 13 1 − 25 ⎥
nd

⎣ ⎦

( ) (
⎡ 4 × 12 + 5 × 3 ⎤ = sin −1 48 + 15
= sin
−1
⎢⎣ 5 13 13 5 ⎥⎦ ) ( )
A

65 65
−1 63
= sin .
nd

65
−1 ⎡
R.H.S. = sin ⎢1. 1 −
⎣ 4225 65 ⎥⎦ ( )
256 + −16 1 − 1 ⎤ = sin −1 3969
4225
ha

−1 63
= sin .
65
C

Hence proved.
−1 4 + sin −1 5 + sin −1 16
Method II. sin
S

5 13 65
⎡4
−1 25 5 16 ⎤ −1 16
©

= sin ⎢⎣ 5 . 1 − 169 + 13 1 − 25 ⎥⎦ + sin 65

−1 63
= sin + sin −1 16 (As done above)
65 65

( ) ( ) ⎥⎦
⎡ 2 2 ⎤
= sin −1 ⎢ 63 1 − 16 + 16 1 − 63
⎣ 65 65 65 65
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–27

= sin
−1 ⎡ 63 × 63 + 16 × 16 ⎤ = sin −1 ⎡ 3969 + 256 ⎤
⎢⎣ 65 65 65 65 ⎥⎦ ⎢⎣ 4225 4225 ⎥⎦

4225 ( )
= sin −1 4225 = sin −1 1 = π .
2
Hence proved.
Method III. The given expression can be put as

⎛ 4 5 ⎞
−1 4 −1 5 π −1 16
⎜ + ⎟ π 16
tan + tan = − tan ⇒ tan ⎜ 3 12 ⎟ = − tan −1
−1
4 5

d
3 12 2 63 ⎜⎜ 1 − . ⎟⎟ 2 63
⎝ 3 12 ⎠

ite
63 π 16
⇒ tan −1
= − tan −1 .

m
16 2 63
Now take tangent of both sides and complete it.

Li
12 3 56
Ex. 16. Prove that cos
–1
+ sin –1 = sin –1 .

y
13 5 65

n
5 3 13
Sol. cos –1 12 + sin –1 3 = sin –1 + sin –1
12

pa
13 5 13 5
θ
5
⎧ ⎫
–1 ⎪ 5 ⎛3⎞ 3
2
⎛5⎞ ⎪
om
2
= sin ⎨ ⋅ 1 – ⎜ ⎟ + ⋅ 1 – ⎜ ⎟ ⎬ –1 1 2 sin – 1 5
⎝5⎠ ⎝ 13 ⎠ ⎪ co s =
⎪⎩13 5
⎭ 13 13
C

–1 ⎧ 5 4 3 12 ⎫ –1 56
= sin ⎨ × + × ⎬ = sin .
⎩ ⎭
nd

13 5 5 13 65

Ex. 17. Prove that 4 tan −1 1 − tan −1 1 + tan −1 1 = π .

5 70 99 4
A

(
Sol. L.H.S. = 2 2 tan
−1 1
) (
− tan −1 1
− tan −1 1
)
nd

5 70 99
−1 −1 2 x
We know that 2 tan x = tan 2 if | x | < 1. (Theorem 7)
1− x
ha

Since 1 < 1 , therefore

5
C

2
−1
2 tan 1 = tan −1 5 = tan −1 5
()
5 2 12
1− 1
S

= 2 ( 2 tan
5)
©

−1 1 −1
1 = 2 tan −1 5
Thus, 4 tan
5 12
2× 5
−1
12 = tan −1 120 .
= tan
( )
2 119
1− 5
12
−1 −1 −1 x − y
We also know that tan x − tan y = tan , if xy > − 1. (Theorem 6)
1 + xy
Ch 4–28 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎛ 1 − 1 ⎞
−1 1 − tan −1 1 −1 ⎜ 70 99 ⎟ = tan −1 1 ⎡Here 1 × 1 > −1⎤
∴ tan = tan ⎜ 1 ⎟ ⎢⎣ ⎥⎦
70 99 ⎜1 + . 1 ⎟ 239 70 99
⎝ 70 99 ⎠
−1
120 − tan −1 1 ⎡ Here 120 × 1 > − 1⎤
∴ L.H.S. = tan
119 239 ⎣⎢ 119 239 ⎦⎥
⎛ 120 − 1 ⎞
−1 ⎜ 119
= tan ⎜ 239 ⎟ = tan −1 28561 = tan −1 1 = π = R.H.S.
120 ⎟ 28561 4
⎜1 + × 1 ⎟
⎝ 119 239 ⎠

d
−1 −1 −1
Ex. 18. Prove that tan 1 + tan 2 = 1 cos 3 .

ite
4 9 2 5
⎛ 1+2 ⎞
−1 ⎜ ⎟

m
−1 17 −
Sol. L.H.S. = tan ⎜ 4 9 ⎟ = tan = tan 1 1 [Here 1 × 2 = 1 < 1, Theorem 6]
− 1 ⋅ 2 34 2 4 9 18
⎜ 1 ⎟
⎝ 4 9⎠

Li
−1 3
Let cos 3 = θ, so that cos θ = .
5 5

y
1− 3

n
θ 1 − cos θ 5 =1
tan = 1 + cos θ =

pa
2 1+ 3 2
5
θ −1 3 −1
−1 −1
= tan 1 ⇒ θ = 2 tan 1 , or cos = 2 tan 1
⇒
om
2 2 2 5 2
1 cos −1 3 = 1 × 2 tan −1 1 = tan −1 1 .
R.H.S. =
2 5 2 2 2
C

Hence L.H.S. = R.H.S.

Note. It also follows that
nd

−1 1 −1
−1 −1 −1
tan 1 + tan 2 = cos 2 , since tan = cos 2 .
4 9 5 2 5
A

Method II. tan

−1 1 = 1
2 2 ( −1
2 tan 1
2 )
nd

⎛1 − 1⎞ 2
1 −1 ⎜ 4 ⎟ = 1 cos −1 3 −1 −1 1− x
= cos ⎜ [2 tan x = cos , Theorem 7]
1⎟ 2 2
ha

2 ⎜1 + ⎟ 5 1+ x
⎝ 4⎠
1 −1 3
= cos .
C

2 5

⎛ 2 ⎞
S

1 −1 −1 ⎜ 1 + 1 + x ⎟
Ex. 19. Show that tan x = cos .
2 ⎜ 2 1 + x2 ⎟
©

⎝ ⎠
Sol. Let tan−1 x = θ, so that x = tan θ.
⎛ ⎞
⎟ = cos −1 ⎛ 1 + sec θ ⎞
2
−1 ⎜ 1 + 1 + tan θ
R.H.S. = cos ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ ⎜ ⎟
2
⎝ 2 sec θ ⎠
⎝ 2 1 + tan θ ⎠
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–29

−1
= cos ⎜
⎛ 1 + cos θ ⎞ −1
⎟ = cos ⎜
⎛
( 2 θ
⎜ 1 + 2 cos 2 − 1 ) ⎞⎟⎟
⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠
−1
= cos cos ( )
θ =θ=1
2 2 2
−1
tan x = L.H.S.

Hence proved.
Ex. 20. Prove that
⎡ 2 2⎤
(i) tan ⎡ −1 x ⎤ = sin −1 x (ii) tan−1 ⎢ 1 + x + 1 − x ⎥ = π + 1 cos−1 x 2 .
⎢ 2 2⎥

d
⎣ a −x ⎦
a ⎢ 1 + x 2 − 1 −x 2 ⎥ 4 2
⎣ ⎦

ite
−1 x x x
Sol. (i) Let θ = sin . Then sin θ = ⇒ tan θ =
a a 2 2
a −x

m
∴ tan
−1 ⎡ x ⎤ = tan−1 (tan θ) = θ = sin−1 x .
⎢ 2 2⎥

Li
a
⎣ a −x ⎦

1 + cos 2θ + 1 − cos 2θ

y
2 2
2 1+ x + 1− x
(ii) Let x = cos 2 θ. Then =

n
2
1+ x − 1− x
2 1 + cos 2θ − 1 − cos 2θ

pa
2 2
1 + 2 cos θ − 1 + 1 − (1 − 2 sin θ) cos θ + sin θ 1 + tan θ 1 + tan θ
= = =
cos θ − sin θ 1 − tan θ 1 −1.tan θ
2
1 + 2 cos θ − 1 − 1 − (1 − 2 sin θ)
2
om
=
tan π 4 + tan θ
1 − tan π 4.tan θ
= tan ( )
π+θ
4
C

∴ L.H.S. = tan
⎡ tan π + θ ⎤
⎣⎢
−1
⎦⎥ ( )
nd

4
π π 1 −1 2
= + θ = + cos x = R.H.S.
4 4 2
A

Ex. 21. If a > b > c > 0, prove that

⎛ ab + 1 ⎞ –1 ⎛ bc + 1 ⎞ –1 ⎛ ca + 1 ⎞
nd

cot –1 ⎜ ⎟ + cot ⎜ ⎟ + cot ⎜ ⎟ = ð

⎝ a–b ⎠ ⎝ b–c ⎠ ⎝ c–a ⎠
–1 1
Sol. We know that if x < 0, cot x = π + tan
–1
ha

(Theorem 2)
x
Here since c < a, therefore, in the last term c – a < 0.
C

–1 ⎛ ab + 1 ⎞ –1 ⎛ bc + 1 ⎞ –1 ⎛ ca + 1 ⎞
∴ cot ⎜ a – b ⎟ + cot ⎜ b – c ⎟ + cot ⎜ c – a ⎟
⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠
S

a –b b–c c–a
= tan
–1
+ tan –1 + π + tan –1
ab + 1 bc + 1 ca + 1
©

–1 –1 –1 –1 –1 –1
= (tan a – tan b) + (tan b – tan c) + π + (tan c – tan a) = π .
[Since a, b, c are all > 0, therefore, ab > – 1, bc > – 1, ca > – 1].
−1 x −1 −1 x + 1 π
Ex. 22. Solve : tan + tan = .
x−2 x+2 4
x −1 x +1 x +1
Sol. tan
−1
= π − tan −1 = tan −1 1 − tan −1
x−2 4 x+2 x+2
Ch 4–30 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

⎛ − x +1 ⎞
⎜1 x + 2 ⎟
= tan −1 ⎜ ⎟ = tan
−1 1 .
⎜⎜ 1 + x + 1 ⎟ 2 x +3
⎝ x + 2 ⎟⎠
The application of the formula is justified provided
x +1
1× > −1 (Theorem 6)
x+2
i.e., if x + 1 > − x − 2, or 2x > −3, or x > − 1.5

d
−1 x −1 −1 1

ite
Now tan = tan
x−2 2x + 3
x −1 1 1
⇒ (x − 1) (2x + 3) = x − 2 ⇒ 2x = 1 ⇒ x = ±
2

m
⇒ =
x−2 2 x + 3 2

Li
Here, ± 1 = ± 2 = ± 1.4142 = ± .707
2 2 2
Since both 0.707 and −0.707 are greater than −1, therefore both are admissible.

n y
Hence x = ± 1 is the answer.

pa
2
−1 −1 −1 8
Ex. 23. Solve the equation tan (x + 1) + tan (x − 1) = tan
om .
31
⎡ ( x + 1) + ( x − 1) ⎤
−1
Sol. L.H.S. = tan ⎢1 − ( x + 1) ( x − 1) ⎥
⎣ ⎦
C

−1 ⎛ 2 x ⎞
= tan ⎜ 2 ⎟ Here (x + 1) (x – 1) < 1 (Theorem 6)
⎝2− x ⎠
nd

tan −1 2x −1 8 2
Now = tan ⇒ x <2
2 − x2 31
A

2x 8 2
⇒ 2 = ⇒ 4x + 31x − 8 = 0 ⇒ | x | < 2, i.e., 2 < x < 2
2−x 31
nd

⇒ (4x − 1) (x + 8) = 0
1
⇒ , or −8.
ha

x =
4
2
⎛1⎞ 1
Since ⎜ ⎟ < 2 and (–8)2 </ 2 , therefore, x = is the answer.
C

⎝4⎠ 4
−1 −1 −1
π
Ex. 24. If tan a + tan b + tan c = , prove that a + b + c = abc.
S

−1 −1 −1 a+b
Sol. tan a + tan b = tan , provided ab < 1. ...(i)
©

1 − ab

⎡ a +b + c ⎤
a+b −1
⎢ 1 − ab ⎥
Again, tan −1 + tan −1 c = tan ⎢ ⎥,
1 − ab ⎢1 − ⎛ a + b ⎞ . c ⎥
⎢⎣ ⎝⎜ 1 − ab ⎠⎟ ⎥⎦
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–31

a+b
provided × c < 1 , i.e., ab + bc + ca < 1. ...(ii)
1 − ab

−1 ⎡ a + b + c − abc ⎤
⇒ tan ⎢1 − ab − ac − bc ⎥ = π
⎣ ⎦
a + b + c − abc
⇒ = tan π = 0
1 − ab − ac − bc
⇒ a + b + c − abc = 0 ⇒ a + b + c = abc.

d
Hence proved.

ite
y x
2
2 xy y2
Ex. 25. If cos −1 x + cos −1 = θ , prove that 2 −
2
cos θ + 2 = sin θ .
a b a ab b

m
−1 x + cos−1 y = θ
Sol. cos
a b

Li
−1 −1 −1 ⎡ 2 2 ⎤
We know that cos x + cos y = cos ⎣xy − 1 − x . 1 − y , if −1 ≤ x, y < 0, x + y ≥ 0⎦

y
−1 x + cos−1 y
∴ cos =θ (Theorem 9)

n
a b

pa
⎡
−1 x x x
2
y ⎤
2
x y x y
⇒ cos ⎢ × − 1 − 2 . 1 − 2 ⎥ =θ , where −1 ≤ , < 0, + ≥ 0
⎢⎣ a b a b ⎥⎦ a b a b
om
x + y ≥0
or − a ≤ x, y < 0,
a b
C
2⎞⎛
xy ⎛ y2 ⎞
⇒ − ⎜1 − x 2 ⎟ ⎜1 − 2 ⎟ = cos θ
ab ⎝ a ⎠⎝ b ⎠
nd

⎛ x ⎞⎛ y ⎞
2 2
xy
⇒ − cos θ = ⎜1 − 2 ⎟ ⎜1 − 2 ⎟
A

ab ⎝ a ⎠⎝ b ⎠
x2 y2 xy 2 2 2 2
. cos θ + cos θ = 1 − x − y + x y
nd

2
⇒ 2 2
−2
a b ab a 2 b 2 a 2b 2
2
y2
ha

x − 2xy θ + 2
⇒ cos = 1 − cos θ
a2 ab b2
C

2
x − 2 xy y2
⇒ cos θ + = sin2 θ.
a2 ab b2
S

−1 2 1 −1 ⎛ 3 sin 2θ ⎞
Ex. 26. If θ = tan (2 tan θ ) − sin ⎜ ⎟ , then find the general value of θ.
2 ⎝ 5 + 4 cos 2θ ⎠
©

2 tan θ
Sol. Let tan θ = t so that sin 2 θ = 2
= 2t 2
1 + tan θ 1 + t

2 2
1 − tan θ 1 − t
cos 2θ = 2
= 2
1 + tan θ 1 + t
Ch 4–32 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

1 sin −1 ⎛ 3 sin 2θ ⎞ 1 −1 ⎛ 3 × 2t ⎞
Then ⎜ 5 + 4 cos 2θ ⎟ = 2 sin ⎜ 2 2 ⎟
2 ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ 5 (1 + t ) + 4 (1 − t ) ⎠

⎛ 2× t ⎞
1 sin −1 6t = 1 sin −1 ⎜ 3 ⎟
= ⎜ 2⎟
()
2
2 9+t 2
⎜1 + t ⎟
⎝ 3 ⎠

⎡ −1 2 x −1 ⎤

d
1 × 2 tan −1 t ⎢3 sin = 2 tan x ⎥
= 2
2 3 ⎢⎣ 1+ x ⎥⎦

ite
−1 t
= tan
3

m
The given equation becomes

()

Li
−1 2 −1 t
θ = tan (2t ) − tan
3

y
2t − t
2
−1 3 , provided 2t 2 × t > − 1 , i.e., t3 > −1.5

n
= tan
1 + 2t × t 3
2

pa
3
om (Theorem 6)
t (6t − 1) t (6t − 1)
⇒ tan θ = 3
⇒t = 3
3 + 2t 3 + 2t
3 3
⇒ t (3 + 2t ) = t (6t − 1) ⇒ t (2t − 6t + 4) = 0
C

Solving, by Remainder theorem, we get

t = 0, 1, −2
nd

3
Now only t = 0 and t = 1 satisfy the condition t > − 1.5.
Therefore, t = − 2 is rejected.
A

π
∴ tan θ = 0, 1 ⇒ θ = 0, .
nd

4
π
Hence, the general value of θ is nπ, or nπ + .
ha

Ex. 27. If u = cot −1 tan α − tan −1 tan α , then tan π − u is equal to ( )

C

4 2
(a) tan α (b) cot α (c) tan2 u (d) cot α.
S

π
Sol. We know that tan−1 θ + cot−1 θ = , or
2
©

−1 π− −1
cot θ = tan θ
2
∴ u = cot −1 tan α − tan −1 tan α

= ( π2 − tan −1
)
tan α − tan
−1 π
tan α = − 2 tan
2
−1
tan α
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–33

π −u
⇒ 2 tan −1 tan α =
2
π u
⇒ tan −1 tan α = −
4 2
⇒ tan π − u = tan α
4 2 ( )
Hence, (a) is the answer.

EXERCISE 4

d
1. Write down the values of :

ite
(i) sin
−1
2
3
(ii) cos
−1
( 12 ) (iii) tan−1 1 (iv) cos−1 0

m
(v) cot
−1 1
3
(vi) sec
−1 ⎛
⎜
−2 ⎞
⎝ 3⎠
⎟ (vii) cosec 2
−1
(viii) cos−1 − 1 .
2 ( )

Li
2. Find :

(a) cos A if cos−1

1
(b) cosec A if sin−1
1 3
(c) sin A if tan−1 4 = A ()

y
=A =A
2 3

n
(d) θ if tan
−1
3 =θ
1
=θ (e) cot θ if tan
−1
(f) x if sin
−1
( 12 ) = tan −1
x.

pa
5
3. Find the principal value of each of the following :

( ) ( π6 ) ( )
−1 1
om−1 −1 4
(a) sin sin (b) tan tan (c) cot tan
2 5

(cos π4 ) (e) sin (cos ) ( )

−1 1
(d) sin (f) cos cot −1 (− 3)
C
2

(g) (
sin 2 sin
−1 2
) −1
(h) cos (sin 220º) (i) sin (
1 cos −1 4
)
nd

3 2 5

(j) tan [sin

−1
(−1)] (k) tan
−1
(cot 43π ) −1
(l) sin (tan 1) + cos cos ( −1 1
2 )
A

⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞
(m) tan ⎜ sin −1 2 ⎟ − cot ⎜ cos −1 2 ⎟ (n) tan −1 ⎜ − 3 ⎟
⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⎠ ⎝ 3 ⎠
nd

−1 ⎛ 2 3⎞
(o) cosec ⎜− ⎟ (p) cos−1 [sin (tan−1 (−1))] (q) sin (2 tan−1 3)
⎝ 3 ⎠
ha

4. Verify the following :

2 − sin −1 1 = π
−1
(b) cos−1 0 + tan−1 (−1) = tan−1 1.
C

(a) sin
2 2 12
5. Show that :
S

(i) 2 sin−1 x = sin −1 2 x 1 − x 2 . ( )

©

−1
[Hint. Let sin x = θ, so that sin θ = x and cos θ = 1− x
2

Now use sin 2θ = 2 sin θ cos θ, etc]

−1 −1 −1 −1 1 1
(ii) 2 cos x = cos (2x − 1) if 0 ≤ x ≤ 1; (iii) 3 sin x = sin (3x − 4x ) if − ≤x≤
2 3
;
2 2
−1 −1 1 −1 −1
(iv) 3 cos x = cos (4x − 3x) if ≤ x ≤ 1;
3
(v) sin (−x) = − sin x;
2
−1 −1 −1 −1
(vi) cos (−x) = π − cos x ; (vii) tan (−x) = − tan x.
Ch 4–34 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

6. Show that :

(a) sin sin ( −1 5 + sin −1 4 = 63

13 5 65 ) (b) sin (tan −1 3 + cot −1 3) = 1

(c)
⎛ −1 3
tan ⎜ sin
⎝ 2
⎞
− cos −1 3 ⎟ = 3
2 ⎠ 3
(
(d) cos tan
−1
8 25 )
15 − sin −1 7 = 297
425

(e) sin sin ( −1

2 5 10 )
1 + cos −1 3 = 3 + 4 3
(f) 2 tan
−1 1 = tan −1 4 .
2 3
7. Simplify :

(a) sin (2 cos x)

−1
(b) cos (2 sin x)
−1 −1
(c) tan (sin y)
1
(−1
(d) cos 2 cos x . )

d
ite
8. Solve the following for x in terms of y :
−1 −1 1 −1
(a) y = 2 sin 3x (b) y = 3 cos 2x (c) y = tan ( x + π) .
2

m
9. Prove that :
−1
4 = tan −1 3 −1 1

Li
−1 −1
(i) cos (ii) tan 2 − tan 1 = tan
5 4 3
(iii) 2 tan −1 1 = tan −1 3 (iv) 2 tan −1 1 + tan −1 1 = π

y
3 4 3 7 4
−1 1 π

n
−1 3 −1 5 −1 −1 4
(v) sin + sin = sin 56 (vi) sin + 2 tan =
5 13 65 5 3 2

pa
−1 4 −1 5 −1 27 −1 4 = cot −1 4
(vii) cos + cot = tan [Hint. cos
5 3
]
5 3 11 om
(viii) tan −1 1 + tan −1 2 = cos −1 2 .
4 9 5
10. Prove that
C

tan
−1 1 + tan −1 1 + tan −1 1 + tan −1 1 = π
. (ISC)
5 7 3 8 4
11. Prove that
nd

(
2 tan
−1
1 + tan
−1 1
2
+ tan
−1
3 )
1 = π.
(ISC)
A

⎡ 1+1 ⎤
⎢π
[Hint. LH.S. = 2 ⎢ + tan
−1 2 3 ⎥
(Here 12 × 13 = 16 < 1)
nd

⎥
⎢⎣
4 1− 1 . 1⎥
2 3⎦
⎡π −1 ⎤
ha

= 2 ⎢ 4 + tan 1 ⎥ , etc.]
⎣ ⎦
−1 3 + 2tan −1 1 = 2π .
C

12. Prove that sin (ISC)

2 3 3
Prove the following :
S

−1 63 + 2 tan −1 1 = sin −1 3 .
13. 4 (cot−1 3 + cosec−1 5 ) = π. 14. cos
65 5 5
©

15. tan
−1
( 12 tan 2A) + tan −1
(cot A) + tan
−1 3
(cot A) = 0 .

π
16. If tan−1 x + tan−1 y + tan−1 z = , show that xy + yz + zx = 1.
2
[Hint. Similar to solved Ex. 19.]
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–35

Solve for x the following:

17. cos
−1
x + sin
−1
( 2x ) = π6 . (Dhanbad)

18. sin−1 x + sin−1 2x = π.

3
π −1
[Sol. sin−1 2 x = − sin x
3
⇒ 2x = sin
3
sin (
π − −1 x = π
3
−1
) π
3
−1
sin . cos (sin x) − cos sin (sin x)

3 . cos (cos −1 1 − x 2 ) − 1 x = 3 . 1 − x 2 − x

d
=
2 2 2 2

ite
⇒ 4x = 2
3 1 − x − x ⇒ 5x = 3 1 − x
2

2 2 2 2 3 3 3
⇒ 25 x = 3 − 3x ⇒ 28 x = 3 ⇒ x = ⇒ x=± ⇒ x= .

m
28 2 7 2 7
− 3
is rejected as it makes the L.H.S. negative whereas the R.H.S. is positive]

Li
2 7
−1 −1 π
19. tan 2x + tan 3x = . (ISC)
4

y
−1 −1 − 1 ⎡ 2 x + 3x ⎤ 2 1
⎥ , provided 2x × 3x < 1 ⇒ x < 6.

n
[Sol. tan 2x + tan 3x = tan ⎢
⎣1 − (2x) (3x) ⎦

pa
Now tan −1 5x = π ⇒ 5x = tan π = 1 ⇒ 6x2 + 5x − 1 = 0 ⇒ x = −1, 1
1 − 6x
2 4 1 − 6x
2 4 om 6

( ) < 16 . Hence, x = 16 is the answer].

1 1 2
x = −1 is rejected as (−1)2  ;x= is accepted as 1
6 6 6
( 15 + cos x) = 1.
20. sin sin
−1 −1
C

sin ( 1 cos x ) = 1.
−1
21.
nd

5
1 cos −1 x = α −1
[Hint. Let . Since 0 ≤ cos x ≤ π, we have
5
A

π
0 ≤ 5α ≤ π ⇒ 0 ≤ α ≤ .
5
nd

Hence sin α ≠ 1. Therefore the given equation has no solution].

22. tan−1 (x − 1) + tan−1 x + tan−1 (x + 1) = tan−1 3x. (ISC 2008)
[Hint. Transpose tan−1 x to the R.H.S., and then apply equations of theorem 6]
ha

− x −1 − x +1
23. tan 1 + tan 1 =π.
x−2 x+2 4
C

[Hint. See solved Ex. 22.]

−1 1 + tan −1 1 = tan −1 2 .
24. tan
S

2x + 1 4x + 1 x2
25. Evaluate the following :
©

(i) sin cot−1 cos tan−1 x;

(ii) tan ⎡⎢sin + cot 3 ⎤ ;

−1 3 −1
⎣ 5 2 ⎦⎥
⎡ 3 − 3x ⎤⎥ 1
2
(iii) cos −1 x + cos −1 ⎢ x + , ≤ x ≤1 .
⎣2 2 ⎦ 2
[Hint. (i) Let tan−1 x = θ. Then, cos tan−1 x = cos θ = 1 = z , say.
2
1+ x
Ch 4–36 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

2
−1 1 1+ x
Let cot z = φ. Then cot φ = z ⇒ sin φ = = .
2 2
1+ z 2+ x
−1 −1 x −1 −1 1.
(ii) Use sin x = tan and cot x = tan (Art. 4.07, Th. 5)
2 x
1− x
−1
(iii) Let cos x = θ. Then cos θ = x.
1 −1 −1 −1 1
Now ≤ x ≤ 1 ⇒ cos 1 ≤ cos x ≤ cos (In Quad. I cos decreases as angle increases).
2 2
π
⇒ 0≤θ≤

d
3
−1 ⎡ 3 . 1 − x2 ⎤

ite
−1
The given expression = cos x + cos ⎢ x . 1 + ⎥
⎣ 2 2 ⎦
−1 ⎡ cos θ . cos π + sin π . sin θ⎤
= θ + cos

m
⎣⎢ 3 3 ⎦⎥
−1
( )
π − θ = θ + π − θ = π⎤

Li
= θ + cos cos .
3 3 3 ⎥⎦
−1
26. Solve for x : cos (sin x) = 1 . (ISC 1997)

y
9

n
−1 −1 2
[Hint. sin x = cos 1− x ]

pa
−1 2.
27. Solve the equation : tan−1 (2 + x) + tan−1 (2 − x) = tan (ISC 1998, 2001)
om 3
−1 2a + sin −1 2b = 2 tan −1 x.
28. Solve the equation : sin 2 2
1+ a 1+ b
[Sol. Let a = tan θ. Then
C

sin
−1 2a = sin −1 ⎛ 2 tan θ ⎞ −1 −1
2 ⎜ 2 ⎟ = sin (sin 2θ) = 2θ = 2 tan a.
+
1 a ⎝ 1 + tan θ ⎠
nd

−1 2b = 2 tan −1 b
Similarly, sin 2
1+ b
A

−1 2a + sin −1 2b = 2 tan−1 a + 2 tan−1 b = 2 (tan−1 a + tan−1 b)

∴ sin 2 2
1+ a 1+ b
nd

−1 a+b a+b a+b ⎤

= 2 tan , provided ab < 1. ∴ 2 tan −1 −
= 2 tan 1 x ⇒ x = 1 − ab ⎥ .
1 − ba 1 − ab ⎦
ha

(6 3x) = − π .
−1 −1
29. Solve the equation. sin 6x + sin (ISC 1999)
2
C

π −1
[Sol. sin−1 6x = − − sin (6 3x)
2
S

⎡ −π ⎤ −1
− sin (6 3x)⎥ = − cos ⎡⎣sin (6 3 x) ⎤⎦
−1
⇒ 6x = sin ⎢
⎣ 2 ⎦
©

⇒ 6x = − cos ⎡⎣cos−1 1 − 108 x 2 ⎤⎦ ⎡Q sin −1 A = cos −1 1 − A2 ⎤

⎣ ⎦
⇒ 6x = − 1 − 108 x 2 ⇒ x = ± 1 .
12

in the given equation we get sin −1 1 + sin −1 3 = π + π = π , which shows that

1
If we put x =
12 2 2 6 3 2
1 1
x= does not satisfy the given equation. If we put x = − , we get
12 12
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–37

sin
−1
(− 12 ) + sin −1 ⎛
⎜−
3 ⎞ = − π − π = − π , which shows that x = − 1 satisfies the given equation.
⎝ 2 ⎠
⎟
6 3 2 12
1
Hence, x = − is the answer].
12
−1 x −1 x +1 −1 2
30. Prove that sin + cos = tan ( x + x + 1) . (ISC 2000, Type 2006 )
2 2
1+ x x + 2x + 2
−1 x
[Sol. Let sin = θ . Then
2
1+ x
2
x x
sin θ = ⇒ tan θ = x 1+

d
2 x
1+ x

ite
−1 θ
⇒ θ = tan x
1
−1 x −1
⇒ sin = tan x Fig. 4.14

m
2
1+ x
−1 x +1
= φ . Then

Li
Let cos
x 2 + 2x + 2
x +1
cos φ = ⇒ tan φ = 1 2

y
2 x +1 x+
x + 2x + 2 +2

n
2
x 1
−1 1
⇒ φ = tan x + 1

pa
φ
−1 x +1 −1 1 x+1
⇒ cos = tan
x +1 Fig. 4.15
2
x + 2x + 2
om
The L.H.S. of the given equation
⎡ x+ 1 ⎤
C
−1 1 −1 ⎢ −1 x +1 ⎥ 1 = x < 1,
= tan x + tan = tan ⎢ [Here x ×
1 ⎥
Theorem 7]
x +1 ⎢1 − x . ⎥ x +1 x +1
⎢⎣ x + 1 ⎥⎦
nd

−1 2
= tan (x + x + 1) = R.H.S.
Hence proved].
A

31. Show that tan

−1 ⎛ 1 tan x ⎞ = 1 cos −1 ⎛ 1 + 2 cos x ⎞ .
⎜ 2 ⎠⎟ 2 ⎜ ⎟
⎝ 3 ⎝ 2 + cos x ⎠
nd

−1 ⎡ 1 tan x ⎤ = 1 ⎡ 2 tan −1 ⎛ 1 tan x ⎞ ⎤

[Hint. L.H.S. = tan
2 ⎦⎥ 2 ⎣⎢ ⎜ 2 ⎠⎟ ⎦⎥
⎣⎢ 3 ⎝ 3
ha

⎡ tan x
2 ⎤
⎢1 − 2 ⎥ ⎛ −1 −1 1 − A ⎞
2
⎜Q 2 tan A = cos ⎟
1 cos −1 ⎢ ⎥
C

3 2
= ⎢ ⎥ ⎜ 1+ A ⎟
⎜ Theorem 7 ⎟
2 tan x
2
⎢ ⎥ ⎝ ⎠
⎢ 1+ 2 ⎥
S

⎣ 3 ⎦

⎛ 3 − tan 2 x ⎞ ⎛ 1 − cos x ⎞ ⎤
©

3−
−1 ⎜ ⎟ −
⎜ 1 + cos x ⎟ ⎥ ⎛ 2 θ 1 − cos θ ⎞
= 1 cos 2 = 1 cos ⎜ ⎜Q tan 2 = 1 + cos θ ⎟
1
⎜ ⎟⎥
2 2 x⎟ 2 ⎜ 3 + − cos x ⎟ ⎥
1 ⎝ ⎠
⎜ 3 + tan ⎟ ⎜
⎝ 2⎠ ⎝ 1 + cos x ⎟⎠ ⎦⎥

1 –1 2 + 4cos x
= 2 cos 4 + 2cos x ( ) = 12 cos (12++2cos
–1
cos x )
x
.
Ch 4–38 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

−1 x −1 y
32. If cos + cos = θ , prove that 9x2 − 12xy cos θ + 4y2 = 36 sin2 θ.
2 3

−1 x y ⎡ 2⎤
+ cos −1 = θ −1 2
[Hint. cos
2 3
⇒ cos ⎢x . y − 1− x . 1− y ⎥ = θ (Theorem 9)
⎣2 3 4 9 ⎦
−1 −1 −1 2 2 2
33. If cos x + cos y + cos z = π, prove that x + y + z + 2xyz = 1.
[Hint. cos−1 x + cos−1 y = π − cos−1 z
−1 2 2 −1
⇒ cos [ xy − 1 − x 1 − y ] = π − cos z (Theorem 9)

d
⎡ xy − 1 − x 2 1 − y 2 ⎤ = cos (π − cos −1 z) −1
⇒ = − cos (cos z) = −z

ite
⎣ ⎦
2 2
⇒ xy + z = 1 − x 1 − y etc.]

m
−1 4 + cos −1 2 = cot −1 2
34. Show that sin . (ISC 2003)
5 11

Li
5
–1 3 –1 2
[Hint. L.H.S. = cos + cos . Now apply Theorem 9]
5

y
5

( π4 − 2cot 3) = 7.

n
−1
35. Prove that cot (ISC 2005)

pa
= π − 2 tan 1 = π − tan 2 / 3 = π − tan −1 3 , etc.]
−1 1 −1 −1
[Hint. tan 2
(Theorem 8)
7 4 3 4 1 − (1/ 3) 4 4
om
36. Prove that 2 tan
−1
( 13 ) + cot −1
(4) = tan ( )
−1 16
13
(ISC 2007)
C

⎛ ⎞
[Hint. Use 2 tan −1 x = tan –1 ⎜ 2x 2 ⎟ ; x 2 < 1 and cot –1 x = tan –1 1 .]
⎝1− x ⎠ x
nd

ANSWERS
A

π π π π π 5π π 2π
1. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii)
3 3 4 2 3 6 6 3
nd

1 3 1
2. (a) (b) 3 (c) (d) 60º (e) 5 (f)
2 5 3
1 π 5 π 3 3 4 5 1
(f) −
ha

3. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (g) (h) 130º (i)

2 6 4 4 2 2 9 10
π 2 +1 −π −π 3π 3
(j) Undefined (k) (l) (m) 0 (n) (o) (p) (q)
C

6 2 6 3 4 5
y 1+ x 1 y
7. (a) 2x 1 − x
2 (b) 1 − 2 x2 (c) (d) 8. (a) x = sin
S

2 2 3 2
1− y
y 1
x = 1 cos 3
19. x =
©

(b) (c) x = tan 2y − π 17. x = 1 18. x =

2 3 2 7 6
1 1
20. x = 21. No solution 22. x = 0, ± 1 23. x = ± 24. x = 3
5 2 2
2
25. (i) 1+ x (ii) 17 (iii) π 26. ± 4 5 27. ± 3
2+ x
2 6 3 9
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–39

REVISION EXERCISE
⎛1⎞ π
1. If sin–1 x + cot–1 ⎜ ⎟ = , then x is :
⎝ ⎠
2 2
1 2 3
(a) 0 (b) (c) (d)
5 5 2
2. If 4 sin–1 x + cos–1 x = π, then x is equal to
1 3 1
(a) 0 (b) (c) − (d)
2 2 2
⎛1⎞
Considering only the principal values, if tan (cos–1 x) = sin [cot–1 ⎜ ⎟ , then x is equal to

d
3.
⎝2⎠

ite
1 2 3 5
(a) (b) (c) (d)
5 5 5 3
⎡ 3 ⎤

m
1 3
4. The value of tan ⎢sin− + cos− 1 ⎥ is :
⎣ 5 13 ⎦

Li
6 6 13 17
(a) (b) (c) (d)
17 13 5 6
–1 1/2 –1 1/2
cot [(cos α) ] – tan [(cos α) ] = x, then sin x =

y
5.
α α α

n
(a) tan2 (b) cot2 (c) tan α (d) cot
2 2 2

pa
–1
6. If θ = sin [sin (–600°)], then one of the possible values of θ is
π π 2π 2π
(a) (b) (c) (d) −
3 2
om 3 3
⎡ −1 ⎛ 1 ⎞ ⎛ 1 ⎞ ⎤
7. cos ⎢cos ⎜ − ⎟ + sin − 1 ⎜ − ⎟⎥ =
⎣ ⎝ 7⎠ ⎝ 7 ⎠⎦
C

(a) –1/3 (b) 0 (c) 1/3 (d) 4/9

⎛ ⎛ 1 ⎞⎞
The value of sin ⎜ 2 tan −1 ⎜ ⎟ ⎟ + cos (tan −1 2 2) =
nd

8.
⎝ ⎝ 3 ⎠⎠
16 14 12 11
(a) (b) (c) (d)
A

15 15 15 15
9. If sin–1 (1 – x) – 2 sin–1 x = π/2, then x equals
nd

(a) {0, – 1/2} (b) {1/2, 0} (c) {0} (d) {–1, 0}

π π
[Hint. sin–1 (1– x) = – 2 sin–1 x ⇒ 1 – x = sin ( – 2 sin–1 x)
2 2
ha

π π
⇒ 1 – x = sin cos (2 sin–1 x) – cos sin (2 sin–1 x) = cos (2 sin–1 x)
2 2
C

⇒ 1 – x = cos cos–1 (1 – 2x2) ⇒ 1 – x = 1 – 2x2 ⇒ x = 0, 1/2. But x = 1/2 does not satisfy the equation,
so x = 0]
S

10. If cos– 1 x + cos– 1 y = π, what is the value of sin– 1 x + sin– 1 y ?

©

π
(a) 0 (b) (c) π (d) 2π
2
11. The value of x for which sin (cot– 1 (1 + x)) = cos (tan– 1 x) is :
(a) 1/2 (b) 1 (c) 0 (d) – 1/2
12. sin– 1 x + sin– 1 (1 – x) = cos– 1 x ⇒ x ∈
(a) {1, 0} (b) {– 1, 1} (c) {0, 1/2} (d) {2, 0}
Ch 4–40 BHSEC Mathematics for Class–XII

–1 4 –1 1
13. sin + 2 tan =
5 3
(a) π/3 (b) π/4 (c) π/2 (d) 0
–1 –1 –1 –1 –1 –1
14. What is the value of tan (tan x + tan y + tan z) – cot (cot x + cot y + cot z) ?
–1 –1
15. What is the value of x that satisfies the equation cos x = 2 sin x?

16. If sin
–1
( 5x ) + cosec ( 54 ) = π2 , then the value of x is
–1

(a) 4 (b) 5 (c) 1 (d) 3

{ ( )}

d
17. What is sin ⎡cot −1 cos tan –1 x ⎤ where x > 0, equal to ?
⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ ,

ite
(a)
( x + 1)
2
(b)
( x + 2)
2
(c)
( x + 1)
2
(d)
( x + 2)
2

(x + 2) ( x + 1)

m
2 2
2 2 x +2 ( x + 1)

Li
[Hint. See solved Ex. 15].

ANSWERS

y
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (d) 5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (b)

n
8. (b) 9. (c) 10. (a) 11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (c) 14. 0

pa
1
15. 16. (d) 17. (a)
2 om
HINTS
π 1 1 x 1
1. sin– 1 x = – cot–1 = tan −1 ⇒ tan–1 = tan– 1
C
2 2 2 1− x 2 2
x 1 x 1
− −
nd

−1 1 − x2 2 1 − x2 2 x 1
⇒ tan =0 ⇒ = tan0º ⇒ − =0
x x 1− x 2 2
1+ 1+
A

2 1− x 2
2 1− x 2

–1 1 1 2 –1 –1 2
= θ ⇒ cot θ = ⇒ sin θ = ; Let cos x = φ ⇒ x = cos φ ⇒ tan φ =
nd

3. Let cot
2 2 5 5
1
− cos α
1 − cos α
− tan −1 cos α = tan −1 cos α
1
5. tan −1
ha

= x ⇒ tan x =
cos α cos α 2 cos α
1+
cos α
C

–1 –1 –1
6. θ = sin [sin (– 600°)] = sin (– sin 600°) = sin [– sin (360° + 240°)]
−1 ⎛ π⎞ π
S

= sin–1 (– sin 240°) = sin– 1 [– sin (180° + 60°)] = sin ⎜ sin ⎟ =

⎝ 3⎠ 3
©

⎛ 2/3 ⎞ ⎛ −1 3⎞
7. sin ⎜ tan −1 −1
⎟ + cos (tan 2 2 ) = sin ⎜ tan
−1
⎟ + cos (tan 2 2 )
⎝ 1 − 1/ 9 ⎠ ⎝ 4⎠

⎛ −1 3⎞ ⎛ −1 1⎞
= sin ⎜ sin ⎟ + cos ⎜ cos ⎟
⎝ 5⎠ ⎝ 3⎠
⎛π −1 ⎞ ⎛π −1 ⎞ −1 −1
10. ⇒ ⎜ − sin x ⎟ + ⎜ − sin y ⎟ = π ⇒ sin x + sin y = 0
⎝2 ⎠ ⎝2 ⎠
Inverse Trigonometric Functions Ch 4–41

−1 ⎛π −1 ⎞ π
11. ⇒ sin ⎡⎣cot (1 + x ) ⎤⎦ = sin ⎜ ± tan x ⎟ ⇒ cot −1 (1 + x ) = m tan − 1 x
⎝2 ⎠ 2
π
⇒ cot–1 (1 + x) + tan–1 (± x) = ⇒ 1+x= ±x
2
π π
12. sin– 1 x + sin– 1 (1 – x) = – sin– 1 x ⇒ sin– 1 (1 – x) = – 2 sin– 1 x
2 2
⎛π ⎞
⇒ 1 – x = sin ⎜ − 2sin − 1 x ⎟ ⇒ 1 – x = cos (2 sin– 1 x)
⎝2 ⎠
2 –1 2
⇒ 1 – x = 1 – 2 sin ( sin 2 ( sin x) ⇒ 1 – x = 1 – 2x

d
4 1 ⎛ −1 4 1⎞

ite
1
13. sin– 1 + 2 tan– 1 = tan + tan − 1 ⎟ + tan − 1
5 3 ⎜⎝ 3 3⎠ 3

m
Li
n y
pa
om
C
nd
A
nd
ha
C
S
©